FS_titlepage.

fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 4:28 PM

Autodesk Field Survey

®

User’s Guide

21000-010000-5020A February, 2001

FS_titlepage.fm Page 2 Thursday, February 1, 2001 4:28 PM

Copyright © 2001 Autodesk, Inc.

All Rights Reserved
AUTODESK, INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THESE MATERIALS
AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS.

IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC. BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE
PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.

Autodesk, Inc. reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product
at the time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.
Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Plan, 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D
Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADE, ADI, Advanced Modeling Extension, AEC
Authority (logo), AEC-X, AME, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Data Extension, AutoCAD
Development System, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Animator, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide,
Autodesk University, Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoShade, AutoSketch, AutoSurf,
AutoVision, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Design Companion, Drafix, Education
by Design, Generic, Generic 3D Drafting, Generic CADD, Generic Software, Geodyssey, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, Inside Track,
Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, Multimedia Explorer, NAAUG, ObjectARX, Office Series, Opus, PeopleTracker,
Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Rastation, Softdesk,
Softdesk (logo), Solution 3000, Tech Talk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, TinkerTech, VISION, WHIP!,
WHIP! (logo), Woodbourne, WorkCenter, and World-Creating Toolkit.
The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D on the PC, 3ds max, ACAD, Advanced User
Interface, AEC Office, AME Link, Animation Partner, Animation Player, Animation Pro Player, A Studio in Every Computer, ATLAST,
Auto-Architect, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Learning
Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk
Animator Clips, Autodesk Animator Theatre, Autodesk Device Interface, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk PhotoEDIT, Autodesk Point
A (logo), Autodesk Software Developer’s Kit, Autodesk View DwgX, AutoFlix, AutoPAD, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with
ObjectARX (logo), ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Concept Studio, Content Explorer, cornerStone Toolkit, Dancing
Baby (image), Design 2000 (logo), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer’s Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Your
World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, DWG Linking, DWG Unplugged, DXF, Extending the Design Team, FLI, FLIC, GDX
Driver, Generic 3D, Heads-up Design, Home Series, i-drop, Jobnet, Kinetix (logo), Lightscape, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online,
Ooga-Chaka, Photo Landscape, Photoscape, Plugs and Sockets, PolarSnap, Pro Landscape, QuickCAD, Real-Time Roto, Render
Queue, SchoolBox, Simply Smarter Diagramming, SketchTools, Sparks, Suddenly Everything Clicks, Supportdesk, The Dancing
Baby, Transform Ideas Into Reality, Visual LISP, Visual Syllabus, VIZable, Volo, and Where Design Connects.
Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Third Party Software Program Credits
Portions of this software are Copyright © 2001 Carlson Software. All rights reserved.
ACIS® © 1994, 1997, 1999 Spatial Technology, Inc., Three-Space Ltd., and Applied Geometry Corp. All rights reserved.
© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.
InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.
Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.
Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992.
Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U. S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents

Chapter 1 Product Overview: System Requirements and Installation ........... 1

Using the Autodesk Field Survey User’s Guide ........................................2
Product Overview.....................................................................................2
System Requirements ...............................................................................6
Installing Autodesk Field Survey..............................................................7
Authorizing Autodesk Field Survey........................................................14

Chapter 2 Tutorials........................................................................................ 15
Lesson 1: Entering a Deed.....................................................................16
Lesson 2: Making a Plat.........................................................................28
Lesson 3: Field to Finish—Faster Survey Work .....................................74

Chapter 3 File Commands............................................................................. 99

Project, Set Data Directory ...................................................................100
Drawing Explorer .................................................................................101
Project Explorer....................................................................................105
New ......................................................................................................106
Open.....................................................................................................108
Close.....................................................................................................108
Save.......................................................................................................109
Save As..................................................................................................109
Page Setup ............................................................................................111
Plot Preview..........................................................................................111
Plot .......................................................................................................111
Import/Export LandXML Files .............................................................117
Display-Edit Text/ASCII File.................................................................118
Recover .................................................................................................118
Purge.....................................................................................................119
Exit .......................................................................................................121

Contents
iii
Chapter 4 Edit Commands .......................................................................... 123
Undo.....................................................................................................124
Redo......................................................................................................124
Erase .....................................................................................................124
Delete Layer..........................................................................................125
Move.....................................................................................................126
Copy .....................................................................................................126
Explode.................................................................................................126
Trim ......................................................................................................128
Cut........................................................................................................128
Copy .....................................................................................................129
Paste .....................................................................................................129
Paste to Original Coordinates ..............................................................130
Extend To Edge ....................................................................................130
Extend to Intersection .........................................................................131
Extend by Distance ..............................................................................131
Break by Closed Polyline......................................................................133
Break at Intersection ............................................................................134
Break, Select Object, 2nd Point............................................................135
Break, Select Object, Two Points..........................................................135
Break, At Selected Point .......................................................................136
Change Properties ................................................................................136
Change Attribute Style.........................................................................137
Change Style ........................................................................................137
Change Elevations ...............................................................................138
Change Block/Inserts Substitute ..........................................................139
Rotate by Bearing .................................................................................139
Rotate by Pick.......................................................................................140
Scale......................................................................................................141
Edit Text ...............................................................................................141
Text Enlarge/Reduce.............................................................................142
Rotate Text ...........................................................................................142
Change Text Font.................................................................................143
Change Text Size..................................................................................144
Change Text Width..............................................................................144
Change Text Oblique Angle.................................................................145
Flip Text ...............................................................................................146
Replace Text .........................................................................................146
Text Import ..........................................................................................147
Text Export...........................................................................................147
Align .....................................................................................................148

Contents
iv
 Mirror ...................................................................................................149
Fillet......................................................................................................150
Offset ....................................................................................................151
Entities to Polylines .............................................................................151
Reverse Polyline ...................................................................................152
Reduce Polyline Vertices ......................................................................152
Smooth Polyline...................................................................................153
Change Polyline Elevation...................................................................153
Change Polyline Width .......................................................................154
Set Polyline Origin ...............................................................................154
Add Intersection Points........................................................................155
Add Polyline Vertex .............................................................................155
Edit Polyline Vertex .............................................................................156
Remove Polyline Arcs...........................................................................156
Remove Polyline Segment....................................................................157
Remove Polyline Vertex .......................................................................157
Offset 3D Polyline ................................................................................158
Fillet 3D Polyline..................................................................................159
Trim 3D Polyline..................................................................................159
Extend 3D Polyline ..............................................................................160
Join 3D Polyline ...................................................................................160
Break 3D Polyline.................................................................................161
Join Nearest ..........................................................................................161
3D Entity to 2D ....................................................................................162
Image Frame .........................................................................................163
Image Clip ............................................................................................163
Image Adjust ........................................................................................165

Chapter 5 View Commands ........................................................................ 167

Redraw..................................................................................................168
Regen ....................................................................................................168
Zoom - Window ...................................................................................168
Zoom - Dynamic ..................................................................................169
Zoom - Previous ...................................................................................169
Zoom - Center ......................................................................................169
Zoom - Extents .....................................................................................170
Zoom IN ...............................................................................................170
Zoom OUT............................................................................................170
Zoom Point(s).......................................................................................171
Pan........................................................................................................171

Contents
v
 3D Viewer Window..............................................................................172
Viewpoint 3D .......................................................................................174
Viewports .............................................................................................176
Twist Screen Standard ..........................................................................177
Twist Screen Line .................................................................................178
Twist Screen Surveyor ..........................................................................178
Restore Due North................................................................................179
Display Order, Bring to Front ..............................................................179
Display Order, Send to Back ................................................................179
Layer Control .......................................................................................180
Set Layer ...............................................................................................183
Change Layer .......................................................................................183
Freeze Layer ..........................................................................................184
Thaw Layer ...........................................................................................184
Isolate Layer .........................................................................................185
Restore Layer ........................................................................................185

Chapter 6 Draw Commands........................................................................ 187

Line.......................................................................................................188
2D Polyline...........................................................................................188
3D Polyline...........................................................................................189
Circle ....................................................................................................191
Text.......................................................................................................191
Hatch ....................................................................................................192
2 Tangents, Radius ...............................................................................198
2 Tangents, Arc Length ........................................................................198
2 Tangents, Chord Length ...................................................................199
2 Tangents, Mid-Ordinate....................................................................199
2 Tangents, External ............................................................................200
2 Tangents, Degree of Curve................................................................200
Tang, PC, Radius, Arc Length ..............................................................201
Tang, PC, Radius, Tang Length............................................................201
Tang, PC, Radius, Chord Length .........................................................202
Tang, PC, Radius, Delta Angle .............................................................203
3 Point Curve .......................................................................................203
PC, PT, Radius Point.............................................................................204
PC, Radius, Chord ................................................................................204
Compound or Reverse..........................................................................205
Best Fit Curve .......................................................................................206
Curve Calc ............................................................................................206

Contents
vi
 Spiral Curve..........................................................................................208
Draw By Example .................................................................................210
Sequential Numbers .............................................................................210
Arrowhead ............................................................................................212
Curve - Arrow .......................................................................................213
Boundary Polyline................................................................................214
Shrink-Wrap Entities............................................................................214
Polyline by Nearest Found ...................................................................215
Drawing Block ......................................................................................216
Write Block...........................................................................................218
Insert ....................................................................................................220
Buffer Offset .........................................................................................221
Raster Image .........................................................................................222

Chapter 7 Inquiry Commands..................................................................... 227

List ........................................................................................................228
Point ID ................................................................................................228
Layer ID ................................................................................................228
Layer Report .........................................................................................229
Drawing Inspector................................................................................229
Bearing & Distance...............................................................................231
Find Point(s).........................................................................................231
Curve Info ............................................................................................232
Polyline Info.........................................................................................233

Chapter 8 Settings Commands ................................................................... 235

Drawing Setup......................................................................................236
Title Block ............................................................................................239
Mortgage Block ....................................................................................240
Text Style..............................................................................................241
Set X-Hairs............................................................................................244
Reset X-Hairs ........................................................................................244
Set UCS to World .................................................................................244
Tablet On/Off .......................................................................................245
Tablet - Calibrate..................................................................................245
Tablet - Configure ................................................................................248
Toolbars................................................................................................250
Options.................................................................................................250
Configure .............................................................................................272

Contents
vii
 Units Control .......................................................................................285
Object Snap ..........................................................................................288
Set Environment Variables...................................................................292

Chapter 9 Points Commands ...................................................................... 293

Point Defaults.......................................................................................294
Draw-Locate Points ..............................................................................298
List Points.............................................................................................303
Import Text/ASCII File .........................................................................305
Export Text/ASCII File..........................................................................307
Set Coordinate File ...............................................................................309
Coordinate File Utilities .......................................................................309
Coordinate File Utilities Options.........................................................310
Edit Points ............................................................................................322
Erase Points ..........................................................................................323
Translate Points....................................................................................324
Rotate Points ........................................................................................325
Align Points..........................................................................................327
Scale Points...........................................................................................328
Move Points .........................................................................................329
Edit Point Attributes ............................................................................329
Edit Multiple Pt Attributes ...................................................................331
Move Point Attributes ..........................................................................332
Scale Point Attributes ...........................................................................333
Erase Point Attributes...........................................................................334
Twist Point Attributes ..........................................................................334
Resize Point Attributes .........................................................................335
Trim by Point Symbol ..........................................................................335
Change Point Layer/Color ...................................................................336
Renumber Points..................................................................................337
Explode Points .....................................................................................338
Convert CRD to TDS CR5 / TDS CR5 to CRD......................................339
Convert CRD to LDD MDB..................................................................339
Convert LDD MDB to CRD..................................................................339
Convert Points to Softdesk ..................................................................340
Convert Softdesk to Points ..................................................................340
Convert Wild/Leica to Points ..............................................................340
Convert Geodimeter to Points.............................................................341
Convert Points to Eagle Point..............................................................341
Convert Eagle Point to Points..............................................................342

Contents
viii
Chapter 10 Tools Commands...................................................................... 343
Data Collectors.....................................................................................344
SurvStar/Dozer 2000.............................................................................345
TDS Data Collection.............................................................................348
Leica/Wild ............................................................................................350
Nikon....................................................................................................352
Geodimeter...........................................................................................353
Zeiss ......................................................................................................354
SMI Data Collection.............................................................................354
SDR/Sokkia/Leitz Data Collection........................................................356
MDL Laser ............................................................................................358
Surveyor’s Assistant/Corvallis Microtechnology .................................358
Edit-Process Raw File ............................................................................360
Field to Finish.......................................................................................380
Insert Symbols......................................................................................397
Insert Multi-Point Symbols ..................................................................399
Edit Symbol Library..............................................................................402
Enter Deed Description ........................................................................404
Process Deed File ..................................................................................407
Legal Description .................................................................................408
Design Centerline ................................................................................413
Input-Edit Centerline File ....................................................................416
Polyline to Centerline File ...................................................................430
Centerline File to Polyline ...................................................................431
Polyline Report.....................................................................................432
Station Polyline/Centerline .................................................................433
Label Station-Offset..............................................................................436
Offset Point Entry ................................................................................439
Calculate Offsets ..................................................................................442
Cut Sheet ..............................................................................................445

Chapter 11 COGO Commands.................................................................... 447

Draw-Locate Points ..............................................................................448
Inverse ..................................................................................................448
Occupy Point........................................................................................450
Traverse ................................................................................................451
Side Shots .............................................................................................453
Enter-Assign Point................................................................................454
Raw File On/Off....................................................................................455
Line On/Off..........................................................................................455

Contents
ix
 Locate by Line Bearing.........................................................................456
Locate by Turned Angle .......................................................................457
Locate by Azimuth ...............................................................................457
Locate by Bearing .................................................................................458
Pick Intersection Points .......................................................................458
Bearing-Bearing Intersect .....................................................................460
Bearing-Distance Intersect ...................................................................461
Distance-Distance Intersect..................................................................462
Resection ..............................................................................................463
Point on Arc .........................................................................................464
Divide Between Points .........................................................................465
Divide Along Entity .............................................................................466
Interval Along Entity ...........................................................................466
Create Points from Entities ..................................................................468
Radial Stakeout.....................................................................................471

Chapter 12 Design Commands ................................................................... 473

Lot Layout ............................................................................................474
Set Lot File ............................................................................................475
Design Lot ............................................................................................476
Polyline to Lot File ...............................................................................477
Lot File by Interior Text .......................................................................478
Input-Edit Lot File ................................................................................479
Lot File Report ......................................................................................481
Draw Lot File ........................................................................................482
Offsets & Intersections .........................................................................483
Cul-de-Sacs ...........................................................................................484
Parking .................................................................................................486
4 Sided Building ...................................................................................487
Best-Fit Circle .......................................................................................487
Best Fit Line by Average .......................................................................488
Best Fit Line Linear Reg........................................................................489
Tangent Line from Circles ...................................................................490

Chapter 13 Area Commands....................................................................... 491

Area Label Defaults ..............................................................................492
Inverse with Area .................................................................................493
Map Check by Pnt#s ............................................................................494
Area by Lines & Arcs ............................................................................496

Contents
x
 Label Last Area .....................................................................................497
Hinged Area..........................................................................................497
Sliding Side Area...................................................................................498
Area Radial from Curve........................................................................499

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands ............................................................... 501

Annotate Defaults ................................................................................502
Auto Annotate......................................................................................506
Angle/Distance .....................................................................................509
Draw End Point Leaders.......................................................................510
Switch Bearing Quadrant .....................................................................511
Mirror Selected Labels ..........................................................................512
Flip Last Label.......................................................................................512
Flip Selected Labels ..............................................................................513
Flip ON/OFF .........................................................................................513
Bearing with Leader .............................................................................514
Distance with Leader............................................................................515
Bearing-Distance with Leader ..............................................................516
Azimuth-Distance with Leader ............................................................516
Global Reannotate ...............................................................................517
Survey Text Defaults ............................................................................518
Offset Dimensions................................................................................520
Building Dimensions............................................................................521
Adjoiner Text .......................................................................................523
Draw Grid.............................................................................................524
Draw Legend ........................................................................................526
Draw North Arrow ...............................................................................529
Draw Barscale .......................................................................................530
Create Point Table................................................................................531
Update Point Table ..............................................................................533
Table Defaults.......................................................................................533
Table Header ........................................................................................535
Set Table Position .................................................................................535
Curve Table ..........................................................................................536
Line Table .............................................................................................537
Delete Table Elements..........................................................................538
Label Arc...............................................................................................538
Stack Label Arc .....................................................................................540
Draw Text On Arc ................................................................................543
Edit Text on Arc ...................................................................................546

Contents
xi
 Fit Text Inside Arc ................................................................................547
Fit Text Outside Arc .............................................................................548
Change Polyline Linetype....................................................................549
Polyline to Special Line........................................................................550
Polyline to Tree Line ............................................................................551
Label Coordinates ................................................................................552
Label Angles .........................................................................................554
Leader With Text..................................................................................555
Special Leader.......................................................................................555
Label Offset Distances ..........................................................................556

Chapter 15 Surface Commands .................................................................. 559

Triangulate & Contour.........................................................................560
Contour Elevation Label ......................................................................567
Make 3D Grid File ................................................................................568
Plot 3D Grid File...................................................................................573
Two Surface Volumes ...........................................................................575
Volumes By Layer.................................................................................578
Design Pad Template............................................................................580
Tag Hard Breaklines .............................................................................584
Untag Hard Breaklines .........................................................................584
Convert LDD-AEC Contours................................................................585
Profile Defaults.....................................................................................586
Profile from Surface Entities ................................................................588
Profile from Pts on Centerline .............................................................590
Input-Edit Profile .................................................................................591
Draw Profile..........................................................................................592
Profile To Points...................................................................................606

Chapter 16 Window Commands................................................................. 609

Cascade.................................................................................................610
Tile Horizontally ..................................................................................610
Tile Vertically .......................................................................................610
Arrange Icons .......................................................................................610

Chapter 17 Help Commands....................................................................... 611

Autodesk Point A..................................................................................612
Support Assistance ...............................................................................613

Contents
xii
 Field Survey Manual.............................................................................613
About Field Survey ...............................................................................614

Appendix A System Variables ..................................................................... 615

APERTURE ............................................................................................616
ATTDIA.................................................................................................616
ATTMODE ............................................................................................616
ATTREQ ................................................................................................617
AUTOSNAP...........................................................................................617
BLIPMODE ...........................................................................................618
CECOLOR.............................................................................................618
CMDECHO...........................................................................................618
COORDS...............................................................................................619
CURSORSIZE ........................................................................................619
DIMSTYLE ............................................................................................619
DIMZIN ................................................................................................620
DRAGMODE.........................................................................................620
ELEVATION..........................................................................................621
FILEDIA ................................................................................................621
GRIDMODE..........................................................................................621
GRIDUNIT ............................................................................................622
GRIPBLOCK..........................................................................................622
GRIPCOLOR .........................................................................................622
GRIPHOT..............................................................................................622
GRIPS....................................................................................................623
GRIPSIZE ..............................................................................................623
HIGHLIGHT .........................................................................................623
LAYOUTREGENCTL .............................................................................624
LIMCHECK ...........................................................................................625
LISPINIT ...............................................................................................625
LTSCALE ...............................................................................................625
MAXSORT ............................................................................................626
MBUTTONPAN ....................................................................................626
ORTHOMODE ......................................................................................626
OSMODE ..............................................................................................627
PDMODE ..............................................................................................628
PDSIZE ..................................................................................................628
PICKADD..............................................................................................628
PICKAUTO............................................................................................629
PICKBOX ..............................................................................................629

Contents
xiii
 PICKDRAG ...........................................................................................629
PICKFIRST ............................................................................................630
PICKSTYLE ...........................................................................................630
PLINEGEN ............................................................................................630
PLINETYPE ...........................................................................................631
PLOTROTMODE...................................................................................631
PLQUIET...............................................................................................632
PSLTSCALE ...........................................................................................632
PSTYLEMODE.......................................................................................633
PSTYLEPOLICY.....................................................................................633
PSVPSCALE...........................................................................................633
RASTERPREVIEW .................................................................................634
REGENMODE .......................................................................................634
SAVETIME ............................................................................................634
SNAPANG .............................................................................................635
SNAPBASE.............................................................................................635
SNAPISOPAIR .......................................................................................635
SNAPMODE ..........................................................................................636
SNAPSTYL.............................................................................................636
SNAPTYPE ............................................................................................636
SNAPUNIT ............................................................................................637
TABMODE ............................................................................................637
THICKNESS ..........................................................................................637
TILEMODE ...........................................................................................638
UCSICON .............................................................................................638
WORLDVIEW.......................................................................................638

Appendix B Standard Libraries ................................................................... 639

Standard Linetypes...............................................................................640
Standard Hatch Patterns ......................................................................641
Standard Text and Symbol Fonts .........................................................647
Examples of Standard Text and Symbol Fonts ....................................648
TrueType Fonts.....................................................................................650

Index ................................................................................................. 651

Contents
xiv
01-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 3:00 PM

Product Overview,
System Requirements,
and Installation
1
This chapter provides information on system require- In this chapter
ments to operate Autodesk Field Survey and it provides ■ Using the Autodesk Field
Survey User’s Guide
information on the installation procedure.
■ Product overview
■ System requirements
■ Installing Autodesk Field Survey

1
 Using the Autodesk Field Survey
User’s Guide
This manual is designed as a reference guide. It contains a complete
description of all commands in the Autodesk Field Survey product. The
chapters are organized by program menus and are arranged in the
order that the menus appear in Autodesk Field Survey. Chapter 2
contains three tutorials. Appendices describing environmental
variables and standard libraries are located at the end of the manual.

Product Overview
Autodesk Field Survey offers a full suite of commands for downloading,
entering, and processing field survey data and for generating final plats
and drawings. Autodesk Field Survey can function as a total and
complete software solution for the land surveying firm, or as an
affordable downloading, calculation, and preparatory solution used in
conjunction with the more full-featured Autodesk products including
AutoCAD Land Development Desktop, Autodesk Survey and Autodesk
Civil Design.
Built around the Autodesk 2000i OEM graphics engine, Autodesk Field
Survey reads and writes standard AutoCAD drawings and links
smoothly to the file formats of the higher-order Autodesk products.
Autodesk Field Survey is one of the first software packages to include
read-write ability in the new LandXML file formats for Internet transfer
of design data. Most importantly, Autodesk Field Survey is built around
the standard AutoCAD command set, assuring familiarity to AutoCAD-
trained staff and offering the opportunity for all firms, large and small,
to build their businesses fully around the Autodesk family of products.

Data Collection
The power of Autodesk Field Survey begins with data collection.
Autodesk Field Survey downloads all major collectors ranging from
Geodimeter and TDS to Leica, Nikon, Sokkia, and SMI. The raw data is
stored in “RW5” format and can be viewed, edited and processed. The
processing, or calculation of coordinates, recognizes “direct and reverse”
and other forms of multiple measurement, and processes sets of field
measurements. Surveys can be balanced and closed by selective use of
angle balance, compass, transit, Crandall, and least squares methods—or
simply by direct calculation with no adjustment. Commands exist for

Chapter 1 Product Overview: System Requirements and Installation

2
finding bad angles and for plotting the traverse and sideshot legs of the
survey in distinct colors as a means of searching for “ busts” or errors. In
addition to downloading of data from electronic data collectors, the
program accepts manual entry of field notes directly into a spreadsheet
format, permitting review, storage, and editing. Alternatively, field notes
can be entered for immediate calculation and screen plotting of points,
with the “ raw notes” stored simultaneously, permitting re-processing
and re-calculation as needed. For data that was not field-surveyed, but
was provided in the form of an ASCII or binary point file, Autodesk Field
Survey offers the “ Import Text/ASCII File” command, unrivalled in its
flexibility to read foreign data sources.

Field to Finish
The survey world is recognizing the power of coding field shots with
descriptions that lead to automatic layering, linework, and symbol work.
Office drafting time can be reduced by 50% or more with intelligent use
of descriptions, leading to “ field to finish” plotting. For example,
breaklines, which act as barriers to triangulation, should be placed on
streams, ridges, toe-of-slopes and top-of-banks for more accurate
contouring. With the field to finish command, breaklines can be created
by field coding, with descriptions such as DL, for creating 3D polyline
ditch lines, or TB for creating top-of-bank polylines, etc. and this
coordinate data can be simply plotted to the screen as undifferentiated
points. However, with the field to finish command, the data can be
plotted in one step, creating 3D polyline break lines, building lines, light
poles, manholes, edge-of-pavements, that are all distinctly layered and
fully annotated. The field to finish command within Autodesk Field
Survey is extremely robust, so much so that it can adapt to a coding
system made up on-the-fly, or a coding system that has been received
from an outsourced survey. Field crew coding and office processing
using the field to finish command can save valuable hours of drafting
and eliminate misinterpretations, paving the way for quick plat
generation or supporting supplemental engineering work.

Deed Work
Autodesk Field Survey allows you to enter old deeds and plot the
linework, then add bearing and distance annotation optionally.
Distances can be entered in meters and feet, and even in the old
measurement forms of chains, poles, links, and varas. Both tangent
and non-tangent arcs can be entered. Closures, distances traversed, and
areas are automatically reported. Working in reverse, the command
Legal Description creates a property description suitable for deed

Product Overview
3
 recording directly from a closed polyline on the screen. If that polyline
has point numbers with descriptions at any of the property corners,
these descriptions will appear in the deed report, as in “… thence
N 45 degrees, 25 minutes, 10 seconds E to a fence post… ” . Deed f i les
can be saved, re-loaded, edited, re-drawn and printed or plotted to the
screen in a report form.

Drafting and Design

Autodesk Field Survey offers approximately 150 different symbols and
north arrows, broken down by categories (for example, points, trees,
map symbols). You can create new categories or supplement or change
the available point symbols within any category. The program is
designed to receive entire sets of new, customized point symbols in a
single command. Attributes of points, such as elevation and point
number, can be selectively “ frozen,” allowing the creation of final plats
with symbols and optional descriptions remaining on points, as
desired. Linework, typically in the form of polylines, can be drawn by
any combination of point number and “ snap” selection, to create
property lines, street lines, easements and right-of-ways, building lines
and borders. In addition to Autodesk Field Survey’s standard line types,
dozens of special line types are available, including tree lines, fence
lines, all manner of utility lines, stonewalls, and customizable line
types. Design features include automatic street intersections and cul-
de-sacs, and automatic lot layout. For lots, you can pick your right-of-
way and back property polylines, specify desired acreages and
frontage/rear lot parameters, and the lots are automatically calculated
and drawn. Hinged Area, Sliding Side Area, and Area Radial from Curve
are excellent design tools, with an easy, graphic interface. All design
polylines can be converted to point numbers at vertices and radius
points for purposes of field stakeout.

Annotation
With a full slate of annotation commands, Autodesk Field Survey is all
you need to finalize your boundary surveys and plats. There is a wide
range of bearing and distance annotation options, including the Auto-
Annotate command, which allows you to annotate an entire selection
set of polylines in one step. Station and offset annotating, as for right-of-
way lines, is provided. Use commands such as Special Leader, Station
Polyline, Draw North Arrow, and Draw Bar Scale to dress up the drawing
and give it a hand-drafted look. Commands such as Title Block and
Draw Legend, as well as sequential lot numbering and the area labeling
commands, help you complete the finished drawing quickly.

Chapter 1 Product Overview: System Requirements and Installation

4
Powerful Utilities
Autodesk Field Survey contains many strong utilities, particularly
polyline utilities. You can Join Nearest disconnected polylines, turn
2-sided figures into closed, 4-sided figures, offset, trim, and extend
3D polylines, create building “ footprints” with left and right entries
using Extend by Distance, even reverse polyline directions. There are
over 20 significant polyline utilities available, including Reduce
Vertices, which weeds out duplicate or unnecessary vertices and cuts
down on drawing size. Boundary Polyline is a simplified version of
Bpoly, and its opposite, Shrinkwrap Polyline. Other categories of
utilities include point attribute editing, scaling, twisting and re-sizing,
text editing, font alteration and re-sizing, and advanced layer
manipulation. Raster images such as aerial photos and scanned images
can be placed on drawings.

Contouring and Terrain Modeling

There are many higher order features in Autodesk Field Survey. Full
contouring is provided, with options for smoothing and labeling
contours, highlighting index contours and clipping contours to
selected perimeters. Autodesk Field Survey can be used to create both
grid files and TIN files (.flt format). Volumes can be computed between
grid files, inside any selected polyline perimeter. Profiles can be
extracted from contour maps or hand-entered, as generic “ point-to-
point” profiles or as road profiles with vertical curves. The Design Pad
Template command carves in building pads, pits, parking lots, roads,
and other 3D features into any existing terrain. Land forms created by
contouring and Design Pad Template can be viewed in 3D and rotated
in real time, using the 3D Viewer Window command. In addition to all
the commands needed to create final drawings, Autodesk Field Survey
also contains commands to perform many engineering tasks typically
encountered by survey firms.
Autodesk Field Survey is the ideal stand-alone solution for the survey
and drafting organization, but it is also the perfect go-between
product for the large civil engineering firm with in-house or
outsourced survey operations. It complements Land Development
Desktop, Autodesk Survey, and Autodesk Civil Design. Autodesk Field
Survey enables Autodesk to serve the full spectrum of the surveying
and civil engineering design world.

Product Overview
5
 System Requirements

Software
n Windows NT® version 4.0, Windows® 95b, Windows 98, or
Windows 2000: It is recommended that you install and run
Autodesk Field Survey on an operating system that uses the same
language as your Autodesk Field Survey software or on an English
version of one of the supported operating systems.
n Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or Netscape Navigator 4.5 or
later: One is required if you plan to use Internet Tools.

RAM and Hard Disk Space Requirements

n 128 MB of RAM (recommended), 64 MB of RAM (minimum)
n 130 MB of hard disk space (minimum)
n 64 MB of disk swap space (minimum)
n 60 MB of free disk space in your system folder
n 20 MB of free disk space for common shared files and Autodesk
shared files

An additional 8 MB to 15 MB of space may be required for files

installed in the system folder. This need not be on the same drive as
the program folder where you load Autodesk Field Survey.

Hardware (Required)
n Pentium 233 or better, or compatible processor (hardware must be
supported by Microsoft for the operating system being used)
n 800 × 600 VGA video display with 256 colors (1024 × 768 or higher
recommended)
n CD-ROM drive for initial installation only
n Windows-supported display adapter
n Mouse or other pointing device

Hardware (Optional)
n Printer or plotter
n Digitizer
n Serial or parallel port (for peripheral devices)
n Modem or access to an Internet connection

Chapter 1 Product Overview: System Requirements and Installation

6
 Access Requirements and Permissions
Before you install Autodesk Field Survey, make sure you have local
system administrative access permissions to the following locations for
the proper installation and execution of Autodesk Field Survey:

n Autodesk Field Survey install folder

n Windows system folder
n System registry

You must have local system administrative permissions to install

Autodesk Field Survey. If you don’t have administrative permissions,
you will not be able to install the product.
Autodesk Field Survey requires that users be assigned either Power User
or Administrator permissions when using the Windows 2000 operating
system. Failure to assign these permissions causes Autodesk Field
Survey to perform incorrectly. See the Windows 2000 Help system for
information about assigning user permissions.

Installing Autodesk Field Survey

If you’re installing Autodesk Field Survey on Microsoft®
Windows NT® 4.0 and Windows 2000, you must have permission to
write to the necessary system registry sections. To do this, make sure
that you have administrative permissions on the computer on which
you’re installing.
Before you install Autodesk Field Survey, close all running applications.
Make sure you disable any virus-checking software. Please refer to your
virus software documentation for instructions.

1 Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive.

If Autorun is enabled, it begins the setup process when you insert
the CD-ROM.
To stop Autorun from starting the installation process automatically,
hold down the SHIFT key when you insert the CD.
To start the installation process without using Autorun, from the Start
menu (Windows), choose Run. Enter the CD-ROM drive letter, and
setup. For example, enter d:\setup.

Installing Autodesk Field Survey

7
 2 The Windows Installer dialog box is displayed.

3 On the initial Autodesk Field Survey dialog box, you have two options:

You can view the Installation Guide. Choose View Installation Guide
and follow the Installation Guide Viewer instructions. When you are
finished, close the document to return to the Installation Wizard page,
and choose Next.
If you do not want to view the Installation Guide during installation,
choose Next to continue with the installation.

Chapter 1 Product Overview: System Requirements and Installation

8
4 On the Serial Number dialog box, do one of the following:

If you have already purchased Autodesk Field Survey, enter the serial
number and CD key, which are located on the Autodesk Field Survey
product packaging. The serial number must contain a three-digit prefix
followed by an eight-digit number. The CD key is six characters.
If you have not yet purchased Autodesk Field Survey, leave the serial
number as it appears in the Serial Number box and choose Next to
install a trial version of Autodesk Field Survey. You can purchase
Autodesk Field Survey at a later time by choosing the Buy Online
option during the Authorizing Autodesk Field Survey procedure
described later in this chapter.

Installing Autodesk Field Survey

9
 5 Choose Next.

6 On the Select Installation Type dialog box, select the type of

installation you want: Typical, Compact, or Custom.
Typical installs the following features:

n Program files: Executables, menus, toolbars, Help templates,

TrueType® fonts, and additional support files
n Internet tools: Support files
n Fonts: SHX fonts
n Samples: Sample drawings
n Help files: Online documentation

Compact installs only the program files, fonts, and the Portable
License Management.
Custom installs only the files you select. By default, the Custom
installation option installs all Autodesk Field Survey features. To install
only the features you want, choose a feature, and then select one of the
following options from the list:

n Will be installed on local hard drive: Installs a feature or component

of a feature on your hard drive.
n Entire feature will be installed on local hard drive: Installs a feature
and its components on your hard drive.

Chapter 1 Product Overview: System Requirements and Installation

10
 n Feature will be installed when required only: Installs a feature
on demand.
n Entire feature will be unavailable: Makes the feature unavailable.

7 Choose Next.

8 On the Destination Folder dialog box, do one of the following:

n Choose Next to accept the default destination folder/directory.
n Choose Browse to specify a different drive and folder where you
want Autodesk Field Survey to be installed. Choose any directory
that is mapped to your computer (including network directories) or
enter a new path. Choose OK and then Next.
Setup installs some files required by Autodesk Field Survey in your
system folder (for example, c:\Windows\System, or
c:\Winnt\System32). This folder may be on a different drive than
the folder you specify as the installation folder (for example,
d:\Program Files\ Autodesk Field Survey). You may need up to
60 MB of space in your system folder, depending on the
components you select to install. Setup alerts you if there is
insufficient free space on the drive that contains your system folder.

Installing Autodesk Field Survey

11
 9 On the Start Installation page, choose Next to start the installation.

If you opened a program to view the Installation Guide and the

program is still open, you must close it now.
10 The Updating System dialog box is displayed while Autodesk Field
Survey installs.

Chapter 1 Product Overview: System Requirements and Installation

12
11 When the installation is complete, the Setup Complete dialog box is
displayed. Choose Finish to exit the installation program.

12 It is strongly recommended that you restart your computer at this

point in order for the new configuration settings to take effect.

13 Do one of the following:

n Choose Yes to restart your computer now.
n Choose No to manually restart your computer at another time.

If you do not restart your computer, you may have problems running
Autodesk Field Survey.

Installing Autodesk Field Survey

13
 Congratulations! You have successfully installed Autodesk Field Survey.
You are now ready to register your product and start using the
program. To register the product, double-click the Autodesk Field
Survey icon on your desktop and follow the instructions.

Authorizing Autodesk Field Survey

The first time you start Autodesk Field Survey, the Begin page of the
Authorization wizard is displayed.

You can authorize Autodesk Field Survey at that time, or run Autodesk
Field Survey and authorize it later. Autodesk Field Survey displays the
Begin page for 30 days each time you start the program until you
provide an authorization code. After 30 days, you must enter an
authorization code to run Autodesk Field Survey.
You can authorize Autodesk Field Survey in one of the following ways:
n Internet: Guides you through entering your registration
information and sends it to Autodesk over the Internet.
Registration and authorization occurs almost instantly once you
submit your information.
n Email: Guides you through creating an email message with your
registration information, which you can send to Autodesk.
n Contact your reseller for additional information on authorizing
Autodesk Field Survey.

Chapter 1 Product Overview: System Requirements and Installation

14
02-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 3:01 PM

Tutorials
2
This chapter contains lessons designed to assist you in In this chapter
learning the functionality of Autodesk Field Survey. ■ Lesson 1: Entering a deed
■ Lesson 2: Making a plat
■ Lesson 3: Field-to-finish

15
 Lesson 1: Entering a Deed
In this short lesson you will create a simple drawing. You will enter a
6-sided deed, add a title block, bar scale, and north arrow, add a title
and certification text, and plot the deed area.
Note that the ESC key will cancel most commands, so if you choose the
wrong command or enter something incorrectly and want to start
over, just press ESC.

1 Click the icon for Autodesk Field Survey. You may be presented with a
Startup Wizard dialog box. If so, click Exit.
2 Under the Settings menu, click Drawing Setup. Set the unit setting to
English and the Horizontal Scale to 50. Click OK.

3 Choose Point Defaults from the Points menu, and, in the dialog box,
click Elevations off to eliminate the Elevation prompt. Click
Descriptions on and also set the point symbol name to symbol 4
(SPT4), which is the round, open circle. Click Automatic Point
Numbering on. Click OK.
4 Under the Tools menu, select Enter Deed Description.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
16
Use the default settings in the Plot Deed Description dialog box.

Set the To Table Scaler option to 0.00. This places all of the deed calls
in the drawing. The To Table Scaler determines which deed calls appear
in the drawing and which deed calls appear in a table. Deed calls less
than the To Table Scaler value multiplied by the Drawing Scale will be
placed in a table of calls. Set the dialog box options to match those
shown above. Click OK.
The command line is the area below the graphics and to the left. When
you are prompted to “Pick point or point number” at the command
line, pick a point in the lower left quadrant of your screen to start the
deed plotting. If you are prompted for elevation, you failed to turn off
the elevation prompt in Point Defaults. Press ESC and return to the
Point Defaults command.

Lesson 1: Entering a Deed

17
 When you are prompted for a description, enter Fence Post. Then,
the following dialog box will appear so you can specify where to store
the coordinates:

Select New under File Name, and type Deed. This creates a file called
Deed.crd. All Autodesk Field Survey points are stored in files with the
.crd file extension, which stands for “ coordinates.”
Respond to the command line prompts exactly as shown below:

Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 125.3500

The quadrant (Q) is 1 for Northeast (2 is Southeast, 3 is Southwest and

4 is Northwest). The bearing is 25 degrees, 35 minutes, and 00 seconds.
If all digits for the minutes and seconds are entered as shown above,
then the deed call will be fully plotted, including the seconds. If only
the degrees and minutes were entered, as in 125.35, then the plot
would appear as “ N 25° 35' E".

Varas/Poles/Chains/<Distance>: 200.51
Note that you can enter old deeds in the forms of Poles and Links,
Chains and Links and even Varas (a unit of measurement formerly
used in the southwestern states of the U.S.).
Enter Point Description <Fence Post>: Iron Pin
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 189.4321
Varas/Poles/Chains/<Distance>: 225.00
Enter Point Description <Iron Pin>: Press ENTER
Pressing ENTER selects the default, which is Iron Pin.
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: C
Radius: 75
Curve direction [Left/<Right>]? Press ENTER (for Right)
Non-tangent/Reverse-tangent/Bearing/Chord/DeltaAng/Tangent/<Arc
Len>: 118.17

Chapter 2 Tutorials
18
If you don’t know the arc length, but you know the tangent, you
would choose “ T” for tangent.
Enter Point Description <Iron Pin>: Press ENTER
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 200.0000 (due south)
If you were to enter just 2 (no degrees, minutes, or seconds), then the
deed call would be plotted “ S 000 E” .
Varas/Poles/Chains/<Distance>: 178.00
Enter Point Description <Iron Pin>: Concrete Monument
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 488.2300
This entry specifies Northwest 88 degrees, 23 minutes.
Varas/Poles/Chains/<Distance>: 300.34
Enter Point Description <Concrete Monument>: Fence Post
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 454.1109
Varas/Poles/Chains/<Distance>: 106.93
Enter Point Description <Fence Post>: Press SPACEBAR, then
press ENTER
Simply pressing ENTER uses the default text (Fence Post) again. To avoid
drawing the text “ Fence Post” twice on the end point, press SPACEBAR,
skip a blank character, and press ENTER.
You have now completed the 6-sided figure (including one curve).
Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: E
The following results are reported:

SQ. FEET: 82302.9 SQ. YARDS: 9144.8 SQ. MILES: 0.0

ACRES: 1.89
Closure error distance> 0.01708540 Error Bearing> S 52d5’26" E
Closure Precision> 1 in 66076.89 Total Distance Traversed> 1128.95
The resulting deed, has a closure of 1:66077. In the initial prompt
“ Undo/Exit/Curve … ” , U for Undo would allow you to reenter the
previous deed call.

Use the Extents command on the View menu to see the entire area.

Lesson 1: Entering a Deed

19
 5 Under the Settings menu, select Title Block. Note that the title line is
plotted in large text on the title block, and its length cannot exceed
15 characters.

Select Paper Size B2 (17 x 11). Enter the title block data on the right
side of the dialog box.
After you’ve completed the title block entries, select OK.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
20
 Enter or pick lower-left corner point for border: Pick somewhat
below and to the left of your drawing, to place the title block

Use the Extents command on the View menu to see the entire area. If
you want to move the border, use the Move command on the Edit
menu. Pick the border lines and the title block objects (up to 3 picks
total), press ENTER (to end object selection), then pick two points
representing the vector of the move.
If you make a mistake, enter U for undo or select the back arrow icon
that appears at the top of the screen. If you want to see your whole
working area, use the Extents command on the View menu.
If you won’t to see a margin around the working area after you use the
Extents command, use the Zoom Out command on the View menu.
Then use the Window command on the View menu to capture the
view and margin you prefer.
6 On the Annotate menu, select Draw North Arrow. Pick a North Arrow
from among the icons, place it in the upper right of your drawing, and
press ENTER at each prompt until the arrow is drawn. If you don’t like
the location of the arrow, choose Move on the Edit menu (or enter M
for move at the command line) and move it.
7 On the Annotate menu, select Draw Bar Scale. Pick an insertion point
below the North Arrow and directly above the “ a” in Farmer. You can
move the bar scale using the Move command on the Edit menu.
8 On the Draw menu, select the Text command. You can also run this
command by typing dtext at the command line.

Lesson 1: Entering a Deed

21
 Respond to the prompts as shown below:
Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: J
Enter an option
[Align/Fit/Center/Middle/Right/TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR]: C
(for center justified)
Specify center point of text: Pick a point for the centered text.
Choose a point near the top-center of the drawing.
Specify height <4.00>: 10
Entering 10 make the title text bigger than the default.
Specify rotation angle of text <E>: Press ENTER
Go due East which is the default specified during Deed Description
Text: Farmer Survey
Text: Ashland, KY
Text: Press ENTER

To enter a certification in the lower right of the drawing, select Text

from the Draw menu, or type dtext at the command line.
If you haven’t done anything else, such as Zoom or Pan, you can simply
press ENTER to repeat the last command. If pressing ENTER doesn’t repeat
the Text command, press ESC to cancel. Enter Dtext at the command
prompt and respond to the resulting prompts as shown below.
Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: J
Pick a point above and to the left of the title block for a certification.
You don’t have to enter L for left-justification. The Dtext command
defaults to left-justification every time.

Height <10.00>: 4
Rotation angle <E>: Press ENTER
Text: Surveyor’s Certification
Text: Press SPACEBAR, then press ENTER
Text: I do hereby certify that the survey shown hereon
Text: is a true and correct representation…. .
Text: Press SPACEBAR, then press ENTER
Text: _____________________________________
Text: Arnold James, PLS #2534
Text: Press ENTER to end

Chapter 2 Tutorials
22
 The following is a close-up of the certification that we just entered:

9 Enlarge the two title lines (“Farmer Survey” and “Surveyor’s

Certification”) by a factor of 2.0 using the command Text
Enlarge/Reduce on the Edit menu, option Text. When prompted for
Scaling Multiplier, enter 2. Select both the Farmer Survey text (at the
top of the screen, not in the title block) and the Surveyor’s
Certification text. When asked again to Select Objects, press ENTER.
When you are selecting objects, if you select something you don’t
want, you can enter R at the next Select Objects prompt, and remove
items from the selection set. If you want to add objects after you have
removed an object, enter A at the next Select Objects prompt.
10 Make the enlarged Farmer Survey text at the top of the screen bold by
changing its font to the bold font. Select the Text command from the
Edit menu, Text, then select the Change Text Font option.

Select Objects: Pick the Farmer Survey Text at the top of the drawing
Select Objects: Press ENTER (for no more selections)
Enter new text Style: Bold

11 Select the Edit Text command (under the Edit menu, Text option)
to change S 00°00’00” E to S 00° E. When you are prompted,
“Select Text to Edit:” pick the due South bearing text.

Lesson 1: Entering a Deed

23
 A dialog box appears as follows:

The degree symbol is represented as %%d. (If you had typed

N 15%%d25’35" E in the Dtext command, Autodesk Field Survey
would draw that entry as N15° 25’35"E.) Click in the text to the
immediate right of the quotation mark and press BACKSPACE until the
text reads as shown here.

Click OK. Press ENTER to exit the command.

12 In the enlargement in Step 8 showing the title block and also
showing point 5, notice how the linework travels into the circle that
represents the point. To clip off the linework at the edge of the corner
symbols, use the Trim by point Symbol command on the Points
menu. This command requires that all points be in view, so if you
cannot see your entire drawing, use the Extents command on the
View menu (sometimes referred to as Zoom Extents). Respond to the
following prompts:

Select point symbols to trim against. Select objects: All

All selects all points, but only linework crossing into corner symbols
will be trimmed.
Select objects: Press ENTER
You can continue to select objects until you press ENTER.
The trimming is completed.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
24
13 Prepare for area labeling by selecting the Area Defaults command on
the Area menu. The dialog box shown below appears:

Change the Other Area Labels and Inverse with Area decimal precision
to 4 decimal places. Also, make the Area Text Size Scaler 0.2 (doubled
from the default of 0.1).
You are going to compute the area by point number, but you could
have chosen the Area by Lines & Arcs command. In that command,
you would pick the lines and arcs that make up the figure, but since
the closure was 0.017 off (the distance from point 7 to point 1), you
would exceed the default Max gap tolerance. Unless you changed that
tolerance in this dialog box to something larger than 0.017, you would
get no result using the Area by Lines & Arcs command. Do not change
it for this exercise, because you might forget to change it back. Instead
you will compute the area by inversing from 1 through 7 and back
to 1. Click OK to exit the dialog box.

Lesson 1: Entering a Deed

25
 14 Select Inverse with Area on the Area menu. Respond to the prompts as
shown below:

Station/<Pick Starting point or point number>: 1

Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): 2
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): 3
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): r
Radius point number or pick point: cen (for center “snap”)
Now move the cursor, without picking, to the arc and see how the
center snap becomes active. When the radius point is found, pick on
the arc.
Curve direction [Left/<Right>]? Press ENTER (for the Right option)
Pick End of Arc or point number (U-Undo, Enter to end): 4
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): 5
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): 6
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): 7
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): 1
Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt, U-Undo, Enter to end): Press
ENTER to end
A dialog box showing the results will appear. Select Exit at the top of
the dialog box and respond to the prompts as shown below:
SQ. FEET: 83921.8 SQ. YARDS: 9324.6 SQ. MILES: 0.0
ACRES: 1.9266 PERIMETER: 1128.9671
Pick area label centering point: Pick a point near the center of the
figure, in its interior.
The area units you chose in Area Defaults are labeled on the screen.
Erase Polyline Yes/No <Yes>: y

This erases a polyline that has been drawn over the original lines and
arcs. The Inverse with Area command draws this polyline because often
you are solve the area from points and want the new linework drawn.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
26
 You snapped to the radius point using the “ cen” object snap.
Additional object snaps appear under Object Snap command on the
Settings menu. Since all plotted points have a node, you could have
inversed around this figure by using the “ nod” snap for points 1
through 7, and the “ cen” snap to capture the radius point. Snaps are
typically entered at the keyboard as 3 characters (for example, “ int” for
intersect and “ end” for endpoint).
15 Freeze the point numbers to finish the drawing by choosing Layer
Control on the View menu. In the PNTNO row, click the sun icon to
change it to a snowflake icon, which freezes the PNTNO layer. The
point numbers remain in the drawing, waiting to be “ thawed” , but
they are not displayed.
The final drawing is shown below:

Lesson 1: Entering a Deed

27
 Lesson 2: Making a Plat
In this lesson you will draw out a plat of a single lot, using Autodesk
Field Survey drafting techniques. You will make the plat from an ASCII
file of points named Plat.txt.

1 Click the icon for Autodesk Field Survey. You may be presented with a
Startup Wizard dialog box as shown below:

You will use the Wizard in Lesson 3 to quickly perform a series of

commands. In this lesson, however, you will enter the commands
individually so you can see what each one does.
If you see the Startup Wizard dialog box, and you don’t want to see it
again, click the Skip Startup Wizard Next Time option.
Another way to turn off the Wizard is to click it off within the
Configure command under the Settings menu.
2 On the Settings menu, click Configure to display the following menu:

Chapter 2 Tutorials
28
Click General Settings to display the dialog box shown here.

The settings in this dialog box along with the settings in other
configure sub-options, determine default working conditions for
Autodesk Field Survey. In this example, set the Data Path, which
specifies where data files are stored , to c:\Program Files\Autodesk
Field Survey\data. Turn on Group Point Entities which groups point
elevations, numbers, and descriptions (all aspects of the points) into a
single entity for moving, erasing, and other commands.
Choose Numeric Only to store points in numeric form. This produces
point numbers such as 1, 2, 3, 10, and 11. If you selected
Alphanumeric, then you could have point numbers like 1A, 1B, 1C,
HUB5, CTRL, SS10, etc. There is a slight speed advantage to working
with purely numeric point numbers. The highest numeric point
number allowed is 32000. Regardless of format, point numbers are
stored in a file that has the extension .crd. There is no limit to the
number of points in an alphanumeric coordinate file.
Click on the Use Startup Wizard option. Click OK and Configure.

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

29
 3 Select Drawing Setup from the Settings menu.

The scale acts as a multiplier on all text annotation. For example,

100 * Text Plot Size (0.08) = 8 (text height of 8 units). The Text Plot
Size is the effective height, in inches, that the text will appear when
plotted at the Horizontal Scale (here 100).
Bearings and Distances, Legends, Title Blocks, and Point Symbols will
size up or down on the basis of the Horizontal Scale set within
Drawing Setup. Set the Horizontal Scale to 100 and press ENTER. Then
click OK to exit Drawing Setup.
4 Next, you will import the ASCII file Plat.txt and store the points in a
Coordinate file called Plat.crd. Under the Points menu, select the
command Import Text/ASCII File. The command recognizes that since
you are in a new drawing, you have not yet set a coordinate file to
store the points in.
You will see the dialog box shown below. Click New.

To the right of File name, enter Plat, and click Save. Points will be
stored in Plat.crd.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
30
The Text File Format dialog box appears.

Click the Select Text/ASCII Files button and choose Plat.txt, found in the
default data directory (C:\Program Files\Autodesk Field Survey\data).
Plat.txt is an ASCII file containing 54 points in the form of Point
Number, Northing, Easting, Elevation, and Description. The format of
the points appears in the Preview Window. The format is: Point (P),
Northing (Y), Easting (X), Elevation (Z), Description (D), or in short,
P,Y,X,Z,D. You must match this format in the Coordinate Order. If you
don’t see P,Y,X,Z,D in the Coordinate Order box, then select that
format from the Common Formats option. Or, you can type the list
directly into the Coordinate Order box.

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

31
 Click OK. A confirming dialog appears as follows:

Click OK.

5 Choose the List Points command under the Points menu.

The List Points dialog box will typically default to the full range of
points, which is 1 through 54 in this exercise. You can control the
decimal places for the Northing/Easting and the Elevation of the
points in the lower portion of the dialog box.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
32
 The settings shown, result in the report shown below:

Exit the report by selecting the Exit icon at the top of the window box
or by clicking the X in the upper-right of the window.
6 Select the Draw/Locate Points command on the Points menu to draw
the points on the screen.

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

33
 In this exercise, the current Symbol Name is SPT10, which stands for
Survey Point symbol 10. SPT10 is an X, shown in the symbol display
window. You can select a different default symbol using the Point
Defaults command on the Points menu.
In this exercise you will change the Symbol Name to null, or symbol 0
(in effect, no symbol). Later you will add official property corner and
utility symbols. Although you are working without a default symbol,
there will always be a “ dot” or a node at the correct insertion point of
each point number
Click Select. You will see the following dialog box:

Click the blank SPT0 point symbol option. Note that the scroll bar
at the right of this Select Symbol dialog box leads to more pages of
symbols.
When you select a symbol, you automatically return to the Draw-
Locate Point dialog box.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
34
 Click Draw All to display the rather busy drawing shown below:

7 Select the Scale Point Attributes command on the Points menu. The
lower right corner of the drawing is very congested. You can specify a
window containing these points and scale them down by a factor of
0.4. For Scaling Multiplier, enter 0.4. When you are prompted for
Select Objects, enter WP for Window Polygon and make a polygon
around the congested area.

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

35
 Press ENTER when you have surrounded the points with the polygon as
shown below.

When you are again prompted to Select Objects, press ENTER.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
36
 The following shows the scaled points.

8 Next, you will prepare for drawing linework by setting the current
layer. You should draft linework and symbol work in designated layers.
In this example, you will put linework and symbol work in a layer
named Final. (You could put property linework in the Final layer and
utility linework in the Utility layer, but for now you will put all
linework and symbols in the layer Final.)

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

37
 To pick the current working layer, select the Layer Control command
from the View menu.

Click Final. Click Current. Click OK.

9 Select the 2D Polyline command on the Draw menu. The 2D Polyline
command allows the you to enter point numbers to draw a line. First,
connect portions of the property line. At the prompt, pick point or
point numbers, enter 1, then 8, then press ENTER to exit. This creates a
polyline. Keep this as a separate polyline, because later you will turn
this back lot line into a fence line.
Now, connect some of the other property lines. Repeat the 2D Polyline
command. You can press ENTER to repeat the command, or you can
select it from the Design menu. Connect points 8 through 10 by
entering as follows:

Pick point or point numbers: 8-10

Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: A
This connects points 8 to 9 to 10 and starts an arc at point 10.
Second point/Radius point/radius Length/<Endpoint or numbers>: 15

Chapter 2 Tutorials
38
Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: 1
Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: Press
ENTER to end the command

This creates the full lot, with the arc coming off point 10 on a tangent.
The line from 15 to 1 is not guaranteed to be tangent to the previous
arc. You should have the following linework at this point:

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

39
 10 You will now create a fence line on the polyline you drew from points
1 to 8. To do this, choose the Line Types command on the Annotate
menu and select the Change Polyline Linetype command. This
command creates polylines that respond as one entity when selected.
When the dialog box appears, click Next to display the dialog box
shown below.

Choose the Fence_S option (the solid fence line).

When prompted to Select Objects, pick the polyline you created from
points 1 to 8. Press ENTER to end selection. Notice that the Current
Linetype Scaler, governing spacing, should be 0.5 (inches) and the
text height scaler is 0.1. If your settings are different, you may want
to Undo (by entering U for undo) the fence line and select the
Defaults command on the Annotate menu and set these items to
match the example.
On the View menu, select the Isolate Layers command, pick the
property line, and press ENTER twice.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
40
 Here is the result:

11 Next, you will connect up the edge of pavement. On the View menu,
select the Restore Layers command to restore your points. Then select
the 2D Polyline command under Draw, and proceed as follows to
connect up the edge of pavement:

Pick point or point numbers: 45– 47,49– 51

Press ENTER at the next prompt to exit the command and create the
road. Note how you can separate range entries using a comma.

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

41
 12 To smooth the edge of the road, select the Polyline Utilities command
on the Edit menu, and select Smooth Polyline.

Enter the looping factor (1-10) <5>: Press ENTER

Enter the offset cutoff <0.05>: Press ENTER
Select objects: pick the edge of road polyline
Select objects: Press ENTER

13 To offset the smoothed edge-of-road polyline by 24 feet to make the

opposite edge of the road, Select the Offset command on the Edit
menu.

Offset distance or Through <Through>: 24

Select object to offset: pick the edge-of-road polyline
Side to offset: pick to the right of the polyline
Select object to offset: Press ENTER to end the command

Now select the Isolate Layers command from the View menu, pick on
any of your linework, and only the entities on the picked layers are
displayed.
Select the Restore Layers command from the View menu to recover
your points. Experiment with the “ cadence” of Isolate and Restore
Layers. Select Isolate Layers, pick the layers to isolate, then press ENTER
twice. Then select Restore Layers.
14 Next, you will draw the shed. Select the 2D Polyline command on the
Draw menu. To draw a two-sided shed, connect points 5 through 7 as
follows:

Pick point or point numbers: 5– 7

Press ENTER to exit at the next prompt.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
42
 This produces the two-sided building shown here:

Select the 4-Sided Building command on the Design menu. Turn the
two-sided shed into a four-sided shed as follows:

Pick a 2-sided building: pick the shed

Enter a width for the polyline <0.00>: Press ENTER
A width of 0 means 1 pass of the pen.

Now your two-sided building looks like this:

15 Focus your attention on the area of tightly spaced points with point
numbers ranging from 27 to 44. This is the driveway and paving area.
In the case of the driveway, assume that the surveyor who collected

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

43
 the points shot in 3-point arcs. He came up to a PC, shot a point on
the arc, and finished up at the PT.
On the View menu, select the Zoom command, then slide over to
Window and pick a lower left and upper right point that windows the
driveway area. (If you wish to use the View ➤ Zoom ➤ Previous
command to zoom out, then use View ➤ Zoom ➤ Window to zoom
in again.)
Select the 2D Polyline command under the Draw menu, and walk the
polyline through the two arcs as follows:

Pick point or point numbers: 27

Undo/Arc/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: 28
Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: A
Second point/Radius point/radius Length/<Endpoint or numbers>: S
Use S for 3-pt arcs.
Pick Second Point or point number: 29
Pick End Point or point number: 30
Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: 31
Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: A
Second point/Radius point/radius Length/<Endpoint or numbers>: S
Pick Second Point or point number: 32
Pick End Point or point number: 33
Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: Press ENTER

In the previous exercise you started at point 27, went to the PC at

point 28 and inserted a 3-point arc through points 29 and 30. You
proceeded tangent to point 31, which was another PC, then completed
a 3-point arc through points 32 and 33, and ended.
Now, connect up the basketball court area. Select the 2D Polyline
command under Draw, or press ENTER to repeat the previous command.

Pick point or point numbers: 27

Undo/Arc/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: 44
Undo/Arc/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: 43-39 (you can
enter “ backwards” ranges)
Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: A
Second point/Radius point/radius Length/<Endpoint or numbers>: S
Pick Second Point or point number: 38

Chapter 2 Tutorials
44
Pick End Point or point number: 37
Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: 36
Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: A
Second point/Radius point/radius Length/<Endpoint or numbers: S
Pick Second Point or point number: 35
Pick End Point or point number: 34
Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: Press
ENTER

Shown below is your drawing to this point.

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

45
 16 Next you will make a building footprint. Points 18 and 19 are two shot
corners of a building. Assume that the surveyors taped the main house,
going clockwise from point 18, as follows: 10’L, 20’R, 40’L, 20’R, 20’L,
83’L, 60’L, 23’L, 10’R.
You can easily enter these “ jogs” in the building using the Extend by
Distance command. If you are zoomed in on the driveway, use
View ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom Out, then View ➤ Pan to focus on the building
north of the driveway.
Now use the 2D Polyline command on the Draw menu to draw a line
from 18 to 19.

Pick point or point numbers: 18

Undo/Arc/Length/<Pick point of point numbers>: 19, or press ENTER
to end
Select the By Distance option from the Edit menu, Extend command.
Pick line or pline to extend: Pick the building line closer to point 18
This makes the arrow point toward 18 rather than 19. Now you can go
clockwise:
Enter or pick distance to Draw: (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): L10
(lower case l and r work also)
Enter or pick distance to Draw: (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): R20
Enter or pick distance to Draw: (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): L40
Enter or pick distance to Draw: (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): R20
Enter or pick distance to Draw: (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): L20
Enter or pick distance to Draw: (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): L83
Enter or pick distance to Draw: (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): L60
Enter or pick distance to Draw: (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): L23
Enter or pick distance to Draw: (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): R10
Enter or pick distance to Draw: (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help):
Press ENTER to end

17 Next, you will complete the linework for the sewer line and the electric
utility line. Use the View ➤ Zoom ➤ Extents command so you can see
all your points.
The sewer line runs from points 52 to 53 to 54. Select the 2D Polyline
command from the Draw menu.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
46
To create the sewer line do the following:

Pick point or point numbers: 52– 54

Press ENTER, to end.

You will next annotate the sewer polyline using the Change Polyline
Linetype command, but first you must set the default spacing for the
annotation. Select the Defaults command on the Annotate menu.
The following dialog box appears.

Change the Line Type Spacing to 1.5. This will label “ S” on the sewer
line every 1.5" at the current scale (1" = 100').
To annotate the sewer line with an S, select the Line Types command
on the Annotate menu, then choose Change Polyline Linetype. Click
Next twice, and select the sewer polyline that runs next to the road.
The polyline will be annotated.
Next, create the electric utility line, which runs from point 3 to point 4
to point 17. Select the 2D Polyline command on the Draw menu.

Pick point or point numbers: 3

Undo/Arc/Length/<Pick point of point numbers>: 4

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

47
 Undo/Arc/Length/<Pick point of point numbers>: 17
Undo/Arc/Length/<Pick point of point numbers>: Press ENTER to end

No points were taken beyond point 17 due to obstructions from the

various setups in the field. So you must extend the polyline from point
17 to beyond the property. Under the Edit menu, choose Extend, then
By Distance. Pick on the electric utility polyline near point 17. Then
pick beyond the property. Press ENTER to end.
Before you annotate the electric utility line, you must offset it 25’on
both sides for a 50’ total right-of-way. Select the Offset command
under the Draw menu. Enter the offset distance of 25. Pick the electric
utility polyline and then pick to one side for the first offset. Repeat for
the other side, by first picking the electric utility polyline, then picking
the other side for the offset. Press ENTER to end.
Now annotate the central electric line with an E by selecting the Line
Types command on the Annotate menu, then choose Change Polyline
Linetype. Choose the Electric linetype which appears on the first page
of linetypes. Select the electric utility polyline to annotate it.
18 Next, make the Property lines bold. Under the Edit menu, select
Polyline Utilities, and then select Change Polyline Width.

New Width <1.0>: 1.5

Select objects: Pick the property polylines
Pick once for the fence line portion and once for the remainder.
Select objects: Press ENTER to end

19 To add color and improve layer management, make a layer for your
road and driveway. Select the Layer Control command on the View
menu.
Click New in the upper right corner, and enter the name Road for the
new layer. Choose the color cyan by clicking the color square to the
right of the layer name.
On the View menu, select the Change Layer command.
Select entities to be changed.

Select objects: pick all driveway and road entities

Pick entity with new layer or press ENTER to type name: Press ENTER

Chapter 2 Tutorials
48
This brings up the dialog box shown below. Select Road, and click OK.

Your linework is now complete and is shown below:

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

49
 20 You will add symbols for trees, property corners, manholes, and a
light pole.
Start with the trees. Points 11, 12, and 20 are oak trees of different
sizes, and point 14 is a pine tree. Use symbol 61 for the deciduous oak
trees and symbol 53 for the pine tree. On the Tools menu, select the
Insert Symbols command. Use the down arrow key at the right to scroll
forward to the tree symbols, which are several pages deep. Choose
symbol SPT61.
You can also choose Trees under the Symbol category field in the Select
Symbol dialog box.

Layer for symbols <PNTS>: TREES

This creates a Trees layer if one does not exist.
Symbol Size <8.0>: 18
A symbol size equal to the diameter of the tree is often effective.

NOTE If you were prompted, “Options/Select entities/Pick pt or pt

number/<Enter North(y)>: ……. ”,then you must enter P to convert to the
Pick point or point numbers default condition. Otherwise, you will be
expected to enter points by northing and easting.

Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: 11

Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: 20
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>:
Press ENTER

Place symbol 61 on the larger point 12 at size 24. Press ENTER to repeat
the last command or select the Insert Symbols command from the
Tools menu. Select symbol 61.
Layer for symbols <TREES>: Press ENTER
Symbol Size <8.0>: 24
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: 12
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>:
Press ENTER

Place symbol 53 on the larger point 14 at size 8. Press ENTER to repeat

the last command or select the Insert Symbols command from the
Tools menu. Select symbol 53.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
50
Layer for symbols <TREES>: Press ENTER
Symbol Size <8.0>: Press ENTER
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: 14
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>:
Press ENTER

Place symbol 5 (representing an iron pin) on points 8-10 and point 15.
Repeat Insert Symbols. Press ENTER to repeat the last command or select
the Insert Symbols command from the Tools menu. Select symbol 5
(first page).

Layer for symbols <TREES>: Final

Symbol Size <8.0>: Press ENTER
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>:
8– 10,15
This puts symbols on points 8 through 10 as well as point 15.
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>:
Press ENTER
Place a concrete monument (symbol 13) on point 1.
Press ENTER to repeat the last command or select the Insert Symbols
command from the Tools menu. Select symbol 13.
Layer for symbols <FINAL>: Press ENTER
Symbol Size <8.0>: Press ENTER
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>: 13
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point or point numbers>:
Press ENTER

Place a manhole (symbol 34) on the vertices (endpoints) of the sewer

line, at points 52 through 54. You could use the above method, but
you can also use S for Select entities and place the symbol
automatically at the vertices of the selected entity.
Select the Insert Symbols command from the Tools menu. Select
symbol 34.

Layer for symbols <FINAL>: Press ENTER

Symbol Size <8.0>: Press ENTER
Options/Select entities/Enter Coords/<Pick point of point numbers>: S

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

51
 The following dialog box appears. Click OK.

Rotation angle <0.0>: Press ENTER

Select arcs, faces, points, text, lines and polylines.
Select objects: pick the sewer polyline
The symbols are inserted at the three polyline endpoints.

21 You can reduce clutter by selecting the Freeze Layer command under
the View menu, and picking a point number. The points freeze, leaving
only linework and symbols. To bring the points back, use the Thaw
Layer command under the View menu. The Freeze Layer and Thaw
Layer commands go together, just like the Isolate and Restore Layers
commands.
22 Next, you will reduce the size of your building dimensions. You can set
the building dimension text size for the current work session using the
Survey Text Defaults option of the Survey Text command on the
Annotate menu. However, you can set the text size permanently using
the Configure command on the Settings menu, select the Configure
command, then select COGO-Design.
The following dialog box appears:

Chapter 2 Tutorials
52
Choose Survey Text Defaults. The following dialog box appears.

Change the Text Size Scaler to 0.06, and select Drop Trailing Zeros.
The Drop Trailing Zeros option will label 17.0’ as 17’. To save more
space, you could blank the Characters to Append box. Enter the name
of a new layer for the building text called BTXT so that building
dimensions can be frozen to reduce the clutter even more. It is
generally a good strategy to use layers for selective freezing and
thawing.
Click OK on the above dialog box, then click Exit until you return to
the command prompt. On the Annotate menu, choose the Survey Text
command, Building Dimensions option. Click on the middle of the
bottom segment of the building and drag to the right and slightly
above the line.

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

53
 The resulting label is shown below.

If you had dragged the cursor to the left rather than to the right, with
the same near-parallel angle to the line, the 83’ would be drawn below
the building rather than above.
Another example is shown below. Select Annotate ➤ Survey
Text ➤ Building Dimensions and click on the left-most segment of the
building, then click roughly perpendicular to the left.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
54
This creates a perpendicular, rather than parallel, label as shown below.

Label the building and the shed as shown below. Only two sides of
the shed must be labeled. The sides of the shed were not measured in
even feet, but the decimal place does not appear in the labels because
you selected the Drop Trailing Zeros option when you set your Survey
Text Defaults.

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

55
 If you choose the wrong direction while you are labeling, you can exit
the command, or you can erase the incorrect dimension by typing E
(for erase) at the command line, or you can enter U (for undo) to back
out your last work. Once the labels are in place, you can type M (for
the Move command), and move the text to the desired position.
23 Next, you will label the offset dimension from property lines to two
building corners, the SE corner as offset from the south property line,
and the SW corner as offset from the west property line. Because of the
options you set in the Survey Text Defaults dialog box above, Offset
Dimensions will be created on layer DTXT, and they will be horizontal,
with arrowheads.
On the Annotate menu select Survey Text, Offset Dimensions option.

[end on] Pick Bldg/Object Corner: pick on the SE building corner.

[perp] Pick Line To Offset From: pick on the S property line (before
the arc)

The setback is labeled 43.5 ft. Why “ ft” and not “ ' ” for distance? If
you review the Survey Text Defaults dialog box again, you will see that
you set the Characters to Append option to “ ft” .
On the Annotate menu, select Survey Text ➤ Survey Text Defaults.
Under Offset Dimension Text, change the characters to Append to an
apostrophe, “ ' ” . Also, change the Text Alignment to Parallel instead of
Horizontal. Select Annotate ➤ Survey Text ➤ Offset Dimensions.

[end on] Pick Bldg/Object Corner: pick on the SW building corner

[perp] Pick Line To Offset From: pick on the W property line

Avoid the electric right-of-way line.

Use the Move command to move the 20' text label to the right, so that
it is not overwritten by the offset dimension.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
56
The result is shown below:

Notice the display, within the above prompts, of the [end on] and
[perp] snaps. When Autodesk Field Survey sets a snap for temporary
use, it displays the snap within the brackets as shown. A building
corner is always an endpoint, so the end snap always applies to the
first pick. The offset is the perpendicular distance to the property lines,
so the [perp] snap always applies to the second pick. The per, or
perpendicular, snap applies to offsets from arcs as well. In the case of
arcs, the per snap finds the shortest, radial distance to the arc.
When you enter a snap at the keyboard in response to a “ Pick object”
request, type only the first three letters of the snap, such as per or end.
You could use the Offset Dimension command to label the Electric
utility right-of-way distance of 50' total, by entering nea (for nearest
snap) for the first pick, then entering the default per snap for the
second pick on the other side of the right-of-way.

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

57
 24 Next, you will add adjoiner ownership text to the property lines. Select
the Survey Text Defaults command under the Annotate menu and set
the Adjoiner Text option to C (for centered). Then select the Adjoiner
Text option on the Annotate Survey Text command.

Pick Line Or Polyline: pick the west property line

Pick Starting Point: pick a centering point west of the property for
the adjoiner text
Text: Brian W. and Mary T. Jones
Text: D.B. 101, P. 37
Text: Press ENTER

This produces parallel, center-justified text on the west side of the

property. Repeat the command for the north side. Press ENTER to repeat
the Adjoiner Text command or select it from the menus.

Pick Line Or Polyline: pick the north property line

Pick Starting Point: pick a centering point north of the north
property line
Text: Stan W. Bosworth
Text: D.B. 94, P. 272
Text: Press ENTER

Chapter 2 Tutorials
58
 The results are shown below:

25 Next, you will add bearing annotation. Select the Annotate menu,
choose Angle/Distance, select the BearingDistance_ option to place
Bearing and Distance above the line.

Define bearing by, Points/<select line or polyline>: pick a line

Pick the northern property line to the east, or right side. The bearing
direction will be labeled towards the picked end, which is northeast.
Define bearing by, Points/<select line or polyline>: pick a line
Pick the eastern property line closest to the southern endpoint of
the line.
To label the western property line on the lower (western) side of the
line, select the _BearingDistance option of the Angle/Distance
command.
Define bearing by, Points/<select line or polyline>: pick a line
Pick the western property line on the northern portion of the line.

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

59
 To label the southern line segment with a leader, on the Annotate
menu, select the Annotate w/Leader command, Brg-Dist w/Leader
option.
Define bearing by, Points/<select line or polyline>: pick a line
Pick on the southwest side of the south property line segment.
Pick point to start leader: pick a point for the arrowhead
Label Position: pick a point
Pick a point off to the right for the left-justified bearing and distance.
Define bearing by, Points/<select line or polyline>: Press ENTER to end

26 Next, you will want to annotate the arc in the drawing. The label will
consist of four entries: arc length, radius, chord bearing, and chord
distance.
Select the Annotate Arc command on the Annotate menu and
choose the Stack Label Arc option. The Stack Label Arc Settings
dialog box appears.

Change the label boxes as shown for Arc Length, Radius, Chord Angle,
and Chord Length. Set the sequence column to 1, 2, 3, and 4 as shown.
These changes apply only to this work session. Use the
Configure ➤ COGO ➤ Design ➤ Stack Label Arc command to set these
options permanently.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
60
 When you are done with the dialog box, click OK.

Define arc by, Points/<select arc or polyline>: pick the arc

Pick point for labels: pick a point to the right to place the label
As the cursor moves, the text “ ghosts” , allowing you to make the best
possible placement decision.
Pick point to start leader at ([Enter] for none): pick a point on or near
the arc for the arrowhead
Define arc by, Points/<select arc or polyline>: Press ENTER to end

Sometimes Autodesk Field Survey displays an arc as a series of chords.

Type Regen at the command prompt to “ regenerate” the arc. Even if
an arc shows up on the screen as a group of jagged chords, it will plot
as a smooth arc to a printer or plotter.
27 Next, you will label the trees, the shed, and the building using a special
leader for a hand-drafted appearance. Under the Annotate menu, select
the Special Leader command.

Arrow location: pick near the southern most corner of the shed
Text location: pick slightly down and to the right
Text: Shed
Text: Press ENTER to end

Repeat the process for all the special leader text items shown in the
drawing below. In the case of the 18" Oak Trees, create just one leader
with text, and on the second oak tree, create only the leader, and press
ENTER when asked for Text. For best appearance, enter 18"Oak and
24"Oak, with no spaces between the characters.

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

61
 Your drawing should be similar to this one:

28 You can add a North Arrow and Bar Scale by selecting these options
under the Annotate menu. When you place the North Arrow, pick an
insertion point, then follow the prompting. You place the Bar Scale with
a single pick. Both the North Arrow and the Bar Scale can be moved to
desired locations with the Move command on the Edit menu.
29 Next, you will insert a title block.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
62
Select the Title Block command from the Settings menu.

Choose paper size A1 (portrait view, 8-1/2 by 11). Fill out the dialog
box as shown above. Click OK.

Enter or Pick lower left corner for border: 5100,4000

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

63
 Your drawing should resemble the one shown below.

30 Next, you will add a legend. On the Annotate menu, select the Draw
Legend command. Choose New, then Save the default legend name.
When the dialog box shown below appears, select Add from Drawing
and then select one of the sewer manholes, one of the iron pins, the
concrete monument, one oak tree, and the pine tree. Make one pick
for each symbol you want to appear in the legend.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
64
If you want to change the order of the items in the list, use the Move
Up and Move Down options, after first selecting and highlighting the
item to be moved. After the list is ordered correctly, highlight one item
on the list and click the Edit button to edit the symbol definition.
Below is the symbol definition for SPT13.

Edit each symbol definition individually, typing the following

descriptions in the description box:

SPT5 = Iron Pin

SPT34 = Manhole
SPT13 = Concrete Monument
SPT 61 = Oak Tree
SPT53 = Pine Tree

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

65
 After you have entered the descriptions for the symbols, choose the
Add option from the Legend Definitions dialog box, and add the Fence
Line type to the list, as shown below:

Save the completed legend, which is shown below.

Select the Draw option from the Legend Definitions dialog box. Set the
defaults as shown below.

Pick a point for the legend, roughly 5260,4380.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
66
You may need to move the fence line portion of the legend to fit in the
tight space. You also may need to move the previously drawn bar scale.
Use the Move command.
The following shows the drawing to this point:

If you wish to reset the spacing of the sewer and electric utility
annotation, use the LTSCALE box in the Drawing Set-up dialog box
under the Settings menu to set it. (The setting is 50, in this example).

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

67
 31 Next, you will use Dtext to label the road and Mtext to create a
certification block.
Zoom in on the area shown below. At the command line, type Dtext.
Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: R (for right-justified)
End Point: pick a point as shown below just to the left of the leader
annotation
Height <8.00>: 10
Rotation angle <N 72d20’24" E>: pick a point as shown below by the
location of the crosshair

Text: Meadow Lane

Text: Press ENTER to end

This right-justifies the label Meadow Lane, ending it before it contacts

the leader line.
Now you will enter a certification using Mtext. The Mtext command
stretches an entire block of text. Autodesk Field Survey breaks up the
lines in the block of text, depending on how you edit and adjust the
Mtext window.
First, use the View ➤ Zoom ➤ Extents command to view the entire
drawing. Then, at the command line, type in Mtext.

Specify first corner: 5660,4980

Specify opposite corner: 5860,4820

Chapter 2 Tutorials
68
 You now see a dialog box that displays all the text heights that you’ve
used in the drawing. Choose the text height of 8.
Then type the following into the dialog box:

The command adds carriage returns to the text when it runs out of
space in the Mtext window. Click OK at the upper right to place this
text into the drawing.
After the Mtext is plotted, you can click on the text to activate the
grips. All four corners highlight as grips. Pick on a grip, and then you
can expand or change the shape of the Mtext rectangle. When you do
this, the text adjusts automatically, adding more lines and carriage
returns, or condensing many lines into fewer, but longer, lines of text.
You can also move the entire text block to a new location.
32 Next, you will define a text style, then add text using that style.

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

69
 On the Settings menu, select the Text Style command.

Create a Bold Style consisting of the Arial Black font tilted at 10 degree
oblique angle, by selecting the settings show above. Then click Apply
and Close.
Run the Dtext command by typing Dtext at the command line, and
place text at the top of the drawing as follows.

Justify/Style/<Start point>: pick a point near the northwest corner

of the drawing
Height <10.00>: 20
Rotation Angle <N 53d46’56" E>: E (for due East)
Text: William T. Farmer
Text: Press ENTER to end

You can type as much as you like using this new Bold style built
around the Arial Black font.
A favorite font is Romans. You can use the Romans font at a 10 degree
oblique angle to create a style that resembles the old “ Leroy” lettering.
The Romand font is similar to the Romans, but with a double strike.
The Romant font is bold and ornate. These fonts are not proportional,
which means that if you print out a table of coordinates using one of
these fonts, with 5 characters to the left of the decimal and 4 to the
right, the columns would not line up. That’s because with
nonproportional fonts, the character 1 takes up less space than the
character 8. Proportional fonts such as Monotxt will cause such tables
to line up perfectly, but proportional fonts typically aren’t as attractive.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
70
 You can use the Change Text Fonts command to select a table of data
with non-proportional fonts, then convert the font to Monotxt to
make the text in the table line up perfectly.
33 Next, you will create an area label for the drawing. Select the Area
Label Defaults command from the Area menu and change the
Precision for Other Area Labels to four decimal places. Select the Areas
by Lines & Arcs command under the Area menu. When prompted to
select objects, pick the two polylines that, taken together, completely
enclose the property.
Pick a centering point for the area label under the William T. Farmer
title at the top of the drawing.
34 Next, bring the points back and draw a contour map. To draw the
points, use the Thaw Layer command under the View menu. If you did
not complete this lesson in one sitting, then Autodesk Field Survey
won’t “ remember” what layer to thaw. In that case, select the Layer
Control command from the View menu, and thaw the PNTS layer by
turning the snowflake to a sun symbol.
Select the Triangulate & Contour command from the Surface menu.

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

71
 Change the contour interval to 1, and click on Use Inclusion/Exclusion
Areas.
Press OK, and then answer as follows:

Select the Inclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none.

Select objects: Press ENTER
We have no “ inclusion” perimeter.
Select the Exclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none.
Select objects: select the building and the shed
Since the building and shed are closed polygons acting as exclusion
perimeters, the contours will not pass through them when they are
created.
Select the points and barrier lines to Triangulate: select a window
around the points by picking from the lower left to the upper right

The contour map is created. Freeze the points again by using

View ➤ Freeze Layer and picking one of the points.
35 Next, label the contours. Select the Contour Elevation Label command
from the Surface menu. Select OK to accept the default settings in the
dialog box shown here:

Now pick two points that cross through one or more contours. The
contours are automatically labeled using the slanted Bold style that
you set up earlier. You can use the Change Text Font command under
the Text command in the Edit menu to change the font to Romans, or
to another font.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
72
The Completed Plat is shown below:

If you have not already saved your drawing, now is a good time to do
it. Use the Save command on the File menu.

Lesson 2: Making a Plat

73
 Lesson 3: Field to Finish—Faster Survey Work
In this lesson, you will make a plat using field to finish techniques
through the Drawing Wizard.

1 Launch Autodesk Field Survey, or, if you are already in the program,
select the File menu, and select New to start a new drawing. Save
your existing drawing first, if you like. If you are asked to use a
template, choose surv.dwt. The first of several Drawing Wizard
dialog boxes appears.
If the Drawing Wizard does not appear, select the Settings command
from the Configure menu. Under General Settings, click Use Drawing
Wizard in the upper left of the dialog box. Then open a new drawing.

To use the Drawing Wizard, enter a new Drawing Name in the

upper portion of the dialog box. Since this is Lesson 3, call the new
drawing Plat3.
Verify that the other settings match the settings shown.
Click Next to display the Drawing Wizard dialog box.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
74
This Drawing Wizard dialog box is used to specify the source of the
data. Our source is the same file as in Lesson 2, Plat.txt. This is an
ASCII file, so click on the option Import Points From Text/ASCII File.
Set the other options as shown and click Next.
In the next dialog box, Select Text/ASCII Files. Choose plat.txt. The
format of the points appears in the Preview Window for verification as
shown below. Click OK.

The points are then copied into the file Plat3.crd. If you repeat this
exercise, and again use the file name Plat3.crd, you will be asked:

[O]verwrite w/new coordinates, overwrite [A]ll, or use number <55>: A

(for all)

In either case, when you correctly complete the process, the following
dialog box appears:

Lesson 3: Field to Finish—Faster Survey Work

75
 Then another Drawing Wizard dialog box appears:

Choose the Field to Finish option and click Next. A dialog box comes
up with a warning that some codes have two descriptions.

The command is asking whether these codes are to be treated as two

separate descriptions or as one description that has a space in it.
Choose the default (Split all multiple codes), to tell the command
that codes with spaces are really two separate descriptions.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
76
The main Field to Finish dialog box appears. Click Draw Points/Lines.

This displays a dialog box that allows you to specify the range of points
to draw.

You want to draw all points 1 through 54. Make sure the options are
set as shown above, and click OK.

Lesson 3: Field to Finish—Faster Survey Work

77
 The Field to Finish dialog box reappears after the points are drawn.
Click Exit, and the command will Zoom Extents and show the points,
as well as the linework and point symbols. Field to Finish saves you
many manual steps. Your plat is shown below:

Chapter 2 Tutorials
78
2 To understand how the above drawing was created, select Field to
Finish from the Tools menu.

The display window shows point codes, such as IP for iron pin and FL
for fence line, that are converted to special symbols and linetypes by
Field to Finish. For an example of how the codes are used, look at the
sewer line running from point 52 to 53 to 54 (the southernmost point),
which is based on a field code of MH. Select MH (for Manhole) as
shown above and click Edit.

Lesson 3: Field to Finish— Faster Survey Work

79
 The following dialog box is displayed.

MH has several attributes that are used by the Field to Finish command
based on the settings shown above. Field to Finish draws a manhole
using the symbol SPT34. It draws a sewer line with the letter S for
sewer. It places the manhole on layer SEWER, and plots a text
description of “ MANHOLE” underneath the symbol. (Descriptions can
be upper or lower case.) When you are done looking at the MH code
definition, click OK.
Other codes have fewer attributes. LP is set only to draw a symbol and
text (Light Pole), but not to draw linework. FL, for fence line, is set to
draw linework but not corner symbols or points descriptions. A code’s
attributes depend on the entries in Set Linetype, Set Symbol,
Description, and Entity Type options.
The “ survey.fld” Field to Finish Table is provided with the Autodesk
Field Survey software. This table shows one possible system, but with
far too many codes for a field crew to remember. You can make your
own table by choosing the

Chapter 2 Tutorials
80
 Select Code Table option from the Field to Finish dialog box, then
choose the Select button. Select New from the New or Existing Code
Table dialog box to create a new code table (.fld file).
3 Use the Layer ID command to verify the layers of the various plotted
entities. Select the Layer ID command under the Inquiry menu. Pick on
the Fence Line, the Road, and the Utility line, and notice the different
layers (FENCE, EOP, UTILITY). You should study the layers in a drawing
before deciding what to freeze and thaw. To reduce clutter on the
screen, select the Layer Control command from the View menu.

Freeze the PNTS layer, the SPOT layer, and the PNTELEV layer by
turning the sun into a snowflake.

Lesson 3: Field to Finish— Faster Survey Work

81
 4 Now you will do some drawing cleanup. Note that a single property
line is drawn from point 8 to 9 to 10 and to 15. The chord from point
10 to 15 should be an arc. You will erase the segment from 9 to 10 and
from 10 to 15, so you can re-draw it, establish the tangent, then draw
the arc and finish back at point 1. To eliminate part of a polyline,
select the Edit menu, then select the Polyline Utilities command and
click Remove Polyline Segment.

Break polyline at removal or keep continuous [<Break>/Continuous]:

Press ENTER (for Break)
Select polyline segment to remove: pick the segment from 9 to 10,
then the segment from 10 to 15, then press ENTER to end
To draw the correct polyline, use the 2D Polyline command under the
Draw menu. If you prefer to type in the command, enter 2dp, which
stands for 2D Polyline.
Pick point or point numbers: 9
Undo/Arc/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: 10
Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: a
Second point/Radius point/radius Length/<Endpoint or numbers>: 15
Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: 1
Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: Press
ENTER

Now erase the plotted traverse line that makes a “V” near the left side
of the drawing. Then use the 4-Sided Building command you learned
in Lesson 2 to create the other 2 sides of the shed located in the upper
middle of the screen, near point 17.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
82
 The end result, to this point, is shown below:

5 Much of the text in the above drawing, such as tree sizes and types, the
manhole text, and the light pole text can be used in the final drawing.
But some of the text, such as the text plotted for iron pins and poles,
can be fully described in the Legend without the redundancy of
plotting to the screen. If you use the Erase command to remove the
iron pin and pole text, the entire point will be erased because the
attributes are grouped with the point. Instead, use the Erase Point
Attributes command under the Points menu.
Select Point No., Elev, or Desc to Erase (Enter to End): Pick the three
poles and the four iron pins

Lesson 3: Field to Finish— Faster Survey Work

83
 6 Next, you will use Extend by Distance command to Create a Building.
The building will be less complex than the building you created in
Lesson 2, but you will learn the “ t” and “ c” options , in addition to “ l”
for left and “ r” for right. Under Edit, choose the Extend command.
Select the By Distance option. Pick the western side of the small line
segment west of the 12” pine and north of the driveway. Follow the
prompts:

Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): T50

“ T” or “ t” means “ total” distance or “ to” the distance—so extend “ to”
50 feet total.
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): L62.5
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): L35
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): L30
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): R15
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): C (to
close)
Enter or pick distance to Draw (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): Press
ENTER

The Extend by Distance “ T” option for total distance solves the

dilemma of making a line of unknown length extend to an exact
known length.
7 Use the Twist Screen command to position the plat on the sheet. Not
every drawing can be plotted “ due North.” Sometimes North needs to
be rotated so that property lines and important features run nearly left-
to-right or top-to-bottom on the plotted page, for a better fit. In this
drawing, you want the western line from point 8 to point 9 to run left-
to-right on a sheet that will be plotted in landscape style (longer left-
to-right than top-to-bottom). Select Twist Screen, from the View menu,
then select Line.

Pick a line or pline to make horizontal: Pick the western line from
point 8 to point 9 closer to point 9

Chapter 2 Tutorials
84
 Now the drawing appears as shown below:

Notice that the north indicator (referred to as the USCICON), at the

lower left, displays the rotation.
8 Now Select Twist Point Attributes, under the Points menu, to twist the
point descriptions and point numbers back to a left-to-right rotation.

Twist by [<Twist screen>/Azimuth/Entity segment/Follow polyline]?

Select Field Survey Point Attributes & Symbols to Rotate.
Select objects: All

The points then twist back orthogonal to the screen, reading once
again left-to-right.
The remaining descriptions associated with the points can be used in
the final drawing, but they should be moved slightly for a better
appearance. For example, the tree descriptions would look better if

Lesson 3: Field to Finish— Faster Survey Work

85
 they weren’t inside the tree canopies. Under the Points menu, select
Move Point Attributes. The steps of the command are: pick text, pick
the new text position, press ENTER, press ENTER. Then the command
repeats. Notice how the text “ ghosts” as it moves, which helps you
place it in the best position. Try to duplicate this result:

9 Because of the earlier Twist Screen command, the “ E’s” in the electric
utility polyline are upside down. Choose the Text command from the
Edit menu and select the from Flip Text option. Select the text to flip.

Select objects: pick the upside down E’s

10 To label the dimensions of the building and the sheds automatically,

you must first activate the Auto Label Closed Polyline Exterior
function. To make this a permanent setting, under the Settings menu,
select Configure, Cogo-Design, Survey Text Defaults, and change the
dialog box as shown below:

Click OK. Select Building Dimensions from the Annotate menu, under
the Survey Text command. Pick the house and the shed. If the text

Chapter 2 Tutorials
86
 overwrites the inside corner of the house, use the Move command
(under the Edit menu, or type M for Move at the command prompt)
and move the 30’ dimension beneath the line.
11 To automatically annotate bearings and distance, as well as arcs, select
the Auto Annotate command from the Annotate menu. When the
dialog box appears, select Right_Left in the lower right corner so the
bearings will always be to the outside. Then pick the 3 polylines that
fully define the perimeter: the fence line, the polyline containing the
arc, and the lower polyline, which is still the western polyline
although you have twisted the screen so it runs along the lower
portion of the drawing. Use the Move command to move the bearing
and distance labels to avoid overwriting other features.
When you move the lower distance label, 404.90’ to the left, you want
to move perfectly level to the screen, since this was the line you used
to Twist the screen, and it runs perfectly left-to-right. To do this, press
the function key F8 to activate Ortho. Then pick 404.90’ and move it
to the left, picking its final position. Repeat this for the S 17° 05'38" E
bearing. After you move these items, press F8 again to turn off Ortho.
Sometimes you will load a drawing from another client or source, and
the Ortho setting has been left on. This may initially confuse you
during Move commands. Press F8 to deactivate Ortho. Notice that F8
works even with Twist Screen active.
Auto Annotate typically centers the arc annotation above and below
the arc, which causes the arc data to overwrite the surveyed edge-of-
pavement (EOP) polyline. You want to erase both the arc annotations,
and use the Label Arc option of the Annotate Arc command to force
both the arc length and radius to be drawn beneath the arc.
12 At the command line, enter E for Erase.

Lesson 3: Field to Finish— Faster Survey Work

87
 At the prompt to select objects, enter WP, then pick as shown below:

Press ENTER when selection set is complete.

There is no close option for window polygon and crossing polygon
selections.
Under the Annotate menu, select the Annotate Arc command, then
the Label Arc option. Then select the arcs from the screen.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
88
The Label Arc Settings dialog box appears:

You want to locate the arc text inside the arc, on positions 1 and 2.
Position 1 is just under the arc, 2 is under it. To place arc text both
above and below the arc, then run the command twice.
Fill out the dialog box as shown above and click OK.
The new arc text will overwrite the 8" Pine, so use the command Move
Point Attributes in the Points menu and relocate the 8" Pine.

Lesson 3: Field to Finish—Faster Survey Work

89
 With the annotations placed in new positions, your drawing should be
similar to the one shown below.
Move your annotations to match this drawing.

13 To label the area of the lot, first select the Area Label Defaults command
from the Annotate menu. Set the square units (s.f.) to the nearest whole
unit (no decimals) and the other area labels to 2 decimal places. Then,
click OK to exit the dialog box. Select the Area by Lines & Arcs
command from the Area menu and pick the three polylines that define
the property perimeter. Locate the text to the left of the 12" Pine.
14 Before completing the final formatting of your drawing, you need to
do some minor cleanup using procedures you learned in Lesson 2.
You don’t want point 16, the PL point, to show in the final drawing.
Use the Layer ID command under the Inquiry menu to verify the layer
of point 16, which should be MISC. Freeze MISC using the Freeze Layer
command on the View menu and pick point 16. Freeze the point
numbers using the Layer Control command on the View menu, and
freeze the layer PNTNO.
15 To insert an A1, 8-1/2 x 11 title block with the orientation landscape
(not portrait), select the Title Block command from the Settings menu.

Chapter 2 Tutorials
90
 Fill out the dialog box as shown below:

Make any text changes that you like, then click OK. For the insertion
point, use 4830,5040 entered at the keyboard (x=4830, y=5040). If you
prefer, you can use the Move command and pick the title block and
two perimeters and move them. Never move the drawing because you
will change coordinates if you do. Move the drawing only if changing
the coordinate location does not matter.
16 Select the Draw Legend command under the Annotate menu, and
specify the Plat.lgd file you saved in Lesson 2. Pick a point in the
available space to the lower left of the plat. If you did not save a legend
in Lesson 2 (or you skipped Lesson 2), follow the steps in that lesson.
Use the Scale Point Attributes command under the Points menu and
scale up the oak tree symbol in the Legend by a factor of 1.5.
Select the Survey Text command from the Annotate menu, then select,
Survey Text Defaults. Change the Offset Dimension Text alignment to
Horizontal. (It may have been set to Parallel in Lesson 2.) Select the
Offset Dimension command from the Annotate menu and pick the
lower right corner of the building, then the lowermost property line
(in the current twist screen position). This labels the offset dimension
horizontal to the current twist screen.
Pick the Draw North Arrow command under the Annotate menu and
pick an appropriate location. Note how the arrow draws due north,
respecting the twist screen.

Lesson 3: Field to Finish— Faster Survey Work

91
 Choose the Draw Barscale command under the Annotate menu and
pick a location near the lower left portion of the drawing.
Your drawing should now look like this:
17 Select the Hatch command from the Draw menu.
The Boundary Hatch dialog box appears.

Select the SOLID pattern from the pull-down list, then click
Select Objects.
Pick the house and the shed.
18 To offset the EOP Polyline, first try using the Offset command under
the Edit menu, and try offsetting the edge-of-pavement polyline that
runs roughly parallel to the sewer line. You will see an error message
because that object is a 3D Polyline created by the Field to Finish
command. To offset a 3D Polyline, you must use a command
specifically designed to offset 3D Polylines. Under the Edit menu,
select 3D Polyline Utilities, and slide over to Offset 3D Polyline.

Enter the offset method [<Interval>,Constant,Variable]: Press ENTER

Vertical/<Horizontal offset amount>: 30
Percent/Ratio/Vertical offset amount <0>: Press ENTER
Select a polyline to offset (Enter for none): pick the EOP polyline

Chapter 2 Tutorials
92
 Select side to offset: pick out and away from parcel, for the other
side of the road

19 Before you add a title to the drawing, create a text style for the title.
Choose Text Style in the Settings menu.

Click New and name the style Title. Choose the font named
romant.shx and then change the oblique angle to 10 degrees as shown.
Click Close.
To create the title, type Dtext at the command line.

Justify/Style/<Start point>: c
Center point: pick a point near the top right of the screen
Height <8.00>: 20
Rotation angle <E>: <Ortho on>
Text: Farmer Survey
Text: August 15, 2000
Text: Press ENTER

Select the Text Enlarge/Reduce option of the Text command under the
Edit menu. Pick the date you just entered, and scale it by 0.8.

Lesson 3: Field to Finish— Faster Survey Work

93
 20 Verify your drawing scale using the Drawing Setup command under
Settings. Your drawing should have a scale of 100 with a text size of
0.08. To shrink the text size to 0.06, the same size as the building
dimensions, label the house “ 2-Story” , “ Frame House” (two lines of
labeling), select the Leader with Text command under the Annotate
menu.

Arrow location: pick near the left side of the house

Text location: pick off to the left
Text: 2-Story
Text: Frame House
Text: Press ENTER

Pick anywhere on the leader. You see two grip squares (usually yellow),
one on the left side and one of the right side. Pick on the right grip
nearest the house. Move your cursor. Note how the arrow moves. Pick
again for the new location, and note how the arrowhead is properly
oriented.
21 Select the Triangulate & Contour command from the Surface menu.
The dialog box should be filled out as shown below:

Chapter 2 Tutorials
94
Click OK.
When you choose Specify Selection Options in the Triangulate and
Contour dialog box, the following dialog box is displayed.
Select the options shown.

Click OK.

Lesson 3: Field to Finish— Faster Survey Work

95
 A third dialog box appears that allows you to set options for labeling.

To label the ends of contours, with no interior labeling, click Label

Contour Ends and No Interior Labels.
Click OK.

Select the Inclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none.

Select objects: Press ENTER
Select the Exclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none.
Select objects: pick the house and the shed

Chapter 2 Tutorials
96
Select the points and barrier lines to Triangulate. Select a right-to-left
window of the property. A right-to-left selection behaves as a crossing,
which means that any object that is touched by the window or
included inside the window is selected. (A left-to-right selection is a
window selection, which means that only objects that are fully
enclosed by the window are selected.)

Select objects: Window

Other corner: pick a point
125 found
Select objects: Press ENTER to end
Pick the coordinate file that contains the points.
Reading points ... 200
Range of Point Numbers to use (A for All) <A>: Press ENTER
Wildcard match of point description <*>: Press ENTER
Pick the lower left elevation “502” annotation. The grips are displayed.
The first grip is used for stretching. Press ENTER to see the second grip,
and move. Press ENTER again to see the third grip.
** STRETCH **
<Stretch to point>/Base point/Copy/Undo/eXit: Press ENTER
Clicking the right button on your mouse is the equivalent to
pressing ENTER.
** MOVE **
<Move to point>/Base point/Copy/Undo/eXit: Press ENTER
** ROTATE **
<Rotation angle>/Base point/Copy/Undo/Reference/eXit: Move your
cursor to the desired rotation, which is roughly left to right, and
pick a point

Lesson 3: Field to Finish—Faster Survey Work

97
 Here is the final drawing:

Chapter 2 Tutorials
98
03-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 3:05 PM

File Commands
3
This chapter provides informaiton on using the In this chapter
commands from the File menu to organize, save, and ■ Project management
commands
plot your drawings.
■ Drawing management
commands
■ Plotting commands

99
 Project, Set Data Directory

Function
This command sets the data directory to use as the default directory for
creating data files such as coordinate (.crd) and profile (.pro) files.

1 The Select Data Directory dialog box shows the tree structure of the
existing directories on your computer with the current data directory
displayed.
■ To set the data directory, highlight the directory name and click OK.
■ To create a new data directory, highlight the parent directory and
pick the Create Directory button. The command will prompt you for
the new directory name.
■ The Remove Directory button allows you to delete empty
directories.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File, Project >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SETTMPDIR

Chapter 3 File Commands

100
Drawing Explorer

Function
The Drawing Explorer command presents a list of all data files
associated with a drawing. Data files, such as a coordinate (.crd) file,
are listed in the order that they were created to help you manage
drawing-related data.
The “ knowledge” of these files is contained in the .ini file that shares
the drawing name (for example, Estates.dwg and Estates.ini). If a
drawing was not created in Autodesk Field Survey or does not have a
companion .ini file, then Drawing Explorer will display “ No Files.” If
Configure, General Settings, Save Drawing INI Files is off, then
Drawing Explorer will display “ No Files.” Drawing Explorer will also
not list any data files when a drawing name starts with the seven-letter
word, “ Drawing.” A deleted or missing file will appear in Drawing
Explorer with a special red “ no entry” symbol.

Drawing Explorer
101
 1 In the Drawing Explorer dialog box, you can modify the data file list.
■ Add: This option allows you to add a file to the list.
■ Remove: This option allows you to remove a file from the list.
■ Up: This option allows you to move the position of the file up in
the list.
■ Down: This option allows you to move the position of the file
down in the list.
■ Change Directory: This options allows you to move the file to a
different directory.
■ Report: This option displays the Report Formatting Options for
formatting the report of the Drawing Explorer (see below).

2 In the Report Formatting Options dialog box, you can determine how
the report is displayed.

n Format: You must choose a format type for the report.

3 The items to be included in the report are listed in the right (Used)
display window. You choose the items by selecting them in the left
(Available) display window and clicking the Add button. This action
moves the item name the right display window. The opposite occurs

Chapter 3 File Commands

102
 with the Remove button. The sequence of the reported items can be
changed using the Move Up and Move Down buttons.
4 You must choose formatting options.
■ Columnar format: This option formats the report as columns.
■ Use commas in numbers: This option allows you to include
commas in numbers.
■ Sort field: This option sorts the contents of the selected items.
■ Auto-width: This option sets the width of the columns
automatically.
■ Fixed-width: This option allows you to designate the width of the
columns.
■ Ignore repeating fields: This option does not include repetitious
fields in the report.
■ Totals only: This option allows you to only report totals for the
items in the report.
■ Total: This option allows you to designate the type of total to be
reported.

5 Under Excel Export Options, you can choose options for exporting
data to Excel.
■ New: You can choose to export to a new Excel file.
■ Existing: This options allows you to append data to an existing
Excel file. You have the option of selecting the file with the Select
button. The selected file is displayed in the field.
■ Sheet: You must designate the sheet of the spreadsheet on which
your data will be located.
■ Start Row: You must designate a starting row for your data.
■ Col: You must designate a column for your data.
■ Include Totals: You can include totals in the exported report.
■ Include Text Lines: You can include text in the exported report.
n Export to Excel: This button executes the export.

6 Under Access Database Export Options, you can choose options for
exporting data to Access.
n Select: You must select the file to append.
n Table: You must designate a Table.
n Export to MDB: This button executes the export.

Drawing Explorer
103
 7 You can Display the report, or you can choose the Export to
Text/ASCII File option to write the data to an external ASCII file.
8 If you choose the Edit User Attributes button, the User-Defined
Attributes dialog box is displayed.

■ This dialog box allows you to edit, add, and remove attributes.
■ Under Totals Options you can determine totals are calculated for the
report.

If you choose the Attr. Options button, the Edit Attribute Options
dialog box is displayed.

■ You can rename attributes and modify their descriptions.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File, Project >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: DWGXPLORE

Chapter 3 File Commands

104
 Project Explorer

Function
This tool is used for management of a complete project. A project can
contain numerous drawings, and each drawing within that project can
contain numerous related files.
Think of the Project Explorer as the trunk of the hierarchical tree
structure that develops into a project. While you work within each
drawing, Autodesk Field Survey keeps track of the files that you create,
such as grid files and coordinate files. These are related to the drawing,
and you can use the Drawing Explorer to manage them.
When a project involves multiple drawings, use the Project Explorer to
tie them together.

1 When you initiate the Project Explorer, you are prompted to select an
existing Project File or create a new one. Project files end with the .prj
file extension.

Project Explorer
105
 2 In the Project Explore dialog box, the display window lists the files in
the project.
n Add: When you choose the Add button, you are prompted to select
a drawing file to add to the project. The selected drawing file is
added to the project tree along with any files related to the drawing.
n Remove: When any branch of the tree structure (except the top
root) is selected, it is removed. Keep in mind that removing any
node of a tree structure removes all nodes under it.
n Up/Down: When you select a branch of the tree structure that can
be moved, the Up and Down buttons become available. This allows
you to rearrange the items vertically.
■ Report: This option displays the Report Formatting Options for
formatting the report of the Drawing Explorer (see Drawing
Explorer).

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File, Project >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PRJXPLORE

New

Function
This command allows you to create a new drawing file.

Chapter 3 File Commands

106
 This command defines the settings for a new drawing. There are two
methods that you can use to create a new drawing. (The first option,
Open a Drawing, is not available from the NEW command. To open
an existing drawing, use the OPEN command.) Choose one of the
icons at the top of the dialog box.

1 Under Start from Scratch, you can start a new drawing file.
This command starts a new drawing using default settings defined in
either the surv.dwt or surviso.dwt template, depending on the
measurement system you’ve chosen. You cannot modify the surv.dwt
or surviso.dwt templates. To start a new drawing based on a
customized template, see Use a Template.
n English: This option starts a new drawing based on the Imperial
measurement system. The drawing is based on the surv.dwt
template, and the default drawing boundary (the drawing limits) is
12 × 9 inches.
n Metric: This option starts a new drawing based on the metric
measurement system. The drawing is based on the surviso.dwt
template, and the default drawing boundary (the drawing limits) is
429 × 297 millimeters.

2 Under Use a Template, you can start a new drawing based on a

customized template.
This command creates a new drawing using the settings defined in a
template drawing you select. Template drawings store all the settings
for a drawing and may also include predefined layers, dimension styles,
and views. Template drawings are distinguished from other drawing
files by the .dwt file extension. They are normally kept in the template
directory. Several template drawings are included with Autodesk Field
Survey. You can make additional template drawings by changing the
extensions of drawing file names to .dwt.

n Select a Template: This option lists all template files that

currently exist in the drawing template file location, which is
specified in the Options dialog box. Choose a file to use as a
starting point for your new drawing. A preview image of the
selected file is displayed to the right.
n Browse: This option displays the Select a Template File dialog box
(a standard file selection dialog box) where you can access template
files in other directions.

New
107
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: NEW

Open

Function
This command allows you to open an existing drawing file.
Autodesk Field Survey displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). Select a file and click Open.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: OPEN

Close

Function
This command allows you to close the current drawing.
Autodesk Field Survey closes the current drawing if there have been no
changes since the drawing was last saved. If you have modified the
drawing, the program prompts you to save or discard the changes.
You can close a file that has been opened in Read-only mode if you
have made no changes or if you are willing to discard changes. To save
changes to a read-only file, you must use the SAVEAS command.

NOTE The Close command is not available when you are running
Autodesk Field Survey in SDI (Single Document Interface) mode.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: CLOSE

Chapter 3 File Commands

108
Save

Function
If the drawing is named, Autodesk Field Survey saves the drawing
without requesting a file name. If the drawing is unnamed, the
program displays the Save Drawing As dialog box (see SAVEAS) and
saves the drawing with the file name you specify.
If the drawing is read-only, use the SAVEAS command to save the
changed file under a different name. This command allows you to save
the drawing under the current file name or a specified name

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SAVE or QSAVE

Save As

Function
This command allows you to save an unnamed drawing with a file
name or renames the current drawing.
Autodesk Field Survey displays the Save Drawing As standard file
selection dialog box. Enter a file name and type. You can select any of
the following file types:

■ Field Survey 2000 Drawing (*.dwg)

■ AutoCAD R14/LT 98/LT 97 Drawing (*.dwg)
■ AutoCAD R13/LT 95 Drawing (*.dwg)
■ Field Survey 2000 DXF ™ (*.dxf)
■ AutoCAD R14/LT 98/LT 97 DXF (*.dxf)
■ AutoCAD R13/LT 95 DXF (*.dxf)
■ AutoCAD R12/LT2 DXF (*.dxf)

Autodesk Field Survey saves the file under the specified file name. If
the drawing is already named, the program saves the drawing to the
new file name. If you save the file as a drawing template, the program
displays the Template Description dialog box, where you can provide a
description for the template and set the units of measurement.

Save
109
 Saving a drawing in Release 14/LT 98/LT 97 format is subject to the
following limitations:

■ Hyperlinks are converted to Release 14 attached URLs.

■ Database links and freestanding labels are converted to Release 14
links and displayable attributes.
■ Database attached labels are converted to MText and leader objects,
and their link information is not available. Attached labels are
restored if you open the drawing in AutoCAD 2000 or
AutoCAD 2000i.
■ Lineweight information is not available. Lineweights are restored if
you open the drawing in AutoCAD 2000 or AutoCAD 2000i.

Saving a drawing in Release 13/LT 95 format is subject to the following

limitations:

■ Lightweight polyline and hatch patterns are converted to Release 13

polylines and hatch patterns.
■ Raster objects are displayed as bounding boxes. Raster objects are
restored if the drawing is opened in AutoCAD 2000 or
AutoCAD 2000i.
■ Draw order information is not applied for display or print.
■ Xrefs that have been clipped with a boundary box are displayed in
full as attached xrefs because AutoCAD Release 13 does not support
xref clipping. Clipping is restored if the drawing is opened in
AutoCAD 2000 or AutoCAD 2000i.

Saving a drawing in Release 12/LT 2 DXF format is subject to the

following limitations:

■ Lightweight polylines and hatch patterns are converted to R12

polylines and hatch patterns.
■ All solids, bodies, regions, ellipses, leaders, multilines, rays,
tolerances, and xlines are converted to lines, arcs, and circles as
appropriate.
■ Groups, complex linetypes, OLE objects, and preview images are not
displayed.
■ Many objects are lost if you save a drawing as Release 12 and open it
later in AutoCAD 2000 or AutoCAD 2000i.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SAVEAS

Chapter 3 File Commands

110
Page Setup

Function
This command allows you to configure your drawing for plotting. The
Page Setup dialog box has the same options as the Plot dialog box. See
the PLOT command below for a detailed description of options.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PAGESETUP

Plot Preview

Function
This option displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted on
paper. To exit the print preview, right-click and choose Exit. This
command is the same as the Full Preview option under Plot.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PREVIEW

Plot

Function
This command allows you to plot a drawing to a plotting device or file.
Autodesk Field Survey displays the Plot dialog box. Choose OK to
begin plotting with the current settings and display the Plot Progress
dialog box.

Page Setup
111
 1 The Plot dialog box includes the tabs, Plot Device and Plot Settings,
and several options to customize the plot.
n Layout Name: This option displays the current layout name or
displays "Selected layouts" if multiple tabs are selected. If the Model
tab is current when you choose Plot, the Layout Name shows
"Model."
n Save Changes to Layout: This option saves the changes you make
in the Plot dialog box in the layout. This option is unavailable if
multiple layouts are selected.
■ Page Setup Name: This option displays a list of any named and
saved page setups. You can choose to base the current page setup on
a named page setup, or you can add a new named page setup by
choosing Add.
n Add: This option displays the User Defined Page Setups dialog box.
You can create, delete, or rename named page setups.

2 Under the Plot Device tab you can specify the plotter to use, a plot
style table, the layout or layouts to plot, and information about
plotting to a file.

Chapter 3 File Commands

112
n Plotter Configuration: This field displays the currently
configured plotting device, the port to which it’s connected or its
network location, and any additional user-defined comments
about the plotter. A list of the available system printers and PC3
file names is displayed in the Name list. An icon is displayed in
front of the plotting device name to identify it as a PC3 file name
or a system printer.
■ Properties: The option displays the Plotter Configuration Editor
(PC3 Editor), where you can modify or view the current plotter
configuration, ports, device, and media settings.
n Hints: This option displays information about the specific
plotting device.
■ Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments): This option sets the plot style
table, edits the plot style table, or creates a new plot style table.
■ Name: This option displays the plot style table assigned to the
current Model tab or layout tab and a list of the currently available
plot style tables. If more than one layout tab is selected and the
selected layout tabs have different plot style tables assigned, the list
displays "Varies."
■ Edit: This option displays the Plot Style Table Editor, where you
can edit the selected plot style table.
■ New: This option displays the Add-a-Plot-Style-Table wizard, which
you can use to create a new plot style table.
■ Plot Stamp: This option places a plot stamp on a specified corner
of each drawing and/or logs it to a file.
■ On: This options turns on plot stamping.
■ Settings: This option displays the Plot Stamp dialog box, where you
can specify the information you want applied to the plot stamp,
such as drawing name, date and time, and plot scale.
■ What to Plot: This field defines the tabs to be plotted.
■ Current Tab: This option plots the current Model or layout tab.
If multiple tabs are selected, the tab that shows its viewing area is
plotted.
■ Selected Tabs: This option plots multiple preselected Model or
layout tabs. To select multiple tabs, hold down CTRL while selecting
the tabs. If only one tab is selected, this option is unavailable.
■ All Layout Tabs: This option plots all layout tabs, regardless of
which tab is selected.
■ Number of Copies: This option denotes the number of copies that
are plotted. If multiple layouts and copies are selected, any layouts
that are set to plot to a file or AutoSpool produce a single plot.

Plot
113
 ■ Plot to File: This option plots output to a file rather than to the
plotter.
■ File Name: This option specifies the plot file name. The default plot
file name is the drawing name and the tab name, separated by a
hyphen, with a .plt file extension.
■ Location: This option displays the directory location where the
plot file is stored. The default location is the directory where the
drawing file resides.
■ [...]: This option displays a standard Browse for Folder dialog box,
where you can choose the directory location to store a plot file.

3 Under the Plot Settings Tab you specify paper size, orientation, plot
area and scale, offset, and other options.

■ Paper Size and Paper Units: This field displays standard paper sizes
available for the selected plotting device. Actual paper sizes are
indicated by the width (X-axis direction) and height (Y-axis
direction). If no plotter is selected, the full standard paper size list is
displayed and available for selection. A default paper size is set for
the plotting device when you create a PC3 file with the Add-a-
Plotter wizard. The paper size you select is saved with a layout and
overrides the PC3 file settings. If you are plotting a raster image,

Chapter 3 File Commands

114
 such as a BMP or TIFF file, the size of the plot is specified in pixels,
not in inches or millimeters.
■ Plot Device: This field displays the name of the currently selected
plot device.
■ Paper Size: This field displays a list of the available paper sizes.
■ Printable Area: This field displays the actual area on the paper
that is used for the plot based on the current paper size.
■ Inches: This option allows you to specify inches for the plotting units.
■ MM: This option allows you to specify millimeters for the
plotting units.
■ Drawing Orientation: This option specifies the orientation of the
drawing on the paper for plotters that support landscape or portrait
orientation. You can change the drawing orientation to achieve a 0-,
90-, 180-, or 270-degree plot rotation by selecting Portrait,
Landscape, or Plot Upside-Down. The paper icon represents the
media orientation of the selected paper. The letter icon represents
the orientation of the drawing on the page.
■ Portrait: This option orients and plots the drawing so that the
short edge of the paper represents the top of the page.
■ Landscape: This option orients and plots the drawing so that
the long edge of the paper represents the top of the page.
■ Plot Upside-Down: This option orients and plots the drawing
upside down.
■ Plot Area: This option specifies the portion of the drawing to be
plotted.
■ Layout: This option plots everything within the margins of the
specified paper size, with the origin calculated from 0,0 in the
layout. Available only when a layout is selected. If you choose to
turn off the paper image and layout background on the Display tab
of the Options dialog box, the Layouts selection becomes Limits.
■ Limits: This option plots the entire drawing area defined by the
drawing limits. If the current viewport does not display a plan
view, this option has the same effect as the Extents option.
Available only when the Model tab is selected.
■ Extents: This option plots the portion of the current space of the
drawing that contains objects. All geometry in the current space is
plotted. Autodesk Field Survey may regenerate the drawing to
recalculate the extents before plotting.
■ Display: This option plots the view in the current viewport in the
selected Model tab or the current paper space view in the layout.

Plot
115
 ■ View: This option plots a previously saved view. You can select a
named view from the list provided. If there are no saved views in
the drawing, this option is unavailable.
■ Window: This option plots any portion of the drawing you specify.
If you select Window, the Window button becomes available.
Choose the Window button to use the pointing device to specify
the two corners of the area to be plotted or enter coordinate values.
■ Plot Scale: This option controls the plot area. The default scale
setting is 1:1 when plotting a layout. The default setting is Scaled to
Fit when plotting a Model tab. When you select a standard scale, the
scale is displayed in Custom.
■ Scale: This option defines the exact scale for the plot. The four most
recently used standard scales are displayed at the top of the list.
■ Custom: This option creates a custom scale. You can create a
custom scale by entering the number of inches or millimeters equal
to the number of drawing units.
■ Scale Lineweights: This option scales lineweights in proportion to
the plot scale. Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of printed
objects and are plotted with the linewidth size regardless of the plot
scale.
■ Plot Offset: This field specifies an offset of the plotting area from
the lower-left corner of the paper. In a layout, the lower-left corner
of a specified plot area is positioned at the lower-left margin of the
paper. You can offset the origin by entering a positive or negative
value. The plotter unit values are in inches or millimeters on the
paper.
■ Center the Plot: This option automatically calculates the X and Y
offset values to center the plot on the paper.
■ X: This field specifies the plot origin in the X direction.
■ Y: This field specifies the plot origin in the Y direction.
■ Plot Options: This field specifies options for lineweights, plot
styles, and the current plot style table. You can select whether
lineweights are plotted. By selecting Plot with Plot Styles, you plot
using the object plot styles that are assigned to the geometry, as
defined by the plot style table.
■ Plot object lineweights: This option plots lineweights.

Chapter 3 File Commands

116
■ Plot with Plot Styles: This option plots using the plot styles
applied to objects and defined in the plot style table. All style
definitions with different property characteristics are stored in the
plot style tables and can be easily attached to the geometry. This
setting can replace pen mapping in earlier versions of AutoCAD.
■ Plot Paperspace Last: This option plots model space geometry first.
Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space
geometry.
n Hide Objects: This option plots layouts with hidden lines removed
for objects in the layout environment (paper space). Hidden line
removal for model space objects in viewports is controlled by the
Viewports Hide property in the Object Property Manager. This is
displayed in the plot preview, but not in the layout.
■ Full Preview: This option displays the drawing as it will appear
when plotted on paper. To exit the print preview, right-click and
choose Exit.
■ Partial Preview: This option quickly shows an accurate
representation of the effective plot area relative to the paper size
and printable area. Partial preview also gives advance notice of any
warnings that you might encounter when plotting. The final
location of the plot depends on the plotter. Changes that modify
the effective plot area include those made to the plot origin, which
you define under Plot Offset on the Plot Settings tab. If you offset
the origin so much that the effective area extends outside the
preview area, the program displays a warning.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PLOT

Import/Export LandXML Files

Function
This command allows you to import and export files in the LandXML
format. Standard File Selection dialog boxes are provided to either
choose a file to import, or name a file to export.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: IMP_EXP

Import/Export LandXML Files

117
 Display-Edit Text/ASCII File

Function
This command allows you to edit or review an ASCII/text file generated
by Autodesk Field Survey or by another program. For example, you can
edit a TemPLate, PROfile, SeCTion, ASCII coordinate, MXS, SUPer
elevation, or CenterLine file. The command prompts for the file name
to edit with the Standard File Dialog Box, then displays the file in the
editor list box.
To save your changes to the file, select the Save button. The original
file is renamed to a .BAK file, and your changes are saved to the file
name you originally called into the editor, which is displayed on the
top line of the editor. Use the Print button to print the file.
You can search for specific characters in the file by selecting the Find
button. Specify the characters to search for in the Find Text edit box.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File

➤ Prerequisite: A file to edit.
➤ Keyboard Command: SCEDIT

Recover

Function
This command allows you to repair and recover a damaged drawing.
In the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), enter
the drawing file name or select the damaged drawing file. Autodesk Field
Survey begins recovery and displays the results in the text window.
If the program determines that a drawing you’re opening is damaged
based on the drawing’s header information, the Open option
automatically repairs it.
The RECOVER command performs recoveries or audit operations on DWG
files only. Performing a recover on a DXF file will only open the file.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File

➤ Prerequisite: A file to edit.
➤ Keyboard Command: RECOVER

Chapter 3 File Commands

118
Purge

Function
This command allows you to remove unused named objects, such as
blocks or layers, from the drawing.

The Purge dialog box displays a tree view summary of all named
objects in the current drawing. The View Items You Can Purge and
View Items You Cannot Purge options toggle the dialog box display
between objects that can cannot be purged.

n View Items You Can Purge: This option switches the tree view to
display a summary of named objects in the current drawing that
you can purge.
n Items Not Used in Drawing: This viewer displays a tree view of all
named object categories (blocks, layers, and so on) in the current
drawing. A plus sign appears next to the object category names that
you can purge. Clicking the plus sign or double-clicking an object
category expands the tree view, displaying all unused named objects
that exist for the category. To purge all unused named objects, select

Purge
119
 All Items in the tree view, and choose Purge All. To purge a specific
named object category, select the category in the tree view, and
choose Purge.
n View Items You Cannot Purge: This option switches the tree view
to display a summary of named objects in the current drawing that
you can’t purge.
n Items Currently Used in Drawing: This viewer displays a tree view
of all named object categories (blocks, layers, and so on) in the
current drawing. A plus sign appears next to the object category
names that you can’t purge. Clicking the plus sign or double-
clicking a named object category expands the tree view, displaying
all named objects that can’t be purged in the category. When you
select individual named objects, the reason why you can’t purge the
item is displayed below the tree view.
n Confirm Each Item to Be Purged: This option displays the Verify
Purge dialog box when you purge an item.
n Purge Nested Items: This option removes all unused named objects
from the drawing even if they are contained within or referenced by
other unused named objects. The Verify Purge dialog box is
displayed, and you can cancel or confirm the items to be purged.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File

➤ Prerequisite: A file to edit.
➤ Keyboard Command: PURGE

Chapter 3 File Commands

120
Exit

Function
This command allows you to exit Autodesk Field Survey.
This option allows you to quit the program if there have been no
changes since the drawing was last saved. If the drawing has been
modified, the program displays the Drawing Modification dialog box
to prompt you to save or discard the changes before quitting.
You can close a file that has been opened in read-only mode if you
have made no modifications or if you are willing to discard them. To
save modifications to a read-only drawing, use the SAVEAS command
under the File menu.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: File

➤ Prerequisite: A file to edit
➤ Keyboard Command: QUIT

Exit
121
Chapter 3 File Commands
122
04-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 3:06 PM

Edit Commands
4
This chapter provides information on using the In this chapter
commands from the Edit menu to modify and change ■ Using editing commands to
modify drawings
entities in your drawing.

123
 Undo

Function
This command allows you to reverse the effect of previously issued
commands.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: U

Redo

Function
This command allows you to reverse the effects of the previous UNDO
command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: REDO

Erase

Function
This command allows you to remove objects from a drawing.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: ERASE, E

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

124
 Delete Layer

Function
This command erases all the entities on the specified layers and deletes
the layers from the drawing.

1 In the Erase by Layer/Type dialog box, you can enter the name of the
layer to be deleted, or you can specify a layer to delete by picking an
entity on that layer.
■ Layers of entities to erase: This field displays the layer names to be
erased. You also have the option of typing layer names in this field.
■ Select Layers from Screen: This option allows you to select entities
on the layers you want deleted.
■ Select Layers by Name: This option allows you to choose a layer
name from the list of layers in the drawing.

2 Under Types of entities on matching layers to erase, you specify which

types of entities to erase.
■ You can clear All and specify which entity types to include in the
selection set. For instance, if you have both linework and points on
the same layer, and you want to erase only the linework, you can
clear All and select Line and Polyline.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LDEL

Delete Layer
125
 Move

Function
This command allows you to displace objects a specified distance in a
specified direction.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: MOVE, M

Copy

Function
This command allows you to duplicate objects.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: COPY, CO

Explode

Function
This command allows you to break a compound object into its
component objects.
Results differ depending on the type of compound object you’re
exploding. The following is a list of objects that can be exploded and
the results for each.

n All Explodable Objects: Produces object geometry that may look

the same, but the color, linetype, and lineweight of the object may
change.
n Block: Removes one grouping level at a time. If a block contains a
polyline or a nested block, exploding the block exposes the polyline
or nested block object, which must then be exploded to expose its
individual objects.

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

126
 Blocks with equal X, Y, and Z scales explode into their component
objects. Blocks with unequal X, Y, and Z scales (nonuniformly
scaled blocks) might explode into unexpected objects.
When nonuniformly scaled blocks contain objects that cannot be
exploded, they are collected into an anonymous block (named with
a "*E" prefix) and referenced with the nonuniform scaling. If all the
objects in such a block cannot be exploded, the selected block
reference will not be exploded. Body, 3D Solid, and Region entities
in a nonuniformly scaled block cannot be exploded.
Exploding a block that contains attributes deletes the attribute
values and redisplays the attribute definitions.
n 2D and Lightweight Polyline: Discards any associated width or
tangent information.
n Wide Polyline: Places the resulting lines and arcs along the center
of the polyline. Autodesk Field Survey discards any associated width
or tangent information.
n 3D Polyline: Explodes into line segments. Any linetype assigned to
the 3D polyline is applied to each resulting line segment.
n Leaders: Explodes into lines, splines, solids (arrow heads), block
inserts (arrow heads, annotation blocks), Mtext, or tolerance
objects, depending on the leader.
n Mtext: Explodes into text entities.
n Multiline: Explodes into lines and arcs.
n 3D Solid: Explodes planar surfaces into regions. Nonplanar surfaces
explode into bodies.
n Region: Explodes into lines, arcs, or splines.
n Body: Explodes into a single-surface body (nonplanar surfaces),
regions, or curves.
n Polyface Mesh: Explodes one-vertex meshes into a point object.
Two-vertex meshes explode into a line. Three-vertex meshes
explode into 3D faces.
n Circle Within a Nonuniformly Scaled Block: Explodes a circle
within a nonuniformly scaled block into ellipses.
n Arc Within a Nonuniformly Scaled Block: Explodes an arc within
a nonuniformly scaled block into elliptical arcs.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: EXPLODE, X

Explode
127
 Trim

Function
This command allows you to trim objects at a cutting edge defined by
other objects.

Prompts
1 Select cutting edges …
Select objects: pick entity
2 Select object to trim or shift-select to extend or [Project/Edge/Undo]:
select entity to be trimmed
■ Project: You can project the object to be trimmed in order to trim
objects that do not intersect.
■ Edge: You can project the trimming edge in order to trim objects
that do not intersect.
■ Undo: This option allows you to undo the above projections.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: TRIM, TR

Cut

Function
This command moves the selected objects to the Clipboard, removing
them from the drawing. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard
into a document or drawing as an embedded OLE object (see PASTE).
CUT does not create OLE link information.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Clipboard >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: CUTCLIP

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

128
Copy

Function
This command copies all objects you select to the Clipboard. You can
paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an
OLE object.
You can also use CTRL+C to run this command. If the cursor is in the
drawing area, Autodesk Field Survey copies the selected objects to the
Clipboard. If the cursor is on the command line or in the text window,
the program copies the selected text to the Clipboard.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Clipboard >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: COPYCLIP

Paste

Function
This command inserts data from the clipboard. If the Clipboard
contains a graphic object, Autodesk Field Survey prompts you to
specify an insertion point. If the Clipboard contains an OLE text
object, the OLE Properties dialog box is displayed when the text object
is pasted.
If the Clipboard contains ASCII text, the program inserts the text in
the upper-left corner of the drawing area using the Mtext defaults.
ASCII text becomes an Mtext object.
All other objects, except Autodesk Field Survey objects, are inserted as
embedded or linked objects. You can edit these embedded or linked
objects by double-clicking them in the drawing to open the
application in which they were created.

Copy
129
 You can also use CTRL+V to run this command. If the cursor is in the
drawing area, PASTECLIP behaves as described. If the cursor is on
the command line, text from the Clipboard is pasted at the current
prompt.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Clipboard >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PASTECLIP

Paste to Original Coordinates

Function
This command pastes a copied object in to a new drawing using the
same coordinates that were used in the original drawing. For example,
you can use PASTEORIG to paste an object such as a fire hydrant from
a site plan to a plot plan.
This command functions only when the Clipboard contains Autodesk
Field Survey data from a drawing other than the current drawing.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Clipboard >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PASTEORIG

Extend To Edge

Function
This command allows you to extend an object to meet another object.

Prompts
1 Select boundary edges . . .
Select objects: pick entity
2 Select object to extend or shift-select to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]:
pick entity
You have the option of trimming or projecting objects and edges.

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

130
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Extend >
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: EXTEND

Extend to Intersection

Function
This command allows you to extend the end points of two lines
and/or polylines to their intersection point.

Prompts
1 Select first line or polyline to extend: pick a line or polyline
2 Select second line or polyline to extend: pick another line or
polyline

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Extend >

➤ Prerequisite: Two lines or polylines
➤ Keyboard Command: EXTINT

Extend by Distance

Function
This command extends a line or polyline, or creates a new line or
polyline from an existing one, using a specified distance. The new
segment of the line or polyline is drawn from the current position in
the direction indicated by the current position arrowhead.
You start by selecting an existing line or polyline. Initially, the current
position is the closest vertex to the location where the line or polyline
was selected. Extending from the endpoint of a polyline will add a new
point to that polyline, while extending from any other point will
create a new polyline.
There are two modes of operation: draw mode (D) and move mode
(M). When you are in draw mode, extending will draw line or polyline
segments. When you are in move mode, the current position
arrowhead can be moved without drawing segments. The orientation

Extend to Intersection
131
 of the current position arrowhead can be changed with the Right, Left,
and Angle commands.
The following is a list of the Extend by Distance options:

Extend by Distance options

Key Name Action

D Draw mode Actions draw or extend the line of polyline

M Move mode Actions only move the pointer

# Number Distance to draw or extend

R Right rotate Rotates clockwise 90 degrees

L Left rotate Rotates counterclockwise 90 degrees

E Extend to edge Extends to intersection with a selected line of

polyline

T# Total distance Sets current segment to specified distance

A# Angle change Rotates pointer by specified number of degrees

B Bearing Sets pointer direction by bearing in format:

Odd.mmss with Q-quadrant, d-degrees, m-
minutes, s-seconds (e.g. 130.100S is NE 30
degrees, 10 minutes, and 5 seconds)

S Switch Reverses pointer direction

N Next Moves pointer to next point

P Previous Moves pointer to previous point

U Undo Undo the last Extend by Distance command

C Close Closes the polyline

O Open Opens the polyline

Help Help Displays this list

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

132
 Prompts
1 Select line or pline to extend: select line or polyline
Pick the polyline near the place to extend.
2 Enter or pick distance to draw (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): T50
The line is extended to a total length of 50 units.
3 Enter or pick distance to draw (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): R
The pointer is turned to the right.
4 Enter or pick distance to draw (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): 75
A polyline is drawn to 75 units.
5 Enter or pick distance to draw (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help):
B145.0000
The pointer is turned toward NE at a bearing of 45 degrees.
6 Enter or pick distance to draw (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): 50
A polyline is drawn to 50 units.
7 Enter or pick distance to draw (A,B,C,E,L,M,N,O,P,R,S,T,U,Help): Press
ENTER
Press ENTER to end the command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Extend >

➤ Prerequisite: An existing line or polyline with at least one segment
from which to start.
➤ Keyboard Command: EXTENDER

Break by Closed Polyline

Function
This command will force a break where all lines and polylines cross the
"break" polyline. In addition to breaking lines and polylines, you can
also put the segments to new layers based on whether the segments are
inside or outside the break polyline. Polylines with arc segments are
not handled. To reconnect the broken lines and polylines, use the Join
Nearest command.

Break by Closed Polyline

133
 Prompts
1 Select the clip edge polyline: pick a closed polyline
2 Select the polylines and lines to be clipped.
Select Objects: pick the entities to break
3 Specify layer names for Inside segments (Yes/<No>)? Yes
4 Enter a layer name for the Inside segments <0>: Press ENTER
5 Specify layer names for Outside segments (Yes/<No>)? Yes
6 Enter a layer name for the Outside segments <0>: Final

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Break >

➤ Prerequisite: A closed polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: CLIPLINE

Break at Intersection

Function
This command allows you to break a line, arc, or polyline at the
intersection of another line, arc, or polyline. This command is often
used in conjunction with the Area by Lines & Arcs command because
many times, to get the correct area of a figure, you must break it from
adjoining lines.

Prompts
1 Select Line, Arc, or Polyline to Break.
Select object: select entity to break
2 [int on] Pick Intersection to break at: pick intersection point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Break >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: BREAKAT

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

134
 Break, Select Object, 2nd Point

Function
This command allows you to break an object. Autodesk Field Survey
both selects the object and treats the selection point as the first break
point. At the next prompt you can specify a second break point or
override the first point.

Prompts
1 Select object: select entity to break
2 Specify second break point or [First point]: pick second point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Break >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: BREAK

Break, Select Object, Two Points

Function
This command allows you to break an object by selecting the object,
then two points. First select the object, then Autodesk Field Survey
will prompt you to select two points that define where the object will
be broken.

Prompts
1 Select object: select entity to break
2 Specify second break point or [First point]: First
3 Specify first break point: pick first point
4 Specify second break point: pick second point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Break >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: BREAK

Break, Select Object, 2nd Point

135
 Break, At Selected Point

Function
This command allows you to break an object by selecting the object.
Only one pick is necessary since Autodesk Field Survey both selects the
object and treats the selection point as the break point.

Prompts
1 Select object: select entity to break
➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Break >
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: BREAK

Change Properties

Function
This command allows you to change properties of existing objects.

1 In the Change Properties dialog box, you must choose the properties
to modify.
n Color: This option allows you to change the color of the object.
n Layer: This option allows you to change the layer of the object.
n Linetype: This option allows you to change the linetype of the
object.

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

136
 n Linetype Scale: This option specifies the linetype scale factor for
the new linetype.
n Thickness: This option specifies the distance to extrude the object
above or below its elevation.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Change >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: DDCHPROP

Change Attribute Style

Function
This command globally changes the style of attributes on the drawing.
This is useful if all the label styles (such as the point symbol attribute
labels) on a drawing must be changed to accommodate a different
plotting specification. The default style used for the point symbol
attributes is PTXT.

Prompts
1 Old style name: enter style name
2 New style name: enter style name
3 New height (0=No height change): enter value

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Change >

➤ Prerequisite: You may want to use the LIST command to check the
current Text style and height.
➤ Keyboard Command: CHGATTR

Change Style

Function
This command globally changes the style and height of text on the
drawing. This is useful if all the text sizes on a drawing must be
changed to accommodate a different plotting scale.

Change Attribute Style

137
 1 Old style name: enter style name
2 New style name: enter style name
3 New height (0=No height change): enter value

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Change >

➤ Prerequisite: If you are going to change the text style, the new
style should be created via the STYLE command before you
execute this command.
➤ Keyboard Command: CHGSTYL

Change Elevations

Function
This command allows you to change the elevation of selected entities.
You can move the entity to a specified elevation from its current
elevation (absolute) or you can specify a differential change to be
added to or subtracted from an entity’s current elevation. If Autodesk
Field Survey points are selected, their attribute text and Z axis
(Elevation) coordinate are changed. Elevation values are not changed
in the current coordinate file. You must choose the command Update
CRD File from Drawing under Coordinate File Utilities on the Points
menu to update the elevation values in the current coordinate file.

Prompts
1 Ignore zero elevations (<Yes>/No)? Press ENTER
If you answer No, then entities with elevation 0 will be changed.
2 [A]bsolute or [D]ifferential Change <A>: A
3 Elevation to change to <0.0>: 125
4 Select Entities for elevation change.
Select objects: pick entities from screen
5 Select objects: Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Change >

➤ Prerequisite: an entity with elevation
➤ Keyboard Command: CHGELEV

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

138
 Change Block/Inserts Substitute

Function
This command allows you to replace one block with another and also
to change the size and rotation angle. This command works with
Autodesk Field Survey point symbol blocks or any AutoCAD block
and can be used when you receive an AutoCAD drawing from
another firm and want to replace certain inserts with inserts of your
own specification. For example, if you had inserted the block SPT10
several places in your drawing and decided to change it to block
SPT11 and wanted to change its size, (SPT# are the different point
symbol inserts included with Autodesk Field Survey) you would
follow the prompts below.

Prompts
1 Block/Insert name to be replaced: SPT10
2 Block/Insert name to replace with: SPT11
3 New Block/Insert Size (Field Survey units) <1.0>: 6
4 New Block/Insert Rotation Angle <0.0>: Press ENTER
5 Select Block/Inserts to change: select the blocks you want to change
The command then searches for any occurrences of the SPT10 in the
selection set and replaces them with block SPT11, making them 6 units
in size.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Change >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: CHGBLK

Rotate by Bearing

Function
This command allows you to move objects about a base point by a
given bearing.

Change Block/Inserts Substitute

139
 Prompts
1 Select entities to rotate.
Select objects: pick entities
2 Base pivot point?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
3 Reference Bearing point?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
4 Azimuth/<New Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: enter a bearing

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Rotate >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: BROT

Rotate by Pick

Function
This command allows you to move objects about a base point using a
point as a rotation reference.

Prompts
1 Select objects: pick entities
2 Specify base point: pick point on screen as reference
3 Specify rotation angle or [Reference]: rotate to desired location

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Rotate >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: ROTATE

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

140
 Scale

Function
This command allows you to enlarge or reduce selected objects equally
in the X, Y, and Z directions.

Prompts
1 Select objects: pick entities
2 Specify base point: pick point on screen as reference
3 Specify scale factor or [Reference]: scale to desired size

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SC

Edit Text

Function
This command allows you to edit text and attribute labels.

1 Select Text to Edit: select the text

You can modify text in provided text field.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Text>

➤ Prerequisite: Text
➤ Keyboard Command: EDITXT

Scale
141
 Text Enlarge/Reduce

Function
This command allows you to scale text entities up or down in size. The
command prompts for a scale multiplier and a selection set of text
objects. If you want to enlarge the text, enter a value greater than one.
If you want to reduce the text, enter a decimal fraction such as .5,
which would reduce the text size by 50%. Use this command if you set
up your drawing for one plotting scale and then decide to change to a
new plotting scale. The Change Text Size command can alternatively
be used to set the text size to a specific value.

Prompts
1 Scaling Multiplier: enter value
Select Text for Scaling.
2 Select objects: select the text

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Text >

➤ Prerequisite: Text
➤ Keyboard Command: TXTENL

Rotate Text

Function
This command allows you to set the rotation of the selected text to the
current twist screen, to an entered azimuth, or to align with a line or
polyline. The text keeps the same insertion point and justification.

Prompts
1 Rotate by (<Twist Screen>/Azimuth/Entity segment/Follow polyline)?
Press ENTER
■ Twist Screen: This option sets the text rotation to align
horizontally with the current twist screen.
■ Azimuth: Using this option, you can enter the angle or pick two
points to define the text rotation.

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

142
 ■ Entity segment: This option aligns the text with a selected line or
polyline segment.
■ Follow polyline: This option aligns the text with the closest
polyline segment.

2 Select Text to rotate.

Select objects: select the text

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Text >

➤ Prerequisite: Text
➤ Keyboard Command: TWISTTXT

Change Text Font

Function
This command allows you to change the selected text entities to a
specified style. The command prompts for a selection set of Text
and/or Mtext objects. You can enter any text style name such as
MONO or ROMANS, or press ENTER to use the current text style. If you
enter a style name that does not exist, it will be created for you using
the font with the same name.

Prompts
1 Select Text and/or Mtext to change.
Select objects: select the text
2 Enter new text Style or <enter> to use current text style: enter style
name

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Text >

➤ Prerequisite: Text
➤ Keyboard Command: CHGTXTSTYLE

Change Text Font

143
 Change Text Size

Function
This command allows you to change the size of the selected text
entities to the specified size. Although Text Enlarge/Reduce also
changes text size, this command sets the text to an absolute size
whereas Text Enlarge/Reduce scales or changes the text size relatively.

Prompts
1 Select the text to size.
Select objects: select the text
2 Enter new text size: enter value

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Text >

➤ Prerequisite: Text
➤ Keyboard Command: CHGTXTSIZE

Change Text Width

Function
This command allows you to change the width of the selected text
entities. The insertion point of each text entity is maintained as the
command lengthens or shortens the text.

Prompts
1 Select the text to change.
Select objects: select the text
2 Enter new width factor <1.0>: enter value for width factor

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Text >

➤ Prerequisite: Text
➤ Keyboard Command: CHGTXTWIDTH

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

144
 Change Text Oblique Angle

Function
This command allows you to change the text oblique angle on existing
text in the drawing. The oblique angle for a specific text style is
defined during the creation of the style. The default value for the
oblique angle for text styles is 0 until changed. When you change the
oblique angle, a minus (-) sign in front of the angle indicates a
backward slant, and a positive value indicates a forward slant. The
reference base point for the oblique change is always 0 degrees. This
means that if an existing text string has an oblique angle of 20,
changing the oblique angle to 25 does not add 25 degrees to the
existing 20 degrees, resulting in a text oblique angle of 45 degrees.
Instead, a 25 degree oblique is established by referencing 0 degrees as
the base and then slanting the text to 25 degrees. This works the same
for backward slants and forward slants.
Below is an example showing original text created with the default
oblique angle of zero, then changed to a backward slant of 15 degrees
and forward slant of 25 degrees.

Prompts
1 Select the text to change.
Select Objects: select the text
2 Enter new obliquing angle: enter value for the desired oblique angle

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Text >

➤ Prerequisite: Text
➤ Keyboard Command: CHGTXTOBLIQUE

Change Text Oblique Angle

145
 Flip Text

Function
This command changes the alignment of text entities by 180 degrees.

Prompts
1 Select the text to flip.
Select objects: select the text

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Text >

➤ Prerequisite: Text
➤ Keyboard Command: FLIPTEXT

Replace Text

Function
This command allows you to replace a text string with another text
string. For example, if the text LEGEL is on a drawing, you could use
this command to replace it with LEGAL. This command can also be
used to replace a substring. For example, if a drawing has the text
string TEST 12345 in several places, then select the occurrences and
enter the new substring as TEST 555. All selections of TEST 12345 are
changed to TEST 555.

Prompts
1 Select Text to Change.
Select Objects: select the text
2 Old string: enter the string
3 New string: enter the modified string
4 Replace all or prompt [All/<Prompt>]? Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Text >

➤ Prerequisite: Text entities to be changed.
➤ Keyboard Command: CHGTEXT

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

146
 Text Import

Function
This command allows you to transfer an ASCII format text file to an
AutoCAD drawing to facilitate the entry of drawing notes.

Prompts
1 The Text File to Import standard file selection dialog box appears.
Select a text file to import.
2 Start point or Center/Middle/Right/?: pick a point
3 Height <4.00>: enter a value
4 Rotation angle <0>: enter a value
5 Change text options? <N>: Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Text>

➤ Prerequisites: None
➤ Keyboard Command: TEXTIN

Text Export

Function
This command allows you to write selected text entities to a file. This
can be useful when you want to use your word processor to edit large
tables or do a spelling check. The edited text can then be redrawn with
the Text Import command.

Prompts
1 The Text File to Export standard file selection dialog box appears.
Enter a file name to write.
2 Select text entities to write to file.
Select objects: select the text
3 Select objects: Press ENTER
Pressing ENTER ends the object selection and writes the text entities to the
specified file name. If you want to preserve the order of the text lines, you
must select the text entities one at a time in the preferred order.

Text Import
147
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Text>
➤ Prerequisite: Text
➤ Keyboard Command: TEXTOUT

Align

Function
Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D.
You use ALIGN to move, rotate, or scale objects into alignment with
other objects. Add source points to the objects you want to align, and
add destination points to the objects to which you want the source
objects to align. You can add up to three pairs of source and
destination points to align an object.
The first set of source and destination points defines the base point for
the alignment. The second set of points defines the angle of rotation.
When you select three point pairs, you can move and rotate the
selected objects in 3D to align with other objects.
If you use two source and destination points to perform a
3D alignment on nonperpendicular working planes, you get
unpredictable results.
After you enter the points, Autodesk Field Survey prompts you to
scale the object. The program uses the distance between the first and
second destination points as the reference length to which the object
is scaled. Scaling is available only when you are aligning objects using
two point pairs.

Prompts
1 Specify first source point: pick point
2 Specify first destination point: pick point
3 Specify second source point: pick point
4 Specify second destination point: pick point

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

148
5 Specify third source point or <continue>: Press ENTER
6 Scale objects based on alignment points? [Yes/No] <N>: Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: ALIGN

Mirror

Function
This command allows you to create a mirror image copy of objects.
The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which
the selected objects are reflected. In 3D, this line orients a mirroring
plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system
(UCS) containing the mirror line.

Prompts
1 Select Objects: select objects to be mirrored
2 Specify first point of mirror line: pick point
3 Specify second point of mirror line: pick point
4 Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <No>: Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: MIRROR

Mirror
149
 Fillet

Function
This command allows you to round and fillet the edges of objects.
You can enter a radius for rounding (default radius is 0). You can
also trim an object that extends beyond the intersection.

FILLET rounds or fillets the edges of two arcs, circles, elliptical arcs,
lines, polylines, rays, splines, or xlines with an arc of a specified radius.
FILLET trims the intersecting lines to the endpoints of the fillet arc. If
the selected lines do not intersect, Autodesk Field Survey extends or
trims them so that they do. FILLET also rounds or fillets the edges of
3D solids.
If both objects you want to fillet are on the same layer, the program
creates the fillet line on that layer. Otherwise, the program creates the
fillet line on the current layer. The same is true for the fillet color,
lineweight, and linetype.
You can fillet line segments of a polyline that are adjacent,
nonadjacent, intersecting, or separated by one segment. If they are
nonadjacent, the polyline segments are extended to accommodate the
fillet. If they are intersecting, the polyline segments are trimmed to
accommodate the fillet. To create a fillet, the polyline segments must
converge within the drawing limits when limits checking is on.
The result is a single polyline that includes the fillet as an arc segment.
All the properties of this new polyline, such as its layer, color, and
linetype, are inherited from the first polyline selected.
Filleting an associative hatch whose boundary is defined by lines
removes hatch associativity. Autodesk Field Survey maintains
associativity when the boundary is a polyline.

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

150
 Prompts
1 Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim]: select entity
2 Select second object: select entity

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: FILLET

Offset

Function
This command allows you to offset an object to create concentric
circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves.

Prompts
1 Specify offset distance or [Through] <Through>: Press ENTER
The Through option allows you to screen pick the location of the
offset. You can also enter a value for the interval of the offset.
2 Select object to offset or <exit>: select entity
3 Specify through point: pick point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: OFFSET

Entities to Polylines

Function
This command converts selected lines, arcs, circles, 3Dfaces, and solids
into individual polylines. You use Join Nearest to convert adjoining
lines and arcs into continuous polylines.
Prompts
1 Select lines, arcs, circles, 3Dfaces and solids to convert.
Select objects: pick entities

Offset
151
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Polyline Utilities>
➤ Prerequisite: Lines, arcs or other entities to convert.
➤ Keyboard Command: TOPLINE

Reverse Polyline

Function
This command reverses the order of the line and/or arc segments of a
polyline. This can be used in conjunction with the commands such as
Station Polyline/Centerline or Profile from Surface Entities, since the
polyline must be plotted in the direction of increasing stations. If it is
more convenient to draft a polyline in one direction you may do so
and then use the Reverse Polyline command to change its order. This
command can also be used to reverse a 3D Polyline Breakline or a 3D
Pad Template. Temporary arrows are drawn along the polyline to
graphically show the new polyline direction.

Prompts
1 Select the Polyline to Reverse: pick point on polyline
➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Polyline Utilities>
➤ Prerequisite: A polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: REVPLINE

Reduce Polyline Vertices

Function
This command removes points from a polyline without significantly
changing the polyline. The offset cutoff is the maximum distance that
the polyline can move when you remove a point. For example, in a
polyline with three points in a straight line, the middle point can be
removed without changing the polyline.

Prompts
1 Enter the offset cutoff <0.1>: .5
2 Select polylines to reduce.
Select objects: pick polylines

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

152
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Polyline Utilities>
➤ Prerequisite: A polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: REDUCE

Smooth Polyline

Function
This command allows you to smooth selected polylines using a
modified Bezier method. The resulting polyline passes through all the
original points, and only the segments between the original points
are smoothed. The looping factor controls the smoothing amount. A
higher factor gives more looping.

Prompts
1 Enter the looping factor (1-10) <5>: 7
2 Enter the offset cutoff <0.05>: Press ENTER
3 Select polylines to smooth.
Select objects: pick polylines

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Polyline Utilities>

➤ Prerequisite: A polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: SMOOTHPL

Change Polyline Elevation

Function
This command allows you to change the elevation of a 2D polyline.
The command automatically increases the elevation by the contour
interval on successive picks.

Prompts
1 Starting elevation <0.00>: 100
2 Contour interval (negative for down) <1.00>: Press ENTER
3 Select polylines to set to elevation 100.00
4 Select objects: pick polyline

Smooth Polyline
153
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Polyline Utilities>
➤ Prerequisite: A polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: SETCELEV

Change Polyline Width

Function
This command sets the width of the selected polylines. You can
change the width of multiple polylines at one time.

Prompts
1 New width <1.0>: 2
2 Select Contours/Plines to change width of:
Select objects: pick polylines

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Polyline Utilities>

➤ Prerequisite: A polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: CWIDTH

Set Polyline Origin

Function
This command sets the starting vertex of a closed polyline. Select the
polyline, then pick near the point you want to set as the starting
point.

Prompts
1 Select Polyline: pick a polyline
2 Pick Near New Origin Point: pick a point on the polyline to be the
starting point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Polyline Utilities >

➤ Prerequisite: A closed polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: PLCHGORG

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

154
 Add Intersection Points

Function
This command allows you to add points to lines or polylines at
intersections with other lines or polylines. This can be useful for
commands such as Auto Annotate. For example, use Add Intersection
Points to add points to a boundary polyline where the lot lines intersect.
Then use Auto Annotate to label the boundary distance along each lot.
This command does not add intersection points on arcs.

Prompts
1 Select lines and polylines to process.
Select objects: pick lines or polylines

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Polyline Utilities>

➤ Prerequisite: Polylines or lines
➤ Keyboard Command: ADDINT

Add Polyline Vertex

Function
This command allows you to add points to a polyline. Select the
polyline to modify, then pick or enter the coordinates for the new
point. The new point is inserted into the polyline at the nearest
polyline segment. On a 3D polyline, the elevation of the new vertex is
calculated for you.

Prompts
1 Select polyline to add to: pick a polyline
2 Pick or enter point to add: pick a point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Polyline Utilities>

➤ Prerequisite: A polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: ADDPL

Add Intersection Points

155
 Edit Polyline Vertex

Function
This command modifies the X,Y position and/or the Z elevation of a
point in a polyline. First, you pick the polyline at the point to edit,
and the command displays the X,Y coordinate for the point. You can
either press ENTER to keep the position or you can pick or enter a new
position. Next, the point elevation is shown and you can enter a new
elevation. This command is useful for editing the elevations on a
3D polyline.

Prompts
1 Select polyline vertex to edit: pick a polyline at the point to be
modified
2 Pick or enter position <5264.23,5048.21>: pick a point
3 Enter elevation <0.00>: Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Polyline Utilities>

➤ Prerequisite: A polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: EDITPL

Remove Polyline Arcs

Function
This command allows you to replace arc segments in polylines with
chords. Arcs must be removed before you convert a 2D polyline into a
3D polyline because Autodesk Field Survey does not allow arcs in 3D
polylines. Removing arcs is also a Prerequisite to some commands that
don’t handle arcs, such as Break by Closed Polyline and Make 3D Grid
file. This command can add many vertices to the polyline.

Prompts
1 Select polylines to remove arcs from.
Select objects: pick polylines
2 Offset cutoff <0.5>: Press ENTER

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

156
 This specifies the maximum distance that any point on the arc will be
allowed to shift.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Polyline Utilities>

➤ Prerequisite: A polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: RMARC

Remove Polyline Segment

Function
This command allows you to remove a specified segment from a
polyline. (A polyline segment is the section between two vertices of
the polyline.) There are two options for removing the segment. When
you specify the Continuous option, the two vertices of the removed
segments are averaged together to keep the polyline continuous. When
you specify the Break option, the segment is left missing in the
polyline, resulting in two separate polylines.

Prompts
1 Break polyline at removal or keep continuous [<Break>/Continuous]? C
2 Select polyline segment to remove: pick point on polyline segment

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Polyline Utilities>

➤ Prerequisite: A polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: REMOVEPL

Remove Polyline Vertex

Function
This command allows you to remove the selected vertex from a
polyline.

Remove Polyline Segment

157
 Prompts
1 Select polyline vertex to remove: pick point on polyline
➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Polyline Utilities>
➤ Prerequisite: A polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: RMVERTEX

Offset 3D Polyline

Function
This command allows you to offset a 3D polyline entity in both the
horizontal and vertical directions. There are three offset methods. The
Interval method applies one horizontal and one vertical offset to all
the vertices of the polyline. The Constant method uses a horizontal
offset and sets the elevation of the polyline to one constant elevation.
The Variable method allows you to specify each horizontal and vertical
offset individually, either by polyline segment or for each point. The
vertical offset can be specified by actual vertical distance, percent
slope, or slope ratio.

Prompts
1 Enter the offset method (<Interval>/Constant/Variable): Press ENTER
2 Vertical/<Horizontal offset amount>: 15
3 Percent/Ratio/Vertical offset amount <0>: 10
4 Select a polyline to offset (Enter for none): select a 3D polyline
5 Select side to offset: pick point
Select a point on the graphics screen in the direction of the desired
offset.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, 3D Polyline Utilities >

➤ Prerequisite: 3D polylines
➤ Keyboard Command: OFFSET3D

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

158
 Fillet 3D Polyline

Function
This command fillets two segments of a 3D polyline with the given
radius. Since 3D polylines cannot have arcs, this command draws the
fillet arc as a series of short chords. The elevations along the curve are
interpolated from the 3D polyline.

Prompts
1 Enter fillet radius <0.00>: enter a value
2 Select first polyline segment: pick a segment of a polyline
3 Select second polyline segment: pick an adjoining segment of the
same polyline

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, 3D Polyline Utilities >

➤ Prerequisite: 3D polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: FILLET3D

Trim 3D Polyline

Function
This command allows you to trim a group of 3D polyline entities.

Prompts
1 Select trim edge polylines.
Select objects: select polyline
2 Select 3-D polyline to trim: select a 3D polyline

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, 3D Polyline Utilities >

➤ Prerequisite: 2D polyline to use as trim perimeter and the 3D
Polylines to trim.
➤ Keyboard Command: TRIM3D

Fillet 3D Polyline
159
 Extend 3D Polyline

Function
This command extends 3D polylines to a boundary edge that is
defined by another polyline or line. An alternative to Extend
3D Polyline is the Extend By Distance command that can be used
to extend a 3D polyline incrementally.

Prompts
1 Select boundary edge: pick a line or polyline
2 Select polyline or line to extend: pick a 3D polyline

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, 3D Polyline Utilities >

➤ Prerequisite: 3D Polylines to use for selection and polylines or lines
to use as boundary edges.
➤ Keyboard Command: EXTEND3D

Join 3D Polyline

Function
This command joins two 3D polyline entities into a single
3D polyline entity.

Prompts
1 Select the 3D polyline to join: pick a 3D polyline
2 Select the other 3D polyline to join: pick a 3D polyline that has a
common endpoint with the first

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, 3D Polyline Utilities >

➤ Prerequisite: 3D polylines
➤ Keyboard Command: JOIN3D

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

160
 Break 3D Polyline

Function
This command allows you to break 3D polylines.

Prompts
1 Select a polyline to break: pick a 3D polyline at the point to be
broken
2 Select second break point (or F for First): pick another point on the
3D polyline

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, 3D Polyline Utilities >

➤ Prerequisite: 3D polylines
➤ Keyboard Command: BREAK3D

Join Nearest

Function
This command joins lines or polylines together, and allows you to join
lines that do not exactly meet. You specify the maximum distance to
join, along with other options, in the dialog box shown below. You
can join many entities at once.

Break 3D Polyline
161
 1 You must specify the maximum separation distance parameter. Entities
beyond this distance will not join.
2 Under Connection Method you must determine how entities are
connected.
■ Average Endpoints Together: This option averages together the
endpoints of the two entities when joined.
■ Directly Connect Endpoints: This option directly connects the
endpoints of the two entities with a polyline.
■ Fillet With Radius Zero: This option will perform a tight fillet on
the two entities.

3 In the Join Nearest Options dialog box you can choose to join only
lines with common elevations or layers.
■ Convert lines into polylines: The option will automatically
convert any lines in the selection set into polylines.
■ Join only identical layers: This option will join entities on the
same layer.
■ Join only common elevations: This option will join entities with
identical elevations.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit

➤ Prerequisite: Lines or Polylines to be joined.
➤ Keyboard Command: NEARJOIN

3D Entity to 2D

Function
This command changes a 3D Arc, Line, or Polyline to a 2D Line or
Polyline, resulting in an entity whose endpoints or vertices all have
the same Z coordinate. When you select a 3D polyline with all vertices
with the same elevation, you can use an option that converts it to a 2D
polyline with this elevation. If the vertices of the selected polyline
have different elevations, you must enter an elevation.

Prompts
1 New Elevation <0.00>: Press ENTER
2 Select Lines, Arcs or Polylines for elevation change.
Select objects: pick a 3D entity

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

162
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit
➤ Prerequisite: 3D entities
➤ Keyboard Command: 3DTO2D

Image Frame

Function
This command controls whether Autodesk Field Survey displays the
image frame or hides it from view.
Because you select an image by clicking its frame, setting the image
frame to off prevents you from selecting an image.
Prompts
1 Enter image frame setting [ON/OFF] <current>: enter an option or
press ENTER
n On: Displays image frames so you can select images.
n Off: Hides image frames so you cannot select images.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Image>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: IMAGEFRAME

Image Clip

Function
This command allows you to create new clipping boundaries for an
image object.

Prompts
1 Select image to clip: select the edge of an image

Image Frame
163
 2 Enter image clipping option [ON/OFF/Delete/New boundary] <New>:
enter an option or press ENTER
The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the image
object.
n On: Turns on clipping and displays the image clipped to the
previously defined boundary.
n Off: Turns off clipping and displays the entire image and frame.
If you re-clip the image while clipping is turned off, the program
automatically turns clipping back on. The program prompts you to
delete the old boundary even when clipping is turned off and the
clipping boundary is not visible.
n Delete: Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the
full original image.
n New Boundary: Specifies a new clipping boundary.
The boundary can be rectangular or polygonal, and consists only of
straight line segments. When defining a clipping boundary, specify
vertices within the image boundary. Self-intersecting vertices are
valid. Rectangular is the default option. If you use the pointing
device to specify a point at the Enter Clipping Type prompt, the
program interprets the point as the first corner of a rectangle.
3 Enter clipping type [Polygonal/Rectangular] <Rectangular>: enter P or
press ENTER
n Polygonal: Uses specified points to define a polygonal boundary.
Specify first point: Specify a point
Specify next point or [Undo]: specify a point or enter U
Specify next point or [Undo]: specify a point or enter U
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: specify a point, or enter C or U
You must specify at least three points to define a polygon.
If the image already has a clipping boundary defined, Autodesk
Field Survey displays the following prompt:
Delete old boundary? [No/Yes] <Yes>: enter N or press ENTER
If you choose Yes, the program redraws the entire image and the
command continues; if you choose No, the command ends.

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

164
n Rectangular: Specifies a rectangular boundary by its opposite
corners. Autodesk Field Survey always draws the rectangle parallel to
the edges of the image.

Specify first corner point: specify a point

Specify opposite corner point: specify a point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Image>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: IMAGECLIP

Image Adjust

Function
This command controls the display of the brightness, contrast, and
fade values of images.

The Image Adjust dialog box controls how the image is displayed by
adjusting the brightness, contrast, and fade settings of the selected
image. Adjusting these values changes the display of the image but
does not change the image file itself.

n Brightness: Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of

the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value,
the brighter the image and the more pixels that become white when
you increase contrast. Moving the slider to the left decreases the
value; moving the slider to the right increases the value.

Image Adjust
165
 n Contrast: Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect, of
the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value,
the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color.
Moving the slider to the left decreases the value; moving the slider
to the right increases the value.
n Fade: Controls the fading effect of the image. Values range from 0
through 100. The greater the value, the more the image blends
with the current background color. A value of 100 blends the
image completely into the background. Changing the screen
background color causes the image to fade to the new color. In
plotting, the background color for fade is white. Moving the slider
to the left decreases the value; moving the slider to the right
increases the value.
n Image Preview: Displays a preview of the selected image. The
preview image updates dynamically to reflect changes to the
brightness, contrast, and fade settings.
n Reset: Resets values for brightness, contrast, and fade to default
settings (50, 50, and 0, respectively).

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Edit, Image>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: IMAGEADJUST

Chapter 4 Edit Commands

166
05-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 3:10 PM

View Commands
5
This chapter provides information about using In this chapter
commands from the View menu to change display ■ Using View commands
■ Display options
settings in Autodesk Field Survey and to manage
■ Managing layers
drawing layers.

167
 Redraw

Function
This command refreshes the display in the current viewport.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: R

Regen

Function
This command regenerates the drawing and refreshes the current
viewport.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: REGEN

Zoom - Window

Function
This commands zooms to display an area you specify by two opposite
corners of a rectangular window.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View, Zoom>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: ZOOM, W

Chapter 5 View Commands

168
 Zoom - Dynamic

Function
This command zooms to display the generated portion of the drawing
using a view box. The view box represents your viewport, which you
can shrink or enlarge and move around the drawing. Positioning and
sizing the view box pans or zooms the viewport, filling it with the
image inside the view box.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View, Zoom>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: ZOOM, D

Zoom - Previous

Function
This command zooms to display a previous view. You can restore up to
10 previous views.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View, Zoom>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: ZOOM, P

Zoom - Center

Function
This command zooms to display a window you define by picking a
center point and a magnification value or height. A smaller value for
the height increases the magnification. A larger value decreases the
magnification.

Prompts
1 Specify center point: pick a point
2 Enter magnification or height <226.66>: enter a value

Zoom - Dynamic
169
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View, Zoom>
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: ZOOM, C

Zoom - Extents

Function
This command zooms to display the drawing extents. You can use
Zoom Extents transparently, but it always regenerates the drawing.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View, Zoom>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: ZOOM, E

Zoom IN

Function
This command increases the zoom factor of the current viewport by a
factor of 2.0.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View, Zoom>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: ZOOM, 2.0x

Zoom OUT

Function
This command decreases the zoom factor of the current viewport by a
factor of 0.5.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View, Zoom>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: ZOOM, 0.5x

Chapter 5 View Commands

170
 Zoom Point(s)

Function
This command centers the screen around a point, or range of points,
you specify using either the point number or description. The
command searches the current coordinate file. In addition to centering
the screen, you can also change the magnification value. The default
value is the current magnification. To zoom in, enter a smaller value.
To zoom out, enter a larger value.

Prompts
1 Find by point number or description [<Number>/Desc]: Press ENTER
2 Point number or range of point numbers to find <1>: 8-12
3 Magnification or Height <323.00>: Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View

➤ Prerequisite: A .CRD file
➤ Keyboard Command: ZOOMPNT

Pan

Function
This command moves the drawing display in the current viewport. The
cursor changes to a hand cursor. By holding down the pick button on
the pointing device, you lock the cursor to its current location relative
to the viewport coordinate system. The drawing display is moved in
the same direction as the cursor.

Zoom Point(s)
171
 When you reach a logical extent (the edge of the drawing space), a bar
is displayed on the hand cursor on the side where the extent has been
reached. Depending on whether the logical extent is at the top,
bottom, or side of the drawing, the bar is either horizontal (top or
bottom) or vertical (left or right side).

When you release the pick button, panning stops. You can release the
pick button, move the cursor to another location in the drawing, and
then press the pick button again to pan the display from that location.
To stop panning at any time, press ENTER or ESC.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: P

3D Viewer Window

Function
This command allows you to view the selected 3D faces, polylines,
lines, and points in 3D using the OpenGL graphics library for
rendering, which gives it superior performance. This command gives
you the ability to zoom in and out, pan, rotate around the X, Y, or Z
axis, and shade in user-positioned lighting. You also have the option to
export the view to a windows bitmap (.BMP) file.

Chapter 5 View Commands

172
The window below is displayed after you select the entities to be
shown. To pan the display, click on the image and drag the pointer.

n Zoom In: This option incrementally zooms in to the view.

n Zoom Out: This option incrementally zooms out to the view.
n Shade Model: This option allows you to shade the surfaces of your
view. The color of the shade depends on the lighting of the surface,
which you adjust using the Light Position control in the middle of
the controls window. See Light Position below.
n Export to BMP: This option creates a .BMP bitmap file from your
current view.
n Set Acad View: This option allows you to send the current 3D view
back to the Autodesk Field Survey screen when you exit the 3D
Viewer window. You update the current CAD view to match the
view that is displayed in the 3D viewer window.
n Plan View: This option restores the X, Y, and Z axes back to zero.
n Exit: This allows you to exit back to the Autodesk Field Survey
screen.
n Ignore Zero Elv: This option excludes entities on zero elevation
from the display.

3D Viewer Window
173
 n Light Position: This control represents the position of the sun in
the sky looking from above. The position of the sun in the center of
the control means the sun is in a zenith, and a position near the
edge of the circle means the sun is near the horizon. To move the
sun, simply drag it to new location or click there.
n X-Axis: This slider rotates the view on the Z axis. The range of
these sliders is -180 to +180 degrees with middle being 0, which is
the default position when the viewer starts.
n Y-Axis: This slider rotates the view on the Y axis.
n X-Axis: This slider rotates the view on the X axis.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View

➤ Prerequisite: Entities to display.
➤ Keyboard Command: CUBE

Viewpoint 3D

Function
This command allows you to define 3D view settings.

Chapter 5 View Commands

174
1 Under Set Viewing Angles, you must set the direction of the view
relative to either the world coordinate system (WCS) or a user
coordinate system (UCS).
n Absolute to WCS: This option sets the view direction relative to the
WCS.
n Relative to UCS: This option sets the view direction relative to the
current UCS.

2 You must specify the viewing angles.

n X Axis: This field specifies the angle from the X axis.
n XY Plane: This field specifies the angle from the XY plane. You can
also use the sample image to specify viewing angles. The black arm
indicates the new angle. The red arm indicates the current angle.
Specify an angle by selecting the inner region of the circle or half-
circle. Selecting the bounded outer regions rounds off the angle to
the value displayed in that region.
n Set to Plan View: This option sets the viewing angles to display the
plan view relative to the selected coordinate system.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View

➤ Prerequisite: Entities to display.
➤ Keyboard Command: DDVPOINT

Viewpoint 3D
175
 Viewports

Function
This command divides the drawing area into multiple tiled or floating
viewports.

The Viewports dialog box creates new viewport configurations, or

names and saves a tiled viewport configuration. The options available
in this dialog box depend on whether you are configuring tiled
viewports or floating viewports.

1 The New Viewports Tab displays a list of standard viewport

configurations and configures tiled viewports.
n New Name: The field specifies a name for the new tiled viewport
configuration you are creating. If you do not enter a name, the
viewport configuration you create is applied but not saved. If a
viewport configuration is not saved, it cannot be used in a layout.
n Standard Viewports: This is a list of the standard viewport
configurations available. It also contains a CURRENT item, the
current configuration.

Chapter 5 View Commands

176
 n Preview: This window displays a preview of the viewport
configuration you select and the default views assigned to each
individual viewport in the configuration.
n Apply To: This option applies the tiled viewport configuration to
the entire display or to the current viewport. Display is the default
setting. It applies the viewport configuration to the entire Model
tab display. The Current Viewport option applies the viewport
configuration to the current viewport only.
n Setup: This option specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup. When you
select 2D, the new viewport configuration is initially created with
the current view in all of the viewports. When you select 3D, a set
of standard orthogonal 3D views is applied to the viewports in the
configuration.
n Change View To: This option replaces the selected viewport
configuration with the viewport configuration you select from the
list. You can choose a named viewport configuration, or, if you have
selected a 3D setup, you can select from the list of standard
viewport configurations. Use the Preview area to view the viewport
configuration choices.

2 The Named Viewports Tab displays any saved viewport configurations

in the drawing. When you select a viewport configuration, the layout
of the saved configuration is displayed in Preview.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View

➤ Prerequisite: Entities to display.
➤ Keyboard Command: VPORTS

Twist Screen Standard

Function
This command allows you to “twist” the screen’s orientation so that a
direction other than North is toward the top of the screen and the
drawing. It does not do a coordinate rotation, and it leaves the
database unchanged. The ROTATE and MOVE commands in the Edit
menu can be used to do a coordinate rotation and translation.
This command prompts you for the twist angle, then adjusts the screen
and crosshairs to that angle. The twist angle is always measured
counterclockwise, with 0 degrees at the east/right.

Twist Screen Standard

177
 Prompts
1 Enter or pick the screen rotation angle: pick or enter a value

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View, Twist Screen>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: TWIST1

Twist Screen Line

Function
This command is a variation of Twist Screen Standard. The command
aligns a selected line to be parallel to the east-west direction of your
graphics screen.
Think of the line you select as a pointer or arrow that will be moved to
point in the east direction of the screen. Select the line closest to the
line endpoint that you want to point in the horizontal or east direction
of the screen.

Prompts
1 Pick a line or pline to make horizontal: select line or polyline
➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View, Twist Screen>
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: TWIST2

Twist Screen Surveyor

Function
This command is another variation of Twist Screen Standard. You enter
the angle/azimuth that you want to be aligned parallel to the east-west
direction of the graphics screen.

Prompts
1 Angle to set to horizontal: 45.0000

Chapter 5 View Commands

178
➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View, Twist Screen>
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: TWIST3

Restore Due North

Function
This command twists the screen to make due north vertical.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View, Twist Screen>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: TWIST4

Display Order, Bring to Front

Function
This command allows you to change the display order of objects by
repositioning an entity from the background to the forefront of the
drawing view.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View, Display Order>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: FRONTOBJ

Display Order, Send to Back

Function
This command allows you to change the display order of objects by
repositioning an entity from the forefront to the background of the
drawing view.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View, Display Order>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: BACKOBJ

Restore Due North

179
 Layer Control

Function
This command allows you to manage layers and layer properties.

This Layer Properties Manager dialog box makes a layer current, adds
new layers to the layer name list, and renames an existing layer. You
can assign properties to layers, turn layers on and off, freeze and thaw
layers globally or by viewport, lock and unlock layers, set plot styles for
layers, and turn plotting on and off for layers. You can filter the layer
names displayed in the Layer Properties Manager, and you can save
and restore layer states and properties settings.

1 Under Named Layer Filters, you determine which layers to display in

the list of layers. You can filter layers based on whether they’re xref-
dependent, or whether they contain objects. You can also filter layers
based on name, visibility, color, linetype, lineweight, plot style name,

Chapter 5 View Commands

180
whether they are plotted, or whether they are frozen in the current
viewport or in new viewports.
n [...]: This button displays the Named Layer Filters dialog box.
n Invert Filter: This option displays layers based on the opposites of
the criteria you select when you are using a named layer filter.
Layers that fit the inverse criteria are displayed in the layer name
list.
n Apply to Object Properties Toolbar: This option displays in the
Object Properties toolbar only layers that match the current filter.
The layer list tooltip on the Object Properties toolbar displays the
filter status of layers in the drawing. (To display the layer list tooltip,
position the pointing device over the layer list on the Object
Properties toolbar.)
n New: This option creates a new layer. After you choose New, the
list displays a layer named LAYER1. You can edit this layer
immediately. To create multiple layers quickly, you can select a
layer name for editing and enter multiple layer names separated by
commas. If you create a new layer, the new layer inherits the
properties of the currently selected layer in the layer list (such as
Color, and On/Off state). To create layers with default settings,
make sure that there are no selected layers in the list or that you
select a layer with default settings before beginning layer creation.
n Current: This option sets the selected layer as the current layer. The
CLAYER system variable stores the layer name.
n Delete: This option deletes selected layers from the drawing file
definition. You can delete only unreferenced layers. Referenced
layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects
(including objects in block definitions), the current layer, and xref-
dependent layers. Layers that don’t contain objects (including
objects in block definitions), are not current, and are not xref-
dependent can be deleted by using the PURGE command. Be careful
about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared
project or one based on a set of layering standards.
n Show/Hide Details: This option controls whether the Details
section is displayed in the Layer Properties Manager.
n Save State: This option displays the Save Layer States dialog box, in
which you save layer state and layer properties settings of all layers
in a drawing. You can choose which layer states and properties you
want to preserve. You save a layer state by assigning it a name.
n Restore State: This option displays the Layer States Manager, in
which you can manage named layer states.

Layer Control
181
 2 The Layer Properties Manager dialog box displays all layers and their
properties. To modify a property, click its icon. To quickly select all
layers, right-click your pointing device and use the shortcut menu. The
following are the layer properties you can modify:
n Name: This field displays the names of the layers. You can select a
name, and then click and enter a new name.
n On/Off: This field turns layers on and off. When a layer is on, it is
visible and available for plotting. When a layer is off, it is invisible
and not plotted, even if Plot is on.
n Freeze/Thaw in All Viewports: This field freezes and thaws layers
in all floating viewports. A frozen layer is invisible and excluded
from regeneration, hiding objects, rendering, and plotting. A
thawed layer is visible and available for regeneration, hiding objects,
rendering, and plotting.
You can freeze layers to speed up ZOOM, PAN, and many other
operations, improve object selection performance, and reduce
regeneration time for complex drawings. Autodesk Field Survey does
not display, plot, or regenerate objects on frozen layers. Objects on
frozen layers do not hide objects and are not rendered.
You can freeze layers in all viewports, in the current viewport, or in
new viewports.
Freeze layers that you want to be invisible for long periods. When
you thaw a frozen layer, the program regenerates and displays the
objects on that layer. If you switch between visible and invisible
states frequently, use the On/Off setting.
n Lock/Unlock: This field locks and unlocks the layers. You cannot
select or edit objects on a locked layer. Locking a layer is useful if
you want to view information on a layer for reference but do not
want to edit objects on that layer.
n Color: This field changes the color associated with the selected
layers. Clicking the color name displays the Select Color dialog box.
n Linetype: This field changes the linetype associated with the
selected layers. Clicking any linetype name displays the Select
Linetype dialog box.
n Lineweight: This field changes the lineweight associated with the
selected layers. Clicking any lineweight name displays the
Lineweight dialog box.
n Plot Style: This field changes the plot style associated with the
selected layers. If you are working with color-dependent plot styles
(the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1), you cannot change

Chapter 5 View Commands

182
 the plot style associated with a layer. Clicking any plot style displays
the Select Plot Style dialog box.
n Plot/Don’t Plot: This field controls whether the selected layers are
plotted. If you turn off plotting for a layer, the objects on that
layer are still displayed. Turning off plotting for a layer affects only
visible layers in the drawing (layers that are on and thawed). If a
layer is set to plot, but is currently frozen or off in the drawing,
Autodesk Field Survey does not plot the layer. Turning off plotting
for layers containing reference information such as construction
lines can be useful.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LAYER

Set Layer

Function
This command allows you to change the current layer by selecting an
entity on the desired layer.

Prompts
1 Pick entity with layer to set: pick an entity
➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LSET

Change Layer

Function
This command allows you to change the layer of a group of entities
you select. The layer name can be either typed or read from an existing
entity you select.

Set Layer
183
 Prompts
1 Select entities to be changed.
Select objects: pick entities
2 Pick entity with new layer or press Enter to type name: pick another
entity
The first selection is now assigned to the layer of the second selection.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LCHG

Freeze Layer

Function
This command allows you to freeze layers assigned to the entities you
select.

Prompts
1 Pick entities on layers to be frozen.
Select objects: pick an entity

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LOFF

Thaw Layer

Function
This command allows you to thaw the layers frozen by the Freeze Layer
command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LON

Chapter 5 View Commands

184
 Isolate Layer

Function
This command allows you to freeze all layers except the layers assigned
to the entities you select. The program prompts to see if you would like
to retain the PNT layers, which keeps the point layers from freezing.
These layers include PNT, PNTMARK, PNTELEV, PNTDESC, and
PNTELEV.

Prompts
1 Select objects on layers to isolate.
Select objects: pick entities
2 Retain POINT layers [Yes/<No>]? Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: ISOLATE

Restore Layer

Function
This command thaws the layers frozen by the Isolate Layer command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: View

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: RESTORE

Isolate Layer
185
Chapter 5 View Commands
186
06-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 3:11 PM

Draw Commands
6
This chapter provides information on using the In this chapter
commands from the Draw menu to create lines, ■ Drawing lines, polylines, and
curves
polylines, and circles in your drawing.
■ Using drawing blocks
■ Managing raster images

187
 Line

Function
This command allows you to draw a line entity by picking points on
the screen or by supplying the coordinate values using the point
number and associated coordinates stored in the current coordinate
file. The Line command links the line with the points when the line is
drawn using point numbers if the Link Linework with Points option is
turned on. This option is set under General Settings in the Configure
command in the Settings menu. With links active, changing a point
with a command like Move Points automatically updates the line. This
command always draws 2D lines with a zero elevation.

Prompts
1 Pick point or point numbers: 1–3
At this prompt, you can pick a point from the graphics screen, or input
a single point number, or enter a range of points. The above example
draws line segments between point numbers 1, 2, and 3.
2 Undo/+/-/Close/<Pick point or point numbers>: 16
This continues the line to point number 16
3 Undo/+/-/Close/<Pick To point or point numbers>: Press ENTER
Press ENTER to end the command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: 2DLINE

2D Polyline

Function
This command draws a polyline entity. You can either provide point
numbers from the current coordinate file or pick points on the screen
to define coordinates. A Polyline is a series of line and/or arc segments
joined together in one entity or object.

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

188
 Prompts
1 Pick point or point numbers: pick point
2 Undo/Arc/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: 3
3 Undo/+/-/Arc/Close/Length/<Pick point or point numbers>: +
The + or - activates an additional prompt option that allows you to
plot line segments at a 90-degree deflection angle from the last line.
This is useful for plotting buildings. See also the Extend by Distance
command on the Edit menu.
4 Perpendicular Distance Right: 50
5 Arc/Length/+/-/Close/Undo/<Pick To point or point number>: C
This closes the polyline and ends the command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: 2DP

3D Polyline

Function
This command allows you to set a specified layer and plot a
3D polyline which can be used to define breaklines and features to
better define surface models. You can pick points from the graphics
screen or use point numbers from the current coordinate file. You
can also specify a range of point numbers. For example, entering 3-
1,5,10 would draw 3D Line segments from point number 3 to 2 to 1
to 5 to 10.
You can choose to pick points from a surface model that is stored in a
file, which can be either a grid file (.grd) or triangulation file (.flt).
When a point is picked or a point number is entered, the program
uses the northing and easting of this point and calculates the
elevation from the surface model.
When you create a 3D polyline by picking points from the screen, be
careful not to miss a point resulting in a zero elevation. This creates a
3D polyline that drops to zero at one point. As points are picked, Draw
3D Polyline reports the coordinate so you can check that the correct
elevation was used. If you miss a point and see a zero elevation, you
can type Undo at the next prompt.

3D Polyline
189
 Prompts
1 Layer Name for 3DPoly <BARRIER>: Press ENTER
2 Prompt for elevations (.XY filter) (Yes/<No>)? Y
Using the .XY filter allows you to pick the X and Y coordinate from the
screen and type in the elevation. If you enter N, then the Z coordinate
of the point picked will be applied.
3 Use surface model from file (Yes/<No>)? No
When a point is picked, this option calculates the elevation of the
picked point using a surface model. The surface model can be either a
grid file (.grd) or triangulation file (.flt).
4 Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>: pick point
5 Elevation <0.0>: 99.5
6 Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>: 15
This is a point number from the current coordinate file.
7 Undo/<Pick point or point numbers>: pick point
8 Percent slope/Ratio slope/Elevation <99.5>: P for Percent slope.
9 Ratio slope/Elevation/Percent slope <-2.53>: -2
Sets the elevation of this point to make a 2 percent slope from the
previous point.
10 Undo/Close/<Pick point or point numbers>: Press ENTER
Pressing ENTER ends the command.
11 Draw another 3D polyline [Yes/<No>]? N

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: 3DPLINE

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

190
 Circle

Function
This command allows you to draw a circle.

Prompts
1 Pick center point or point number or [3P/2P/TTR]: pick point or
specify option
n 3P: This option draws a circle based on three points on the
circumference.
n 2P: This option draws a circle based on two endpoints of the
diameter.
n TTR—Tangent, Tangent, Radius : This option draws a circle with a
specified radius tangent to two objects.

2 Specify radius of circle or [Diameter]: enter a value

Sometimes more than one circle matches the criteria specified in the
command. The circle whose tangent points are closest to the selected
points is drawn.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SCIRCLE

Text

Function
This command allows you to create multiline text.
You can use the TEXT to enter several lines of text that you can rotate,
justify, and resize. As you type at the Enter Text prompt, the text you
are typing is displayed on the screen. Each line of text is a separate
object. To end a line and begin another, press ENTER after entering
characters at the Enter Text prompt. To end the TEXT command, press
ENTER without entering any characters at the Enter Text prompt.

Circle
191
 By applying a style to the text, you can use a variety of character
patterns or fonts that you can stretch, compress, make oblique, mirror,
or align in a vertical column.
If TEXT was the last command entered, pressing ENTER at the Specify
Start Point of Text prompt skips the prompts for height and rotation
angle and immediately displays the Enter Text prompt. The text is
placed directly beneath the previous line of text. The point specified at
the prompt is also stored as the Insertion Point object snap.

Prompts
1 Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: specify a point or enter
an option
2 Specify height <2.00>: specify a height
3 Specify rotation angle of text <E>: specify an angle or press ENTER
4 Enter text: enter text and press ENTER to exit the command

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: DTEXT

Hatch

Function
This command allows you to fill an enclosed area or selected objects
with a hatch pattern.
The Hatch command first defines the boundaries of the area you want
to hatch, either by computing a region or polyline boundary from a
specified point within an enclosed area, or by using selected objects as
boundaries. It then fills the boundaries with a hatch pattern or a solid
color. You can create an associative hatch, which updates when its
boundaries are modified, or a nonassociative hatch, which is
independent of its boundaries. You can preview any hatch and adjust
the definition.
Due to the large number of combinations of geometry that you can
hatch, editing hatched geometry can produce unexpected results. In
this event, delete the hatch object and re-hatch.

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

192
 The Boundary Hatch dialog box defines the boundary, pattern type,
pattern properties, and attributes for hatch objects. Use the Quick Tab
to work with hatch patterns and quickly create a hatch. Use the
Advanced Tab to customize how Autodesk Field Survey creates and
hatches boundaries.

1 Under the Quick Tab you define the appearance of the hatch pattern to
be applied.
n Type: This field sets the pattern type.
n Pattern: This field lists the available predefined patterns. The six
most recently used predefined patterns appear at the top of the list.
The Pattern option is available only if you set Type to Predefined.
n [...]: This button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box, in
which you can view preview images for all predefined patterns at
once to help you make a selection.
n Swatch: This field displays a preview of the selected pattern. You
can click the swatch to display the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box.
n Custom Pattern: This field lists the available custom patterns. The
six most-recently used custom patterns appear at the top of the list.
The Custom Pattern option is available only if you set Type to
Custom.
n Angle: This field specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to
the X axis of the current UCS.

Hatch
193
 n Scale: This option expands or contracts a predefined or custom
pattern. This option is available only if you set Type to Predefined
or Custom.
n Relative to Paper Space: This option scales the hatch pattern
relative to paper space units. Using this option, you can easily
display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your layout.
This option is available only from a layout.
n Spacing: This option specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined
pattern. This option is available only if you set Type to User
Defined.
n ISO Pen Width: This option scales an ISO predefined pattern based
on the pen width you choose. This option is available only if you
set Type to Predefined and set Pattern to one of the available ISO
patterns.

2 Under the Advanced Tab you define how Autodesk Field Survey creates
and hatches boundaries.

n Island Detection Style: This option allows you to specify the

method for hatching objects within the outermost hatch boundary.
If no internal boundaries exist, specifying an Island Detection style
has no effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, it’s
often best to use the Normal style.

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

194
The illustrations that accompany each style show how the program
hatches a group of three nested boundary objects in each case.

Normal

Hatches inward from the outer boundary. If the program encounters

an internal intersection, it turns off hatching until it encounters
another intersection. Thus, areas separated from the outside of the
hatched area by an odd number of intersections are hatched, and
areas separated by an even number of intersections are not.

Outer

Hatches inward from the outer boundary. The program turns

hatching off if it encounters an internal intersection. Because this
process starts from both ends of each hatch line, the program
hatches only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the
internal structure blank.

Ignore

Ignores all internal objects and hatches through them.

Hatching concave curves with the Outer and Ignore styles can cause
hatching discrepancies.
The Normal, Outer, and Ignore options are also available from a
shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area while you
specify points or select objects to define your boundaries.

Hatch
195
 n Object Type: This option allows you to specify whether to retain
boundaries as objects, and specifies the object type Autodesk Field
Survey applies to those boundary objects. Object Type controls the
type of the new boundary object. Autodesk Field Survey creates the
boundary as a region or a polyline. This option is available only if
you select Retain Boundaries.
n Retain Boundaries: This option adds the temporary boundary
objects to the drawing.
n Boundary Set: This field defines the set of objects Autodesk Field
Survey analyzes when defining a boundary from a specified point.
The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects
to define a boundary. By default, when you use Pick Points to define
a boundary, the program analyzes all objects visible in the current
viewport. By redefining the boundary set, you can disregard certain
objects when defining boundaries without having to hide or remove
those objects. For large drawings, redefining the boundary set can
also produce the boundary faster because the program examines
fewer objects.
n New: This option prompts you to select the objects that define
the boundary set. When you choose this option, the dialog box
temporarily closes, prompting you to select objects. Autodesk Field
Survey includes only the hatchable objects you select when it
constructs the new boundary set. Autodesk Field Survey discards
any existing boundary set, replacing it with the new boundary set
defined by the objects you select. If you don’t select any hatchable
objects, the program retains any current set. Until you exit the
Hatch command or create a new boundary set, Autodesk Field
Survey ignores objects that do not exist in the boundary set when
you define your boundaries using Pick Points.
n Island Detection Method: This option allows you to specify
whether to include objects within the outermost boundary as
boundary objects. These internal objects are known as islands.
n Flood: This option includes islands as boundary objects.
n Ray Casting: This option runs a line from the point you specify to
the nearest object and then traces the boundary in a
counterclockwise direction, thus excluding islands as boundary
objects.

3 In the Boundary Hatch dialog box, you set the options the define the
selection set.
n Pick Points: This option determines a boundary from existing
objects that form an enclosed area. How Autodesk Field Survey

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

196
 detects objects using this option depends on the selected Island
Detection Method on the Advanced tab. For example, if the Island
Detection Method is Flood, the program detects objects within the
outermost boundary as islands and includes them in the boundary
definition. The Island Detection Style (which you also set on the
Advanced tab) then determines how to hatch the detected islands.
When you choose Pick Points, the dialog box closes temporarily,
and the program prompts for point specification.
n Select Objects: This option allows you to select specific objects for
hatching. The dialog box closes temporarily, and the program
prompts you for object selection. When you define your
boundaries using Select Objects, the program does not detect
interior objects automatically. You must select the objects within
the selected boundary to hatch those objects according to the
current Island Detection Style (which you set on the Advanced
tab). Each time you choose Select Objects, the program clears the
previous selection set. While selecting objects, you can right-click
at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu. You
can undo the last or all selections, change the selection method,
change the island detection style, or preview the hatch.
n Remove Islands: This option removes from the boundary
definition any of the objects that the program detects as islands
when you use Pick Points. You cannot remove the outer boundary.
n View Selections: This option temporarily dismisses the dialog box
and displays the currently defined boundaries with the hatch
settings that you last previewed. This option is unavailable when
you have not yet specified points or selected objects.
n Inherit Properties: This option hatches specified boundaries
using the hatch properties of one object. After selecting the
associative hatch object whose properties you want the hatch to
inherit, you can right-click in the drawing area and use the
shortcut menu to toggle between the Select Objects and Pick
Internal Point options to create boundaries.
n Double: For user-defined patterns, this option draws a second set of
lines positioned at 90 degrees to the original lines, creating a
crosshatch. This option is available only if you set Type to User
Defined on the Quick tab.
n Associative: This option creates an associative hatch, meaning that
the hatch is updated when you modify its boundaries.
n Nonassociative: This option creates a nonassociative hatch,
meaning that it is independent of its boundaries.

Hatch
197
 n Preview: This option temporarily dismisses the dialog box and
displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch
settings. This option is not available when you have not yet
specified points or selected objects to define your boundaries.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: BHATCH

2 Tangents, Radius

Function
This command fits a curve between two tangent lines using a known
radius. The command prompts for the radius and the points on the
two tangent lines.
Prompts
1 Radius of Arc <0.0>: enter radius value
2 [nea] Pick Point on 1st Tangent Line: pick a point
3 [nea] Pick Point on 2nd Tangent Line: pick a point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution
➤ Keyboard Command: 2TANLIN

2 Tangents, Arc Length

Function
This command fits a curve between two tangent lines and a known arc
length. It prompts for the arc length, the P.I. (point of intersection of
the tangent lines), and the points on the two tangent lines.

Prompts
1 Arc Length <0.0>: enter or pick distance
2 [int on] Pick P.I. of curve: pick intersection of tangent lines
3 [nea on] Pick point on 1st Tangent Line: pick point

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

198
4 [nea on] Pick point on 2nd Tangent Line: pick point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution.
➤ Keyboard Command: 2TANLAL

2 Tangents, Chord Length

Function
This command fits a curve between two tangent lines and a known
chord length. It prompts for the chord length, the P.I. (point of
intersection of the tangent lines), and points on the two tangent lines.

Prompts
1 Chord Length <0.0>: enter or pick distance
2 [int on] Pick P.I. of curve: pick intersection of tangent lines
3 [nea on] Pick point on 1st Tangent Line: pick point
4 [nea on] Pick point on 2nd Tangent Line: pick point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution.
➤ Keyboard Command: 2TANLCL

2 Tangents, Mid-Ordinate

Function
This command fits a curve between two tangent lines and a known
middle ordinate. It prompts for the middle ordinate length, the P.I.
(Point of Intersection), and points on the two tangent lines.

1 Middle Ordinate <0.0>: enter a value

2 [int on] Pick P.I. of curve: pick intersection of tangent lines
3 [nea on] Pick point on 1st Tangent Line: pick point
4 [nea on] Pick point on 2nd Tangent Line: pick point

2 Tangents, Chord Length

199
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >
➤ Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution.
➤ Keyboard Command: 2TANLMO

2 Tangents, External

Function
This command fits a curve between two tangent lines and a known
external secant distance. It prompts for the P.I. (Point of Intersection),
points on the two tangent lines, and the external distance.
1 [int on] Pick P.I. of curve: pick intersection of tangent lines
2 [nea on] Pick point on 1st Tangent Line: pick point
3 [nea on] Pick point on 2nd Tangent Line: pick point
4 External Distance <0.0>: enter or pick distance

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution.
➤ Keyboard Command: 2TANLEX

2 Tangents, Degree of Curve

Function
This command fits a curve between two tangent lines using a known
radius. It prompts for the radius and the points on the two tangent
lines.

1 Degree of Curve (ddd.mmss) <5.0000>: enter the angle

2 Define by [C]hord or [A]rc length <Arc>: Press ENTER
3 [nea on] Pick point on 1st Tangent Line: pick point
4 [nea on] Pick point on 2nd Tangent Line: pick point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution.
➤ Keyboard Command: 2TANLDO

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

200
 Tang, PC, Radius, Arc Length

Function
This command draws a curve from a perpendicular tangent line using a
known radius and arc length. It prompts for the radius, the arc length,
the PC start point of the curve (the endpoint of a previously drawn
tangent line), and a point along the tangent line.

Prompts
1 Precede radius with - sign for curve to the right.
Radius of Arc <15.00>: 55
2 Arc Length <25.00>: 30
3 PC Start Point ?
Pick point/<point Number>: 14
4 [nea on] Pick point along perpendicular tangent line: pick point on
tangent line

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution.
➤ Keyboard Command: SRAL

Tang, PC, Radius, Tang Length

Function
This command draws a curve from a perpendicular tangent line using a
known radius and tangent length. It prompts for the radius, the
tangent length, the PC start point of the curve, and a point along the
tangent line.

Prompts
1 Precede radius with - sign for curve to the right.
Radius of Arc <15.00>: 25
2 Tangent Length <25.00>: 35

Tang, PC, Radius, Arc Length

201
 3 PC Start Point ?
Pick point/<point Number>: 15
4 [nea on] Pick point along perpendicular tangent line: pick point on
tangent line

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution.
➤ Keyboard Command: SRTL

Tang, PC, Radius, Chord Length

Function
This command draws a curve from a perpendicular tangent line using a
known radius and chord length. It prompts for the radius, the chord
length, the PC start point of the curve, and a point along the tangent
line.

Prompts
1 Precede radius with - sign for curve to the right.
Radius of Arc <150.00>: 125
2 Chord Length <25.00>: 30
3 PC Start Point ?
Pick point/<point Number>: 25
4 [nea on] Pick point along perpendicular tangent line: pick point on
tangent line

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution.
➤ Keyboard Command: SRCL

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

202
 Tang, PC, Radius, Delta Angle

Function
This command draws a curve from a perpendicular tangent line using a
known radius and delta angle. It prompts for the radius, the delta angle,
the PC start point of the curve, and a point along the tangent line.

Prompts
1 Precede radius with - sign for curve to the right.
Radius of Arc <125.20>: 115.35
2 Enter Delta Angle (dd.mmss) <90.0000>: 79.2525
3 PC Start Point ?
Pick point/<point Number>: pick point
4 [nea on] Pick point along perpendicular tangent line: pick point on
tangent line

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: Tangent lines should be drawn before execution.
➤ Keyboard Command: SRDA

3 Point Curve

Function
This command draws an arc between three points. The first point is the
PC, the second is a point on the arc, and the third is the PT. The points
can either be picked on-screen or specified by point number.

Prompts
1 Pick PC point or point numbers: 101
2 Pick Second point or point number: 102
3 Pick PT point or point number: 103

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: 3PA

Tang, PC, Radius, Delta Angle

203
 PC, PT, Radius Point

Function
This command draws an arc between the PC point, radius point, and
PT point. The points can either be picked on-screen or specified by
point number. Given these points, the arc can be drawn clockwise or
counterclockwise. The program shows one direction and asks if it is
correct. If you want the arc to go in the other direction, enter No.

Prompts
1 Pick PC point or point number: 101
2 Pick Radius point or point number: 102
3 Pick PT point or point number: 103
4 Is the direction of this arc correct ? No/<Yes>: N
The arc draws in the other direction.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PCA

PC, Radius, Chord

Function
This command draws an arc given the PC point, radius length, chord
length, and chord bearing. The PC point can either be picked on-
screen or specified by point number. Given these points, the arc can be
drawn clockwise or counterclockwise. The program shows one
direction and asks if it is correct. If you want the arc to go in the other
direction, enter No.

Prompts
1 Radius of Arc <-40.00>: 500
2 PC Start Point ?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
3 Chord bearing or chord endpoint (<Bearing>/Point)? Press ENTER

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

204
4 Enter Bearing (Qdd.mmss) <90.0000>: 145.1041 (for NE 45° 10'41")
5 Chord Length <200.46>: 200
6 Is this arc in the correct direction (<Yes>/No)? Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SRCB

Compound or Reverse

Function
This command draws a reverse or compound curve using an existing
curve. It prompts (reverse or compound), for the PC start point
(endpoint of an existing arc), and the known radius. Then you select
from the choices of tangent length, arc length, chord length, or delta
angle, and enter the appropriate value. This command gives
unpredictable results if there is another entity, such as a point symbol,
at the PC If this happens, freeze the PNTMARK layer or temporarily
erase the point symbol.

Prompts
1 [end on] Select the PC Start point of the curve: pick point
2 Is the curve Compound or Reverse [C/R] <C>: Press ENTER
3 Enter the Radius: enter a value
4 Select other known: [T]ang length [A]rc length [C]hord [D]elta angle
<A>: choose an attribute and enter value

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: Tangent arc should be drawn before execution.
➤ Keyboard Command: SRCR

Compound or Reverse
205
 Best Fit Curve

Function
This command draws an arc between two endpoints using a radius that
is derived from sampling points and the average radius of an arc that
passes though these points.
Prompts
1 Starting Point ?
Pick point or point number: pick point
2 Ending point ?
Pick point or point number: pick point
3 Select points from screen or by point number [<Screen>/Number]:
Press ENTER
Select objects: select from screen

Use window to select a group of points. After selecting all the points to
sample, end selection by pressing ENTER.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: Points for sampling should be drawn before execution.
➤ Keyboard Command: BFITCRV

Curve Calc

Function
This command displays a dialog box containing a series of fields that
you fill in with the values of a curve. You enter two known values
and the command calculates the other values. One of the known
values must be the radius or the delta angle.

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

206
 The following shows the Curve Calculator dialog box.

1 Under Type of Degree of Curve you must specify type of calculation.

n Roadway: This options allows you to calculate degree of curve for a
roadway.
n Railroad: This options allows you to calculate degree of curve for a
roadway.

2 In the Curve Calculator dialog box, you can choose one of four
different ways to select curve values and plot the results.
■ Select: This option allows you to select entities from the screen.
■ 3 Points: This options allows you to three coordinate points to
define the selected curve.
■ Plot: This option allows you to output the results to the screen.
■ Clear: This option allows you to blank the fields of the dialog box.

Prompts
1 The Curve Calculator dialog box is displayed.
■ You must enter at least two values, or select a curve from the screen
or define a curve by picking three points.
■ You may then select Plot.

Curve Calc
207
 2 PC Start Point ?
Number/<Pick point>: pick point
Respond with N to input a point number from a coordinate file.
3 Plot from perpendicular Tangent/<direction of Chord>: Press ENTER
Pressing ENTER specifies that the default, defining the curve by its chord
direction, should be used. Input T if the curve is to be defined by
selecting a point along its perpendicular back tangent line.
4 Type in direction/<select point>: T
The default is to pick a point that defines the chord direction. Entering
a T allows you to enter a direction as follows.
5 Chord Bearing <North>: 145.3030
The arc is plotted on the graphics screen. If the arc is drawn in the
wrong direction, maybe right when you wanted left, respond with N at
the next prompt.
6 Is this arc in the correct direction, No/<Yes>: N
The arc is redraw in the opposite direction.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: None.
➤ Keyboard Command: CURVECALC

Spiral Curve

Function
This command plots a spiral curve. You must provide the P.I. (point of
intersection), the length of spiral, and the radius length of the simple
curve. The command plots a symmetrical spiral, a spiral in, or a spiral
out. At the first prompt, choose S to plot a symmetrical spiral out, T or
P to plot an unsymmetrical spiral in, and S to plot an unsymmetrical
spiral out. The command plots a polyline to represent the spiral as line
segments using the resolution you specify. You can use the Calculate
Offsets, Station Polyline, Centerline, or Offset Point Entry to calculate
points and/or stations and offsets from the spiral.

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

208
 Prompts
1 Spiral method [TS/ST/<PI>]: Press ENTER
2 PI Point ?
Pick point or point number: pick intersection of tangent lines
3 TS Direction point (tangent in) ?
Pick point or point number: pick point along tangent in line
4 ST Direction point (tangent out) ?
Pick point or point number: pick point along tangent out line
5 Point calculating distance resolution <10.0>: Press ENTER
6 Length of Spiral <350.0>: 350
7 Radius of simple curve (precede with - sign if curve to left) <954.93>:
954.93
8 Enter Point Elevation <>: 400
The northing and easting of the SC are calculated.
9 Enter Point Elevation <400>: 425
The northing and easting of the offset PC are calculated.
10 [P]lot spiral or [I]ntermediate distances for staking (deflection angle
calc) <P>: Press ENTER
11 Enter Point Elevation <425>: 427
This is the radius point elevation.
12 <press [Enter] for symmetrical spiral out>/[D]elta of simple curve:
Press ENTER
13 Enter Point Elevation <425>: 427
This is the elevation of the CS point.
14 Enter Point Elevation <427>: 435
This is the elevation of the SC point.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw, Curves >

➤ Prerequisite: For a symmetrical spiral draw the tangent in and
tangent out lines. For spiral in or out only, draw the tangent line in
or out.
➤ Keyboard Command: SPIRAL

Spiral Curve
209
 Draw By Example

Function
This command prompts you to pick an entity and then starts the
appropriate Draw command so you can create another of the selected
type of entity. The properties such as layer and color of the original
entity are used for creating the new one. For example, if you pick a
polyline, Draw By Example starts the Draw Polyline command. If you
pick text, this command starts the Draw Text command using the layer
and style of the selected text.

Prompts
1 Pick Object for Command: pick an entity
The remaining prompts depend on the type of the selected entity.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: Entities.
➤ Keyboard Command: DRAWBYEX

Sequential Numbers

Function
This command draws a numerical text label optionally inside a circle,
square, or other symbol. The size of the symbol adjusts to fit the label
size. The label is drawn by combining the Prefix, Text, and Suffix into
one text label.

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

210
 Prompts
1 In the Symbol Selection dialog box, choose a symbol type to use.

2 In the Sequential Numbers Options dialog box, set parameters for

the labels.

■ Text Size: This allows you to set the text height in drawing units.
The default text size is the text scale multiplied by the horizontal
scale set in the Drawing Setup command.
■ Text: The Text portion of the label is incremented by the value in
the Increment field. For example, use this command to quickly label
a series of lots by setting the Prefix to “ Lot” and the Text field to the
starting lot number. Then pick points inside the lots to label as
“ Lot” , “ Lot 2” , “ Lot 3” , etc. You will often set Text to a number to
be incremented.

Sequential Numbers
211
 ■ Prefix: This option allows you to provide a prefix to the
incremented text. For example “ Subdivided” would appear in the
above example as “ Subdivided Lot” , “ Subdivided Lot 2” , etc.
■ Suffix: This option allows you to provide a suffix to the labels. For
example, “ in Plat 27” would appear as “ Subdivided Lot 3 in Plat
27” , etc.
■ Auto Increment Labels: The Auto Increment Labels option allows
you to set the value of the next label by increasing the Text portion
of the label by the Increment value. Otherwise, the program will
prompt for the text of each label.
■ Prompt for Alignment Every Time: The Prompt for Alignment
Every Time option prompts you for rotation for each label.
Otherwise, the rotation you specify for the first label is
automatically used for the other labels.
■ Increment: You must set the increment used to number the labels.

3 Pick point at center of label: pick a point

4 Pick point for label alignment: pick a point
Pick a point to the right of the first point to set the rotation angle.
5 Pick point at center of label: Press ENTER
Press ENTER to end the command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: NUMBERS

Arrowhead

Function
This command draws an arrowhead at the end of the selected line or
polyline.

Prompts
1 Enter the arrow size <5.00>: Press ENTER
2 Pick a line or pline to add arrow: pick a line or polyline
3 Pick a line or pline to add arrow (Enter to End): Press ENTER

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

212
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: ARROWHD

Curve - Arrow

Function
This command allows you to draw a section of a contour line or to
create leader pointer lines. The command draws a Bezier curve through
the points you specify. After you choose the endpoints, each
intermediate point you pick will be redrawn through all the points.

Prompts
1 Do the Zorro (Yes/<No>)? N
This prompt is for a “ Zorro” option, which creates a Z leader curve.
2 Include an arrow (Yes/<No>)? Y
3 Enter the arrow size <4.00>: enter arrowhead size
4 Pick a starting point: pick a point
5 Pick an ending point: pick a point
6 Pick an intermediate point (U to Undo): pick a point
This allows you to curve the line. Pick a point to the side of the line to
curve it.
7 Pick an intermediate point (U to Undo): Press ENTER
Press ENTER to end the command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: CARROW

Curve - Arrow
213
 Boundary Polyline

Function
This command allows you to create closed polylines from existing
linework. Select all the entities (lines, arcs, or polylines) you would like
to use, specify desired snap tolerance (for joining broken lines), then
click inside the boundary you would like to close, and the command
will generate corresponding closed polylines. Duplicate polylines are
detected and are not created. The new polylines are always created on
the current layer; the layers of the original linework are not used.

Prompts
1 Select polylines: pick entities
2 Select objects: pick entities
3 Select objects: Press ENTER
4 Enter snap tolerance <0.0>: enter a value
5 Pick an internal point: pick a point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: Entities on screen.
➤ Keyboard Command: BOUNDPL

Shrink-Wrap Entities

Function
This command allows you to create a closed polyline that encloses a
given set of entities. The resulting polyline is created on the current
layer. The command works on either point entities or polylines. For
points, the command creates a closed polyline through the points
around the perimeter of the area defined by the points. For polylines,
the shrink-wrap polyline follows the outside border of the selected
polylines. The polylines that are processed must be connected to be
shrink-wrapped. The snap tolerance is the maximum gap that will be
joined to make the closed polyline.

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

214
 Prompts
1 Entities to shrink wrap [Points/<Polylines>]? Press ENTER
2 Enter snap tolerance <0.0>: enter a value
3 Select polylines.
Select objects: select entities

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: Entities on screen.
➤ Keyboard Command: SWPLINES

Polyline by Nearest Found

Function
This command draws a polyline by connecting points using a nearest
found method. You specify the points to be connected either by
entering point numbers or by picking point entities on the screen.
The nearest found method draws a polyline by starting at one of the
points and then connecting it to the closest of the remaining points.
Then the remaining point that is closest to a polyline end point is
then connected to the polyline. The process continues until all points
are part of the polyline.

Prompts
1 Select point from screen or by point number (<Screen>/Number)?
Press ENTER
2 Select points: pick points
3 Select objects: Press ENTER
Press ENTER to end the command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PLNEAR

Polyline by Nearest Found

215
 Drawing Block

Function
This command allows you to create a block definition from objects you
select.

1 In the Block Definition dialog box, you must first name the block. The
Name field, names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters
and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special
character not used by Microsoft® Windows® and Autodesk Field
Survey for other purposes. The block name and definition are saved in
the current drawing. You cannot use DIRECT, LIGHT, AVE_RENDER,
RM_SDB, SH_SPOT, and OVERHEAD as valid block names.
2 Under Base Point, you must specify a base point for the block. The
default value is 0,0,0.
n X: This field specifies the X coordinate value.
n Y: This field specifies the Y coordinate value.
n Z: This field specifies the Z coordinate value.
n Pick Point: This option allows you to temporarily close the dialog
box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current
drawing.

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

216
3 Under Objects, you specify the objects to include in the new block and
whether to retain or delete the selected objects or convert them to a
block instance after you create the block.
n Retain: This option retains the selected objects as distinct objects in
the drawing after you create the block.
n Convert to Block: This option converts the selected objects to a
block instance in the drawing after you create the block.
n Delete: This option deletes the selected objects from the drawing
after you create the block.
n Select Objects: This option dismisses the Block Definition dialog
box temporarily while you select the objects for the block. When
you finish selecting objects, press ENTER to redisplay the Block
Definition dialog box.
n Quick Select: This option displays the Quick Select dialog box,
which defines a selection set.
n Objects Selected: This option displays the number of selected
objects.

4 Under Preview Icon, you determine whether to save a preview icon

with the block definition and specify the source of the icon.
n Do Not Include an Icon: This option specifies that no icon is
created.
n Create Icon from Block Geometry: This option creates a preview
icon to be saved with the block definition from the geometry of the
objects in the block.

5 In the Block Definition dialog box, you must describe and link the
block.
n Insert Units: This field specifies the units to which the block is
scaled when it is inserted.
n Description: This field specifies the text description associated with
the block definition.
n Hyperlink: This button opens the Insert Hyperlink dialog box,
which you can use to associate a hyperlink with the block
definition.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: BLOCK

Drawing Block
217
 Write Block

Function
This command allows you to write objects or a block to a new
drawing file.

The Write Block dialog box displays different default settings

depending on whether nothing is selected, a single block is selected,
or objects other than blocks are selected. For example, if you have a
single block selected when you open the Write Block dialog box, the
Source radio button is set to Block.

1 Under Source, you write selected blocks and objects out as a file, and
specify insertion points.
n Block: This option specifies an existing block to save as a file. Select
a name from the list.
n Entire Drawing: This option selects the current drawing as a block.
n Objects: This option specifies objects to be saved as a file.

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

218
2 Under Base Point, you must specify a base point for the block. The
default value is 0,0,0.
n X: This field specifies the X coordinate value.
n Y: This field specifies the Y coordinate value.
n Z: This field specifies the Z coordinate value.
n Pick Point: This option allows you to temporarily close the dialog
box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current
drawing.

3 Under Objects, you specify the objects to include in the new block and
whether to retain or delete the selected objects or convert them to a
block instance after you create the block.
n Retain: This option retains the selected objects as distinct objects in
the drawing after you create the block.
n Convert to block: This option converts the selected objects to a
block instance in the drawing after you create the block.
n Delete from drawing: This option deletes the selected objects from
the drawing after you create the block.
n Select objects: This option dismisses the Block Definition dialog
box temporarily while you select the objects for the block. When
you finish selecting objects, press ENTER to redisplay the Block
Definition dialog box.
n Quick Select: This option displays the Quick Select dialog box,
which defines a selection set.
n Objects Selected: This option displays the number of selected
objects.

4 Under Destination, specify the name, location, and unit value used for
the objects in the file.
n File Name: This field specifies a file name that the block or objects
will be saved to.
n Location: This field specifies the drive and directory path for the
file.
n Insert Units: This field specifies the unit value to be used when the
new file is inserted as a block. Enter 0 (zero) if you do not want to
scale the drawing to a specific value as you insert it.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: WBLOCK

Write Block
219
 Insert

Function
This command allows you to place a named block or drawing into the
current drawing.

1 In the Insert dialog box, you specify the block to insert and define the
position for the inserted block. The last block you insert during the
current editing session becomes the default block for subsequent uses
of this command.
n Name: This field specifies the name of a block to insert or the name
of a file to insert as a block.
n Browse: This button opens the Select Drawing File dialog box (a
standard file selection dialog box) where you can select a block or a
file to insert.

2 Under Insertion Point, you specify the insertion point for the block.
n Specify On-Screen: This option specifies the insertion point of the
block using the pointing device.
n X: This field sets the X coordinate value.
n Y: This field sets the Y coordinate value.
n Z: This field sets the Z coordinate value.

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

220
3 Under Scale, you specify the scale for the inserted block. Specifying
negative values for the X, Y, and Z scale factors inserts a mirror image
of a block.
n Specify On-Screen: This option specifies the insertion point of the
block using the pointing device.
n X: This field sets the X coordinate value.
n Y: This field sets the Y coordinate value.
n Z: This field sets the Z coordinate value.
n Uniform Scale: This option specifies a single scale value for X, Y,
and Z coordinates. A value specified for X is also reflected in the Y
and Z values.

4 Under Rotation, you specify the rotation angle for the inserted block.
n Specify On-Screen: This option specifies the rotation angle of the
block using the pointing device.
n Angle: This field sets a rotation angle for the inserted block.

5 You can explode the block and inserts to the individual parts of the
block. When you select Explode, you specify only an X scale factor.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: DDINSERT

Buffer Offset

Function
This command allows you to offset a polyline. It maintains a fixed
distance from the original polyline by placing an arc on convex
corners.
Prompts
1 Enter the offset amount: 50
2 Select a polyline to offset (Enter for none): pick a polyline

Buffer Offset
221
 3 Select side to offset: pick a point on the side of the polyline where
the offset should be placed
4 Select a polyline to offset (Enter for none): Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: A polyline to offset.
➤ Keyboard Command: BOFFSET

Raster Image

Function
This command allows you to manage raster images.

1 The Image Manager dialog box lists all the image files attached to the
current drawing. You can view the parameters and details for selected
images. You can attach new image files and detach, locate, reload, and
unload existing images.
n List View: This button lists the image definitions attached to the
drawing. Each image name appears only once regardless of how
many times you attach (insert) the image. You can sort the list of
images by name, status (loaded, unloaded, or not found), size, type
(TIFF, for example), date, or the saved path and file name. By
default, Autodesk Field Survey displays the list alphabetically by
image name.

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

222
 To select multiple images, hold down SHIFT or CTRL while selecting
items.
To sort the list alphabetically or numerically by a specific column,
click that column’s heading.
To change the width of the column, drag the line between the
column headings to the right or left. The program saves and restores
the settings when you reopen the dialog box.
To change an image name, select it and then click it again, or select
it, and then press F2. You cannot edit names of images that reside in
external references (xrefs). Image names can include up to 255
characters and can contain letters, digits, spaces, and any special
characters not used by Microsoft® Windows® or Autodesk Field
Survey. The image name can be identical to the file name, but
changing the image name does not change the file name.
n Tree View: This button displays all the image definitions and the
levels of nesting of images within xrefs. The top level of the tree
view shows images that you attached directly to the drawing,
images nested in block references, and the names of externally
referenced drawings containing images. The names of the images
attached to the externally referenced drawings appear nested within
the drawing at the next tree level. To insert a copy of an already
attached image, select it, and then choose Attach.
Tree view lists the image names only (not file names) and lists the
image name just once, regardless of how many times you attach
(insert) the image.
You can edit an image name by selecting it and then clicking it
again, or by selecting it and then pressing F2. However, you cannot
select more than one image at a time.
n Attach: This option displays the Select Image File dialog box. When
you unload and then reload an image, the program draws that
image on top. Images remain loaded or unloaded from one drawing
session to the next.
n Detach: This option removes the selected image definitions from
the drawing database and erases all the associated image objects
from the drawing and from the display.
n Reload: This option loads the most recent version of an image or
reloads an image that was previously unloaded. Reloading does not
control whether the image is displayed, but it ensures display of the
most current image.

Raster Image
223
 n Unload: This option unloads image data from working memory
without erasing the image objects from the drawing. It is
recommended that you unload images no longer needed for editing
to improve performance. An unloaded image cannot be displayed or
plotted. You can selectively load and unload individual images from
a working list of images associated with the drawing file.
n Details: This option opens the Image File Details dialog box, which
displays the image name, saved path, active path, file creation date
and time, file size and type, color system, color depth, width and
height in pixels, resolution, default size in units, and a preview
image.
n Image Found At: This field shows the path of the selected image. If
you select multiple images, this field remains blank. The path
shown is the actual path where the image resides.
n Browse: This option opens the Select Image File dialog box (a
standard file selection dialog box). The path you select appears
under Image Found At.
n Save Path: This option stores the new path information. Press ESC
while editing the path to restore the old path. If the program cannot
find the referenced image in the new path, the image’s status
changes to Not Found. If you do not choose Save Path after editing
the path, the program uses the original image path the next time
you load the drawing.

2 Under the Image dialog box, you can attach an image.

Chapter 6 Draw Commands

224
3 In the Image dialog box, you must first identify the image and the
path.
n Name: This field identifies the image you have selected to attach,
either from the Select Image File dialog box (an unattached image)
or from the list of previously attached images. To add another
instance of an image file that is already attached, select the image
name from the list and choose OK.
n Browse: This option opens the Select Image File dialog box (a
standard file selection dialog box). If Show Preview is selected, the
program displays a preview of the selected file.
n Retain Path: This option saves the path of the image file with the
image definition. If Retain Path is not selected, only the image
name is saved and Autodesk Field Survey searches the Support File
Search Path.

4 Under Insertion Point, you must specify the insertion point for the
selected image. Specify On-Screen is the default. The default insertion
point is 0,0.
n Specify On-Screen: This option directs input to the command line
or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the
insertion point in X, Y, and Z.
n X: This field sets the X coordinate value.
n Y: This field sets the Y coordinate value.
n Z: This field sets the Z coordinate value.

5 Under Scale, you must specify the scale factor of the selected image.
Specify On-Screen directs input to the command line or the pointing
device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter a value for the scale factor.
The default scale factor is 1.
6 Under Rotation, you must specify the rotation angle of the selected
image. If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait until you exit the
dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a
rotation angle value on the command line. If Specify On-Screen is
cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box. The default
rotation angle is 0.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Draw

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: IMAGE

Raster Image
225
Chapter 6 Draw Commands
226
07-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 3:12 PM

Inquiry Commands
7
This chapter provides information on using the In this chapter
commands from the Inquiry menu to obtain ■ Evaluating drawing information
■ Using the Drawing Inspector
information and specifications about entities in
■ Points, curve, and polyline
your drawing. information

227
 List

Function
This command allows you to display at the command line database
information for the selected objects.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Inquiry

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LIST

Point ID

Function
This command allows you to display at the command line the
coordinate values of a point you pick on the screen.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Inquiry

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PT_ID

Layer ID

Function
This command allows you to report at the command line the layer
name of the selected entity.

Prompts
1 Pick entity to read layer: pick an entity
Layer: FINAL
2 Pick entity to read layer: Press ENTER
Pressing ENTER ends the command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Inquiry

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LAYERID

Chapter 7 Inquiry Commands

228
Layer Report

Function
This command reports the number of entities contained within each
layer of the drawing. There are no prompts, and when you invoke the
command it immediately begins evaluating the current drawing. Please
be patient in very large drawings with numerous layers, especially with
a slower computer. All layers and the total number of objects
contained on each layer are displayed in the Standard Report Viewer
upon completion.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Inquiry

➤ Prerequisite: None.
➤ Keyboard Command: REPORTLAYER

Drawing Inspector

Function
This command controls the reporting of object properties when you
move the cursor over an entity. You activate the Drawing Inspector by
selecting the Drawing Inspector command from the Inquiry menu,
then you right click to display the menu containing a list of properties
you can display and a list of display options. The available properties
are: Layer Name, Elevation, Bearing-Distance, Point Data, and Text
Data. After you select a property, you move the pointer over an entity,
and the selected property is displayed either in a pop-up window next
to the pointer and/or on the status bar, depending on the selected
display option.

Layer Report
229
 1 In the Drawing Inspector menu, you can choose one or more
properties to display.
n Display Layer Name: Allows you to display the layer name of the
entity.
n Display Elevation: Allows you to display the elevation of the
entity.
n Display Bearing-Distance: Allows you to display the bearing and
distance of a line.
n Display Point Data: Allows you to display the coordinate data of
point.
n Display Text Data: Allows you to display the attributes of text.

2 In the Drawing Inspector menu, you can choose how the property
information is reported.
n Enable Highlighting: Allows you to highlight the object that the
Drawing Inspector is reporting.
n Enable Tag Display: Enables you to view the information next to
the cursor on the screen.
n Show Data On status Bar: Enables you to view the information on
the status bar, in the lower right corner of the screen.
n Use Default Cursor: When enabled, you see only the CAD cursor.
When disabled, mouse pointer is also shown.

Other commands can be run as usual while Drawing Inspector is

active. To turn off the Drawing Inspector, pick the Drawing Inspector
command from the menu a second time.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Inquiry

➤ Prerequisite: None.
➤ Keyboard Command: INSPECTOR

Chapter 7 Inquiry Commands

230
 Bearing & Distance

Function
This command reports the slope distance, slope ratio, bearing, azimuth
and vertical angle between two 3D points. Pick or enter the coordinates
of two points or select a line or polyline segment to calculate between
the segment endpoints.

Prompts
1 Specify bearing-distance from (Line/PLine/<Points>)? Press ENTER
2 Pick point or enter point number: pick a point
3 Pick second point or enter point number: pick a point
The horizontal distance, slope distance, elevation difference, vertical
angle, slope, bearing, and azimuth are reported.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Inquiry

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: 3DIST

Find Point(s)

Function
This command is used to find a point with a specified point number or
description. The command searches the current coordinate file. Points
that match the point number or description are highlighted on the
graphics screen with the preview arrow and listed on the text screen.

Bearing & Distance

231
 Prompts
1 Find by point number or description [<Number>/Desc]: Press ENTER
Point number or range of point numbers to find <1>: 8–12

8 4856.75 4747.20 0.00

9 4909.25 4648.37 0.00
10 4223.30 4545.46 0.00 RADPT
11 4111.32 4532.98 0.00
12 4142.92 4624.43 0.00

-or-

2 Find by point number or description [<Number>/Desc]: D

3 Point Description(s) text to search for <>: rad*

1 4252.76 4158.32 0.00 RADPT

4 4558.06 4950.80 0.00 RADPT
7 4817.02 4662.73 0.00 RADPT
10 4223.30 4545.46 0.00 RADPT

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Inquiry

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: FPNT

Curve Info

Function
This command displays information about a curve/arc. You can define
the curve by selecting an arc entity or polyline arc segment, or you can
pick three points on the arc, either by specifying point numbers or
picking on the screen. The curve data is displayed in the text window.
Press ENTER to return to the graphics window.

Chapter 7 Inquiry Commands

232
 Prompts
1 Define arc by, Points/<select arc or polyline>: pick arc or polyline arc
segment
The curve information is displayed in the text window.
2 Press ENTER to continue: Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Inquiry

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: CURVINFO

Polyline Info

Function
This command reports the length and elevation of the selected line or
polyline.

Prompts
1 Pick Polyline or Line: pick a polyline
Polyline length: 145.43 Elevation: 100.0

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Inquiry

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: POLYLEN

Polyline Info
233
Chapter 7 Inquiry Commands
234
08-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 4:19 PM

Settings Commands
8
This chapter provides information on using the In this chapter
commands from the Settings menu to configure options ■ Setting drawing parameters
■ Setting defaults
and settings in your drawing.
■ Setting environment variables

235
Drawing Setup

Function
This command displays a dialog box for setting drawing parameters,
including the plotting scale, size of symbols, label annotation size, and
the drawing mode.

1 Under Scale and Size Settings you can determine scale and size of
drawing entities.
n English 1in=?ft or Metric 1m=?m: This option tells Autodesk Field
Survey which unit mode to use. This affects the prompting and
reports. When you are working on a drawing in English units, one
unit equals one foot. In metric, one unit equals one meter.
■ Metric 1m=?m: This option sets the metric scale to meters only.
■ Horizontal Scale: This option allows you to set the horizontal scale
of the drawing. For example, if the horizontal scale is set to 50, then
1” = 50’ in your drawing.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

236
 ■ Symbol Plot Size: This value is a scaler that represents the size on
the plot. The Drawing Units are determined by multiplying the
scaler by the horizontal scale. In English mode the scaler represents
the plotted size in inches. In Metric mode, this value is the plotted
size in centimeters. The Symbol Plot Size is not entered in Drawing
Units.
■ Drawing Units: This field shows the result of the Symbol Plot
Size value (the scaler) multiplied by the horizontal scale.
■ Text Plot Size: This value is a scaler that represents the size on the
plot. The Drawing Units are determined by multiplying the scaler by
the horizontal scale. In English mode the scaler represents the
plotted size in inches. In Metric mode, this value is the plotted size
in centimeters. The Text Plot Size is not entered in Drawing Units.
■ Drawing Units: This field shows the result of the Text Plot Size
value (the scaler) multiplied by the horizontal scale.
■ Line Type Scaler: This option sets the linetype scale by multiplying
this scaler by the horizontal scale.

2 Under Angle Mode you determine how angles are entered and
displayed.
■ Bearing: This option sets reporting to bearing mode for any of the
inquiry commands.
■ Azimuth: This option sets reporting to north based azimuth mode
for any of the inquiry commands.
■ Gons: This option sets reporting to gons mode for any of the
inquiry commands.

Drawing Setup
237
 3 The Set Paper button allows you to draw a rectangle on the screen that
represents the edge of your paper. After you have set the horizontal
scale, press the Set Paper button and the following dialog box appears.

■ Layout: This option lets you specify landscape or portrait paper

orientation. Landscape layout is where the width of the page is
greater than the height of the page. Portrait layout is the opposite.
■ Paper Size: This option allows you to specify the paper size. The
numbers in parenthesis represent drawing units and will be
multiplied by the horizontal scale to determine the rectangle to be
drawn. If you select the Other option, you will be prompted on the
command line for the horizontal and vertical sizes of the paper.

Prompts
1 Pick or Type lower left corner point for border <(5000.00 5000.00
0.0)>: pick point
2 Erase existing Set Paper boundary [<Yes>/No]? Y
This prompt only appears if there is an existing paper boundary in
this drawing.
3 Set Limits [Yes/<No>]? Y
If you answer Yes to Set Limits, drawing limits are enabled, and
Autodesk Field Survey restricts the coordinates you can enter to within
the paper boundary. Drawing limits also determines the area of the
drawing that can display grid dots, and the minimum area displayed

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

238
 by the Zoom All command on the View menu. To turn drawing limits
off, type in LIMITS on the command line and set to Off.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SETUP

Title Block

Function
This command draws a border and title block for the selected sheet size.

1 In the Title Block dialog box, you must set paper size and margins, and
provide notes for the document.
2 Under Paper Size you must select the size of the sheet. Click the User
Defined radio button to set a custom sheet size.
The default user defined size can be stored in the Configure command
under the General Settings option.
3 In the Layer field, you may provide a layer name for the title
block.
4 You can provide notes to be included in the title block.

Title Block
239
 5 You must provide a scale. To select a scale, click on the Change Scale
button. This changes the scale for the title block and for the drawing
as well.
6 You must specify the size of the margins. Margins are needed so that
the border fits in the plotter’s plotable area. For sheet 11x17 or smaller,
a 1/2-inch margin is typical. For larger sheets, a typical margin is
3/4 inch.
7 To change the title block, edit the drawing TBLOCK.DWG in the
\SUPPORT directory. After the title block is drawn, the contents can be
edited using the Attribute Edit command under the Modify menu.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: TBLOCK

Mortgage Block

Function
This command draws a personalized title block for a mortgage survey.
The output yields a 3 ¾ x 2 block placed in the right corner of the
sheet with optional text for a Special Flood Hazard Area.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

240
 The Mortgage Block dialog box allows you to edit all block information
and input unique data for every field.

1 Enter the relevant information into each specified field in the Title
Block section of the dialog box.
2 Under Paper Size you must choose the paper size to determine the
output size of the drawing.
3 You have the option of including Flood notes. Under Flood
Insurance Note you can enter relevant information into the fields.
You can designate the area as a Special Flood Hazard Area.
The mortgage block drawing is called from the mortgage.dwg file
located in the \SUPPORT directory and can easily be opened and
edited within Autodesk Field Survey, allowing you to alter the size,
text, or any other aspect of the drawing to fit your needs. However,
changes are usually unnecessary since the original .dwg file places this
block to fit a standard 8½ x 11 or 8½ x 14 drawing. All inputs are saved
and recalled from a mortgage.ini file located in the \LSP directory.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: MORTGAGE

Text Style

Function
This command creates or modifies named styles and sets the current
style for text in your drawing.

Text Style
241
 1 Under Style Name, you can display text style names, add new styles,
and rename and delete existing styles.
The list contains defined style names and displays the current style by
default. To change the current style, select another style from the list,
or choose New to create a new style.

n New: This option displays the New Text Style dialog box and
automatically supplies the name "stylen" (where n is the number of
the supplied style) for the current settings. You can accept the
default or enter a name and choose OK to apply the current style
settings to the new style name.
n Rename: This option displays the Rename Text Style dialog box.
The text style listed is renamed when you enter a new name and
choose OK.
n Delete: This option deletes a text style. Select a name from the list
to make it current, and then choose Delete.

2 Under Font you can change the style’s font.

n Font Name: This field lists the font family name for all registered
TrueType fonts and all compiled shape (SHX) fonts in the
Autodesk Field Survey Fonts directory. When you select a name
from the list, the program reads the file for the specified font. The
file’s character definitions are loaded automatically unless the file
is already in use by another text style. You can define several styles
that use the same font.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

242
 n Font Style: This field specifies font character formatting, such as
italic, bold, or regular. When Use Big Font is selected, this option
changes to Big Font Name and is used to select a Big Font file name.
n Height: This field sets the text height based on the value you enter.
If you enter 0.0, the program prompts for the text height each time
you enter text using this style. Entering a height greater than 0.0
sets the text height for this style. TrueType fonts can be displayed at
a smaller height than SHX fonts with the same height setting. The
text height you specify may not be accurately represented by
uppercase letters in TrueType fonts supplied with Autodesk Field
Survey.
n Use Big Font: This option specifies an Asian-language Big Font file.
Use Big Font is available only if you specify an SHX file under Font
Name. Only SHX files are valid file types for creating Big Fonts.

3 Under Effects, you modify characteristics of the font, such as its height,
width factor, and obliquing angle and whether it is displayed upside
down, backwards, or vertically aligned. TrueType fonts using the
effects described in this section might appear bold on the screen.
Onscreen appearance has no effect on plotted output. Fonts are plotted
as specified by applied character formatting.
n Upside Down: This option displays the characters upside down.
n Backwards: This option displays the characters backwards.
n Vertical: This option displays the characters aligned vertically.
Vertical is available only if the selected font supports dual
orientation. Vertical orientation is not available for TrueType fonts.
n Width Factor: This option sets the character spacing. Entering a
value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than
1.0 expands it.
n Oblique Angle: This option sets the obliquing angle of the text.
Entering a value between -85 and 85 makes the text oblique.

4 Under Preview, you can display sample text that changes dynamically
as you change fonts and modify the effects. To change the sample text,
enter characters in the box below the character preview image.
n Preview: This field updates the sample text in the character
preview image according to any changes you’ve made in the dialog
box. Height has no effect in the character preview image because a
very large text height might show little or no text.

Text Style
243
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: STYLE

Set X-Hairs

Function
This command sets the crosshairs either to align with the selected line
or polyline or to a user-specified slope.

Prompts
1 Type new slope or pick entity with slope [Type/<Pick>]: pick a line or
polyline or enter value

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SETXHAIRS

Reset X-Hairs

Function
This command sets the crosshairs alignment to horizontal.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: RESETXHAIRS

Set UCS to World

Function
This command sets the UCS (user coordinate system) to the world
coordinate system. Autodesk Field Survey works exclusively in the
world coordinate system. If you receive a drawing that is not set in the

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

244
 world coordinate system, this command restores it to the world
coordinate system.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: UCS_WORLD

Tablet On/Off

Function
This command toggles the tablet use on and off. Your tablet becomes
the pointing device if toggled on.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: TABLET

Tablet - Calibrate

Function
This command calibrates the digitizer to the coordinate system of a
paper drawing or photograph. Calibration digitizes points on a
drawing or photograph into X,Y coordinates. Calibration can be
performed in model space or paper space.
The paper should be flat, with no bumps or wrinkles, and securely
fastened to the digitizing tablet. The paper can be oriented at any
angle.

Prompts
1 Digitize point #1: digitize a point on the paper drawing
2 Enter coordinates for point #1: specify an X,Y coordinate at the
digitized point
3 Digitize point #2: digitize a point on the paper drawing
4 Enter coordinates for point #2: specify an X,Y coordinate at the
digitized point

Tablet On/Off
245
 5 Digitize point #3 (or RETURN to end): digitize a point on the tablet
or press ENTER to end
6 Enter coordinates for point #3: specify an X,Y coordinate in the
drawing

The points you enter cannot be duplicates. The points need not be the
origin on either axis, and you can enter as many points as you like.
The more points you enter, the more accurate the drawing will be.
If you enter only two points, Autodesk Field Survey automatically
computes an orthogonal transformation. If it is successful, the
command ends.
If you enter three or more points, Autodesk Field Survey computes the
transformation in each of the three transformation types (Orthogonal,
Affine, and Projective) to determine which best fits the calibration
points. If you enter more than four points, computing the best-fitting
projective transformation can take a long time. You can cancel the
process by pressing ESC.
When the computations are complete, the program displays a table
with the number of calibration points and a column for each
transformation type. For a description of the information contained in
the table, see Section 8 below.
If there have been no failures of projection transformation, the
program prompts you to choose a transformation type.
7 Enter transformation type [Orthogonal/Affine/Projective/Repeat table]
<Repeat>: enter an option or press ENTER
Only transformation types for which the outcome was Success, Exact,
or Canceled are included in this prompt. A projective transformation
can be specified even if it was canceled. Autodesk Field Survey uses the
result computed at the time you canceled.
n Orthogonal: Specifies translation, uniform scaling, and rotation
with two calibration points. Use Orthogonal for dimensionally
accurate paper drawings and paper drawings in which the portion to
be digitized is long and narrow, with most points confined to single
lines.
n Affine: Specifies arbitrary linear transformation in two dimensions
consisting of translation, independent X- and Y-scaling, rotation,
and skewing with three calibration points. Use Affine when
horizontal dimensions in a paper drawing are stretched with respect
to vertical dimensions, and lines that are supposed to be parallel
actually are parallel. The RMS (root mean square) error reported

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

246
 after calibration measures how close the program has come to
making a perfect fit. Affine should be used if the RMS is small.
n Projective: Specifies a transformation equivalent to a perspective
projection of one plane in space onto another plane with four
calibration points. A projective transformation provides a limited
form of what cartographers call rubber sheeting, in which different
portions of the tablet surface are stretched by varying amounts.
Straight lines map into straight lines. Parallel lines do not
necessarily stay parallel.
Projective transformation corrects parallel lines that appear to
converge.
n Repeat Table: Redisplays the computed table, which rates the
transformation types.

8 The Transformation Table reports the number of calibration points

and provides information about each transformation type.
n Outcome of Fit: Reports the outcome of fit for each of the
transformation types. If the outcome of fit is not Success or Exact
for any of the transformation types, the program reports failure of
the entire calibration process and ends the command. The
remaining entries in each column are blank unless Outcome of Fit is
Success.
Exact: Indicates the correct number of points for a valid
transformation.
Success: Indicates more than enough points, thus the program
succeeded in fitting a transformation to the data.
Impossible: Indicates not enough points.
Failure: Indicates enough points, but the program was unable to fit
a transformation to the points, usually because some points were
colinear or coincident.
Canceled: Indicates that the fit process was canceled. This outcome
occurs only with the projective transformation.
n RMS Error: Reports the RMS (root mean square) error, which
measures how close the program has come to finding a perfect fit.
The goal is the smallest possible RMS error.
n Standard Deviation: Reports the standard deviation of the
residuals. If it is near zero, the residual at each calibration point is
about the same.

Tablet - Calibrate
247
 n Largest Residual/At Point: Reports the point at which the
mapping is least accurate. The residual is the distance between
where the point was mapped during transformation and where it
would be mapped if the fit were perfect. The distance is given in
the current linear units.
n Second-Largest Residual/At Point: Reports the point at which
the mapping is second-least accurate. The residual is the distance
between where the point was mapped during transformation and
where it would be mapped if the fit were perfect. The distance is
given in the current linear units.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings

➤ Prerequisite: Tablet driver installed and tablet turned on
➤ Keyboard Command: TABLET

Tablet - Configure

Function
This command designates or realigns the tablet menu areas or
designates a small portion of a large tablet as a screen pointing area.

Prompts
1 Enter number of tablet menus desired (0-4) <current>: Enter a value
or press ENTER
If tablet menus are in use and the same number of menus is selected,
Autodesk Field Survey prompts:
2 Do you want to realign tablet menus? [Yes/No] <N>: enter y or n, or
press ENTER
3 Digitize upper-left corner of menu area n: digitize a point (1)
4 Digitize lower-left corner of menu area n: digitize a point (2)
5 Digitize lower-right corner of menu area n: digitize a point (3)

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

248
 In the prompt, n is the menu number (1-4).
The printed menu form must be affixed to the tablet surface, and the
requested points must be digitized. The set of three points must form a
90-degree angle. Tablet menu areas can be skewed at any angle.
6 Enter the number of columns for menu area n: enter a positive value
7 Enter the number of rows for menu area n: enter a positive value
After all interaction concerning tablet menus is complete, Autodesk
Field Survey displays the following prompt:
8 Do you want to re-specify the screen pointing area? [Yes/No] <N>:
enter y or n, or press ENTER
If you enter y, the program displays the following prompts:
9 Digitize lower-left corner of the pointing area: digitize a point
10 Digitize upper-right corner of the pointing area: digitize a point
A small portion of the tablet’s surface is designated as the fixed screen
pointing area. Autodesk Field Survey displays the following prompt:
11 Do you want to specify the Floating Screen Pointing area? [Yes/No]
<N>: enter y or n, or press ENTER
If you responded y to the previous prompt, respond to the following
prompt:
12 Do you want the Floating Screen Area to be the same size as the Fixed
Screen Pointing Area? [Yes/No] <Y>: enter y or n, or press ENTER
If you responded n to the previous prompt, respond to the following
prompts:
13 Digitize lower-left corner of the Floating Screen pointing area: digitize
a point
14 Digitize upper-right corner of the Floating Screen pointing area:
digitize a point
15 Respond to the following prompt:
The F12 Key will toggle the Floating Screen Area ON and OFF. Would
you also like to specify a button to toggle the Floating Screen Area?
[Yes/No] <N>: enter y or n, or press ENTER
If you responded y to the previous prompt, respond to the following
prompt:
Press any non-pick button on the digitizer puck that you wish to
designate as the toggle for the Floating Screen Area.

Tablet - Configure
249
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings
➤ Prerequisite: Tablet driver installed and tablet turned on.
➤ Keyboard Command: TABLET

Toolbars

Function
This command allows you to display and hide toolbars. Click on a
toolbar name and press the Show or Hide button.

n Show: Turns on the selected toolbar. If the toolbar is already

visible, then this does nothing.
n Hide: Turns off the selected toolbar. If the toolbars is already
hidden, then this does nothing. If the toolbar is floating, you can
also turn it off by clicking the x in the upper right corner.
n Exit: Exits this command

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: TBARCFG

Options

Function
This command allows you to customize the Autodesk Field Survey
settings.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

250
 Files Tab

Under the Files Tab, you specify the directories in which the program
searches for support, driver, menu, and other files. You can also specify
optional, settings such as which dictionary to use for checking spelling.
Each option under the Files Tab displays a list of the directories and
files used by Autodesk Field Survey. To specify a location for a directory
or file, double-click the directory or file from the list. Choose Browse
and use the Browse for Folder dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box) to locate the directory or file you want to use.
1 Support File Search Path: Specifies the directories in which Autodesk
Field Survey searches for support files. In addition to the files required
to run the program, you can include files for fonts, menus, drawings to
insert, linetypes, and hatch patterns in the support file search path.
2 Device Driver File Search Path: Specifies where the program looks for
device drivers for the video display, pointing devices, printers, and
plotters.
3 Miscellaneous File Names: Specifies the names and locations of
various types of files.

Options
251
 n Menu File: Specifies the location of the menu file.
n Default Internet Location: Specifies the default Internet location
used by both the Connect to Internet option on the Help menu,
and the Launch Browser button on the Standard toolbar.

4 Text Editor, Dictionary, and Font File Names: Specifies a number of

optional settings.
n Text Editor Application: Specifies the text editor application to
use for editing mtext objects.
n Custom Dictionary File: Specifies a custom dictionary to use (if
you have one).
n Alternate Font File: Specifies the location of the font file to use if
Autodesk Field Survey cannot locate the original font and an
alternate font is not specified in the font mapping file. If you choose
Browse, the program displays the Alternate Font dialog box, from
which you can choose an available font.
n Font Mapping File: Specifies the location of the file that defines
how Autodesk Field Survey should convert fonts it cannot locate.

5 Print File, Spooler, and Prolog Section Names: Specifies settings

related to plotting.
n Plot File Name For Legacy Plotting Scripts: Specifies a default
name for the temporary plot files used with plotting scripts created
with earlier versions of Autodesk products. The default name is the
drawing name plus .plt file name. The default name used with
Autodesk Field Survey drawings is the drawing name-layout name
plus the .plt file name extension. Some plotting device drivers,
however, use a different plot file extension name. This option only
affects the default plot file name used for plotting scripts created
with earlier versions of Autodesk products.
n Print Spool Executable: Specifies the application to use for print
spooling. You can enter the executable file name as well as any
command line arguments you want to use. For example, you can
enter myspool.bat %s to spool plot files to myspool.bat and have a
unique plot file name automatically generated.

6 Printer Support File Path: Specifies search path settings for printer
support files.
n Print Spooler File Location: Specifies the path for print spool files.
Autodesk Field Survey writes the plot to this location.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

252
 n Printer Configuration Search Path: Specifies the path for printer
configuration files (PC3 files).
n Printer Description File Search Path: Specifies the path for
files with a .pmp file extension, or printer description files.
n Plot Style Table Search Path: Specifies the path for files with an
.stb or .ctb extension, or plot style table files (both named plot style
tables and color-dependent plot style tables).

7 Search Path for ObjectDBX Applications: Specifies the path for

ObjectDBX ™ application files. You can enter multiple URL addresses
under this option. (Multiple URLs should be separated by a semi-
colon.) Autodesk Field Survey searches the specified URLs when an
associated ObjectDBX application cannot be located. Only URL
addresses can be entered in this option.
8 Automatic Save File Location: Specifies the path for the file created
when you select Automatic Save on the Open and Save tab.
9 Drawing Template File Location: Specifies the path for the template
files used by the setup wizards.
10 Log File Location: Specifies the path for the log file created when you
select Maintain a Log File on the Open and Save tab.
11 Temporary Drawing File Location: Specifies the location Autodesk
Field Survey uses to store temporary files. The program creates
temporary files on disk and then deletes them when you exit the
program. If you plan to run the program from a write-protected
directory (for example, if you are working on a network or opening
files from a CD), specify an alternate location for your temporary files.
The directory you specify must not be write-protected.
12 You use buttons to manipulate the files and paths.
n Browse: Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box,
depending on what you selected in the List of Folders and Files.
n Add: Adds a search path for the selected directory.
n Remove: Removes the selected search path or file.
n Move Up: Moves the selected search path above the preceding
search path.
n Move Down: Moves the selected search path below the following
search path.
n Set Current: Makes the selected project or spelling dictionary
current.

Options
253
 Display Tab

1 Under Window Elements, you control display settings specific to the

Autodesk Field Survey drawing environment.
n Display Scroll Bars in Drawing Window: Specifies whether to
display scroll bars at the bottom and right sides of the drawing area.
n Colors: Displays the Color Options dialog box. Use this dialog box
to specify the colors of elements in the window.
n Fonts: Displays the Command Line Window Font dialog box. Use
this dialog box to specify the font for the command line text.

2 Under Layout Elements, you control options for existing and new
layouts. A layout is a paper space environment in which you can set up
drawings for plotting.
n Display Layout and Model Tabs: Specifies whether to display the
layout and Model tabs at the bottom of the drawing area.
n Display Margins: Specifies whether margins are displayed in a
layout. Margins appear as dashed lines. Objects drawn outside of the
margins are clipped or omitted when the drawing is plotted.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

254
 n Display Paper Background: Specifies whether a representation of
the specified paper size is displayed in a layout. The paper size and
plot scale determine the size of the paper background.
n Display Paper Shadow: Specifies whether a shadow is displayed
around the paper background in a layout.
n Show Page Setup Dialog for New Layouts: Specifies whether the
Page Setup dialog box is displayed when you create a new layout.
Use this dialog box to set options related to paper and plot settings.
n Create Viewport in New Layouts: Specifies whether a viewport is
created when you create a new layout.

3 Under Display Resolution, you control the quality of the display of

objects. If you set high values to improve display quality, the impact
on performance is significant.
n Arc and Circle Smoothness: Controls the smoothness of circles,
arcs, and ellipses. A higher number produces smoother objects, but
requires more time to regenerate, pan, and zoom the objects. You
can improve performance by setting this option to a low value such
as 100 for drawing, and increasing the value for rendering. The valid
range is 1 to 20,000. The default setting is 100. This setting is saved
in the drawing. To change the default for new drawings, consider
specifying this setting in the template files on which you base your
new drawings.
n Segments in a Polyline Curve: Sets the number of line segments to
be generated for each polyline curve. The higher the number, the
greater the performance impact. Set this option to a low value such
as 4 to optimize performance for drawing. Values range from -32767
to 32767. The default setting is 8. This setting is saved in the
drawing.

4 Under Display Performance, you control display settings that affect

Autodesk Field Survey performance.
n Apply Solid Fill: Controls whether solid fills in objects are
displayed. Objects with solid fill include multilines, traces, solids, all
hatches (including solid-fill), and wide polylines. You must
regenerate the drawing by using REGEN for this setting to take
effect. This setting is saved in the drawing. Clear this option to
optimize performance.
n Show Text Boundary Frame Only: Displays the frames for text
objects instead of displaying the text objects. After you select or
clear this option, you must use REGEN to update the display. This

Options
255
 setting is saved in the drawing. Select this option to optimize
performance.

5 Under Crosshair Size, you control the size of the crosshairs. The valid
range is from 1 to 100 percent of the total screen. At 100 percent, the
ends of the crosshairs are never visible. When the size is decreased to
99 percent or below, the crosshairs have a finite size, and the ends of
the crosshairs are visible at the edge of the drawing area. The default
size is 5 percent.

Open and Save Tab

Under the Open and Save Tab, you control options that relate to
opening and saving files.

1 Under File Save, you control settings related to saving a file in

Autodesk Field Survey.
n Save As: Displays the valid file formats used when saving a file with
SAVE and SAVEAS. The file format selected for this option is the
default format that all drawings are saved as when you use SAVE or

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

256
 SAVEAS. Saving an Autodesk Field Survey file to any DXF format
affects performance. Set the Save As option to Field Survey 2000
Drawing to optimize performance while saving.
n Save a Thumbnail Preview Image: Specifies whether an image of
the drawing should be displayed in the Preview area of the Select
File dialog box.
n Incremental Save Percentage: Sets the percentage of potential
wasted space in a drawing file. When the specified percentage is
reached, the program performs a full save instead of an
incremental save. Full saves eliminate wasted space. If you set
Incremental Save Percentage to 0, every save is a full save.
Although incremental saves increase the size of your drawing,
avoid setting a very low value. Low values degrade performance
because the program performs time-consuming full saves more
often. For optimum performance, set the value to 50. If hard disk
space is scarce, set the value to 25. If you set the value to 20 or less,
performance of the SAVE and SAVEAS commands slows
significantly.

2 File Safety Precautions settings help you avoid data loss and detect
errors.
n Automatic Save: Saves your drawing automatically at the interval
you specify. You can specify the location of all Autosave files by
using the SAVEFILEPATH system variable. SAVEFILE (read-only)
stores the name of the Autosave file.
n Minutes Between Saves: Specifies how often the drawing is saved
when using Automatic Save. The value is stored in SAVETIME.
n Create Backup Copy with Each Save: Specifies whether a backup
copy of a drawing is created when you save the drawing. The
backup copy is created in the same location as the drawing. The
ISAVEBAK system variable controls whether a backup copy of the
drawing is created.
n Maintain a Log File: Specifies whether the contents of the text
window are written to a log file. To specify the location and name of
the log file, use the Files tab in the Options dialog box.
n File Extension for Temporary Files: Specifies a unique extension
that allows you to identify your temporary files in a network
environment. The default extension is .ac$.

Options
257
 3 Under File Open, you control settings that relate to recently used files
and open files.
n Number of Recently Used Files to List: Controls the number of
recently used files that are listed in the File menu for quick access.
Valid values are 0 to 9.
n Display Full Path In Title: Displays the full path of the active
drawing in the drawing’s title bar, or in the Autodesk Field Survey
title bar if the drawing is maximized.

4 Under External References (Xrefs), you control the settings that relate
to editing and loading external references.
n Demand Load Xrefs: Controls demand loading of xrefs. Demand
loading improves performance by loading only the parts of the
referenced drawing needed to regenerate the current drawing.
External Reference File Demand Load is also controlled by the
XLOADCTL system variable.
Disabled: Turns off demand loading.
Enabled: Turns on demand loading and improves performance.
Select the Enabled setting to enhance the loading process when you
are working with clipped xrefs that contain a spatial or layer index.
When this option is selected, other users cannot edit the file while it
is being referenced.
Enabled with Copy: Turns on demand loading but uses a copy of
the referenced drawing. Other users can edit the original drawing.

n Retain Changes to Xref Layers: Saves changes to layer properties

and states for xref-dependent layers. When the drawing is reloaded,
the properties currently assigned to xref-dependent layers are
retained. This setting is saved in the drawing.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

258
 Plotting Tab

Under the Plotting Tab, you control options related to plotting.

1 Under Default Plot Settings For New Drawings, you control default
plotting settings for new drawings or drawings created in AutoCAD
Release 14 or earlier that have never been saved in Field Survey 2000
format.
n Use As Default Output Device: Sets the default output device for
new drawings and for drawings created in AutoCAD Release 14 or
earlier that have never been saved in Field Survey 2000 format. The
list displays any plotter configuration files (PC3) found in the
plotter configuration search path and any system printers that are
configured in the system.
n Use Last Successful Plot Settings: Sets the plotting settings
according to the settings of the last successful plot.
n Add or Configure Plotters: Displays the Autodesk Plotter Manager
(a Windows system window). You can add or configure a plotter
with the Autodesk Plotter Manager.

Options
259
 2 Under General Plot Options, you control options that relate to the
general plotting environment including paper size settings, system
printer alert behavior, and OLE objects in an Autodesk Field Survey
drawing.
n Keep the Layout Paper Size If Possible: Uses the paper size
specified on the Layout Settings tab in the Page Setup dialog box
under the File menu as long as the selected output device can plot
to this paper size. If the selected output device cannot plot to this
paper size, the program displays a warning message and uses the
paper size specified either in the plotter configuration file (PC3) or
in the default system settings if the output device is a system
printer. You can also set Keep the Layout Paper Size If Possible by
setting PAPERUPDATE to 0.
n Use the Plot Device Paper Size: Uses the paper size specified either
in the plotter configuration file (PC3) or in the default system
settings if the output device is a system printer. You can also set Use
the Plot Device Paper Size by setting PAPERUPDATE to 1.
n System Printer Spool Alert: Determines whether to alert you if the
plotted drawing is spooled through a system printer because of an
input or output port conflict.
Always Alert (And Log Errors): Alerts you and always logs an
error when the plotted drawing spools through a system printer.
Alert First Time Only (And Log Errors): Alerts you once and
always logs an error when the plotted drawing spools through a
system printer.
Never Alert (And Log First Error): Never alerts you and logs
only the first error when the plotted drawing spools through a
system printer.
Never Alert (Do Not Log Errors): Never alerts you or logs an error
when the plotted drawing spools through a system printer.

n OLE Plot Quality: Determines the quality of plotted OLE objects.

The values are Line Art, Text, Graphics, Photograph, and High
Quality Photograph.
n Use OLE Application When Plotting OLE Objects: Launches
the application used to create the OLE object when plotting a
drawing with OLE objects. You can use this option if you want to
optimize the quality of plotted OLE objects. This setting is saved
in the drawing. You can also control this option by using the
OLESTARTUP system variable.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

260
 n Hide System Printer: Controls whether Windows system printers
are displayed in the Plot and Page Setup dialog boxes under the File
menu. This option hides standard Windows system printers only.
You can control the size of the list of devices in the Plot and Page
Setup dialog boxes by moving a device’s PC3 file out of the Plotters
directory and its subdirectories.

3 Under Default Plot Style Behavior, you control options related to plot
style behavior in all drawings. Changing the default plot style behavior
using the Options dialog box does not affect the current drawing. A
plot style is a collection of property settings defined in a plot style
table and applied when the drawing is plotted. The default setting is
Use Color Dependent Plot Styles. The plot style list on the Object
Properties toolbar is disabled by default. You enable the list after you
select the Use Named Plot Styles option and open a new drawing. You
can also control Default Plot Style Behavior by using the
PSTYLEPOLICY system variable.
n Use Color Dependent Plot Styles: Uses color-dependent plot styles
in both new drawings and drawings created in earlier versions of
Autodesk products. Color-dependent plot styles use the numbers
from the color index to create a plot style table with a .ctb file
extension. Each color is defined by a name or number ranging from
1 to 255. You can assign each color number to a different pen on a
pen plotter to achieve different property settings in the plotted
drawing. If this option is selected, a plot style is created for each
color setting. You can also control Use Color Dependent Plot Styles
by setting the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable to 1.
If you want to change the default plot style behavior for a drawing,
select this option or Use Named Plot Styles before opening or
creating a drawing. Changing the default plot style behavior using
the Options dialog box affects only new drawings or drawings
created in an earlier release of an Autodesk product that have never
been saved in Field Survey 2000 format. This setting is saved with
the drawing. Once a drawing is saved with Use Color Dependent
Plot Styles as the default, you can change the default to Use Named
Plot Styles with a migration utility with a migration utility.
However, once a drawing is saved with Use Named Plot Styles as the
default, you cannot change it to Use Color Dependent Plot Styles.
n Use Named Plot Styles: Uses named plot styles in both new
drawings and drawings created in earlier versions of Autodesk
products. Autodesk Field Survey plots the drawing according to the
property settings you specify in the plot style definition. The plot

Options
261
 style is defined in the plot style table attached to the layout or
viewport. Named plot style tables are files with the file extension
.stb. You can also control Use Named Plot Styles by setting the
PSTYLEPOLICY system variable to 0.
If you want to change the default plot style behavior for a drawing,
select this option or Use Color Dependent Plot Styles before opening
or creating a drawing. Changing the default plot style behavior
using the Options dialog box affects only new drawings or drawings
created in an earlier release of an Autodesk product that have never
been saved in Field Survey 2000 format. This setting is saved with
the drawing. Once a drawing is saved with Use Color Dependent
Plot Styles as the default, you can change the default to Use Named
Plot Styles with a migration utility. However, once a drawing is
saved with Use Named Plot Styles as the default, you cannot change
it to Use Color Dependent Plot Styles.
n Default Plot Style Table: Specifies the default plot style table to
attach to new drawings. A plot style table is a file with a .ctb or an
.stb extension that includes and defines plot styles. If you are using
color-dependent plot styles, this option lists all color dependent
plot style tables found in the search path as well as the value of
None. If you are using named plot styles, this option lists all named
plot styles tables.
n Default Plot Style for Layer 0: Sets the default plot style for Layer
0 for new drawings or drawings created with earlier releases of an
Autodesk product that have never been saved in Field Survey 2000
format. The list displays the default value Normal and alphabetically
displays any plot styles defined in the currently loaded plot style
table.
n Default Plot Style for Objects: Sets the default plot style that is
assigned when you create new objects. The list displays a BYLAYER,
BYBLOCK, and Normal style, and it alphabetically displays any plot
styles defined in the currently loaded plot style table.
n Add or Edit Plot Style Tables: Displays the Autodesk Plot Style
Table Manager (a Windows Explorer window). You can create or
edit plot style tables with the Autodesk Plot Style Table Manager.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

262
 System Tab

Under the System Tab, you control Autodesk Field Survey system
settings.

1 Under Current Pointing Device, you control options that relate to the
pointing device. This field displays a list of the available pointing
device drivers.
n Current System Pointing Device: Sets the system pointing device
as current.
n Wintab Compatible Digitizer: Sets the Wintab Compatible
Digitizer as current.
n Accept Input From: Specifies whether the program accepts input
from both a mouse and a digitizer or ignores mouse input when a
digitizer is set.

Options
263
 2 Under General Options, you control general options that relate to
system settings.
n Single-Drawing Compatibility Mode: Specifies whether a single-
drawing interface (SDI) or a multi-drawing interface (MDI) is
enabled. If you select this option, Autodesk Field Survey opens only
one drawing at a time. If you clear this option, the program can
open multiple drawings at once.
n Display OLE Properties Dialog: Controls the display of the OLE
Properties dialog box when inserting OLE objects into a drawing.
n Show All Warning Messages: Displays all dialog boxes that include
a Don’t Display This Warning Again option. All dialog boxes with
warning options are displayed regardless of previous settings specific
to each dialog box.
n Beep on Error in User Input: Specifies whether the program
should sound an alarm beep when it detects an invalid entry.
n Allow Long Symbol Names: Determines whether long symbol
names are enabled. Named objects can include up to 255 characters.
Names can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special
character not used by Windows and Autodesk Field Survey for other
purposes. When this option is enabled, long names can be used for
layers, dimension styles, blocks, linetypes, text styles, layouts, UCS
names, views, and viewport configurations. This option is saved in
the drawing.

3 Under Live Enabler Options, you specify how Autodesk Field Survey
checks for Object Enablers. Using Object Enablers, you can display and
use custom objects in Autodesk Field Survey drawings even when the
ObjectARX™ a pplication that created them is unavailable.
n Never: Prevents the program from checking for Object Enablers
regardless of your settings in the Today window.
n When Autodesk Point A is Available in Today: Autodesk Field
Survey checks for Object Enablers only if Autodesk Point A is open
in the Today window. It is not necessary for the Today window to
be open. However, the program checks for Object Enablers only if a
live Internet connection is present.
n Always: Autodesk Field Survey always checks for Object Enablers
regardless of your settings in the Today window.
n Maximum Number of Unsuccessful Checks: Specifies the number
of times Autodesk Field Survey will continue to check for Object
Enablers after unsuccessful attempts.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

264
 User Preferences Tab

Under the User Preferences Tab, you control options that optimize the
way you work in Autodesk Field Survey.

1 Under Windows Standard Behavior you specify whether Windows

behavior is applied when working in Autodesk Field Survey.
n Windows Standard Accelerator Keys: Follows Windows standards
in interpreting keyboard accelerators (for example, CTRL+C equals
COPYCLIP). If this option is cleared, the program interprets
keyboard accelerators by using Autodesk Field Survey standards
rather than Windows standards (for example, CTRL+C equals Cancel,
CTRL+V toggles among the viewports).
n Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area: Controls whether right-clicking
in the drawing area displays a shortcut menu or issues ENTER.
n Right-Click Customization: Displays the Right-Click
Customization dialog box. You can also set Shortcut Menus in
Drawing Area and the right-click customization settings by using
the SHORTCUTMENU system variable.

Options
265
 2 Under Hyperlink, you control settings that relate to the display
properties of hyperlinks.
n Display Hyperlink Cursor and Shortcut Menu: Controls the
display of the hyperlink cursor and shortcut menu. The hyperlink
cursor appears alongside the crosshairs whenever the pointing
device moves over an object that contains a hyperlink. The
hyperlink shortcut menu provides additional options when you
select an object that contains a hyperlink and then right-click in the
drawing area. If this option is cleared, the hyperlink cursor is never
displayed and the Hyperlink option on shortcut menus is not
available (if shortcut menus are enabled).
n Display Hyperlink Tooltip: Controls the display of the Hyperlink
tooltip. If this option is selected, a hyperlink tooltip is displayed
when the pointing device moves over an object that contains a
hyperlink. Display Hyperlink Cursor and Shortcut Menu must be
selected to enable this option

3 Under Priority for Coordinate Data Entry, you control how Autodesk
Field Survey responds to input of coordinate data.
n Running Object Snap: Specifies that running object snaps override
coordinate entry at all times. You can also set OSNAPCOORD to 0 to
enable Running Object Snap.
n Keyboard Entry: Specifies that coordinate entry overrides running
object snaps at all times. You can also set OSNAPCOORD to 1 to
enable Keyboard Entry.
n Keyboard Entry Except Scripts: Specifies that coordinate entry
overrides running object snaps, except in scripts. You can also set
OSNAPCOORD to 2 to enable Keyboard Entry Except Scripts.

4 Under Object Sorting Methods, you determine the sort order of objects.
n Object Selection: Controls how objects are sorted during selection.
If this option is selected, Autodesk Field Survey sorts objects
available for selection from those created first to those created last.
If two overlapping objects are chosen during object selection, the
program recognizes the newest object as the selected object. If this
option is cleared, object selection is determined by a random sort
order. This setting is saved in the drawing.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

266
n Object Snap: Controls how objects are sorted when using Object
Snap. If this option is selected, Autodesk Field Survey sorts objects
available for selection from those created first to those created last.
If two overlapping objects are chosen when using Object Snap, the
program recognizes the newest object as the object to snap to. If this
option is cleared, Object Snap is determined by a random sort order.
This setting is saved in the drawing.
n Redraws: Controls how objects are sorted when using the REDRAW
command. If this option is selected, the program sorts and redraws
objects in the drawing from those created first to those created last.
If this option is cleared, the redrawing of objects is determined by a
random sort order. This setting is saved in the drawing.
n Regens: Controls how objects are sorted when using the REGEN
command. If this option is selected, the program sorts and
regenerates objects in the drawing from those created first to those
created last. If this option is cleared, the regeneration of objects is
determined by a random sort order. This setting is saved in the
drawing.
n Plotting: Controls how objects are sorted during plotting. If this
option is selected, the program sorts and plots objects in the
drawing from those created first to those created last. If this option
is cleared, the plotting of objects is determined by a random sort
order. This setting is saved in the drawing.
n PostScript Output: Controls how objects are sorted in PostScript
output. If this option is selected, the program sorts and exports
objects in the drawing from those created first to those created last.
If this option is cleared, the exporting of objects is determined by a
random sort order. This setting is saved in the drawing.
n Lineweight Settings: Displays the Lineweight Settings dialog box.
Use this dialog box to set lineweight options, such as display
properties and defaults, and also to set the current lineweight.

Options
267
 Drafting Tab

Under the Drafting Tab, you specify a number of general editing

options.

1 Under AutoSnap Settings, you control settings that relate to object

snaps. Using object snaps, you can locate exact points and planes
including endpoints, midpoints, centers, nodes, quadrants,
intersections, insertion points, and perpendicular and tangent planes.
n Marker: Controls the display of the AutoSnap™ marker . The
marker is a geometric symbol that displays the object snap location
when the crosshairs move over a snap point on an object. You can
also enable the Marker by setting AUTOSNAP to 1.
n Magnet: Sets the AutoSnap magnet on or off. The magnet is an
automatic movement of the crosshairs that locks the crosshairs onto
the nearest snap point. You can also enable the Magnet by setting
AUTOSNAP to 4.
n Display AutoSnap Tooltip: Controls the display of the AutoSnap
tooltip. The tooltip is a text flag that describes which part of the
object you are snapping to. You can turn object snaps on and off

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

268
 from the Object Snap tab in the Drafting Settings dialog box. You
can also enable the Display AutoSnap tooltip option by setting
AUTOSNAP to 2.
n Display AutoSnap Aperture Box: Controls the display of the
AutoSnap aperture box. The aperture box is a box that appears
inside the crosshairs when you snap to an object. You can also set
the Display AutoSnap Aperture Box by using the APBOX system
variable.
n AutoSnap Marker Color: Specifies the color of the AutoSnap
marker.

2 Under AutoSnap Marker Size, you set the display size for the AutoSnap
marker. Values range from 1 to 20 pixels.
3 Under Tracking Settings, you control the settings that relate to tracking
behavior.
n Display Polar Tracking Vector: Sets polar tracking behavior on or
off. With polar tracking, you can draw lines along angles relative to
a drawing command From or To point. Polar angles are 90-degree
divisors, such as 45, 30, and 15 degrees.
n Display AutoTrack Tooltip: Controls the display of the AutoTrack
tooltip. The tooltip is a text flag that displays the tracking
coordinates. You can turn Object Snap Tracking on and off on the
Object Snap tab in the Drafting Settings dialog box. You can also
enable the AutoTrack tooltip by setting AUTOSNAP to 32.

4 Under Aperture Size, you set the display size for the Autosnap
aperture. When Display AutoSnap Aperture Box is selected (or when
APBOX is set to 1), the aperture box is displayed in the center of the
crosshairs when you snap to an object. The size of the aperture
determines how close to a snap point you can be before the magnet
locks the aperture box to the snap point. The smaller the aperture,
the closer you must be to the snap point to activate the magnet.
Values range from 1 to 50 pixels. You can also set Aperture Size by
using the APERTURE system variable.

Options
269
 Selection Tab

Under the Selection Tab, you control settings that relate to object
selection methods.

1 Under Selection Modes, you determine the methods of selecting

objects.
n Noun/Verb Selection: Allows you to select an object before starting
a command. The command affects the previously selected object or
objects. You can also set this option by using the PICKFIRST system
variable.
You can use many editing and inquiry commands with noun/verb
selection, including: ALIGN, DVIEW, PROPERTIES, ARRAY, ERASE,
ROTATE, BLOCK, EXPLODE, SCALE, CHANGE, LIST, STRETCH,
CHPROP, MIRROR, WBLOCK, COPY, and MOVE.

n Use Shift to Add to Selection: Adds or removes an object to the

selection set when you press SHIFT and select an object. To clear a
selection set quickly, draw a selection window in a blank area of the

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

270
 drawing. You can also set this option by using the PICKADD system
variable.
n Press and Drag: Draws a selection window by selecting a point and
dragging the pointing device to a second point. If this option is not
selected, you can draw a selection window by selecting two separate
points with the pointing device. You can also set this option by
using the PICKDRAG system variable.
n Implied Windowing: Initiates the drawing of a selection window
when you select a point outside an object. Drawing the selection
window from left to right selects objects inside the window’s
boundaries. Drawing from right to left selects objects within and
crossing the window’s boundaries. You can also set this option by
using the PICKAUTO system variable.
n Object Grouping: Selects all objects in a group when you select one
object in that group. With GROUP you can create and name a set of
objects for selection. You can also set this option by setting the
PICKSTYLE system variable to 1.
n Associative Hatch: Determines which objects are selected when
you select an associative hatch. If this option is selected,
boundary objects are also selected when you select an associative
hatch. You can also set this option by setting the PICKSTYLE
system variable to 2.

2 Under Pickbox Size, you control the display size of the Autodesk Field
Survey pickbox. The pickbox is the object selection tool that appears in
editing commands. The default size is set to 3 pixels; values range from
0 to 20. You can also set the Pickbox Size by using the PICKBOX
system variable. If you use the command line to set Pickbox Size,
values range from 0 to 32767.
3 Under Grips, you control the settings that relate to grips. Grips are
small squares displayed on an object after it has been selected.
n Enable Grips: Controls whether grips are displayed on an object
after you select it. You can edit an object with grips by selecting a
grip and using the shortcut menu. Enabling grips in a drawing
significantly affects performance. Clear this option to optimize
performance.
n Enable Grips within Blocks: Controls how grips are displayed on a
block after you select it. If this option is selected, Autodesk Field
Survey displays all grips for each object in the block. If this option is
cleared, the program displays one grip located at the insertion point
of the block. You can edit an object with grips by selecting a grip
and using the shortcut menu.

Options
271
 n Unselected Grip Color: Determines the color of an unselected grip.
If you choose Other from the color list, Autodesk Field Survey
displays the Select Color dialog box. the program displays an
unselected grip as the outline of a small square. You can also set
Unselected Grip Color by using the GRIPCOLOR system variable.
n Selected Grip Color: Determines the color of a selected grip. If
you choose Other from the color list, Autodesk Field Survey
displays the Select Color dialog box. The program displays a
selected grip as a filled small square. You can also set Selected Grip
Color by using the GRIPHOT system variable.

4 Under Grip Size, you control the display size of grips. The default size
is set to 3 pixels; values range from 1 to 20. You can also set the Grip
Size by using the GRIPSIZE system variable. If you use the command
line to set Grip Size, values range from 1 to 255.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PREFERENCES

Configure

Function
This command allows you to set the default settings that are used each
time you start a new drawing or load an existing drawing. These
settings are stored in *.ini files in the Autodesk Field Survey directory.
Configure restores the current drawing settings to these default
settings.

1 In the Configure dialog box you choose between General Settings,

Drawing Setup, and COGO-Design options.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

272
2 In the General Settings dialog box you can set options for Autodesk
Field Survey.

Under General, you can choose options relevant to points, angles, and
start up.
■ Use Startup Wizard: This option controls whether the wizard
appears when you create a new drawing.
■ Generate Report Log: This option allows output from several
commands to be accumulated in a report buffer. Any report that is
displayed in the standard report viewer is also added to the report
log. While activated, the report log resides in the lower left corner of
the desktop as a minimized title bar displaying the number of lines
in the report buffer. To view the report log, pick the maximize icon
on this title bar. You can edit the report log, save it to a file, or print
it. To quickly turn the report log on and off, you can type REPORT
at the command prompt, which toggles the report log on/off.
■ Save Drawing INI Files: This option creates an .ini file with the
same name as the .dwg file to store the project data files for the
drawing.
■ Put Data Files in DWG Directory: This option sets the Data Path
to the directory of the drawing. The Data Path is the default
directory for data files such as the coordinate file (.crd).

Configure
273
 ■ Auto Zoom Center for New Points: This option will zoom center
on new points.
■ Ignore Zero Elevs: This option causes entities with zero elevations
to be excluded from calculations, etc.
■ Use South Azimuth: This option allows you to use a south azimuth
for calculations.
■ Use Dview Twist Angle: This option keeps text horizontal to a
twist screen view.
■ Point Layer: You can assign a layer name for points.

Under Support Paths, you must determine paths for file allocation
and retrieval.
■ Data Path: You determine where data files (*.crd, *.grd, etc.)
are stored.
■ LSP Path: You determine where command files (*.dcl, *.arx, etc.)
are stored.
■ Program Path: You determine where *.exe files are located.

WARNING! Changing this path can render Autodesk Field Survey

non-functional.

■ Support Path: You determine where auxiliary *.dwg files (point

symbols, linetypes, etc.) are stored.
■ MS Excel Path: You determine the path for the *.exe file efor MS
Excel is located.

Under Object Linking, you can set reactors to the drawing entities.
■ Link Points with CRD File: This option attaches a reactor to the
point entities so that any change to the entities such as MOVE or
ROTATE will update the coordinates in the coordinate file.
■ Link Linework with Points: This option attaches reactors to line
and polyline entities that are drawn by point number so that
moving the points automatically moves the linework.
■ Link Labels with Linework: This option applies to
bearing/distance annotation. This link updates the annotation when
the linework is modified.
■ Group Point Entities: This option joins the three entities of a point
(attribute block, symbol, node). For each point, selecting any one of
these entities selects all three entities for the point.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

274
Under CRD File Pt# Format, you can set the point number format for
coordinate files as either numeric only or alphanumeric.
■ Numeric Only: This options allows for numeric point numbers
only.
■ Alphanumeric: This option allows point numbers to contain
characters, for example 5A, 5B, and 5C.

Under Database Format you choose between Microsoft Access 97 or

2000 format. This only applies to new .MDB files created by Autodesk
Field Survey
Under Report Print Specifications, you determine formatting for the
Standard Report Viewer.
■ Use Degree Symbol in Reports: This option lets you choose
between using the degree circle symbol and a “ d” for degree angles
in the report. The “ d” can be used for printers that don't handle the
degree circle symbol.
■ Use Print Settings: This option allows you to use settings on the
Plot Settings Tab under Plot in the File menu.
■ Use Page#: This option adds a page number to the bottom of each
page in the report.
■ Text Size: This option specifies text size for the reports.
■ Lines/Page: This option specifies the number of lines per page of
the report viewer.
■ Left Margin: This option specifies the left margin of the report.
■ Top Margin: This option specifies the top margin of the report.
n Bottom Margin: This option specifies the bottom margin of the
report.

Under Title Block, you set the height and width of the title block.
Under Contour Options, you set the smoothing and offset parameters.
■ Smooth Contours: This option automatically applies a smoothing
factor to the calculated contour line.
■ Low/High slider: This slider bar determines the amount of
smoothing to be applied.
■ Reduce Vertices: This option automatically applies a reduction to
the number of vertices created in the calculating the contour lines.
■ Offset Distance: This option determines offset distance of the
contour lines.

Configure
275
 3 In the Drawing Setup dialog box you have options for setting drawing
parameters, including the plotting scale, size of symbols, label
annotation size, and the drawing mode.

Under Scale and Size Settings, you can determine scale and size of
drawing entities.
n English 1in=?ft: This option tells the program which unit mode to
use. This affects the prompting and reports. When you are working
on a drawing in English units, one unit equals one foot.
■ Metric 1m=?m: This option sets the metric scale to meters only.
■ Horizontal Scale: This option allows you to set the horizontal scale
of the drawing. For example, if the horizontal scale is set to 50, then
1" = 50' in your drawing.
■ Vertical Scale: This option allows you to set the vertical scale of the
drawing.
■ Symbol Size: This value is a scaler that represents the size on the
plot. The Drawing Units are determined by multiplying the scaler by
the horizontal scale. In English mode the scaler represents the plotted
size in inches. In Metric mode, this value is the plotted size in
centimeters. The Symbol Plot Size is not entered in Drawing Units
■ Text Size: This value is a scaler that represents the size on the plot.
The Drawing Units are determined by multiplying the scaler by the
horizontal scale. In English mode the scaler represents the plotted

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

276
 size in inches. In Metric mode, this value is the plotted size in
centimeters. The Text Plot Size is not entered in Drawing Units.
n Line Type Scaler: This option sets the linetype scale by multiplying
this scaler by the horizontal scale.
n Symbol Name: This option allows you to set the default symbol
name for points.

Under Point Prompt-Label Settings, select the options that determine

how the points are to be labeled and how you will be prompted for
point entry.
n Descriptions: Determines whether you are prompted for a point
description when creating points and whether the point
descriptions are labeled in the point block.
n Elevations: Sets prompting and labeling for point elevations.
n Locate on Real Z Axis: Switches between locating points at zero
elevation and at the actual stored elevations.
n Instrument & Rod Height: Turns on prompting for instrument
and rod heights when creating points.
n Symbol Name: Shows file name of the point symbol you have
selected.
n Attribute Layout ID: Controls the location of the point number,
elevation, and description. These attribute layouts are defined in
drawings that are stored in the Autodesk Field Survey Support
directory with the file name of SRVPNO plus the ID number (i.e.
SRVPNO1.DWG, SRVPNO2.DWG, etc.). If you want to change the
attribute positions for a layout ID, then edit the associated SRVPNO
drawing. You can use the MOVE command to arrange the point
attributes. Then you can save your changes in the drawing file.

Under Angle Mode, you determine how angles are entered

and displayed.
■ Bearing: This option sets reporting to bearing mode for any of the
Inquiry commands.
■ Azimuth: This option sets reporting to north based azimuth mode
for any of the Inquiry commands.
■ Gons: This option sets reporting to gons mode for any of the
Inquiry commands.

Configure
277
 Under Vertical Angle Prompt select an option to determine how the
vertical angle is calculated. Vertical Angle Prompt applies to creating
points with commands such as Traverse.
n None: The vertical angle will not be used to calculate point
elevations.
n 0 Degrees Level: The vertical angle is used to calculate elevation
and horizontal distance.
n 90 Degrees Level: The zenith angle is used to calculate elevation
and horizontal distance.
n Elevation Difference: Use the elevation difference to calculate the
elevation.

Under Point Number Settings, select the options that determine

whether you will be prompted for point numbers by the commands
that locate points.
n Point Numbers: When this toggle is checked on, points that are
inserted by Autodesk Field Survey commands are shown with a
point number, and a coordinate is stored in the current coordinate
(.crd) file. When this toggle is off, points are shown with no point
number plotted and no coordinate is stored in the current
coordinate (.crd) file.
n Automatic Point Numbering: If this toggle is checked on,
commands that locate a point will automatically insert a point
number for each point drawn on the screen. If Automatic Point
Numbering toggle is off, commands that locate a point will prompt
for a point number.

4 In the COGO-Design dialog box, you set defaults for coordinate

geometry calculations and design work.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

278
5 In the General Settings dialog box under COGO-Design, you can set
defaults for offsets and stakeout.

Under Options for Calculate Offsets, you must set defaults for offsets.
■ Maximum Offset to Calc: This option allows you to set the
maximum distance an offset will be calculated from an origin.
■ Display Offsets Ahead/Behind Centerline: This option allows you
to display the calculated offsets apart from the centerline.
■ Store Station Text to CRD File: This option allows you to save
station text in the coordinate file with the points.
■ Label Station and Offsets: This option allows you to label the
generated stations and offsets.
■ Sort Report by Stations: This option allows you to sort the output
report by generated stations.
■ Report Point Coordinates: This option allows you to report
coordinates for all points generated.

Under Define Centerline by, you must determine if centerlines are

picked as polylines or as points.

Configure
279
 Under Options for Radial Stakeout, you must set defaults for the report,
including angle format.
■ Maximum Horiz Distance: This option allows you to define the
maximum horizontal distance.
■ Report Slope Distance: This option allows you to include the slope
distance in the report.
■ Use Cut Sheet Format: This option allows you to use the cut sheet
format in the report.
■ Azimuth: This option reports azimuth for radial stakeout.
■ Angle Right: This option reports angle right for radial stakeout.
■ Both: This option reports both azimuth and angle right for radial
stakeout.

Under Number of Decimal Places for List Points, you can set the
precision for both Northing/Easting and elevation. You also set scale
factors for line and curve tables.
Under Initial Traverse/Sideshot Angle Mode you can determine if
angles are represented as azimuth or angle right. Alternatively, you can
set the default to prompt you each time.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

280
6 In the Survey Text Defaults dialog box, you can set defaults for
building, dimension, and adjoiner text.

Under Building Dimensions, you set text specification for building

dimensions.
■ Layer: This option allows you to set the layer for the building text.
■ Text Style: This option allows you to set the text style for the
building text.
■ Text Size Scaler: This option allows you to set the text scaler to
determine text size.
■ Decimal Places: This option allows you to set the precision for the
building dimensions.
■ Drop Trailing Zeroes: This option allows you to truncate trailing
zeroes from dimensions.
■ Characters To Append: This options allows you to set characters to
add to reported dimensions.
■ Offset From Line: This option sets the offset distance from the line
to the dimension text.
■ Auto Label Closed Pline: This option specifies whether a closed
polyline is labeled on the interior or exterior.

Configure
281
 Under Offset Dimension Text, you can set text specifications for offset
dimensions.
■ Layer: This option allows you to set the layer for the offset text.
■ Text Style: This option allows you to set the text style for the offset
text.
■ Text Size Scaler: This option allows you to set the text scaler to
determine text size.
■ Arrow Size Scaler: This option allows you to set the arrow scaler to
determine arrowhead size.
■ Decimal Places: This option allows you to set the precision for the
offset dimensions.
■ Drop Trailing Zeroes: This option allows you to truncate trailing
zeroes from dimensions.
■ Characters To Append: This options allows you to set characters to
add to reported dimensions.
n Offset From Line: This option sets the offset distance from the line
to the dimension text.
■ Text Alignment: This options allows you to align text either
parallel to the line, or horizontally in the drawing.
■ Position: This options allows you to determine if you will pick the
location of the text, or if it is automatically positioned in the
drawing.

Under Adjoiner Text you can set text specifications for adjoiner text.
■ Layer: This option allows you to set the layer for the adjoiner text.
■ Text Style: This option allows you to set the text style for the
adjoiner text.
■ Text Size Scaler: This option allows you to set the text scaler to
determine text size.
■ Justification: This option allows you to set the text justification.

Under Dimension Line Type, you can determine the line style to use
for dimensions.
n Arrow Line: This option draws a line with an arrowhead from the
dimension text to the figure.
n Standard Line: This option draws a line with no arrowhead from
the dimension text to the figure.
n Curved Leaders: This option draws a curved line with an
arrowhead from the dimension text to the figure.
n Dimension Only: This option draws the dimension text with no line.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

282
7 In the Area Label Defaults dialog box you can set parameters for
labeling area calculations. See the Area Label Defaults command in
Chapter 13, “ Area Commands” in this manual for a complete
description of this dialog box.
8 In the Annotate Defaults dialog box you can set defaults for displaying
annotation text. See the Annotate Defaults command in Chapter 14,
“ Annotate Commands” in this manual for a complete description of
this dialog box.
9 In the Stack Label Arc dialog box, you can set parameters for the
labeling of arcs.

Under Label Options, you can determine the label abbreviations and
sequence in he label stack.
■ You must set the sequence and the label abbreviations for all the
attributes of the arc label.
■ Use Symbol for Delta Angle Label: This option inserts a symbol to
denote the delta angle. If this option is unchecked, then you may
specify the prefix for Delta Angle above.

Under Label Chord Angle in, you can determine if the chords of the
arc are labeled as azimuths, bearings, or gons.
Under Type of Curve, you can specify if the arc is a roadway or railway
curve.

Configure
283
 10 In the Line/Curve Table defaults dialog box, you can set parameters for
producing line and curve tables.

In the Line/Curve Table dialog box, you must assign text size and
layers.
■ Label Text Layer: This option sets the layer for the label text.
■ Label Text Style: This option sets the text style for label text.
■ Label Text Size: This option sets the text size for label text.
■ Line Label Prefix: This option sets the label prefix for lines.
■ Table Text Layer: This option sets the layer for the table text.
■ Table Text Style: This option sets the text style for table text.
■ Table Text Size: This option sets the text size for table text.
■ Curve Label Prefix: This option sets the label prefix for curves.
■ Prompt for Label Location: This option prompts you for label
position.

Under Line Table Distance, you can choose between slope or

horizontal distance.
Under Curve Options, you can determine sequence of the curve table.
Under Label Angles in, you determine if angles are labeled in azimuths,
bearings, or gons.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

284
 Under Automatic Table Update, you determine if the table is
automatically updated when lines or curves are modified.
Under Label Alignment, you set the label as horizontal or parallel.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings

➤ Prerequisites: None
➤ Keyboard Command: CONFIG_SCAD

Units Control

Function
The Drawing Units dialog box controls coordinate and angle display
formats and determines precision.

1 Under Length, you specify the current unit of measurement and the
precision for the current units.
n Type: This field sets the current format for units of measure. The
values include Architectural, Decimal, Engineering, Fractional, and
Scientific. The Engineering and Architectural formats produce feet-
and-inches displays and assume that each drawing unit represents
one inch. The other formats can represent any real-world unit.
n Precision: This field sets the number of decimal places for the
current units display.

Units Control
285
 2 Under Angle you specify the current angle format and the precision for
the current angle display.
n Type: This field sets the current angle format.
n Precision: This field sets the precision for the current angle display.
Autodesk Field Survey uses the following conventions for the
various angle measures: decimal degrees appear as decimal
numbers, grads appear with a lowercase g suffix, and radians appear
with a lowercase r suffix. The degrees/minutes/seconds format uses
d for degrees, ‘ for minutes, and “ for seconds, for example:
123d45’56.7”
Surveyor's units show angles as bearings, using N or S for north or
south, degrees/minutes/seconds for how far east or west the angle is
from direct north or south, and E or W for east or west, for example:
N 45d0’0” E
The angle is always less than 90 degrees and is displayed in the
degrees/minutes/seconds format. If the angle is precisely north,
south, east, or west, only the single letter representing the compass
point is displayed.
n Clockwise: This option calculates positive angles in the clockwise
direction. The default direction for positive angles is
counterclockwise.
When the program prompts for an angle, you can point in the
desired direction or enter an angle regardless of the setting specified
for Clockwise.
3 Under Drawing Units for Field Survey DesignCenter blocks, you can
control the unit of measurement used for block insertions. A block
created in units that differ from the units specified in this option is
scaled and inserted in the specified units. Select Unitless to insert the
block as is and not scale the block to match the specified units. Source
content units and Target drawing units settings in the User Preferences
tab of the Options dialog box under the Settings menu are used when
Insert Units are not defined.
4 Sample Output displays an example of the current settings for units
and angles.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

286
Direction displays the Direction Control dialog box described below.

The Base Angle determines where 0 degrees is located when the

program calculates angles. The base angle sets the direction of the base
angle. These options affect the entry of angles, object rotation angles,
the display format, and the entry of polar, cylindrical, and spherical
coordinates. Choose East, North, West, or South, or choose Other to
indicate an alternative direction. The default direction for the zero
angle is East. In Autodesk Field Survey, the base angle is relative to the
orientation of the user coordinate system.

n East: Sets the base angle to east (default is zero degrees).

n North: Sets the base angle to 90 degrees north.
n West: Sets the base angle to 180 degrees west.
n South: Sets the base angle to 270 degrees south.
n Other: Sets a direction different from the points of the compass.
n Angle: Sets the angle. Available only when Other is selected.
n Pick an Angle: Uses the pointing device to define the angle based
on the angle of an imaginary line connecting any two points you
specify. Available only when Other is selected.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: UNITS

Units Control
287
 Object Snap

Function
The Drafting Settings dialog box sets object snap modes.

1 Under Object Snap, you set object snaps.

n Object Snap On: This option turns running object snaps on and
off. The object snaps selected under Object Snap Modes are active
while object snap is on. This setting is also controlled by the
OSMODE system variable.
n Object Snap Tracking On: This option turns object snap tracking
on and off. With object snap tracking the cursor can track along
alignment paths based on other object snap points when specifying
points in a command. To use object snap tracking, you must turn
on one or more object snaps.

2 Under Object Snap Modes, you turn on running object snaps.

n Endpoint: Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc, elliptical arc,
line, multiline, polyline segment, spline, region, or ray or to the
closest corner of a trace, solid, or 3D face.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

288
n Midpoint: Snaps to the midpoint of an arc, ellipse, elliptical arc,
line, multiline, polyline segment, solid, spline, or xline.

n Center: Snaps to the center of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.

n Node: Snaps to a point object.

n Quadrant: Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc, circle, ellipse, or

elliptical arc.

n Intersection: Snaps to the intersection of an arc, circle, ellipse,

elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, spline, or xline.
Intersection snaps to the edges of regions and curves, but does not
snap to the edges or corners of 3D solids.
Extended Intersection snaps to the imaginary intersection of two
objects that would intersect if the objects were extended along their
natural paths. Autodesk Field Survey automatically turns on
Extended Intersection when you select the Intersection object snap
mode. You might get varying results if you have both the
Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned
on at the same time.

Object Snap
289
 Intersection and Extended Intersection work with edges of regions
and curves, but not with edges or corners of 3D solids.

n Extension: Causes a temporary extension line to display when

you pass the cursor over the endpoint of objects, so you can draw
objects to and from points on the extension line.
n Insertion: Snaps to the insertion point of an attribute, a block, a
shape, or text.
n Perpendicular: Snaps to a point perpendicular to an arc, circle,
ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, solid, spline, or
xline. Autodesk Field Survey automatically turns on Deferred
Perpendicular snap mode when the object you are drawing requires
you to complete more than one perpendicular snap. You can use a
line, arc, circle, polyline, ray, xline, multiline, or 3D solid edge as an
object from which to draw a perpendicular line. You can use
Deferred Perpendicular to draw perpendicular lines between such
objects. When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Perpendicular
snap point, the program displays a Snaptip and marker.

n Tangent: Snaps to the tangent of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical

arc. Autodesk Field Survey automatically turns on Deferred Tangent
snap mode when the object you are drawing requires you to
complete more than one tangent snap. For example, you can use
Deferred Tangent to draw a line that is tangent to two arcs, polyline
arcs, or circles. When the aperture box passes over a Deferred
Tangent snap point, the program displays a marker and Snaptip. If
you use the From option in conjunction with the Tangent snap
mode to draw objects other than lines from arcs or circles, the first
point drawn is tangent to the arc or circle in relation to the last
point selected in the drawing area.

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

290
n Nearest: Snaps to the nearest point on an arc, circle, ellipse,
elliptical arc, line, multiline, point, polyline, spline, or xline.
n Apparent Intersection: Apparent Intersection includes two
separate snap modes: Apparent Intersection and Extended Apparent
Intersection. You can also locate Intersection and Extended
Intersection snap points while running Apparent Intersection object
snap mode is on. Apparent Intersection snaps to the apparent
intersection of two objects (arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line,
multiline, polyline, ray, spline, or xline) that do not intersect in 3D
space but may appear to intersect in the drawing display. Extended
Apparent Intersection snaps to the imaginary intersection of two
objects that would appear to intersect if the objects were extended
along their natural paths. You might get varying results if you have
both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object
snaps turned on at the same time. Apparent and Extended Apparent
Intersection work with edges of regions and curves but not with
edges or corners of 3D solids.

n Parallel: Draws a vector parallel to another object whenever

Autodesk Field Survey prompts you for the second point of a vector.
After specifying the first point of a vector, if you move the cursor
over a straight line segment of another object, the program acquires
the point. When the path of the object you create is parallel to the
line segment, the program displays an alignment path, which you
can use to create the parallel object.
n Clear All: This option turns off all object snap modes.
n Select All: This option turns on all object snap modes.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: OSNAP

Object Snap
291
 Set Environment Variables

Function
This command allows you to list or change the values of system
variables.

Prompts
1 Enter variable name or [ ? ] <variable_name>: enter name
n [?]: Lists all system variables in the drawing and their current
settings. Then you are prompted:
Enter variable(s) to list <*>: enter a name list or press ENTER to list
all variables
2 Enter new value for variable_name <current>: enter a new value or
press ENTER
A complete list of all available system variables can be found in
Appendix A.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Settings

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SETVAR

Chapter 8 Settings Commands

292
09-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 4:20 PM

Points Commands
9
This chapter provides information on using the In this chapter
commands from the Points menu to manipulate ■ Managing points
■ Managing point attributes
coordinate points and point attributes in your drawing.
■ Converting coordinate files

293
 Point Defaults

Function
The Point Defaults dialog box allows you to set default settings for
point options.

1 Under Point Prompt-Label Settings, select the options that determine

how the points are to be labeled and how you will be prompted for
point entry.
n Descriptions: Determines whether you are prompted for a point
description when creating points and whether the point
descriptions are labeled in the point block.
n Elevations: Sets prompting and labeling for point elevations.
n Locate on Real Z Axis: Switches between locating points at zero
elevation and at the actual stored elevations.

Chapter 9 Points Commands

294
 n Instrument & Rod Height: Turns on prompting for instrument
and rod heights when creating points.
n Attribute Layout ID: Controls the location of the point number,
elevation, and description. These attribute layouts are defined in
drawings that are stored in the Autodesk Field Survey Support
directory with the file name of SRVPNO plus the ID number (i.e.
SRVPNO1.DWG, SRVPNO2.DWG, etc.). If you want to change the
attribute positions for a layout ID, then edit the associated SRVPNO
drawing. You can use the MOVE command to arrange the point
attributes. Then you can save your changes in the drawing file.
n Symbol Name: Shows file name of the point symbol you have
selected.
n Select Symbol: Determines the point symbol to be used. Your
selection then appears to the right of the button.
n Prompt for Symbol Numbers: Prompts for a symbol number as
each point is drawn. Otherwise, the Symbol Number set in this
dialog box will automatically be used.

2 Under Point Number Settings, select the options that determine

whether you will be prompted for point numbers by the commands
that locate points.
n Point Numbers: When this toggle is checked on, points that are
inserted by Autodesk Field Survey commands are shown with a
point number and a coordinate is stored in the current coordinate
(.crd) file. When this toggle is off, points are shown with no point
number plotted and no coordinate is stored in the current
coordinate (.crd) file.
n Automatic Point Numbering: If this toggle is checked on,
commands that locate a point will automatically insert a point
number for each point drawn on the screen. If Automatic Point
Numbering toggle is off, commands that locate a point will prompt
for a point number.
n Starting Point Number: This field allows you to specify the
number assigned to the first point.

Point Defaults
295
 3 Under Vertical Angle Prompt, select an option to determine how the
vertical angle is calculated.
Vertical Angle Prompt applies to points created with commands such
as Traverse. The vertical angle is used to calculate the point elevation.

n None: The vertical angle is not be used to calculate point

elevations.
n 0 Degrees Level: The vertical angle is used to calculate elevation
and horizontal distance.
n 90 Degrees Level: The zenith angle is used to calculate elevation
and horizontal distance.
n Elevation Difference: Use the elevation difference to calculate the
elevation.

4 The layer for points and point attributes must be determined.

n Layer Name for Points: Determines the layer in which points will
reside.
n None: The point symbol, point number, elevation, and description
will use the layer names PNTMARK, PNTNO, PNTELEV, and
PNTDESC.
n Points: Layer names are determined based on the current point
layer instead of the default attribute layer names. The layer names
for these attributes will start with the current point layer followed
by the attribute name. For example, if the point layer is UTIL then
the attribute layers will be UTILMARK, UTILNO, UTILELEV, and
UTILDESC.
n Symbols: Only the point symbol itself will take on the name of the
current layer. For example, UTILMARK would be created, but all
other attribute layers would be PNTNO, PNTELEV, and PNTDESC.
n Both: The block reference layer will be unique (UTIL) but point
attributes will PNTNO, PNTELEV, etc.

Chapter 9 Points Commands

296
5 Under For New Points, select the options that determine how new
points will be introduced into the drawing.
n Automatic Zoom Center: The screen view will zoom center to the
new point when it is drawn. This is useful for keeping the display
centered to the current working area.
n Use Field to Finish Table: This option allows you to use the code
definitions from Field to Finish for the point symbols and/or layers
when creating new points with commands such as Traverse. For
example, when creating a point with description "EP" with both For
Symbols and For Layers toggled on, the command will look up "EP"
in the Field to Finish table and will use the symbol and layer
defined in this code table instead of the symbol and layer set in
Point Defaults.
n Set Table: Select the field to finish code table file (.fld) for layer and
symbols definitions for the above options.
n Set GIS File: Select a GIS file to be used when creating new points.
The GIS file contains a list of fields. For each point that is created,
the command will prompt for these fields and store the results to
the note file (.not) associated with the current coordinate file.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PTSETUP

Point Defaults
297
 Draw-Locate Points

Function
The Draw-Locate Point dialog box allows you to insert either new or
existing points into the drawing. You can create new points either by
picking points on the screen or by entering northing and easting
coordinates. You can place existing points by entering point numbers
which reference the current coordinate file. You are prompted to
choose a coordinate file if no coordinate file is current.

1 In the Draw-Locate Point dialog box, you must select the point symbol
and select placement options if necessary.
n Symbol Name: The name of the symbol file is displayed here. You
can choose a different symbol by clicking Select. The selected point
symbol is displayed on the right.
n Symbol Rotation Azimuth: This is the rotation angle that is used
for the point symbols. This angle is used in a counterclockwise
direction relative to the current twist screen.
n Layer by Desc: This option inserts the points in the layer named by
the point description. Using Layer by Desc organizes the points by
description and allows for layer management. For example, you can

Chapter 9 Points Commands

298
 use the Isolate Layers command to show only points on a certain
layer. If you include an invalid layer character in the description,
the layer name stops at the bad character. For example, a point
description of “UP / 105” would use layer “UP”. The Layer Prefix is
added to the beginning of the layer name. For example, a Layer
Prefix of “PT_” and a point with the description “EP” would use the
layer “PT_EP”. Layer Prefix is optional. It allows all the point layers
to be grouped.
n Draw Nodes Only: This option inserts only a point entity (the
node) and not the point block and symbol. This option is most
useful when you have a lot of points to insert, because inserting
only the nodes is faster than inserting nodes with the point block
and symbol. Commands such as Triangulate & Contour and Make
3D Grid File can use these points and do not need the point block
and symbol.
n Elevation Text Only: Selecting this option draws text of the point
elevation without the point block, symbol, or node. The decimal
place of elevation text is placed at the northing and easting point
location.
n Locate within Polyline: This option inserts only the points that
are inside a closed polyline. The command prompts you to select a
closed polyline. All the points in the current coordinate file are
checked. Any points that are located within the closed polyline are
drawn.
n Locate within Distance: This option inserts only the points that
are within a specified distance from a reference point. The
command asks you for the reference point and the search distance.
All the points in the current coordinate file are checked. Any points
that are located within the search distance of the reference point are
drawn.
n Locate within Coordinate Range: This option inserts only the
points that are within the specified range of northing, easting, and
elevation. The command prompts for the minimum and maximum
northing, easting, and elevations. These values default to the actual
minimum and maximum in the coordinate file. Then the command
prompts for the point number range of points to check. The points
that fall in both the point number range and the coordinate range
are drawn.

Draw-Locate Points
299
 2 Under Point Prompt-Label Settings, you determine attributes for which
you will be prompted.
n Descriptions: This option determines whether you are prompted
for descriptions for each point when creating new points. When you
are placing both new and existing points, Descriptions determine
whether this attribute is labeled with the point inserts.
n Notes: This option works with the note file (.not) associated with
the current coordinate file. The note file contains unlimited point
descriptions in addition to the fixed 32-character point descriptions
in the coordinate file. When you create points with Notes on, the
command will prompt for point notes to be stored with the point.
When you draw existing points with Notes on, any notes for the
points are drawn as text entities below the point description.
n Elevations: This option determines whether you are prompted for
elevations for each point when creating new points. When you are
placing both new and existing points, Elevations determine whether
this attribute is labeled with the point inserts.
n Use ’+’: This option labels the positive elevations with a leading ’+’.
For example, "+159.43".
n Use ’-’: This option labels the negative elevations with a leading ’-’.
n Locate on Real Z Axis: This option determines if the points are
placed at their elevations or at zero elevation.
n Label Zeros: This option will label points with zero elevation when
the Elevations option is on. Otherwise only points with nonzero
elevation will be labeled.

3 Under Point Number Settings, you determine how points will

numbered.

n Point Numbers: This option determines whether the complete

point block is drawn or just the symbol and node. When you
create new points with Point Numbers off, no points are stored in
the current coordinate file, and only the point symbol and node
are drawn. When you draw existing points with Point Numbers
off, the point attribute block is not drawn and only the point
symbol and node are drawn.
n Automatic Point Numbering: This option applies to creating new
points. With this option active, the command will use the Starting
Point Number for the first new point. The next point number is
automatically incremented. Before storing the point, the command
checks whether the point number is used. If the point number is
used and point protect is on (set in the Coordinate File Utilities

Chapter 9 Points Commands

300
 command), then the command will prompt for another point
number or to overwrite the point. With Automatic Point
Numbering off, the command will prompt for the point numbers.

4 Determine how the points are to be displayed and in what layer.

n Wildcard match of point description: You can display only points
with specific descriptions. This can be thought of as a filter. For
example, entering IP, would display only points that are labeled
with the description IP, or Iron Pin. The default is the asterisk (*),
this will display all points regardless of description.
n Layer Name: This allows you to designate a layer for the points to
be displayed. You can enter a new name or choose an existing layer
by clicking Select Layer. An Autodesk Field Survey point consists of
a block insert with attributes, a point symbol, and a point entity.
The point entity is used for picking the point by OSNAP Node in
other commands. The block insert includes a point number,
elevation, and description. These attributes are in the PNTMARK,
PNTNO, PNTELEV, and PNTDESC layers. The points are also in an
overall layer as specified in this dialog box. This layer setup allows
you to freeze a group of points by the main layer name or freeze
point attributes for all the points in the drawing. For example,
freezing layer "PNTS" would freeze all the points in this layer.
Freezing layer "PNTELEV" would freeze the point elevation attribute
for all the points.
n Draw Range: This command will draw existing points from the
current coordinate file. The Draw Range button will prompt for the
point numbers to draw.
n Draw All: This command will draw all the points in the coordinate
file and then zoom the extents of the display to show the points.
n Enter & Assign: This command can be used to create new points
using the point northing and easting.
n Screen Pick Point: This command allows you to create points by
picking the point coordinate on the screen. For example, you could
set the Object Snap to EndPoint and pick the end point of a
building polyline to create a point at the building corner.

Draw-Locate Points
301
 Prompts
To create a new point.
1 In the Draw-Locate Point dialog box Choose Screen Pick Point.
Pick point to create: pick point
2 Enter Point Elevation <500>: 498.43
This prompt appears only if elevation prompting is turned on.
3 Enter point description: HUB
This prompt only appears if description prompting is turned on.

To locate a point in the coordinate file (point number 3 in this

example).
1 In the Draw-Locate Point dialog box Choose Draw Range.
Point numbers to draw: 3
PtNo. North(y) East(x) Elev(z) Description
3 4154.28 4147.35 0.00

2 Point numbers to draw: 1-2

Locates a range of points. From 1 to 2.

PtNo. North(y) East(x) Elev(z) Description

1 4252.76 4158.32 0.00 RADPT
2 4258.11 4059.38 0.00

3 Point numbers to draw: Press ENTER

This ends the command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points menu

➤ Prerequisite: You may want to execute the Drawing Setup
command under the Setting menu to set the scale and size.
➤ Keyboard Command: LP

Chapter 9 Points Commands

302
 List Points

Function
The List Points dialog box allows you to list point numbers, northings,
eastings, elevations, and descriptions. The point list report that is
generated under List Points is displayed in the standard report viewer,
which can print, draw, and save the report file. This report viewer
cannot be used to edit the coordinate file. To edit the coordinate file,
use the Edit Points command on the Points menu.

1 Under Selection method you must choose a way of selecting points

to list.
n Range: This option allows you enter a range of points to be listed.
n Area: With this option you can select a closed polyline to list all
the points inside the polyline area.
n Selection Set: This option allows you to select points from the
screen to be listed.

List Points
303
 2 Under Range Settings you can assign a range to list with a “filter”
by description.
n Range of Points: Enter any numeric range of points to be
displayed. Pick the All button to select all points.
n Description Match: This entry can be used to only list points that
match a specified description. An asterisk (*) means match any
description.

3 In the List Points dialog box there are several options for formatting
your points list.
n Report Coordinate Range: This option reports the minimum and
maximum northing, easting, and elevation for the points listed.
n List Point Notes: This option lists any additional descriptions
assigned to the points. Point notes can be entered in Coordinate File
Utilities under Input-Edit Point.
n Use Report Formatter: This option allows you to customize the
fields and layout of the point report. The Report Formatter can also
be used to export the point report to Excel or Access.
n Double Space Between Points: This options displays the report
with a space between the rows of points.

4 Under Number of Decimal Places For, you can format the precision of
the point values.
n Northing/Easting: This setting allows you to display values with a
precision of up to nine decimal places.
n Elevations: This setting allows you to display values with a
precision of up to nine decimal places.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Points in a coordinate file or on the screen.
➤ Keyboard Command: LISTPT

Chapter 9 Points Commands

304
Import Text/ASCII File

Function
The Import Text/ASCII File dialog box allows you to convert point data
from an ASCII text file into the current coordinate file (.CRD). Each
line of the text file can contain any combination of point number,
northing, easting, elevation, and description. All of the information for
a point should be on one line with the values separated by a comma,
space, or other delimiter.

n Source File Format: Using this setting, you can choose from
specific formats or User-Defined. The special formats of Leica *.gsi
files, TDS *.cr5 files, Geodimeter *.obs/*.raw files, Laser Atlanta *.txt
files, Trimble *.pos files, Zeiss *.txt files, Traverse PC *.trv files, and
Maptech and Benchmark *.dat files can be directly imported by
choosing the corresponding Source File Format.
n Select Text/ASCII Files: Using this command, you can select files
to read into a coordinate file. Multiple files can be selected by using
the SHIFT or CTRL keys while picking files. You can also run the Select
Text/ASCII Files command multiple times. The files to import are
listed in the top scroll display window. The selected file is displayed
in the Preview Window to help you fill out the Coordinate Order.

Import Text/ASCII File

305
 n Remove File: This allows you to remove a previously selected ASCII
file from the list.
n Common Formats: This is a listing of common formats. All the
lines in the text file should contain only point data. Any header
lines should be removed.
n Coordinate Order: For User-Defined, the format of the text file is
specified in the Coordinate Order field where the value identifiers
are listed with the appropriate delimiters.

For example:
1 For a text file with northing, easting, elevation, and comma delimiters:
5100.0,5150.5,485.1
5127.1,5190.3,487.3

The Coordinate Order would be:

Y,X,Z

2 For a text file with point number, easting, northing, elevation,

description, and space delimiters:
1 5000.0 5000.0 490.3 TRAV
2 5030.4 4930.5 495.5 TRAV

The Coordinate Order would be:

PXYZD

3 When the Coordinate Order is set, click OK to read the text file.

n Wild Card Descriptions Match: This allows for only points with
matching descriptions to be imported.
n Header Lines to Skip: This is an easy way to skip a header in the
file to be read. Enter the number of lines not to be processed at the
beginning of the text file.
n Value to Add to Point #’s: This option allows you to renumber the
points as they are imported.
n Point Protect: With this option active, the command will check if
a point number already exists in the coordinate file before
importing the point. If a point conflict is found, you can either
assign a new point number or overwrite the old point.
n Process Multiple Files Options: The point data from all the
imported files can be stored to the current coordinate file or to
separate files for each import file. The All Into Current CRD option

Chapter 9 Points Commands

306
 allows you to import one or multiple ASCII files into the current
coordinate file. The Create Separate CRD Files for Each option will
name the coordinate files by the imported file name with a .CRD
file extension. For example, the import of file job125.txt would
create job125.crd.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: A text file to read.
➤ Keyboard Command: READPT

Export Text/ASCII File

Function
The Export Text/ASCII File dialog box allows you to output point data
from the current coordinate file to an ASCII text file.

Export Text/ASCII File

307
 1 Under Coordinate Order, you select the type of file you want to write.
■ You can choose from among several variations on point number,
northing, easting, elevation, and descriptions.
■ You can choose a specific format for Leica, Geodimeter, Zeiss,
Maptech, and D45.

2 Under Type of Delimiter you must choose Comma delimited or

Space delimited.
3 You must give your selection set parameters for exporting.

n Number of Decimal Places: Choose the precision of

exported coordinates.
n Wild Card Descriptions Match: You can output only specific point
descriptions, or enter an asterisk (*) for all descriptions.
n Range of Points to Write: You can specify the range of point
numbers to export and filter the output by description matching.

After selecting the OK button, you will be prompted to specify a

new text/ASCII file or to append data into an existing file. Then
the standard file selection dialog box allows you to specify the
export file name.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: A Coordinate File (.CRD)
➤ Keyboard Command: WRITEPT

Chapter 9 Points Commands

308
Set Coordinate File

Function
The Set Coordinate File dialog box allows you to set the name of the
current coordinate file. This file is used by commands that compute,
store, and recall the coordinates. The file has an extension of .CRD and
by default is stored in the configured data subdirectory set in the
Configure, then General Settings command under the Settings menu.

n Existing: A standard file selection dialog box is provided from

which to choose a coordinate file.
n New: A standard file selection dialog box is provided so you can
create a new coordinate file.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SETCRD

Coordinate File Utilities

Function
The Coordinate File Utilities dialog box allows you to manipulate the
coordinates stored in a .CRD file. One of the most important
commands is the Update CRD File from Drawing which allows you to
update the file after editing the drawing with commands such as Erase,
Move, Rotate or Change Elevations. Another handy command is the
Draw Entities by Point Number, which allows the user to input point
number ranges and plot Lines, Arcs, Polylines, or 3D Polylines.

Set Coordinate File

309
 Coordinate files have either numeric or alphanumeric point numbers.
Alphanumeric point numbers consist of nine or fewer digits and
letters (for example, point number 7A).
The current point number format is displayed at the top title bar of
the following dialog box. Use the Copy CRD File command to change
the point number format.

Coordinate File Utilities Options

Open CRD File

This command allows you to switch to another coordinate file. When
you exit Coordinate File Utilities, the specified file becomes the current
coordinate file.

Chapter 9 Points Commands

310
 Copy CRD File
This command copies a coordinate file to another file name. Use this
command to make a backup of your coordinate file. You can specify
whether the copied file format is numeric or alphanumeric, so you can
change the format.

Map Points from 2nd File

This command adds a point to the current coordinate file using points
stored in a second coordinate file. The points to copy are specified by
number, one at a time.

Prompts
1 Destination Point Number: 55
This is the point number to create in the current coordinate file.
2 Source Point Number: 25
This is the point number to copy from the second coordinate file.
Point# Northing Easting Elevation
25 52.516 13.328 0.000

3 Destination Point Number: Press ENTER to end

Import Text/ASCII File

This command converts point data from a text file into the current
coordinate file. See the Import Text/ASCII File command earlier in this
chapter for more information.

Export Text/ASCII Text File

This command outputs point data from the current coordinate file to
an ASCII Text file. See Export Text/ASCII File command for more
information.

Edit Header
This command allows you to enter or edit the job information
associated with the coordinate file. Fields include Job Description, Job
Number, and Job Date.

Coordinate File Utilities Options

311
 Compress CRD File
This command removes unused point numbers by renumbering high
point numbers into the unused spaces. For example, a file with points
1,2,105,107,108,109 would be compressed to 1,2,3,4,5,6.

Coordinate Transformation
The Coordinate Transformation dialog box allows you to transform
coordinates between local, state plane 27, state plane 83,
latitude/longitude, and Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM). The
dialog box works on individually entered coordinates, by range of
point numbers, and with on-screen entities. For converting between
state plane 27 and 83, Autodesk Field Survey calls upon NADCON from
the National Geodetic Survey to apply the latitude/longitude
adjustment. The NADCON program, ndcon210.exe, is stored in the
Autodesk Field Survey EXEC directory.

1 Under Source Coordinates, you provide a Coordinate Format and

method of input.
n Coordinate Format: Select the format of your coordinates.
n Input: Choose a method of inputting your data. Screen entities
allows you to pick points from the screen. Point Numbers allows

Chapter 9 Points Commands

312
 you to enter a range of points to transform. The Enter Coordinates
input option transforms one coordinate at a time.

2 Under Destination Coordinates, you choose the Coordinate Format for

your resultant points.
n Coordinate Format: Choose the desired resultant format.
n Output to: Allows you overwrite coordinates in your current
coordinate file, or create points with new numbers.

3 You must choose your destination coordinate system.

■ Select the state and quadrant for the destination coordinates. For
example, KY North, or IA South.

4 The Local Coordinate Transformation Options dialog box appears. You

must select options for scaling and aligning.

n Rigid Body Transformation: This option gives a best fit least

squares transformation but applies only translation and rotation
with no scale.
n Over Determination by Plane Similarity: This option is used to
find the least squares best fit transformation for all the given source
and destination points. In addition to a translation and rotation,
this option also scales the points during the transformation.
n Align by Two Pairs of Points: This option uses two pairs of source
and destination coordinates. The first pair defines the translation as
the difference between the source and destination northing and
easting. The destination point is also the pivot point for rotation.
Rotation can be entered directly or defined by a second pair of
points where the bearing between the first and second source points
is rotated to align with the bearing from the first and second
destination points. You can also apply scaling. The scaling holds the
angle between points and adjusts the distances by the scale factor.

Coordinate File Utilities Options

313
 Draw Entities by Point #
This command draws Lines, Arcs, 3DLines, Polylines, or 3D Polylines
by defining a range of point numbers.

Prompts
1 Enter Menu Option? <L>: P
2 Plot Entities by Point Number
Type of entity, Arc/Polyline/3dpoly/2dline/Exit/<Line>: P
Example: 1*4-7-10*12-5-8’ would draw lines from point numbers 1
through 4 then to 7, to 10 through 12, then to 5 to 8 (limit 132
characters).

3 Undo/<Enter point numbers or ranges>: 1*10-20*30

The command draws a polyline from point number 1 through 10 to
point number 20 through 30.

New Last Point Number

This command sets the highest point number in the current coordinate
file. All points above this number are erased.

Chapter 9 Points Commands

314
 Update Drawing from CRD File
The Update Drawing from CRD File dialog box allows you to move
points in the drawing, if necessary, to match the coordinates stored in
the current coordinate file.

1 Under Range Settings determine which points to locate from the

coordinate file.
■ Highest Point Number: This number reported from the current
coordinate file.
n Range of Points to Update: You must enter a range of points to
locate to the screen. You may enter ALL to locate all of the points
from the coordinate file.
n Erase points from drawing that are not in CRD file: This option
will allow for all points in the drawing to be erased if they do not
exist in the current coordinate file.

2 Under Draw Points Options you can choose point symbols and
attributes.
n Draw points from CRD file that are not in drawing: If a point
exists in the current coordinate file but not in the drawing, it will be
drawn using the settings in the dialog box.

Coordinate File Utilities Options

315
 n Select Symbol: Clicking this button allows you to select a point
symbol. The Symbol Name is displayed at the left and the symbol is
shown at the right.
n Point Label Settings: You can choose which point attributes, Point
Numbers, Descriptions, or Elevations you want to be displayed as
points are drawn.
n Locate on Real Z-axis: This option determines if the points are
placed at their elevations or at zero elevation.
n Layer for Points: Enter the layer in which the points will be drawn.

Update CRD File from Drawing

This command allows you to select all or some of the points in the
drawing and add them to or update them in the current coordinate
file. You can filter the points using the Select Objects selection
mechanism and/or wild card matching of the point descriptions. The
Update Point Descriptions option determines whether the point
descriptions from the drawing will be stored in the current coordinate
file. Use this command to update the file after a global edit such as
Move, Rotate, Renumber Points, Change Elevations, or Erase. This
command directly reads Leica (Wildsoft), Softdesk, Geodimeter,
InRoads, Eagle Point, and many other point blocks.

Prompts
1 Wildcard match of point description <*>: ENTER

2 Update point descriptions [<Yes>/No]? ENTER

3 Select Field Survey, Softdesk, InRoads, EaglePt, Geodimeter or Leica

Points.
Select Objects: All
To select all the points in the drawing enter All, or enter a range of
points, or make a window select set.

List Points
This command lists the points stored in the coordinate file by point
number range and description matching. See the List Points command
earlier in this chapter.

Chapter 9 Points Commands

316
Delete Points
This command deletes points in the coordinate file. You can define a
range of point numbers to delete, or you can pick a polyline that
defines a perimeter and choose whether points inside or outside the
perimeter are deleted.

Screen Pick Point

This command allows you to pick a point on the screen to update its
coordinate values in (or add new coordinate values to) the coordinate
file. This command does not plot a point, point attributes, or point
symbol. Use the Draw-Locate Point command for that.

Scale Points
This command multiplies the point northing, easting, and elevation by
the scale conversion factor. You can use this command for metric-
English conversion. See the Scale Points command in this chapter for a
detailed description.

Translate Points
This option translates a range of points based on entered delta X and
delta Y, entered coordinates, or translation point numbers. See the
Translate Points command in this chapter for a detailed description.

Rotate Points
This command rotates a range of points based on entered degrees of
rotation, entered azimuths, entered bearings, or rotation point
numbers. See the Rotate Points command in this chapter for a detailed
description.

Align Points
This command does a translation based on a source point and
destination point, and then rotates to align the first source point and a
second source point with the first destination point and a second
destination point. See the Align Points command later in this chapter
for a detailed description.

Coordinate File Utilities Options

317
 Description for Points
The Assign Descriptions to Points dialog box allows you to set the
point description field to the specified text for a range of point
numbers.

Point Number Report

This command lists the used and unused point numbers in the
coordinate file.

Duplicate Points
The Duplicate Point Check dialog box allows you to search the
coordinate file for points with the same northing, easting, and
elevation.

1 The Action must be determined for found duplicates.

n List Duplicates: Reports duplicates found within the tolerances.
n Delete Duplicates: For the delete option, the first point number is
kept and any higher point numbers with duplicate coordinates are
erased from the coordinate file.

Chapter 9 Points Commands

318
2 The Range of points must be determined.
■ Highest Point Number is reported from the current coordinate file.
n Range of Points to Check: You must enter a range of points to
check. You may enter ALL to check all of the points from the
coordinate file.

3 The Tolerance must be entered.

n Northing/Easting: You must enter the precision for the tolerance.
n Elevation: You must enter the precision for the tolerance.

Compare Points
The Compare Points Options dialog box allows you to compare the
coordinates in the current coordinate file with either the coordinates
for the matching point numbers in the drawing file, with matching
point numbers from another coordinate file or with different point
numbers from the same coordinate file. A report is created for any
differences, showing the point numbers and the differences.

1 Under Source of Points for comparison, you choose your primary

comparison points.
n Drawing: This option allows you to choose points from the screen.
n Current Coordinate File: This option allows a comparison using
your current coordinate file.
n Another Coordinate File: This option allows you to select a
different coordinate file.

Coordinate File Utilities Options

319
 2 Under Ouput Option, you can select a format for reporting the
differences.
n Bearing-Distance: Difference is reported as bearing and distance
between points.
n DeltaX-DeltaY: Difference is reported as differences in the
northings and eastings.
n North-South-East-West: Difference is reported as difference of
North/South and of East/West.

3 Under Number of Decimal Places for, you can select your precision.
n Northing/Easting: Report precision out to four decimal places.
n Elevation: Report precision out to four decimal places.
n Report Coordinates: If this is checked, the coordinate points will
be included in the report.

Renumber Points
The Renumber Points dialog box allows you to renumber points in a
range starting from a new point number. The old point numbers are
erased.

The condense points option renumbers so that no unused point

numbers remain in the renumbered range. Otherwise, the spaces
between the points are maintained.

Chapter 9 Points Commands

320
 Input-Edit Point
The Input-Edit Point dialog box allows you to edit points individually.

1 You must enter the point number to be edited.

n Point Number: Enter the number of the point to be edited.
n North (Y): Enter the modified value.
n East (X): Enter the modified value.
n Elevation (Z): Enter the modified value.
n Description: The standard description field is limited to 32
characters.
n Notes: Enter notes associated with the point. Any number of lines
of text can be assigned to the point. To add a note line, pick a blank
line in the list box and then type in the note in the edit box and
press ENTER. To edit a note, highlight the line in the list box and edit
the text in the edit box.
n Next: Go to the next point.
n Previous: Go to the previous point.

Coordinate File Utilities Options

321
 Point Protect Toggle
If Point Protect is checked on, then you will be prompted every time a
new point is generated with a point number that already exists in the
coordinate file. If Point Protect is off, then the new point will override
the existing one.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: CFU

Edit Points

Function
The Coordinate Data Sheet dialog box allows you to edit point data in
the current coordinate file. The current coordinate file can be set with
the Set Coordinate File command. Edit Points shows all the points in
the coordinate file. You can add new points and delete existing points
using the INSERT and DELETE keys. You can edit any value by clicking in
a cell and typing the new value.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: EDITPT

Chapter 9 Points Commands

322
 Erase Points

Function
This command erases Autodesk Field Survey points from the drawing.
The points to erase can either be selected from the screen or specified
by point number. Erasing a Autodesk Field Survey point will erase the
point symbol, point attributes, and point node. The points may
optionally be erased from the coordinate file. As long as the points are
not deleted from the coordinate file, they can be redrawn with the
Draw-Locate Points command.

Prompts
1 Select points from screen or by point number (Screen/<Number>)?
ENTER

2 Point numbers to erase: 1-5

3 Delete points from coordinate file (Yes/<No>)? ENTER
Erasing Field Survey Points ....
Number of points erased> 5

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey points.
➤ Keyboard Command: DELPT

Erase Points
323
 Translate Points

Function
The Translate Points dialog box allows you to translate points in a
coordinate file. The delta X, Y, and Z can be entered directly or
calculated from original and destination coordinates. The coordinates
can be entered directly or specified by point number. Any points in
the drawing will be updated automatically when the coordinate file is
updated.

1 You must enter the differences for the X, Y, or Z values.

n delta X: Enter the Easting difference.
n delta Y: Enter the Northing difference.
n delta Z: Enter the Elevation differnce.

Any combination of values can be entered. For example, you can

modify the values of the Northings (Y) and Elevations (Z), but not the
Eastings (X).

n Original Point: Enter point number or coordinate values.

n Destination Point: Enter desired coordinate values.

The delta values are calculated automatically.

Chapter 9 Points Commands

324
2 Under Output, to you must determine how new points will be
integrated.
n Overwrite Existing Coords: Existing coordinate values will be
overwritten with newly calculated values.
n New Point Numbers: The command will generate new point
numbers for all coordinates in selection set.

3 You are prompted for range of points to modify.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Points in a coordinate file.
➤ Keyboard Command: TRANSPT

Rotate Points

Function
The Rotate Points dialog box allows you to rotate points in a
coordinate file. The degrees of rotation can be entered directly or
calculated from original and destination bearings or azimuths. The
bearings and azimuths can be entered directly or specified by point
numbers. Any points in the drawing are updated automatically. The
coordinate file is also updated.

Rotate Points
325
 1 Under Rotation Point, enter a point for the pivot point.
n X and Y: Enter values for coordinate that is the rotation point.
n Point #: Enter the point number of the rotation point.
If the rotation point is a known point, it is much easier to enter its
point number.
■ Degrees of Rotation (dd.mmss): Enter the Rotation value.

2 If the Rotation value must be calculated, you must enter Original and
Destination points.
n Original Bearing/Azimuth: Enter point numbers or values.
■ Destination Bearing/Azimuth: Enter desired values.

3 Under Output to, you must determine how new points will be
integrated.
n Overwrite Existing Coords: Existing coordinate values will be
overwritten with newly calculated values.
n New Point Numbers: The command will generate new point
numbers for all coordinates in the selection set.

4 You are prompted for range of points to modify.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Points in a coordinate file.
➤ Keyboard Command: ROTATEPT

Chapter 9 Points Commands

326
Align Points

Function
The Align Points dialog box allows you to translate points based on a
source point and destination point and then rotates to align the first
source point and a second source point with the first destination point
and a second destination point. Both the drawing and the current
coordinate fill are updated when running Align Points.

n Range of Points: Enter a range of points to be modified.

n Translation Points: Enter point numbers of points for the
translation calculation.
n Rotation Points: Enter point numbers of points for the rotation
calculation.
n Ignore Elevations: If checked on, elevations are not included in
calculations. If checked off, elevation values are included in
calculation.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Points in a coordinate file.
➤ Keyboard Command: ALIGNPT

Align Points
327
 Scale Points

Function
The Scale Range of Points dialog box allows you to scale points in a
coordinate file. The northing, easting, and optionally the elevation are
multiplied by the specified scale factor. You can use this command for
Metric-English conversion or a specific conversion by choosing the Use
Customized Scale Factor option and specifying the desired Scale Factor
in the edit box. This command will scale the coordinates in the current
coordinate file.

Highest Point Number is reported from the current coordinate file.

n Range of Points: You must enter a range of points to scale. You
may enter ALL to scale all of the points from the coordinate file.
n Base Point: Enter point to used as origin for scale.
n Use Customized Scale Factor: Enter any scale factor value.
n Source Coordinates: Select the format of the existing
coordinate values.
n Destination Coordinates: Select the format of the desired
coordinate values.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Points in a coordinate file
➤ Keyboard Command: SCALEPT

Chapter 9 Points Commands

328
 Move Points

Function
This command moves an entire Autodesk Field Survey point when you
select any part of the point. Each Autodesk Field Survey point is made
up of three entities: a point entity, a symbol, and a point block with
the point number, elevation, and description. All these parts of the
point are moved together with this command. The point is moved
only in the drawing, and the coordinate file is not updated unless Link
Points with CRD File is turned on under General Settings in the
Configure command found in the Settings menu. Without this link
turned on, you can update the coordinate file with the new point
position in the drawing by using the Update from Drawing function in
Coordinate File Utilities described earlier in this chapter.

Prompts
1 Select Point: pick a point on the screen
2 Select Second Point: pick a destination location on the screen

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey points
➤ Keyboard Command: MPNT

Edit Point Attributes

Function
The Edit Point dialog box allows you to edit the features/attributes of a
point such as the symbol type, point number, elevation, and
description.

Prompts
1 Select Field Survey point to edit: pick a point from screen
At this point, you can select any part of the point, including the
symbol, elevation, point number, or the description.

Move Points
329
 2 The Edit Point dialog box appears as shown:

n Symbol Name: This option displays the symbol name. You can
type in a symbol name and the symbol picture on the right will
change.
n Select Symbol: This option allows you to select a new symbol.
n Point Number: This option allows you to change the point number
of the selected point. If you change the point number to a number
that already exists in the current coordinate file, and point protect is
ON, you will be prompted [O]verwrite w/new coordinates, overwrite
[A]ll, or use number <1000>:. You can choose to use the next
available point number in the coordinate file (this is the default) or
overwrite the point number.
n North (Y): This option allows you to change the northing value of
the selected point.
n East (X): This option allows you to change the easting value of the
selected point.
n Elevation (Z): This option allows you to change the elevation value
of the selected point.
n Description: This option allows you to change the description of
the selected point.
n Notes: This option allows you to modify or add notes to the
selected point.

Chapter 9 Points Commands

330
3 The properties that you modify with this command will update the
current coordinate file and the screen entities.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey points
➤ Keyboard Command: EDITPNT

Edit Multiple Pt Attributes

Function
The Edit Multiple Points dialog box allows you to modify multiple
point attributes simultaneously. An example application is to rotate
the elevation text of 1000 points to 45 degrees or change the height of
the description text for all the points in the drawing.

One attribute type (point number, elevation, or description) can be

changed at a time. If you wish to modify two attributes, such as the
elevation and the point number, edit one of them, then repeat the
command. For each attribute, you can change any number of the
properties (for example, layer or height) at one time. The dialog box
will reflect the current status of each attribute’s properties. For
example, if you select 10 points, and 5 of them have the elevation
rotation set at 45 degrees and the other 5 are set at 0 (zero) degrees,
then the rotation edit field displays *varies* to let you know that the
properties of the points you selected are not the same.

Edit Multiple Pt Attributes

331
 1 You must first pick points from the screen to be edited. The number of
points selected will be shown in the dialog box title.
2 Under Attribute to Edit, you must choose which attribute you want to
modify.
n Point Number: This option allows you to edit the point number.
n Elevation: This option allows you to edit the point elevation.
n Description: This option allows you to edit the point description.

3 Under Item(s) to Change, you must choose how you want to modify
the attribute.
n X Location (relative to point): The X location refers to the
distance in the X direction from the center (or insertion point) of
the point symbol.
n Y Location (relative to point): The Y location refers to the
distance in the Y direction from the center (or insertion point) of
the point symbol.
n Layer: The Layer refers to the layer of the individual attribute, not
the entire attribute block.
n Height: The Height is expressed in real units (generally feet or
meters), not plotted size.
n Rotation (absolute in Deg.): The Rotation angle is expressed in
absolute decimal degrees.

4 The Pick buttons allow you to pick two points to define a distance (or
angle in the case of Rotation). For example, if you want to select a line
to define a distance or angle, select two points on the line with the
appropriate OSNAP.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey points
➤ Keyboard Command: MODPNTS

Move Point Attributes

Function
This command allows the user to move-drag point attributes such as
number, elevation, or description.

Chapter 9 Points Commands

332
 Prompts
1 Select Point Number, Elevation, or Description to Move: select point
attribute
2 Pick new location: pick point
3 Pick new angle: Press ENTER or enter numeric angle

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey points
➤ Keyboard Command: MOVEPNT

Scale Point Attributes

Function
This command scales point attribute text (number, elevation, and
descriptions) and point symbols up or down in size. The command
prompts for a scale multiplier and a selection set of objects. If you want
to enlarge the attribute, enter a value greater than one. If you want to
reduce it, enter a decimal fraction such as .5, which would reduce the
text size by 50%. This command is very useful if you have set up your
drawing for one plotting scale and decide to change to a new plotting
scale. This command adjusts the point attributes and symbols to the
screen twist angle.

Prompts
1 Scaling Multiplier : 2.5
This response would enlarge the point attributes and symbols by
250 percent.
This command will adjust the point attributes to the current
screen twist.
2 Select Field Survey Point Attributes & Symbols to Enlarge/Reduce.
Select objects: C
3 First corner: pick point
4 Other corner: pick point
5 Select objects: Press ENTER
Number of entities changed 30

Scale Point Attributes

333
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points
➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey points
➤ Keyboard Command: PNTENL

Erase Point Attributes

Function
This command allows you to erase point attributes such as number,
elevation, or description. You pick the attribute to erase.

Prompts
1 Select Point Number,Elevation, or Description to Erase: select point
attribute

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey points
➤ Keyboard Command: ERASEPNT

Twist Point Attributes

Function
This command rotates the orientation of the point attributes (point #,
elevation, description) and point symbols. The Twist Screen option
aligns the point attributes to appear horizontal in the current twist
screen. The Azimuth option allows you to enter an azimuth or pick
two points to align the point attributes. The Entity Segment option
aligns the point attributes using the selected line or polyline segment
in the direction the entity is drawn. The Follow Polyline option aligns
the point attributes using the polyline segment that is closest to the
point.

Prompts
1 Twist by (<Twist Screen>/Azimuth/Entity segment/Follow polyline): F
(for follow)
2 Select polyline to follow: pick a polyline
3 Select Field Survey Point Attributes & Symbols to Rotate.

Chapter 9 Points Commands

334
 Select objects: pick the Autodesk Field Survey point inserts

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey points
➤ Keyboard Command: TWISTPTS

Resize Point Attributes

Function
This command sets the size of the selected point attributes (point
number, elevation, description) and point symbols. This command
is similar to Scale Point Attributes, but instead of scaling the size by
a factor, the command sets all the selected points to the same
specified size.

Prompts
1 Enter point attribute and symbol size <4.0>: Press ENTER
2 Select Field Survey Point Attributes & Symbols to resize.
Select objects: pick the point entities
Finding Field Survey Point Attributes ....
Number of entities changed> 39

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey points
➤ Keyboard Command: SIZEPNT

Trim by Point Symbol

Function
This command trims lines and polylines that pass through the selected
Autodesk Field Survey point symbols so that the lines do not appear
within the symbol. This should be a last step in preparing a drawing
because this command explodes the Autodesk Field Survey points and
modifies the lines and polylines by trimming, which makes these
entities unusable by some of the COGO commands.

Resize Point Attributes

335
 Prompts
1 Select Field Survey point symbols to trim against.
Select objects: select the point symbols

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey point symbols.
➤ Keyboard Command: TRIMPTS

Change Point Layer/Color

Function
The Change Point Layer/Color dialog box allows you to change the
layer and, optionally, the color of Autodesk Field Survey points.

1 Under Create Separate Layers, you must determine which attribute

layers the command will affect.
n None: No attribute layers change. The block layer will change to
the New Layer Name.
n Pt Attributes: The point number, elevation, and description layers
will change.
n Symbols: The point symbol layer will change.
n Both: All attribute layers will change.

Chapter 9 Points Commands

336
2 If needed, change the color of the new attribute layers. To select an
attribute color, pick the corresponding color button.
3 Assign a New Layer Name. The points are initially put in the layer set
in Point Defaults. The symbol, point number, elevation, and
description are in the layers PNTMARK, PNTNO, PNTELEV, and
PNTDESC. You can create new attribute layers based on the new layer
name, for example, TRAVMARK, TRAVNO, TRAVELEV, and
TRAVDESC.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey points
➤ Keyboard Command: PNTCHG

Renumber Points

Function
This command edits the point number attributes of a group of
Autodesk Field Survey points. The command prompts you to enter the
point number difference. Enter the positive or negative amount you
would like to have added to or subtracted from the current value.

Prompts
1 Point Number difference <1>: 100
This response would add 100 to the current point number value.
2 Select Field Survey Points for Point Number change.
Select Objects : pick a point(s)
The command then edits the point numbers and prints the numbers
changed.

3 Delete old point numbers from file [<Yes>/No]? Y

You can update the current coordinate file with the new point
numbers at this time.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey points
➤ Keyboard Command: RENUMPNT

Renumber Points
337
 Explode Points

Function
This command can be useful if you need to send a DXF file to another
firm that does not use Autodesk Field Survey and/or AutoCAD. When
you send another firm a DXF file, they may not have the same
block/inserts defined or available. This command solves that problem
by exploding all blocks and replacing the Autodesk Field Survey point
attributes with Text entities of the same value.
After you use this command, the link between the points and the
coordinate file are destroyed, and you can no longer extract the
attributes from the drawing. Typically after using this command, you
use the Save command to write the exploded drawing to a new file
name, then use the Quit command to exit the exploded drawing so as
not to save the changes to the original. Then you can call up the new
drawing and use the DXFOUT command on it.

Prompts
1 Select Point Attributes & Inserts to Explode.
Select objects: pick point(s)
2 Layer Name for Point Numbers <PNTNO>: Enter new layer name
3 Layer Name for Point Elevations <PNTELEV>: Enter new layer name
4 Layer Name for Point Descriptions <PNTDESC>: Enter new layer
name

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey points
➤ Keyboard Command: EXPLODE_SCAD

Chapter 9 Points Commands

338
Convert CRD to TDS CR5 / TDS CR5 to CRD

Function
These commands convert coordinate file formats between a Autodesk
Field Survey coordinate file and a TDS CR5 file. Both of these file
formats are binary and require special commands. These commands
prompt for the file names to process.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: A CRD or CR5 file
➤ Keyboard Command: CRD_CR5, CR5_CRD

Convert CRD to LDD MDB

Function
This command converts a Autodesk Field Survey coordinate file into an
Autodesk Land Development Desktop (LDD) point database file in
Access MDB format. The LDD point database always has the file name
of POINTS.MDB. To specify the LDD file to create, you need only to
specify the directory/path and not the file name. This path corresponds
to the LDD project directory. The command has point protect enabled,
so if a point number from the coordinate file already exists in the LDD
file, then you will be prompted to skip or replace the point.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: a .CRD file
➤ Keyboard Command: CRD_LDD

Convert LDD MDB to CRD

Function
This command converts an Autodesk Land Development Desktop
(LDD) point database file into a Autodesk Field Survey coordinate file.
The LDD point database always has the file name of POINTS.MDB and
is stored in the LDD project directory.

Convert CRD to TDS CR5 / TDS CR5 to CRD

339
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points
➤ Prerequisite: an LDD point database file
➤ Keyboard Command: LDD_CRD

Convert Points to Softdesk

Function
This command converts the Autodesk Field Survey point blocks in the
drawing to Softdesk point blocks. These point block formats are similar
and conversion only reorders and renames the attributes.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey points
➤ Keyboard Command: 2SOFT

Convert Softdesk to Points

Function
This command converts the Softdesk point blocks in the drawing to
Autodesk Field Survey point blocks. These point block formats are
similar and conversion only reorders and renames the attributes. The
Update from Drawing option in the Coordinate File Utilities command
can be used directly on Softdesk points without using this command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Softdesk points
➤ Keyboard Command: 2SURV

Convert Wild/Leica to Points

Function
This command converts the LisCad or Leica point blocks in the
drawing to Autodesk Field Survey point blocks. These point block
formats are similar and conversion only reorders and renames the
attributes. The Update CRD file from Drawing option in the

Chapter 9 Points Commands

340
Coordinate File Utilities command can be used directly on
LisCad/Leica points without using this command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Leica points
➤ Keyboard Command: 2SURV3

Convert Geodimeter to Points

Function
This command converts the Geodimeter point blocks in the drawing to
Autodesk Field Survey point blocks. These point block formats are
similar and conversion only reorders and renames the attributes. The
Update CRD file from Drawing option in the Coordinate File Utilities
command can be used on Geodimeter points to store the point
coordinates to the coordinate file.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Geodimeter points
➤ Keyboard Command: 2SURV4

Convert Points to Eagle Point

Function
This command converts the Autodesk Field Survey point blocks in the
drawing to Eagle Point point blocks. These point block formats are
similar and conversion only reorders and renames the attributes.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Autodesk Field Survey points
➤ Keyboard Command: 2EDS

Convert Geodimeter to Points

341
 Convert Eagle Point to Points

Function
This command converts the Eagle Point point blocks in the drawing to
Autodesk Field Survey point blocks. These point block formats are
similar and conversion only reorders and renames the attributes. The
Update CRD file from Drawing option in the Coordinate File Utilities
command can be directly used on Eagle Point points without using
this command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Points

➤ Prerequisite: Eagle Point points
➤ Keyboard Command: 2SURV2

Chapter 9 Points Commands

342
10-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 4:20 PM

Tools Commands
10
This chapter provides information on using the In this chapter
commands from the Tools menu to download data from ■ Transferring and converting
data files
data collectors, process raw data, use field-to-finish and
■ Editing and processing raw data
other utilities for preparing a plat. ■ Using field to finish

343
 Data Collectors

Function
The Data Collector Programs dialog box allows you to perform two
main functions for a variety of popular data collectors. First, this
command transfers (uploads and downloads) data between the data
collector and Autodesk Field Survey. Second, this command converts
data formats between the data collector format and Autodesk Field
Survey format. If you already have the data file on the computer, you
can skip the transfer function and just run the conversion function.
The transfer function does the conversion automatically. In most cases
the download from the data collector produces a RW5 file (field notes)
and/or a CRD file (coordinate points). Several of the download
programs allow you to automatically run the Edit-Process Raw File
command after you download raw data. You can also send or upload a
CRD file. The dialog box shown here appears when the Data Collectors
menu item is selected.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

344
Data Collectors

Data collector Description

SurvStar For Carlson Software’s data collection program

TDS (Tripod Data For data collectors that use TDS software (Ranger,
Systems) HP48, HP95, Huskey FS-2 & FS-3, Corvallis MC-5)

SMI For SMI data collectors on the HP48

Sokkia/Leitz For Sokkia SDR2 through SDR 33 and other

collectors that have a SDR format like the Trimble
TSC-1

Surveyors For data collectors running Surveyors Asistant

Assistant software (Corvallis MC2, MC5, and Pentax SC5)

Leica For Leica GIF-10 module and Leica TC series total

stations

Nikon For Nikon DR-48 and DTM (300, 310, 400, 500,
700, 800) series total stations. Also includes the
AIMS CE

Geodimeter For the Geodimeter Geodat collector

MDL Laser For MDL Laser instruments

Zeiss For transferring from Zeiss total stations including

Rec 500, Rec Elta, Dac E, Elta-E-Series, and generic
transfer

Dozer2000 For Carlson Software/Leica data collection program,

Dozer 2000.

SurvStar/Dozer 2000
Before you start this command, the SurvStar or Dozer 2000 program
should be in file transfer mode. In SurvStar, go to File Utilities and
choose File Transfer. In Dozer 2000, go to Transfer and choose Transfer
with Computer.

SurvStar/Dozer 2000
345
 When you select the command for the first time, the Options dialog
box appears.

Make sure that all of your communication and transfer settings are
correct. Especially check that your COM Port is set correctly, as this is
the most critical and most often incorrect setting. If you plan to
transfer large files, you may wish to increase the baud rate setting for
faster transfer. SurvStar will automatically adjust on the data collector
end and reconnect at the new baud rate. You can always bring the
Options dialog box back and modify your settings by clicking the
Options button from the File Transfer Utility dialog box.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

346
The view window on the left of the File Transfer Utility dialog box
displays files from your local PC directory and files from your data
collector are displayed on the right.

n Delete: This option allows you to remove a file from the list of files
to be transferred.
n Set Path: If you wish to change the directory of either system, click
the Set Path button. Then, select Local PC or Remote, type in the
path name of the desired directory, and click OK.
n Make Directory: You may create a new directory on either
computer.
n Remove Directory: You may delete a directory on either computer.
n Connect: This option allows you to establish communication
between computers.
n Transfer: This option allows you to transfer selected files. Click on
the file you wish to transfer, and you will see it highlighted in the
screen. You can select multiple files at once by holding the CTRL key
and clicking on additional file names. Once you have highlighted
your files, click the Transfer button to copy them from one machine
to the other. When the transfer is complete, the Transfer Complete
message will appear. If you do not see this message, the transfer was
not successful. Check your cables, COM Port settings, and available
Disk Space (displayed on the File Transfer Utility screen).
n Options: This dialog box allows you to modify your settings as
shown above.

SurvStar/Dozer 2000
347
 TDS Data Collection

Downloading (HP-48 and Husky)

In the TDS program, run the File Transfer command. Choose the type
of data to transfer (CRD or RAW) and pick the Send function key.
Switch from TDS to Autodesk Field Survey. Pick Data Collection in the
Tools menu then pick TDS. Make sure that the COM port and baud
rate are set correctly, then pick the Download button. While the
program waits to receive the TDS file, you have 10 seconds to select the
file to send from the TDS program. When the file transfer is complete,
the command will ask you for the file to create unless you already
specified a file name in the dialog box.

Downloading (Ranger and Windows CE)

In the TDS program, run the Transfer command and pick the Send File
function. Set the "Connecting To" field to HP-48. Make sure that the
COM port, baud rate, and parity are set correctly, then pick OK. In the
Type field of the file selection dialog box, choose Coordinate Files or
Raw Files. Switch from TDS to Autodesk Field Survey. Pick Data
Collection from the Tools menu, then pick TDS. Make sure that the
COM port and baud rate are set correctly, then pick the Download
button. While the program waits to receive the TDS file, you have
10 seconds to select the file to send from the TDS program. When the

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

348
file transfer is complete, the program will ask you for the file to create
unless you already specified a file name in the dialog box.

Uploading (HP-48 and Husky)

An Autodesk Field Survey coordinate file can be converted to a CR5 file
and uploaded into TDS. Start in the TDS program File Transfer
command. Then move back to the program, pick Data Collection from
the Tools menu, and pick TDS. In the Autodesk Field Survey dialog
box, enter a TDS File name. This name should not include the drive
and directory path or file extension. For example, if the CRD file is
c:\data\simo2.crd, then the TDS File name could be just SIMO2. Next
pick the Select File button next to the CRD File edit box and choose
the CRD file to send. Check that the COM port and baud rate are set
correctly. Pick the Upload button. A dialog box allows you to specify
the range of point numbers to upload. Enter the range of points but
before clicking the Start Transfer button, go to TDS and press the
Receive function key. Within 10 seconds go back to Autodesk Field
Survey and click the Start Transfer button on the range of points dialog
box. The file should then transfer.

Uploading (Ranger and Windows CE)

An Autodesk Field Survey coordinate file can be converted to a CR5 file
and uploaded into TDS. Start in the TDS Transfer command, and pick
the Receive File function. Set the "Connecting To" field to HP-48. Make
sure that the COM port, baud rate, and parity are set correctly and pick
OK. Switch from TDS to Autodesk Field Survey. Pick Data Collection
from the Tools menu then pick TDS. In the Autodesk Field Survey
dialog box, enter a TDS File name. This name should not include the
drive and directory path or file extension. For example, if the CRD file
is C:\data\simo2.crd, then the TDS File name could be just SIMO2.
Pick the Select File button next to the CRD File edit box and choose
the CRD file to send. Check that the COM port and baud rate are set
correctly. Pick the Upload button. A dialog box allows you to specify
the range of point numbers to upload. Enter the range of points and
click the Start Transfer button.

TDS Data Collection

349
 Leica/Wild

There are two types of Leica transfers: GIF-10 and GeoCom for all
other Leica instruments. The type is set in the Equipment Type field on
the main dialog box. For transferring with Leica instruments, the
GeoCom program shows a dialog box of the available COM ports on
your computer. The first time that you transfer to an instrument, you
will need to pick the Instruments button and register the instrument
from the list. Pick the Port Settings button to make sure that the
communication settings match the instrument.

Downloading (GeoCom)
To download a file with GeoCom, make sure that the instrument is on
and connected to the computer by serial cable. Then choose
Download. In the GeoCom program, open the computer COM port
that the instrument is connected to by picking the ’+’. Open the
Memory Card and GSI folders. Select the file to transfer and click the
OK button.

Uploading (GeoCom)
To upload a file with GeoCom, specify the file name to be created on
the instrument in the Leica File field, and pick the Upload button. The
command will prompt for the range of points to transfer. Enter the
range and pick the Start Transfer button. The GeoCom program will
start. Open the computer COM port by picking the ’+’. Open the
Memory Card folder, highlight the GSI folder, and click OK.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

350
The upload and download file transfer works with the GIF-10 data
collector. The GIF-10 communication settings should be the following:
Baud: 9600
Parity: NONE
Protocol: NONE
Stop Bit: 1 1
End Mark: CR/LF
Connected As: some computers use DCE and others use DTE

Downloading (GIF-10)
From the GIF-10, run the file transfer command. Then switch to
Autodesk Field Survey. Pick Data Collection from the Tools menu, and
choose Leica. Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly.
Click the Download button and within 10 seconds switch back to GIF-
10 and select the file to send. The file transfer should begin. When the
transfer is complete, the program will ask you for the CRD file to create
unless you already specified a file name in the dialog box.

Uploading (GIF-10)
From the GIF-10 data collector, run the file transfer command. Then
switch to Autodesk Field Survey and pick Leica under Data Collection
on the Tools menu. In the Autodesk Field Survey dialog box, specify
the job name in the Leica File field. Pick the Select File button next to
the CRD File edit box and choose the CRD file to send. Check that the
COM port and baud rate are set correctly. Click the Upload button.
Specify the range of point numbers to upload. Before clicking the OK
button for range of points, switch to GIF-10. Start to receive by
highlighting Receive and pressing the Run button. The GIF-10 shows
the available job numbers. Use the arrow buttons to choose a job to
receive the transfer, then press the Run button.

Converting
Autodesk Field Survey supports raw and coordinate data collected
using three different Leica Operation Codes: Wildsoft, 10-20-30-40,
and the newer LISCAD. Data can also be in the GSI8 format or the
newer GSI16 format.

Leica/Wild
351
 Leica raw files usually have a .RAW or .GSI extension. The primary
difference in the GSI8 and GSI16 formats is that information is
contained in data blocks of 16 characters in the GSI16 format, while it
is contained in blocks of 8 characters in the GSI8 format. Leica
instruments make it possible to have both the GSI8 as well as GSI16
data formats in the same raw file. Lines with the GSI16 format data
always start with an asterisk (*) sign, to distinguish them from the GSI8
format. There is no distinction between Leica raw files collected in the
Wildsoft and LISCAD operation codes.
The Convert Leica button can be used to convert any Leica format file
into a Autodesk Field Survey format file. For example, if you have a
Leica PCMCIA card, no serial cable transfer is needed. Instead use the
Convert routine to make the RW5 and CRD files. Since there is no
distinction between Wildsoft and LISCAD files, you must know in
advance which format has been used in the file. Then, select that
particular option (Wildsoft, 10-20-30-40, or LISCAD) under the
"Coding System" option at the bottom of the dialog box. Another
option you must choose is the order in which foresight-backsight
readings were recorded in the raw file, BFFB or BFBF, as explained in
the dialog box. Then, you can pick the Convert Leica button. The
command prompts for the input Wild/Leica File (raw file), the output
RW5 file and the CRD file, if you have not entered them.

Nikon

Downloading
Choose the equipment and data type under the Transfer Type list.
Also, check that the communication and data format settings match
your collector. Then, click the Download button and follow the on-
screen directions. When the transfer is complete, the program will ask
you for the coordinate file (.CRD) and raw file (.RW5) to create if you
haven’t already specified a file name in the dialog box. The original
data from the collector is stored in a file name with the same name as
the coordinate file except with a .TRN extension. For example, job5.crd
would have job5.trn.

Uploading
Pick the Select File button next to the CRD File edit box and choose
the CRD file to send. Check that the COM port and baud rate are set
correctly and then click the Upload button. A dialog box now allows

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

352
you to specify the range of point numbers to upload. Set the points
and then click the Start Transfer button. The file transfer then
proceeds.

Converting
The Convert button will translate the Nikon raw file format (.TRN or
.RAW) into coordinate (.CRD) and raw (.RW5) files.

Geodimeter

Downloading
From the Geodimeter data collector, go to the file transfer command
by pressing the PRG (Program) key and entering program 54. Choose
Imem (option 1) as the source. Next, choose the file type to send as
either Job (measurement data) or Area (point data). The Geodimeter
then prompts for the job name. Next, enter Serial (option 3) as the
destination. A confirmation screen appears showing the serial port
settings. Here are some typical settings:
COM=1,8,0,9600
Before pressing ENTER (ENT key), go to Autodesk Field Survey and run
Data Collection in the Tools menu and choose Geodimeter. Then click
the Download button and within 15 seconds, go back to the
Geodimeter and press ENTER. The file transfer then proceeds. When the
transfer is complete, the program prompts for the coordinate file and
raw file to create if you haven’t already specified a file name in the
dialog box.

Uploading
In Autodesk Field Survey, choose Geodimeter under Data Collection in
the Tools menu. Pick the Select File button next to the CRD File edit
box and choose the CRD file to send. Check that the COM port and
baud rate are set correctly and then click the Upload button. A dialog
box allows you to specify the range of point numbers to upload. Enter
the points to send but before clicking OK, go to the Geodimeter data
collector. Start the file transfer routine by pressing the PRG key and
entering program 54. Choose Serial (option 3) as the source. The
Geodimeter displays the serial port settings. Check these values and
press ENTER. Next choose Area (option 2) as the destination. Then enter

Geodimeter
353
 the job name. The Geodimeter is now prepared to receive data. In
Autodesk Field Survey, click OK on the points to send dialog box. The
file transfer then proceeds.

Zeiss
The Zeiss option begins the command Zeiss Transfers. This option
allows you upload and download data, translate files from ASCII to
DAT(the native format for Zeiss), and manage data file storage.

SMI Data Collection

Downloading
To send point data from the SMI data collector, go to the file transfer
command by typing [More] [NXT] [TOPC] [COMM]. In SMI version 6
or later, type [Job][KERM][SEND]. Also in version 6, make sure that first
function key reads [NE] and not [XY] in the [Job][KERM] screen.
Otherwise, the coordinate northing and easting will be reversed. Enter
the first point to send, followed by the last point to send, but before
you press ENTER for the last point, switch to Autodesk Field Survey. Pick
Data Collection from the Tools menu and choose SMI. Check that the
COM port and baud rate are set correctly. Click the Download button
and within 10 seconds switch back to SMI and press ENTER to send the

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

354
last point. When the transfer is complete, the program will ask you for
the coordinate file to create unless you already specified a file name in
the dialog box. To send raw data, use the [Print][Raw] command in SMI
then follow the same procedure used for point data.

Uploading
From the SMI data collector, go to the file transfer command by typing
[More] [NXT] [TO48] [COMM]. In SMI version 6 or later, type
[Job][KERM][RECV]. Also in version 6, make sure that first function key
reads [NE] and not [XY] in the [Job][KERM] screen. Otherwise, the
coordinate northing and easting will be reversed. Enter the first point
to send, followed by the last point to send. Enter the job name, but
before you press ENTER, switch to Autodesk Field Survey. Pick Data
Collection from the Tools menu and choose SMI. In the Autodesk Field
Survey dialog box, specify the same job name that you entered in SMI.
Pick the Select File button next to the CRD File edit box and choose
the CRD file to send. Check that the COM port and baud rate are set
correctly, then click the Upload button. A dialog box now allows you
to specify the range of point numbers to upload. Enter the same range
of points that you entered on the SMI. Go back to SMI and hit Enter
for job name, then switch back to Autodesk Field Survey and click the
OK button for the range of points. The file should transfer.

SMI Data Collection

355
 SDR/Sokkia/Leitz Data Collection

This command applies to the Sokkia SDR-20, SDR-22, SDR-31 and SDR-
33 as well as other collectors that have SDR format transfer, such as the
Trimble and C & G.

Downloading
From the SDR data collector, go to the Communications command
from the main menu. Choose Data Format SDR. Press the Send
function key, then choose Select Jobs. From the list of jobs, highlight
the job to transfer and set it to Yes with the arrow keys. Switch to
Autodesk Field Survey. Pick Data Collection from the Tools menu and
choose Sokkia/Leitz. Check that the COM port and baud rate are set
correctly. Click the Download button and within 10 seconds go back
to SDR and press OK. The file should transfer. The SDR format contains
both coordinate and raw data. The coordinate data is converted to a
CRD file and the raw data is converted to a RW5 file. The original SDR
transfer file is stored on the computer as a RAW file. When the transfer
is complete, the program will ask you for the coordinate file unless you
already specified a file name in the dialog box.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

356
The SDR-33 has different modes for storing and transferring data. In
coordinate mode, the download creates points in the CRD file and the
RW5 file contains only some basic header lines. In the raw data mode,
the download creates all the measurement data in the raw file and no
points are created in the CRD file. When you see raw data mode, you
will need to run Edit-Process Raw File in the Tools menu to calculate
the points from the raw data. The third mode in the SDR-33 creates
both raw data in the RAW file and points in the CRD file. The Include
Time Stamps in Notes option sets whether all the date-time records for
each point are included in the RW5 file as description records. The
Include Point Attributes in Notes option will store SDR code 13(AT)
codes to the point note (.NOT) for the coordinate file.

Uploading
Point data from the CRD file can be uploaded into the SDR. Begin at
the Communications command on the SDR main menu. Choose Data
Format SDR. Switch to Autodesk Field Survey and choose Sokkia/Leitz
from the Data Collection command in the Tools menu. Check that the
COM port and baud rate are set correctly. In the Autodesk Field Survey
dialog box, pick the Select File button next to the CRD File edit box
and choose the CRD file to send. Click the Upload button. A Sokkia
Options dialog box appears for setting the job parameters for the file to
be created on the collector. Choose the Distance Unit that matches
your coordinate file (meters, US feet, or international feet) and click
OK. In the dialog box that appears, specify the range of point numbers
to upload. Before you click the Start Transfer button for range of
points, switch to the SDR and press the Receive function key. The SDR
is now waiting to receive. Return to Autodesk Field Survey and click
Start Transfer on the range of point dialog box. The file should
transfer.

Print File
The Receive Sokkia Print File command downloads a print report
from the SDR33 data collector. This file is used only for printing
report purposes. This file is not used to generate coordinate files or
raw files. To receive a print file, choose Data format=Printed in the
Communications menu of the SDR33. Pick the Receive Print File
button in Autodesk Field Survey. On the SDR33, choose Send and
select a job to send. The file is immediately transferred and displayed
in the standard report viewer.

SDR/Sokkia/Leitz Data Collection

357
 MDL Laser
The MDL Laser outputs a raw file of angles, distances and codes as one
string of data which can be converted into a RW5 file. There is no
coordinate data in the MDL raw file, so you need to run Edit-Process
Raw File to calculate coordinates from the raw data. The Download
button will transfer the MDL raw data from a BDI logger.

Surveyor’s Assistant/Corvallis
Microtechnology

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

358
 Downloading
From the Surveyor’s Assistant data collector, pick the Transfer command
from the main menu. Fill out the transfer screen as follows:

1 Enter Direction: OUTPUT

2 Format: LIETZ
3 Data: Coordinate or All Data
4 Port: COM1 or COM2
5 Ckh Hold: NO
6 Protocol: NONE
Check the settings under the PORT menu. Typical port settings are
baud=9600, parity=none, data=8, stop=1 and handshake=XON/XOFF.
Switch to Autodesk Field Survey, pick Data Collection from the Tools
menu and choose Surveyor’s Assistant. Check that the COM port and
baud rate are set correctly. Click the Download button and within 10
seconds switch back to Surveyor’s Assistant and press GO. The file
should transfer. If the All Data option is used, then the Leitz format
will contain both coordinate and raw data. The coordinate data is
converted to a CRD file, and the raw data is converted to a RW5 file.
When the transfer is complete, the program will ask you for the
coordinate file unless you have already specified a file name in the
dialog box.

Uploading
Point data from the CRD file can be uploaded into the Surveyor’s
Assistant. First go to the Transfer routine on the main menu. Fill out
the screen as follows:

1 Direction: INPUT
2 Format: LEITZ
3 Port: COM1 or COM2
4 Protocol: NONE

Switch to Autodesk Field Survey and choose Surveyor’s Assistant from

the Data Collection command on the Tools menu. Check that the
COM port and baud rate are set correctly. In the Autodesk Field Survey
dialog box, pick the Select File button next to the CRD File edit box
and choose the CRD file to send. Then click the Upload button. In the
dialog box that appears, specify the range of point numbers to upload.
Before clicking the OK button for range of points switch to the

Surveyor’s Assistant/Corvallis Microtechnology

359
 Surveyor’s Assistant and press the GO function key. The Surveyor’s
Assistant is now waiting to receive. Switch to Autodesk Field Survey
and click OK on the range of point dialog box. The file should transfer.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: DATACOLT

Edit-Process Raw File

Function
This command reads or creates a raw file (.RW5) that contains lines of
data (records) that could be likened to a surveyor’s field book. You can
specify point coordinates, job information, notes, and the angles and
distances that make up traverse or sideshots records. Once the raw data
is created or read, it can be processed/reduced to coordinates that are
stored in the current coordinate file (.CRD file).
The raw file can also be created or appended using the Draw-Locate
Point, Traverse, Side Shots, and Inverse commands on the COGO
menu. To store the data inputs from these commands into a raw file,
first run the Raw File ON/OFF command on the COGO menu.
The raw files created by TDS data collector programs are compatible
with Autodesk Field Survey without conversion. The file name
extension of the raw file is RW5. The Data Collectors command on the
Tools menu has options for reading other data collectors’ native file
formats and for converting them to RW5 files. Under the File menu for
Edit-Process Raw File, there is an Import menu for converting raw data
from other formats.
When you select the Edit-Process Raw File command, you are
prompted to specify the name of the raw file (.RW5). The current
coordinate file is used automatically. To change the current coordinate
file, use the Set Coordinate File command in the Points menu. If no
coordinate file is current, the program will prompt you for a coordinate
file (.CRD).
Edit-Process Raw File uses the Raw Editor to edit a spreadsheet for
editing the raw data as shown below. Each row of the spreadsheet
represents one record of data. There are 15 types of data records. The
type of data record is shown in the first column. Different record types

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

360
use different numbers of columns. Whenever the data record type
changes between rows, a record header is added to the spreadsheet that
describes each column of data in the rows that follow it. See the
Format of the Raw File section later in this chapter for a complete list
of the supported record header codes and their field headers.

File
The File menu of the Raw Editor dialog box contains commands for
printing, importing, exporting, and saving files.

n Print: This command displays the raw file data using the standard
report viewer. You can print the report, draw it in the drawing, or
save it to a file.
n Import: These commands convert raw data from other formats
into the current Edit-Process RW5 file. The converted raw data will
be added to the end of the existing data in the current RW5 file. In
many cases, the raw file to import can be downloaded directly
from the data collector or instrument using the appropriate Data
Collector command. In other cases, the file to import is the output
from another software program.

Edit-Process Raw File

361
 The following formats are supported:
n Sokkia/Leitz (.raw): Several data collectors generate this format
including the SDR series collectors.
n Wild/Leica (.gsi or .raw): The command reads the Leica raw file
in Wildsoft, Liscad, or 10-20-30-40 format. You can choose an
option to specify direct-reverse shot order, if any exists.
n SMI (.raw)
n Geodimeter (.obs or .raw)
n Nikon (.trn or .raw)
n MDL Laser (.cds)
n Fieldbook (.fbk): From Softdesk or Land Development Desktop.
n SurvCOGO (.raw or .txt)
n PC Cogo (.bat)
n Survis (.raw)

n Export: This command exports the raw data out to a *.fbk field
book file.
n Save/Save As: These commands save the raw data as a *.RW5 file.
n Exit: This command exits the raw file editor.

Edit
Under the Edit menu of the Raw Editor are basic cut, copy, and paste
commands for editing. To edit the raw data, simply highlight the cell
and type in the new value. To change the type of record, pick on the
down arrow in the first column and choose a new data type from the
list. To delete a row, highlight any cell in the row and press the DELETE
key, or choose Delete Row from the Edit menu. Data can be hidden
from view with the Hide and Show commands.

Search
Under the Search menu of the Raw Editor are basic Find and Replace
commands. You enter in a variable you want to find and, optionally,
what you want to replace it with.

Display
The Display menu of the Raw Editor contains two settings on how the
Vertical and Distance items are shown in the Raw Editor dialog box.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

362
n Vertical: Vertical can be shown as Vertical Angle, Zenith Angle,
Elevation Difference, or None. You pick the item off the menu list,
and a check mark is placed in front of the selection.
n Distance: There are two choices for showing distance in the Raw
Editor, slope and horizontal. You pick the item off the menu list,
and a check mark is placed in front of the selection.

Add
You can add records by pressing the INSERT key, pressing the down
arrow key from the last line in the spreadsheet, or by choosing one of
the add records from the Add menu of the Raw Editor.
The types of records are the following:

n TR (Traverse): The traverse record contains the occupied point

number, foresight point number, angle mode, horizontal angle,
slope distance, vertical angle, and description. When processed, this
record calculates and stores the coordinates for the foresight point.
Traversing also moves the setup by making the traverse foresight
point the next occupied point and the traverse occupied point the
next backsight point. The different angle modes are: NE for
northeast bearing, SE for southeast, SW for southwest, NW for
northwest, AZ for azimuth, AL for angle left, AR for angle right, DL
for deflection angle left, DR for deflection angle right, and GN for
gons. To set the angle code, pick on the Code down arrow and
choose from the list. The horizontal and vertical angles must be
entered as dd.mmss. For example, 45.2305 is 45 degrees, 23
minutes, and 5 seconds. The vertical angle can be shown as vertical
angle (0 degrees level), zenith angle (90 degrees level), or elevation
difference. The vertical angle mode is set in the Raw Editor Display
menu. The distance mode is also set in the Raw Editor Display
menu, as either slope or horizontal distance. The description field is
used as the foresight point description.
n SS (SideShot): The sideshot record is the same as the traverse record
except that sideshot does not move the setup.
n HI (Instrument and Rod Height): This record sets the instrument
and rod heights used in elevation calculations. This record should
precede any traverse and sideshot records that you want the heights
applied to.
n BK (BackSight): The backsight record contains the occupied point
number, backsight point number, backsight azimuth, and the set
azimuth. This record should precede any traverse and sideshot

Edit-Process Raw File

363
 records that use this setup. If no backsight point is entered, the
command turns angles from the backsight azimuth. The Set
Azimuth is the circle reading of the instrument when sighting the
backsight. A Set Azimuth of zero is the default.
n PT (Store Point): The store point record consists of a point number,
northing, easting, elevation, and description. When processing, this
data is stored as a point in the coordinate file.
n DS (Description): The description record is an additional note that
appears in the spreadsheet editor and printouts. This record is not
used in processing.
n CL (Closing Shot): The closing shot record is the traverse record
where the foresight point is the closing point for the traverse. This
record is used by the adjustment commands in the Process menu.
There should be only one CL record in the raw file. If there is no CL
record, the process adjustment routines will prompt for the closing
shot.
n AB (Angle Balance): The Angle Balance is the traverse record that
the Angle Balance command in the Process menu uses to compare
the angle between the occupied point and foresight point to a user-
specified reference angle. There should be only one AB record in the
raw file. If there is no AB record, then the Angle Balance command
will prompt for which shot to use as the angle balance.
n CL + AB (Closing Shot and Angle Balance): This record is used as
both the closing shot and angle balance records.
n FD (Foresight Direct): The foresight direct is a traverse record used
in a direct and reverse set. When the program finds a direct-reverse
measurement records, it will look for the other three records to
complete the set.
n FR (Foresight Reverse): The foresight reverse is a traverse record
used in a direct and reverse set.
n BD (Backsight Direct): The backsight direct is a traverse record
used in a direct and reverse set.
n BR (Backsight Reverse): The backsight reverse is a traverse record
used in a direct and reverse set.
n NAME (Traverse Name): This record acts as an identifier for the
group of records that make up a traverse. All the records after the
NAME record belong to that traverse up to the next NAME record or
the end of the file. This record allows you to have multiple traverses
in one raw file. When you are running one of the Process commands,
the program will bring up a list of all the traverse names. Choose
which traverse to process. If you have only one traverse in the raw
file, then you don’t need the NAME record.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

364
Following is an example of raw data.

CRD
The CRD menu of the Raw Editor contains commands for
manipulating points in a coordinate file.
n Edit Point: This command creates new points in the coordinate
file, or edits existing points.
n List Points: This command generates a list of points from the
coordinate file. The dialog box gives the total number of points, and
allows for listing a certain range of points. The list is displayed in
the report viewer.

Edit-Process Raw File

365
 1 Under the Range Settings option, the points to list are selected. The
highest point number in the file is also displayed.
n Range of Points: Type in the range of points. For example 1-34,
40-56, or enter all to list all of the points in the coordinate file.
n Description Match: A description entered here would only list
points with that description. If all descriptions are to be listed, leave
it as the *.
2 Under Number of Decimal Places for, define the precision for the
points.
n Northing/Easting: Enter the number of decimal places you want
listed for the northing and easting of the points.
n Elevation: Enter the number of decimal places you want listed for
the elevation of the points.
n Set Coordinate File: This command sets a coordinate file for the
job. It can be an existing file, or you can create a new file.

Process (Compute Points)

The commands under the Process (Compute Points) menu of the Raw
File Editor provide various methods for processing the raw file and for
storing the calculated points in the coordinate file. The different
types are described separately for each adjustment.
No Adjust: This command processes the raw file and stores the
calculated coordinates to the coordinate file. The name No Adjust
means that no angle balance or traverse adjustment will be applied.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

366
The dialog box prompts for the following options.

n Direct-Reverse Vertical Angles: For any direct-reverse raw data,

you can choose to process the direct-reverse shots using only the
foresight direct shot, or to balance all shots.
n Report Angle Format: This setting specifies the angle format for
the report. The By File option specifies that the report should use
the angle format in the RW5 file.
n Calculate Elevations: The Calculate Elevations option controls for
which points elevations will be calculated. For example, if the
traverse point elevations have already been adjusted and you need
to recalculate the sideshot elevations, then use the SideShots Only
option.
n Report SideShots: This option specifies whether to include the
sideshot data in the process results report.
n Point Protect: This option will check the coordinate file for
existing point data before processing. If the foresight point number
for any traverse or sideshot record is already a stored coordinate in
the coordinate file, then the program shows a list of conflicting
point numbers. You can either continue processing and overwrite
the coordinate file coordinates with the calculated raw file
coordinates, or you can cancel the processing to go back to the
editor to change foresight numbers.
n Create Point Notes: This option will generate a note file (.NOT)
named after the coordinate file. The note file contains additional
descriptions for points. With this option active, the text from all
note records (DS records) will be stored to the note file for the
foresight point number preceding the note records.
n Decimal Places for Report: Controls the number of decimals used
in the report, ranging from zero to four.
n Use Report Formatter: Allows you to customize the process results
report by selecting the layout of the fields to display. The report
formatter can also output the report to Microsoft Excel and Access.
Without the report formatter, the program generates a standard
results report.
n Calculate State Plane Scale Factor at Each Setup: This will
calculate a scale factor for each TR and SS record. This scale factor is
calculated as the average of the scale factors at the occupied and
foresights points. At these points, the scale factor is calculated as the
state plane grid factor minus the elevation divided by the earth
radius [SF = Grid Factor - (Elev/Earth Radius)]. In order to calculate
the state plane scale factors, the traverse coordinates must be in
state plane coordinates. When this option is selected, the program

Edit-Process Raw File

367
 will prompt for the state plane zone to use. Select either Zone 27
or 83.
n Scale Factor: This factor is multiplied by the slope distance for the
traverse and sideshot records.
n Correct for Earth Curvature: This adjusts the calculated points for
the effect of the Earth’s curvature. Typically this adjustment is small
and adjusts the elevation more than the horizontal.
n Reference Closing Point (OPTIONAL): This is an optional field for
entering the coordinates to compare the ending traverse point with.
This reference closing point is used to calculate the closure. If you
do not specify this option the command will use the starting
coordinate as the reference closing point.

After you pick OK for the first dialog box, a Traverse Points dialog box
appears. Enter the starting and ending point numbers.

The command reads the raw file to set the defaults for these point
numbers, which are used to calculate the closure. The difference
between the ending point and the reference closing point is the closure
error. The sum of the traverse distances from the starting to the ending
point is used as the total distance traversed.
After you pick OK for the second dialog box, the program starts
processing the raw file from the top record down. The result is
displayed in the standard report viewer, which you can use to save,
print, or draw the report.

Angle Balance

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

368
This process command applies an angle balance to the traverse lines
when calculating the coordinates. This command displays the same
dialog box as No Adjust. The angle balance takes the angular error
divided by the number of traverse lines and adjusts the angle of each
traverse line by that amount. The angular error is the difference
between the angle balance shot and a reference angle. The angle
balance shot is specified as a type AB or CL+AB record in the raw file. If
no AB record is found in the raw file, then the command prompts for
which traverse shot to use as the angle balance shot. The angle from
the angle balance shot is calculated as the angle from the occupied
point to the foresight point. The reference angle can be specified as a
bearing, as an azimuth, or by two point numbers in the dialog box
shown. The angle balance report shows the unadjusted points, the
unadjusted closure, the angular error, the adjusted points, and the
adjusted closure. Typically, but not always, applying the angle balance
correction improves the traverse closure.

Compass, Crandall, Transit

These process commands apply the selected rule of Compass, Crandall,
or Transit, to the traverse lines when calculating the coordinates. The
dialog box is the same for all three methods.

Edit-Process Raw File

369
 n Reference Closing Point: This is the field for entering the point
number and coordinates to compare the ending traverse point with.
The reference closing point is used to calculate the closure.
n Direct-Reverse Vertical Angles: For any direct-reverse raw data,
you can choose to process the direct-reverse shots using only the
foresight direct shot, or to balance all shots.
n Report Angle Format: This setting specifies the angle format for
the report. The By File option specifies that the report should use
the angle format in the RW5 file.
n Calculate Elevations: The Calculate Elevations option controls for
which points elevations will be calculated. For example, if the
traverse point elevations have already been adjusted and you need
to recalculate the sideshot elevations, then use the SideShots Only
option.
n Create Point Notes: This option will generate a note file (.NOT)
named after the coordinate file. The note file contains additional
descriptions for points. With this option active, the text from all
note records (DS records) will be stored to the note file for the
foresight point number preceding the note records.
n Report Unadjusted Points: Includes the unadjusted points in the
report.
n Vertical Error Adjustment: Adjusts the vertical error for elevation
difference.
n Report Point Adjustments: Reports the adjustment of each point.
n Apply Angle Balance: Applies the Angle Balance method to the
traverse lines for calculating coordinates.
n Point Protect: This option will check the coordinate file for
existing point data before processing. If the foresight point number
for any traverse or sideshot record is already a stored coordinate in
the coordinate file, then the program shows a list of conflicting
point numbers. You can either continue processing and overwrite
the coordinate file coordinates with the calculated raw file
coordinates, or you can cancel the processing to go back to the
editor to change foresight numbers.
n Report SideShots: This option specifies whether to include the
sideshot data in the process results report.
n Decimal Places for Report: Controls the number of decimals used
in the report, ranging from zero to four.
n Use Report Formatter: Allows you to customize the process results
report by selecting the layout of the fields to display. The report
formatter can also output the report to Microsoft Excel and Access.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

370
 Without the report formatter, the program generates a standard
results report.
n Calculate State Plane Scale Factor at Each Setup: This will
calculate a scale factor for each TR and SS record. This scale factor is
calculated as the average of the scale factors at the occupied and
foresights points. At these points, the scale factor is calculated as the
state plane grid factor minus the elevation divided by the earth
radius [SF = Grid Factor - (Elev/Earth Radius)]. In order to calculate
the state plane scale factors, the traverse coordinates must be in
state plane coordinates. When this option is selected, the program
will prompt for the state plane zone to use. Select either Zone 27
or 83.
n Scale Factor: This factor is multiplied by the slope distance for the
traverse and sideshot records.
n Correct for Earth Curvature: This adjusts the calculated points for
the effect of the Earth’s curvature. Typically this adjustment is small
and adjusts the elevation more than the horizontal.

After the command adjusts the traverse, it also recalculates the

sideshots. The closure error is calculated as the difference between the
closing shot and a reference point. The closing shot is specified as a
type CL or CL+AB record in the raw file. If no CL record is found in the
raw file, then the command prompts for which traverse shot to use as
the closing shot. The foresight point is used as the closing coordinate.
The reference point can be specified by point number or by entering
the northing, easting, and elevation. The process results report shows
the unadjusted points, closure error, adjustments to each traverse
point, and adjusted points.

Prepare Least Squares Data

From the raw file data, this command makes initial calculations for the
coordinate points in the traverse. This data, along with the control
point coordinates and angle and distance measurements, is stored to a
data file with the same name as the current RW5 file using a .LSQ
extension (for example, survey.lsq goes with survey.rw5). The
constraints of the command are:

n All angle readings must be in “ angle right” mode.

n The coordinates of the starting and the ending points must be
known.

Edit-Process Raw File

371
 The command begins with a dialog box which you specify the reference
closing coordinates and any scale factors to apply to the distance
measurements. The Reference Closing Point is the last point in the
traverse, whose coordinates must be known. If an angle balance shot is
used in the traverse, the Reference Angle Balance Angle must also be
specified, either as a value or as the angle between known points.

n Reference Closing Point: Enter the point number and coordinates

to be compared to the ending traverse point. This reference closing
point is used to calculate the closure.
n Calculate State Plane Scale Factor at Each Setup: This will
calculate a scale factor for each TR and SS record. This scale factor is
calculated as the average of the scale factors at the occupied and
foresights points. At these points the scale factor is calculated as the
state plane grid factor minus the elevation divided by the earth
radius [SF = Grid Factor - (Elev/Earth Radius)]. In order to calculate
the state plane scale factors, the traverse coordinates must be in
state plane coordinates. When this option is selected, the program
will prompt for the state plane zone to use. Select either Zone 27
or 83.
n Scale Factor: This factor is multiplied by the slope distance for the
traverse and sideshot records.
n Correct for Earth Curvature: This adjusts the calculated points for
the effect of the Earth’s curvature. Typically this adjustment is small
and adjusts the elevation more than the horizontal.
Since angles and distances have errors of different magnitudes, they
are normalized using weights, based on the accuracy and confidence
with which these quantities have been measured.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

372
 Below is the dialog box for specifying the estimated
measurement errors.

n Reading Error: The horizontal angular error in the instrument. For

example, for a "5-second" instrument, this error would be 5.
n Pointing Error: Accounts for several factors in the horizontal angle
reading, including accuracy lining up the crosshairs on the target,
the target size, and the optical quality of the instrument.
n Target and Instrument Centering Errors: The distance off the
point due to faulty centering of both the target and instrument.
n EDM Constant Error: The accuracy of the instrument distance
measurements.
n EDM Scaler Error: Entered in parts per million for the increased
error in longer measurements.

The command calculates the weights for each distance and angle
measurement using these measurement errors. The control points,
points to adjust, distance, and angle measurements with weights are
reported. You can edit these measurements and weights using the Edit
Least-Squares Data command or go directly to the Process Least-
Squares Data command.

Edit Least Squares Data

This command edits the points, measurements, and weights stored in
the .LSQ file associated with the current RW5 file, using the dialog box
shown. You can edit, add, or remove the control points. You can also
adjust points, angle measurements, or distance measurements. The
command does not check that the editing is valid, so you need to
make sure that you keep a good set of least-squares data and don’t
delete a needed control point.

Edit-Process Raw File

373
 n Edit: Brings up one of the three following dialog boxes for
modifying any values. The first two, Control and Adjust Points use
the first Edit Point dialog box, the other two observation settings
have their own.
n Add: Uses one of the three dialog boxes for adding in new data.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

374
n Remove: Removes the selected line of data from the dialog box.
n Distance Error: Allows you to set the distance standard error
weights for all the distance measurements to the same value.

n Angle Error: This option sets the standard error weights for all the
angle measurements.

Process Least Squares Data

This command applies a least-squares adjustment to the data stored in
the .LSQ file associated with the current .RW5 file. The closing errors
are distributed among the other points, using the “ Method of Least
Squares” (Ref : Wolf, P.R. and Ghilani, C.D., 1996, “ Adjustment
Computations” , John Wiley and Sons, NY, Third Edition). After the
adjustment, the rest of the raw file is processed to recalculate the
sideshots. You can choose to draw standard error ellipses around the
adjusted points. The ellipse axes are multiplied by Ellipse Scale Factor
to make the ellipse larger for easier viewing.
The least-squares process report shows the input data and the results.
For each point, the amount adjusted and the standard error in X and Y
are reported. The Reference Standard Deviation is based on the sum of
the residuals and the initial estimated standard errors. The Chi-Squares
test is a goodness-of-fit test that checks the reference standard
deviation with the least squares model. If this test fails, there may be a

Edit-Process Raw File

375
 blunder in the measurement data or the initial estimated standard
errors were too low or too high.
The following is a sample Least Squares Data report.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

376
Tools
The Tools menu of the Raw Editor contains commands to help you
manage points and angles in the raw file.

n Direct-Reverse Report: This command creates a report of direct

and reverse shots along with the resulting averaged shots. The
residuals are the difference between the measurement and the final
average. A sample report is shown below.

n Reduce Direct-Reverse: This command processes the direct and

reverse shots and simplifies the raw file by replacing the sets of
direct and reverse shots with the resulting average traverse record.
n Update Raw from Points: This command updates the horizontal
angle, distance, and vertical angle data in the raw file using the
coordinates from the coordinate file. This command can be used to
generate a raw file from point numbers only. To create raw data from
points, first create rows of Traverse and/or SideShot records in the
spreadsheet containing only the occupied and foresight point
numbers. Set the angle code to the desired format, then run Update
Raw from Points. All the angles and distances will be filled in.
n Find Bad Angle: This command applies the angular error to each
traverse record one at a time. The adjusted traverse record that
improves the closure the most is reported as the Bad Angle. The

Edit-Process Raw File

377
 angular error is the difference between the angle balance shot and a
reference angle.
n Append Another Raw File: This command prompts for a raw file
(.RW5). The file is read and its data is added to the end of the
existing raw file. For example, if you are editing the raw file from a
first day’s work, and you have a separate raw file containing a
second day’s work, you can use this routine to add the second raw
data file to the first.
n Draw Traverse-Sideshot Lines: This command draws lines for all
the traverse and sideshot records. Sideshot Traverses are traverses
that do not lead to the closing or ending point.

You can specify different layers so that you can draw different lines
with different colors. This command does not process the raw file.
Instead it reads the raw file, and, for each traverse and sideshot
record, it looks up the coordinates for the occupied and foresight
points in the CRD file. You may need to run the No Adjust
command under Process (Compute Points) menu of the Raw Editor
before you run this command.
n Renumber Points: This command renumbers points in the raw file.
This applies to all point numbers including: TR, SS, and PT records.

You specify the range of point numbers to change and the amount
to change in the dialog box.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

378
Format of the Raw File (.RW5 extension)
The following are supported record header codes with their field
headers.

BK > Backsight
OP > Occupy Point Number
BP > Backsight Point Number (if 0 the next field’s azimuth will be
used for)
BS > Back Azimuth
BC > Back Circle
DS > Description
LS > Line of Sight
HI > Height of Instrument
HR > Height of Rod/Target
SP > Store Point
PN > Point Number
N > North Coordinate
E > East Coordinate
EL > Elevation
— > Point Description/Note
TR > Traverse
SS > Side Shot
CL > Closure Record
AB > Angle Balance Record
OP > Occupy Point Number
FP > Foresight Point Number
(one of the following 6)
AZ > Azimuth (angle code 5)
BR > Bearing (angle code 1 = NE, 2 = SE, 3 = SW, 4 = NW)
AR > Angle Right (angle code 7)
AL > Angle Left (angle code 6)
DR > Deflection Angle Right (angle code 9)
DL > Deflection Angle Left (angle code 8)
(one of the following 3)
ZE > Zenith Angle (90 degrees level)
VA > Vertical Angle (0 degrees level)
CE > Change/Difference in Elevation from
Instrument Point
SD > Slope Distance (if ZE or VA above)
HD > Horizontal Distance (if CE above)

Edit-Process Raw File

379
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: RAWEDIT

Field to Finish

Function
This command turns data collector field notes into a final Autodesk
Field Survey drawing by matching the descriptions of the field points
with codes you define. The points are brought into the drawing with
attributes defined by the code including layer, symbol, size, and
linetype.
Two files are used by the Field to Finish command, a data file and a
code file. The data file consists of X,Y,Z points with text description
fields. The description fields contain codes for the Field to Finish
processing. The data file can be either a coordinate file (.crd) or an
ASCII file (.txt or .asc). The code file (.fld) defines the layer, symbol,
size, and other actions to apply to each code. These two file names are
displayed at the top line of the Field to Finish dialog box.
Field to Finish can translate the field points into Autodesk Field Survey
points with a symbol, layer, and size defined by the code. The point
settings specifying the labeling of the description, point number,
elevation, and whether to locate the point at zero or at the real Z are
set in the Point Defaults command under the Points menu. (The Draw-
Locate Points command is another command you can use to draw
points. Draw-Locate Points is simpler than Field to Finish, but not as
powerful.)

Linework in Field to Finish

Field to Finish uses two different methods for connecting linework.
One method creates linework by connecting all points with the same
code. The linetype is defined by the code as either points only (no
linework), lines, 2D polylines, or 3D polylines (breaklines). Distinct
lines with the same code are defined by adding a group number to the
end of the code name in the data file. With this method, all points
with the description CODE1 will make up one line while points with
CODE2 will make up another line. Both CODE1 and CODE2 use the
definition for CODE. For example, the code EP could be a code for edge
of pavement that is to be connected as 3D polylines. If there are two

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

380
separate edge of pavement lines on the left and right sides of a road, all
the points for the left side could have the description EP1 and all the
points on the right side could use EP2.
The second method also connects points with the same code. The
difference is that instead of using a number after the code for distinct
lines, you use the same code with an additional code for starting and
ending the line. For example, +0 is used to start a line and -0 to end. So
the coding for a segment of edge of pavement could be EP+0, EP, EP,
EP-0. Another special code that has been added to Field to Finish is
+7, -7. This 7 code will use the linetype definition of line, 2D polyline,
or 3D polyline defined by the Field to Finish code. For example, if EP is
defined as a 3D polyline, then the coding EP+7, EP, EP, EP-7 will create
a 3D polyline. Otherwise, codes like +0, -0, which is defined as start
and end line, will draw EP as a line. When a field to finish code is
defined as Linework (and not Points Only), coding such as EP +7, EP,
EP, EP, EP +7, EP, will also lead to two distinct polylines, because
polylines that are started with +7 are automatically ended prior to +7.
The “ end polyline” code is not necessary.
The advantage to the second method is that you don't have to keep
track of line numbers. For example, if you are surveying 50 curb lines,
the first method would require you to use 50 distinct curb numbers.
The advantage to the first method is that you don't have to use start
and end codes. Also, the Nearest Found connection option applies to
the first method.

Point Codes in Field to Finish

Autodesk Field Survey points in a drawing have point attributes,
including a description. When Field to Finish draws the points, the
point description from the data file is processed to match a code. The
code then defines the description that is drawn with the point. For
example, consider a code of UP with a description of POLE and a data
point with the description UP. The data point description UP would be
matched with the code UP and the point would be drawn with the
description POLE. A special character “ /” (the divide key) can be used
for an unprocessed description. Everything after the “ /” is added
directly to the point description and is not considered a code. For
example, a data point with the description UP / 150 with the same
code UP definition above would be drawn with the description
POLE 150.
Multiple codes are defined by including each code in the point
description field separated by a space. A single data point can be used

Field to Finish
381
 in different lines by assigning it multiple codes. For instance, a point
might be part of both a curb line and a driveway line with a
description of CURB DRW. Since Field to Finish processes spaces in the
description as multiple codes, you should avoid spaces in the
descriptions except when multiple codes are intended or after the "/"
character. Also, codes can’t have spaces because they would be spilt
into multiple codes. For example, a code for light post could not be
LGT POST but instead could be LGTPOST. When Field to Finish detects
spaces in the descriptions at start up, it allows you to choose whether
to process the multiple codes.
The following special codes can be added after or before a code: PC,
PT, CLO, NE, ROT, SCA, SZ, AZI, DIST, OH, and OV. A special code
comes after or before the regular code. A space separates the two codes.
You may substitute you own codes for the pre-defined codes. See the
Select Code Table option below, under Field to Finish Command
Descriptions. The only exception to the required space separation is
use of the dot (.) character as a replacement for +7 and – 7 (see
Linework in Field to Finish above). If a polyline is started by a dot
rather than +7 (see Linework in Field to Finish), then FL. would be a
legitimate Fence Line start code.

n PC: This code begins a three point arc. The point with this special
code is the first point on the arc. The next point with the code is
considered a point on the arc, and third point with the code is the
arc endpoint. For example (in point number, X, Y, Z, description
format),
10, 500, 500, 0, EP PC start curve (or PC EP)
11, 525, 527, 0, EP second point on curve
12, 531, 533, 0, EP end point of curve
n PT: This is a special code that can be used with PC to define a curve
with more than three points. Starting at the point with the PC code,
the program will look for a PT code. If the PT is found, all the points
between the PC and PT are used for the curve, which is drawn as a
smoothed polyline that passes through all points and curves only
between points. If no PT is found, then the regular three point arc is
applied as explained above.
n CLO: This code forces the lines drawn between a series of points
with the same code to close back to the first point with the same
code. For example, shots 1-4 all have the BLD description, and the
description of point 4 is BLD CLO. This forces the linework drawn

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

382
 for the BLD code, to close back to point 1, which is the first point
with the description of BLD.
n NE: This code represents no elevation. A point with this special
code is located at zero elevation.
n ROT: This code is used to set the rotation of the point symbol. If a
point number follows the ROT code, then the angle from the
current point to this point number is used for the rotation. For
example, ROT45 would rotate the symbol towards point
number 45. If there is no point number after the ROT code, then
the rotation point is the next point number with the same code as
the current point.
n SCA: This special code is used to control multi-point symbols.
n SZ: This special code is used to change the symbol size. The value of
the new symbol size is specified after the SZ (for example SZ0.2).
This value is a size scaler that is multiplied by the current drawing
scale to determine the actual drawn size. For example, a drawing
scale of 50 and a symbol size scaler of 0.2 would make the drawn
symbol size 10.
n AZI and DIST: These codes are used together to locate an offset
point. The AZI sets the offset azimuth and DIST sets the distance.
The values should directly follow the code. For example, AZI25
DIST4.2 would draw the point offset 4.2 at an azimuth of
25 degrees.
n OH and OV: These codes stand for offset horizontal and offset
vertical. These offset codes apply to 2D and 3D polylines. A single
set of offset codes can be used to offset the polyline a set amount.
For example,
10, 500, 500, 100, EP OH2.5 OV-.5
11, 525, 527, 101, EP
12, 531, 533, 103, EP
This creates a polyline connecting points 10,11, and 12, and an
offset polyline with a 2.5 horizontal and -0.5 vertical offset. The
direction of the horizontal offset is determined by the direction of
the polyline. A positive horizontal offset goes right from the
polyline direction and a negative goes left. The horizontal and
vertical offset amounts apply starting at the point with the offset
codes until a new offset code is found or the end of the polyline is
reached. Only one horizontal and vertical offset can be applied to a

Field to Finish
383
 2D polyline. For a 3D polyline, multiple offset codes can be used to
make a variable offset. For example,
10, 500, 500, 100, EP OH2.5 OV-.5
11, 525, 527, 101, EP OH5.5 OV-.75
12, 531, 533, 103, EP OH7.5
This would offset the first point horizontal 2.5 and vertical -0.5, the
second point horizontal 5.5 and vertical -0.75, and the third point
horizontal 7.5 and vertical -0.75.

Layers in Field to Finish

Field to Finish will assign layers to the points and linework according
to the code definitions. If the layers are not already defined, Field to
Finish will create the necessary layers and assign different colors. To
use the same colors for the same layers in all your drawings, define the
layers in the prototype drawing, which is the default drawing that is
loaded whenever a new drawing is created.
To define layers in the prototype drawing, save your current drawing.
Start a new drawing using the New command on the file menu. Do
not give the new drawing a name, just click OK. Define the layers as
desired with the Layer command or LAYER CONTROL. When you are
done creating layers, use the SAVEAS command and save the Drawing
Template (.dwt) under Save as Type. In Autodesk Field Survey, the
default drawing template is SURV.DWT. You can overwrite this
template with the new drawing template. You can edit the Autodesk
Field Survey startup icon on the desktop to use the new drawing
template. To edit the icon, right click on it and choose Properties,
and then Shortcut, and change the drawing template name in the
Target field.
When a point from the data file has a description that does not match
a defined code, the point is drawn with a default method, which is to
draw a point in the "MISC" layer with no linework. To change the
default, define a code called "SC_DFLT". The unmatched points will
then use the code "SC_DFLT" definition. A good way to check the data
file for unmatched descriptions is to use Report Codes/Points menu
and choose the Data Points and Distinct Code options. This command
prints the codes in the data file and identifies any undefined codes.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

384
 Field to Finish Command Descriptions
The main Field to Finish dialog box allows you to load the data and
code files, view and edit the code definitions, and then process the files.

The top section displays the code definitions. The middle section has
two rows of buttons for changing the selected code definitions similar to
Autodesk Field Survey’s Layer Control command. The bottom section
has three columns of functions.

1 The display window in the main Field to Finish dialog box lists the
field code and all associated attributes. You can select a code definition
directly from the list to modify it using options below the display
window or an option listed in Code Definitions.
2 The middle row of buttons in the Field to Finish dialog box allow you
change a field code definition.
n Select All: This option selects all of the code definitions in the list.
n Clear All: This option deselects any of the selected code definitions.
n Symbol: This option allows you to choose a different symbol type.
n Linetype: This option allows you to choose a different linetype.
n Entity: This option allows you to change a line entity to 3D, 2D, or
to a line. It also allows you to change the connection order.
n Layer: This option allows you to change the layer for entities
drawn by the code definition.

Field to Finish
385
 n Width: This option allows you to change the width of a line or
polyline.
n Off: This option allows you to turn off the layer.
n SymSize: This option allows you to change the size of the symbol.
n TxtSize: This option allows you to change the size of the text.
n Tie: This option allows you to automatically close linework
generated by field codes.
n Distinct: This option allows you to assign all points to a distinct
layer.
n Separate: This option allows you to create separate layers for the
points and lines created with the field code definition.
n Precision: This option allows you to choose a precision for the
elevation labels.
n On: This option allows you to turn on the layer.

3 Under Code Table Settings you choose options for setting and
reporting the code table.
n Select Code Table: This option allows you to select the code table
file to use and specify replacement characters. To choose a different
code table, pick the Select button in the upper left corner. In select
code table, you may enter Replacement Codes. If you prefer to begin
curves with BC, then the Replacement for PC Code (Start Curve)
field should be changed to BC. Entries are not case sensitive. With
Replacement Codes, you can tailor Field to Finish to your own
system of coding.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

386
n Sort Table: This sorts the code table by either code name or layer.
n Report Codes/Points: This option prints the code table or the data
file to the screen, file, or printer. A useful option here is to print the
data file (CRD Points) and choose Sort by Codes which will group
the data points by distinct codes.

Field to Finish
387
 An example of a report follows.

n Code Table by CRD: This option creates code table definitions

based on the data file field descriptions.

4 Under Code Definitions, there are five options for editing code
definitions.
n Edit: To edit a code definition, highlight one of the definitions in
the list. Then select the Edit button (or you can double click the
code definition in the list).

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

388
 This brings up the Code Definition dialog box.

n Category: This is an optional field that can to used to help organize

your codes. A category is useful only for viewing and printing and is
not used for processing.
n Sequence: This specifies a sequence type code. Sequences are a way
to simplify field entry of a sequence of codes. For example, a road
cross section could be SHD1 EP1 CL EP2 SHD2. Instead of entering
these individual codes, you can enter one sequence definition that
stores these codes in order. Then, in the field, you can enter just the
sequence code (such as RD). The cross section can be shot in left to
right then left to right order, right to left then right to left order, or
alternating left to right then right to left order. The alternating
method is known as the Zorro style. The one restriction is that the
shots always start from a right or left edge.
To set up a sequence, choose the Sequence toggle in the Edit Field
Code Definition dialog box. Then pick the Define Code Sequence
button, which brings up a dialog box that allows you to enter the
sequence codes in order. These sequence codes should be defined as

Field to Finish
389
 normal codes somewhere else in the Field to Finish code table (for
example SHD as a 3D polyline).

In the field, you will use one template code for all the cross-sections
shots (for example, RD for all the points). Then Field to Finish will
substitute this template code with the sequence codes (for example,
substitute RD with SHD).
n Define Code Sequence: This sets the code names that make up the
sequence explained in the Sequence section.
n Code: This is the key name that identities the code and is matched
with the field data descriptions.
n Processing ON: This toggle controls whether this code will be
processed.
n Full Name: This is an optional field that describes the code for
viewing.
n Layer: The point and linework for the code will be created in this
layer.
n Description: This value is assigned to the point description field.
An additional description can be added to a point by entering it
after a forward slash in the data description field.
n Use Code: This option turns off the Description field described
above. The points will be drawn with their original unprocessed
descriptions.
n Set Linetype: Linework can be drawn in any of the 48 special
linetypes or using the linetype for the layer (BYLAYER). The spacing

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

390
 and size of special linetypes is determined by the LTSCALE variable
and by the linetype settings from the Defaults command under
Annotate.
n Set Symbol: This is the point symbol for the code. To avoid
drawing a symbol, use spt0.
n Symbol Pts: This option defines point orientation. For each code
definition, the symbol insertion points can be defined with up to
three points. To define the symbol insertion points, choose the
Symbol Pts button in the Edit Field Code Definition dialog box. To
activate this button, the Entity type must be set to Points Only. By
default, the symbol insertion is defined by one point at the symbol
center (0,0). Use one point insertion definition to insert a symbol
offset from the center. With two insertion point definitions, you
can rotate and scale the symbol. For example, two insertion points
can be used to insert a tree symbol to size the tree, where the first
point is for the tree center and the second is for the drip line. With
three insertion point definitions, you can rotate and scale the
symbol in both X and Y. For example, three points can be used to
insert a car symbol, with the first point being the front driver’s side,
the second point the back driver’s side (to rotate and scale the
length) and the third the back passenger side (to scale the width).

In addition to the insertion point coordinates, you can define a

description for each point, which is used for the drawn point
description.

Field to Finish
391
 The coordinates for the insertion point definitions are for the
symbol at unit size. To calculate these coordinates, you will need to
open the symbol drawing (.dwg). By default, the symbols are located
in the Support directory.
For example, to create an insertion point for the tree drip line, open
the tree symbol drawing and find the coordinate at the edge of the
tree symbol (in this case 0.5,0.0).

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

392
Not all of the symbol insertion points must be used when drawing
the points. If a code definition has a three insertion points, you can
use just the first two points or the first one. There are special codes
to associate multiple points to the same symbol. The first code point
is used as the first symbol insertion point. Use the "ROT" code to
specify the second symbol insertion point. A point number can
follow the "ROT" to identify a specific point. Without the point
number, the command will use the next point with the current
code. Use the "SCA" code to specify the third symbol insertion
point. A point number following the "SCA" is optional. The "ROT"
and "SCA" codes should be assigned to the first point. For example,
if a code of "CAR" has a three point symbol insertion definition,
point #1 has a description of "CAR ROT SCA". Point #1 will be used
as the first symbol insertion point, and the next two points with the
"CAR" description will be used as the second and third symbol
insertion points.
The following is a Multi Point Symbol example. Twelve source
points were used to generate the drawing with the rotated car and
trees.

Field to Finish
393
 n Set Color: The linework will be drawn in this color. The default is
BYLAYER.
n Unit Symbol: This option will draw the point symbol at unit (1:1)
scale. For example, this option could be used for a symbol that is
already drawn to actual dimensions such as a car symbol.
n Text Size: This is a scaler value that is multiplied by the horizontal
scale to obtain the actual size.
n Symbol Size: This is a scaler value that is multiplied by the
horizontal scale to obtain the actual size. The horizontal scale can
be set in Drawing Setup.
n Line Width: This sets the line width.
n Set Template: For 3D polyline codes, this option allows you to
assign a template (.tpl) file to the code. The code points act as the
centerline for the template, and parallel 3D polylines will be drawn
for each break point in the template.
n Entity Type: This defines the linetype to be created. The Points
Only option does not create any linework. The 3D Polyline option
can be used for breaklines.
n Connection Order: The points of a distinct code can be connected
in their sequential point number order or by nearest found, which
makes the line by adding the next closest point.
n Separate Layers: This controls the layers of the point and symbol
attributes. With None option, the point layers are the standard
layers, PNTNO, PNTELEV and PNTDESC, and the symbol layer is
PNTMARK. With the Points option or the Both option, the point
attribute layers begin with the layer for the code followed by the
attribute type. For example, the code DWL could have a layer name
DRIVEWAY. The point attributes would then be DRIVEWAYNO,
DRIVEWAYELEV and DRIVEWAYDESC. With the Symbols or Both

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

394
 options, the symbol attribute layer begins with the layer for the
code followed by MARK.
n Tie: This specifies whether the line is open or closed.
n Precision: This is the number of decimal places to use for the
elevation label.
n Hard Breakline: This will tag the 3D polylines created with this
code as "hard" breaklines. In the Triangulate & Contour command,
contours are not smoothed as they cross hard breaklines.
n Locate Pts on Real Z Axis: This option will draw the points at the
point elevation. Otherwise the points are drawn at zero elevation.
For example, you could turn this option off for the fire hydrant
code (FH) to draw them at zero. Then the GND code could have this
option on to draw the ground shots at their elevations.
n Random Rotate: This option will randomly rotate the symbol. For
example, this option could be used for tree symbols so the trees are
drawn in various orientations.
n Smooth Polyline: This applies a modified bezier smoothing to the
polyline. The smoothed polyline will pass through all the original
points.
n Distinct Point Layer: When this toggle is selected, the linework is
created in the layer defined in the Layer field, and the points are
created in the specified distinct point layer. For example, you could
have DRIVEWAY for linework and DRIVEWAY_PNT for the points.
n Add: The new code definition is inserted in the list in the position
after the currently selected one. If no code is selected for
positioning, the new code is placed at the top. Only one code
definition may be highlighted before running this command.
n Cut: This command removes the highlighted code definitions from
the list and puts them in a buffer for retrieval with Paste.
n Paste: This command inserts the code definitions put in the buffer
by the Cut command. These codes are inserted after the row of the
currently highlighted code or at the top of the list.
n Save: This command Saves the changes to the FLD file.

5 Under Set/Process Data File, you prepare the coordinate file and
execute the Field to Finish command.
n Set CRD File: This option loads the coordinate file to be processed.
n CRD File Utilities: This option allows you to view and edit the data
file.
n Draw Points/Lines: This option applies the code table definitions
to the data file to create the points and linework.

Field to Finish
395
 n Draw Points Only: This option creates only the points.
n Draw Lines Only: This option creates only the linework.

To process Field to Finish, choose Draw Points/Lines, Draw Points

Only, or Draw Lines only. These commands bring up a dialog box to
specify the range of points to process, the point attributes to draw, and
a layer prefix which is added at the beginning of all layer names.

n Under Point Range, enter the range of points from low to high.
n Under Point Label Settings, you select the items you want to see
labeled at each point. The Point Notes option will draw text below
the points for any notes contained in the .NOT file that is associated
with the coordinate file.

n Elev Label Settings: Select Elevations if you want the elevation

of each point labeled. The Label Zeros option will label the
elevations of points with Z=0. Use + or – will label positive and
negative elevations.
n Locate on Real Z Axis: The Locate on Real Z Axis options allow
you to choose between locating all the points at real Z, locating
all points at zero elevation, or using the real Z setting as defined
in the individual codes.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

396
 n PC-PT Curve Type: Sets the method for drawing curves with
more than 3 points. The Bezier option draws a smooth polyline
through all the curve points. The Tangent Arcs method draws
multiple arcs with arc end points at each of the curve points.
These arcs are tangent to the preceding line segment.
n Layer Prefix: Assigns this prefix to all layers created and used.
n Erase Existing Field to Finish Entities: This option erases from
the drawing any old entities created by previous Field to Finish
runs before drawing the new entities.
n Preview Only: This option temporarily draws the points and
linework and allows you to review it with zoom and pan.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: A data file of points with descriptions.
➤ Keyboard Command: FINISH

Insert Symbols

Function
This command inserts point and map symbols into the drawing. You
can specify the locations for the symbols by picking points, by entering
point numbers that reference the current coordinate file, or by entering
the northing and easting.
Select the symbol you wish to insert from the table shown below by
clicking on the symbol. Symbols can be grouped by category. One of
the default categories is North Arrows. The current symbol category is
shown at the top of the dialog box. To view the symbol table for a
different category, pick the down arrow on the right side on the
category and select a category name. Within a category, use the scroll
bar on the right side of the screen to view more symbols. The symbols
and categories can be customized by the Edit Symbol Library
command. After selecting the symbol, you are prompted for Layer and
Size of the symbol.

Insert Symbols
397
 Prompts
1 Layer name for symbols <PNTS>: Press ENTER
2 Symbol Size <2.0>: Press ENTER
3 Options/Select entities/Enter coords/<Point numbers or pick point>:
pick point
4 Options/Select entities/Enter coords/<Point numbers or pick point>:
5–10
Inserts symbols at points 5-10 from the current coordinate file.
5 Options/Select entities/Enter coords/<Point numbers or pick point>: S
Enter S, for Select entities.
6 Entities to Process, Choose the types of entities to place symbols on.
Select arcs, points, line or polylines.
Select objects: pick a polyline
7 Rotation Angle <0.0>: Press ENTER
8 Options/Select entities/Enter coords/<Point numbers or pick point>:
Press ENTER

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

398
➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PTSYM

Insert Multi-Point Symbols

Function
This command allows you to locate symbols using multiple insertion
points. You can define up to three insertion points for an individual
symbol. If you define only two insertion points for a particular symbol,
the symbol will be scaled and rotated. If you define three insertion
points, the symbol is rotated and scaled in both the X and Y directions.
The two point insertion definition will aid in the drawing of tree
symbols with a specific drip line width. For instance, a surveyor could
locate the tree and then locate the drip line, taking two shots for each
tree, and then size the tree symbol accordingly so that the map will
have tree symbol sizes that reflect the actual field conditions.

You define the multiple insertion points using the Field to Finish
command. The Insert Multi-Point Symbols command reads the Field to
Finish code table and finds all the codes with multi-point symbol
definitions. You then select the symbol to be drawn from these codes.
Both the two and three point insertion definitions can aid with the

Insert Multi-Point Symbols

399
 insertion of concrete pads and buildings symbols during final drawing
preparations and design phases of a project.
The following are the steps required to define two point and three
point insertion point symbols.
First, choose the symbol to use for the desired code. Open the desired
symbol drawing by identifying the symbol name and then locate the
symbol using its drawing name under the Support subdirectory.
Next, determine the placement points for the symbol. The placement
points for a code symbol are determined by identifying X and Y values
of the desired placement points, for example, by using the ID
command and specifying the end points of lines.
Next, define the symbol insertion points in the Field to Finish code
table (*.FLD file). To do this open your *.FLD file by choosing Field to
Finish under the Tools menu. Select a code to edit from the list of
codes displayed in the Field to Finish dialog box by highlighting the
code and picking the Edit button. Or define a new code using the New
button to display the Edit Field Code Definition dialog box.
In the Edit Field Code Definition dialog box, choose the desired
symbol for the code by picking the Set Symbol button and selecting
the desired symbol. Next, select the Symbol Pnts button to display
the Define Symbol Placement Points dialog box.
Enter the X and Y values for each placement point into the appropriate
fields. The description fields are used as the prompts when placing the
symbol in the drawing. Use this method to define either a two point
symbol or a three point symbol.
After you define the codes, use the Multi-Point Symbol command to
add the symbols to the drawing. The command displays a dialog box
that lists all the codes with Multi-Point Symbols defined. Select the
symbol to draw. The symbol size applies when only one point is used
to place the symbol. When two or more points are used, the symbol is
scaled to fit the points.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

400
 Prompts
The example below shows three points that represent a building. In
this example, we want the building to use the dimensions defined by
the point locations.

1 Specify LTFNT PAD point.

Pick Point or Point Number (Enter to End): 15
2 Specify LT REAR PAD point.
Pick Point or Point Number (Enter to End): 16
3 Specify RT REAR PAD point.
Pick Point or Point Number (Enter to End): 17
4 Insert another BLD symbol [<Yes>/No]? N

The following is an example using the TREE code. Specify the location
of the trunk and the drip line by point number.

1 Specify Trunk Location point.

Pick Point or Point Number (Enter to End): 1
2 Specify Drip Line Point.
Pick Point or Point Number (Enter to End): 13
3 Insert another TREE symbol [<Yes>/No]? N

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: Field to Finish file with codes defined with Multi-Point
Symbols
➤ Keyboard Command: MULTSYM

Insert Multi-Point Symbols

401
 Edit Symbol Library

Function
This command allows you to customize the symbol library, including
the symbol drawing files, symbol categories, and symbol names.

Categories allow you to group symbols by type for your convenience in

symbol selection. Add a new category by clicking on the Add Category
button. An edit field then appears in the tree view on the left so you
can enter the category name. End by pressing the ENTER key.
You add symbols to a category by creating a new symbol from selected
entities in the drawing, by importing symbol drawing files to your
computer, or by moving existing symbols from one category to
another.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

402
To create a new symbol, open a drawing that contains the entities to
be used in the symbol. The symbol should be drawn at full scale (1:1)
because Autodesk Field Survey will scale the symbol by the current
drawing scale when the symbol is used. Highlight the category for the
symbol and click on the Create Symbol button. A dialog box appears
for entering the new symbol name. Enter the file name to be used for
the symbol. The file name has a .DWG extension and usually resides in
the Support directory, but you may use another path. Select the
entities to use for the symbol. You must also pick an insertion point for
the symbol.
The Import Symbols button displays a file selection dialog box which
allows you to select a file to be added to the current category. To select
multiple files, use SHIFT or CTRL keys with the mouse. If the files being
imported are not in Support directory, the command will offer you the
option of either copying them there or referring to their current
location.
The default symbol description is the same as file name. Change the
description for the symbol or category name by highlighting the name
and clicking on the Rename button. The highlighted name is placed in
edit mode. End by pressing the ENTER key.
To move a symbol into a different category, select the symbol to be
moved on the tree and click an Up or Down button as many times a
needed to reach the desired category.
The symbols are sorted alphabetically within each category. Categories
remain in the order placed, allowing you to place the more frequently
accessed categories at the top of the tree.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: Field to Finish file with codes defined with Multi-Point
Symbols.
➤ Keyboard Command: EDITPTSYM

Edit Symbol Library

403
 Enter Deed Description

Function
This command lets you enter line and curve data which is drawn and
annotated as entered. At the end, the closure and area of the figure is
reported. The command starts with the dialog box shown here.

1 Under the Line and Curve Layer option, enter the layer to draw lines
and curves.
2 Under the Annotations Layer option, enter the layer to draw
annotation.
3 Under the Points Layer option, enter the layer to points.
4 Under the Traverse by option, you select between entering bearings,
azimuth, gons, or point numbers. The Points option recalls points from
the current coordinate file.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

404
5 The Point Format option allows you to choose the format of the
points.
n Complete Points: This option draws the point symbol, description,
number and elevation. Autodesk Field Survey points are created in
the coordinate file at each point in the figure.
n Descriptions Only: This option draws the point descriptions only.
n None: This option draws no point labels.

6 Line-Curve Annotations can be drawn on the line or arc, or can be sent

to a table.
7 The To Table Scaler option is used with the On Lines option to put
annotation in line or curve tables only when the length of the line or
arc is less than the drawing’s horizontal scale multiplied by the To
Table Scaler. For example, if your drawing scale is 1"=50' and you enter
a table scaler of 1.5, then all short curve and line annotation less than
75' (1.5*50) will go to the table.
8 If the Plot Point Symbols option is set, and the Traverse By option is set
to Points, the points are drawn.
9 The Create Radius Points option creates radius points for the arcs and
curves in the deed.
10 The Store Deed to File option creates a deed file (.PDD) that contains
the entered deed data. This file can be processed later to correct bad
entries, create deed reports, or redraw the deed. To use this option, set
the deed file name by picking the Specify Deed File Name button and
setting the Deed Name field. The Deed File Parameters specify if the file
is a new one to be created, or an existing file to Append or Revise.

Prompts
1 Pick point or point Number: 1
PtNo. North(y) East(x) Elev(z) Description
1 8000.00 12000.00 0.00

In this example, the coordinate for point number one has already been
stored in the current .CRD file with the Locate Points command.

2 Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 145.3035

3 Varas/Poles/Chains/<Distance>: 210.5
4 Enter Point Elevation <>: 396.25
5 Enter Point Description <>: ip

Enter Deed Description

405
 6 Enter P to input a distance in Pole format or C for Chains format.
Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: C
Enter C to traverse through a curve.
7 Radius: 1103.5
8 Curve direction (Left/<Right>)? Press ENTER for right
9 Non-tangent/Reverse-tangent/Bearing/Chord/Delta
angle/Tangent/<Arc length>: N
In this example the curve is a non-tangent curve, so enter N. If the
curve is tangent to the previous leg, then enter the arc length. Enter C
for a chord length, D to enter the delta angle, or T to enter the tangent
distance.
10 Chord Bearing (Qdd.mmss): 245.2341
11 Length of Chord: 201.22
12 Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 345.3218
13 Varas/Poles/Chains/<Distance>: 209.28
14 Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: 445.2348
15 Varas/Poles/Chains/<Distance>: 200.54
16 Undo/Exit/Curve/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: E
Enter E to end the prompting and calculate the closure error.
Closure error distance> 1.35251089 Error Bearing> N 70d41’35" E
Closure Precision> 1 in 607.63 Total Distance Traversed> 821.82

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PDD

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

406
Process Deed File

Function
This command contains several functions for deed files (.PDD). A
deed file consists of one or more deed descriptions. Each deed
description includes a deed name, starting coordinate, and line and
curve data. This deed data can be created with the Enter Deed
Description command.

In Process Deed File command you can edit or input deed data. To edit a
deed, highlight the deed name and pick the Edit button. This brings up
a dialog box you can use to edit the deed name and the starting
coordinate. To edit any of the line or curve data, highlight the data row
and pick the Edit button.

Process Deed File

407
 Picking the Edit button displays the Edit Deed dialog box.

Here, you can edit the angle and distance of a segment.

To generate a deed report, highlight the deed name on the Input-Edit
Deed dialog box, and pick the Report button. This displays the report
in the standard report viewer, which you can use to print or save the
report. The report includes the closure error distance and bearing. To
draw the deed linework, highlight the deed name and pick the Draw
button. The draw function draws only the lines and curves of the deed.
To annotate the linework, run the Auto Annotate command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: DEED

Legal Description

Function
The Legal Description Writer allows you to create a detailed legal
description from a polyline. This description consists of calculated
calls, point descriptions from Autodesk Field Survey points, and
numerous terms you can define. You can easily change the values
associated with these terms. You can store the new values as defaults.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

408
The initial dialog box is shown below.

Legal Description Writer dialog box option descriptions:

n Pick Boundary Polyline: Select this button to designate the

polyline boundary to use. The boundary should be a closed polyline
drawn in the direction of advance.
n Pick Reference Lines: This button is used to select lines that tie
into the polyline boundary for the legal description. These should
be line entities with one endpoint that is exactly the same as the
beginning point of the boundary polyline. If a Autodesk Field
Survey point exists at the end of the line away from the boundary,
the command picks up its description. If not, you are prompted for
the description. You can choose any number of reference lines. Press
ENTER to conclude the selection of reference lines.
n Header File: This button and its edit field are used to designate the
optional header text file. If a valid file name is entered, it will be
written into the top of the output file.
n Footer File: This is used for the optional footer text file, which is
written into the bottom of the output file.
n Report Viewer: The output is sent to the standard report viewer.
n Text File: The output is sent to an external text file as designated in
the output file section described below.
n Mtext Object: This creates an Mtext object in the current drawing.
Upon choosing OK you will be prompted for a starting point (which
is the upper left corner) and well as a second point that determines
the width and angle. By default, Ortho is turned on for the second
point. Press the F8 key to toggle Ortho off.

Legal Description
409
 n Output File: This button and its edit field are used to designate the
output text file. This file can then be brought into your word
processor and edited. Note that the appearance of the output file
can be affected by the status of the Use Paragraph Format toggle
described below under Legal Descriptions.

Buttons in the Settings group initiate additional options that are

explained in detail in the following sections.

1 Bearing: This option is used to establish the appearance of the

bearings that are drawn with the description.
n Bearing Format: Designate the character or word used in each
bearing direction. Standard values are the letters N, S, E, or W. One
possible option is the entire words NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, and
WEST. It is important to keep in mind that spaces must be included.
If you don’t enter a space after N/S, and before E/W, a space will not
be formatted into the bearing.
n Words Quads: For example, for bearings that are due NORTH, the
default is to generate N 00_ 00' 00 E. If the 1-Word Quads toggle is
turned on, the program will substitute the single word (which you
can change) for the direction, usually NORTH, or DUE NORTH.
n Symbols: This option allows you to designate the precision for
bearings, as well as the symbols used. Turn on/off the toggles for
degrees, minutes, and seconds to control the precision. For example,
if you wish to round to the nearest minute, simply clear the toggle
from the second field. For each field (degrees, minutes, seconds),
you can supply the character or word to be used. You can quickly
fill in these fields with the two buttons to the right of each field.

2 Line: This option is used to establish the terms used when the course
of a call is a line segment, as is often the case. Simply supply the
beginning and ending terms for these line calls.
3 Distance: This dialog box is used to establish the terms and precision
used when creating a distance for the course of a call. The precision
and suffix apply to curves as well. Choose the desired distance
precision from the window, and supply the beginning and ending
terms for the line calls.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

410
 If you would like to report dual distances such as feet/metric, turn on
the toggle in the lower left corner of the dialog box. Note that the
primary units are the units set in the Settings menu, Drawing Setup. If
you have English set as your units in Drawing Setup, then the alternate
units will be metric. The opposite also applies. If your units in Drawing
Setup are set to metric, then the alternate units will be English.
4 Curve: This option is used to establish the terms and options used
when creating the course of a curve. Basic options include beginning
and ending terms, as well as the words for left and right if chosen. In
the large table of curve options, choose the items you wish to report, in
the order you want them to appear, by placing a number in the
sequence field indicating the desired order. Make sure you do not enter
duplicate numbers.
5 Pt Description: In the process of following the polyline definition for
a boundary, the Legal Description Writer can look for descriptions of
the points at the endpoints of the polyline. These can be extracted by
setting the data source to the corresponding point from the coordinate
file, meaning the points do not have to be plotted on the screen. A
second option is Point Block, in which the command reads the
information from the drawing, instead of a coordinate file.
n Prefix: General term applied before the actual description.
n Suffix: General term applied after the actual description.
n Unknown: The text designated here will be placed in the
description if the program does not find a valid description at that
coordinate location. The words Unknown Point may be used.

6 Area Reporting: The Legal Description Writer can output several types
of areas. Basic options include beginning and ending terms. In the
large table of area options, choose the items you wish to report, in the
order you want them to appear, by placing a number in the sequence
field indicating the desired order. Make sure you do not enter duplicate
numbers. You can edit the prefix/suffix for each, and control decimal
precision of each field output.

Legal Description
411
 7 General: This option controls general specifications, which can affect
the entire description. Each item is explained in detail below.
n Description Body: Enter the beginning and ending terms for the
description.
n String Case: Choose the button corresponding to the string case
conversion desired. If you want no changes to be made, choose
none. Choosing upper, lower, or proper case conversion will affect
the case of all text throughout the description, except bearing
letters.
n Use Paragraph: If this toggle is on, the program will output the
description without carriage returns after each line. This approach
makes a nice paragraph style when brought into a word processor
with word wrap. If the toggle is cleared, the program will place
carriage returns at the end of each call.

8 Reset: This option resets the entire dialog box back to the original
settings from the installation.

Minimum Procedure Outline:

1 Initiate Legal Description from the Tools menu.
2 Choose the Pick Boundary Polyline button and select desired polyline.
3 Choose OK, and the boundary description will appear in the Report
Viewer.

Standard Procedure Outline:

1 Initiate Legal Description from the Tools menu.
2 Choose the Pick Boundary Polyline button and select desired polyline.
3 Designate the Header, Footer, and Output file names.
4 Choose the appropriate button for the output you desire.
5 Choose OK to generate the boundary description.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: closed polyline boundary
➤ Keyboard Command: LEGAL

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

412
 Design Centerline

Function
This command draws a centerline polyline and writes the centerline
data in a centerline file. The first step is to specify a centerline file
name. A centerline file has a .cl extension. Next, use the Design
Centerline dialog box to specify options, which are explained below.

1 The Centerline Layer is the layer name for the polyline.

2 The Tangents Layer is the layer name for the tangent lines drawn from
the centerline to the curve center.
3 If the Draw Tangents option is selected, the tangents to the centerline
are drawn.
4 If the Store Points in CRD File option is selected, all points are stored
in the specified coordinate file. This option is used for creating the
SMI chain file for SMI data collectors. To specify the coordinate file,
choose Set Coordinate File from the Points menu.
5 The Starting Station option allows you to enter a starting station
number.
6 The Spiral Segment Length is the distance between vertices of the
polyline along the spiral.
7 The Max Superelevation is used for determining the minimum
recommended radius. Choosing Special activates a window for entering
in a specific percent.

Design Centerline
413
 8 Under Prompting Mode, the options for prompting are set.
n Design: All design questions are prompted for.
n Existing: Skips design questions such as design speed.

After you click OK on the Design Centerline dialog box, the command
cycles through curve prompting until End is selected. There are PC and
PI modes for curve entry. In PC mode the arc’s PC points are entered
followed by the curve data. The PC points can be specified by picking
the point, entering a distance, or entering a station. In PI mode, the
arc’s PI points are entered. Once the PI points determine two tangents,
the program prompts for curve data for the previous PI. Spirals can be
entered only in PI mode. You can switch between arc and PI mode
between curves on the polyline. The arc curvature can be specified by
degree of curve or radius. The minimum recommend radius is based on
AASHTO specifications. The arc length can be specified by PT station,
tangent length, or arc length.

Prompts
1 Centerline file to design.
Enter the .CL file name to create: enter a filename
2 Design Centerline Dialog box is displayed: choose options and
click OK
3 Pick Point or Point number: pick a starting point or enter the
starting point coordinates
For Arc mode design (See figure below).
4 Bearing/PC/PI/End/Undo/<Pick Point or Point number>: pick a point
5 Reverse/Compound Curve (Yes/<No>)? Press ENTER
6 PI/Distance/Station/<Pick point or Point number>: D (for distance)
7 Point/Enter Distance: 180
8 Bearing/Line/Undo/End/<Continue PC>: Press ENTER
9 Enter Design Speed for curve <40.00>: Press ENTER
10 Minimum Recommended Radius = 426.67
View/Point/Degree of Curve/<Radius>: 500
11 Curve direction (Left/<Right>)? Press ENTER
12 Point/Station/Tangent/<Arc length>)? Press ENTER
13 Enter Arc Length: 300
14 Reverse/Compound Curve [Yes/<No>]? Press ENTER

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

414
15 PI/Distance/Station/<Pick point or Point number>: D (for distance)
16 Point/Enter Distance: 140
17 Bearing/Line/Undo/End/<Continue PC>: E (to end)

For PI mode design (See figure below).

1 Bearing/PI/End/Undo/<Pick Point or Point number>: pick the first PI

2 Type of curve [Spiral/<Circular>]? S (for spiral)
3 Enter Design Speed for curve <55.00>: 40
4 Minimum Recommended Radius = 426.67
View/Point/Degree of Curve/<Radius>: 500
5 Enter Number of Lanes <2>: Press ENTER
6 View/Enter Spiral Length in <204.8000>: 210
7 View/Enter Spiral Length out <210.0000>: Press ENTER
8 Bearing/Pick next Point or Point number (PI): pick the second PI
9 Bearing/Line/PC/Undo/End/<Continue PI>: Press ENTER
10 Type of curve [Spiral/<Circular>]? Press ENTER for circular
11 Enter Design Speed for curve <40.00>: Press ENTER
12 Minimum Recommended Radius = 426.67
View/Point/Degree of Curve/<Radius>: 500
13 Bearing/Pick next Point or Point number (PI): pick the last PI

Design Centerline
415
 14 Reverse/Compound Curve [Yes/<No>]? Press ENTER
15 Bearing/Line/PC/Undo/End/<Continue PI>: E to end

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: CENTERLN

Input-Edit Centerline File

Function
This command can be used to input a new centerline (.cl file) or edit
an existing one. It is a dialog box-based alternative to the Design
Centerline command and has the advantage of accepting whatever
information you have on your centerlines (coordinates, stationing,
length of tangents and arcs, etc.). It is ideal for entering data straight
from highway design plans to create a new centerline. This command
allows you to change any of the geometric properties of any of the
elements of the centerline (lines, curves, and spirals), including the
starting coordinates and station. The program starts by asking for a
coordinate file if one is not already specified. This is the file from
which coordinates of points are read when point numbers are entered
in the program. New point numbers are created and stored in this file

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

416
by the command. After you specify a coordinate file, the main dialog
box appears, displaying a list of the centerline elements.

n Load: The Load button loads an existing .CL file for review or
editing. The list box in the dialog box shows a list of all the
elements in the centerline, identifying them as either a line, curve,
or spiral element and reporting the ending station, northing, and
easting of the element.
n Add: The Add button adds a new element after the highlighted
element.
n Edit: The Edit button edits the highlighted element.
n Remove: The Remove button removes the highlighted element
from the centerline.
n Save: The Save button allows you to save the .CL file currently
being edited. The Save button always prompts you for the file name
to save; hence, it works like the Save As button in most commands.
n Quit: The Quit button checks whether the file currently being
edited is saved or not and quits the command.

Input-Edit Centerline File

417
 When the Add button is clicked, the command prompts you for the
type of the element to be added. There are three choices available: a
Line, a Curve or a Spiral.

The dialog box for every type of element shows the point ID, the
northing, easting, and station of the start point of the element. It then
allows you to modify or define the parameters specific to the type of
element. The following are the rules regarding data entry in the
centerline editor, which apply regardless of the entity type you are
editing.

n Wherever the length of the element is to be entered, you can enter

an expression of the type "123.5 - 93.7" and the command will
evaluate the difference of the values. This is particularly convenient
when only the stations of the start and end points of the element
are known.
n When the station is specified, the program takes the length of the
element as the difference between the station of the start point of
the element and the station specified.
n All bearings are to be specified by entering the angle between 0 and
90 degrees (in dd.mmss format) and selecting the quadrant.
n When entering the delta angle of a curve, only the absolute value
(between 0 and 360 degree) is to be entered. The direction of the
curve is to be explicitly set as "right" or "left", the default being "left".
All angles are entered in degrees, minutes, and seconds as dd.mmss.
n Point numbers, when used, access their coordinates in the current
coordinate file. If the point number specified has no coordinates
stored in the coordinate file, the point number is remembered for
that location (for example, the radius point of a curve or the SC
point of a spiral). Then, when the .CL file is saved, the program
creates points for that location and stores them to the coordinate
file with the specified point number.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

418
1 In the Line Element dialog box, the starting point coordinates and
station is displayed at the top.

2 The end point of the line is specified primarily by its length, or its
station and bearing. The line can also be defined by its ending point
number, or its coordinates.
n End Point #: This is the ending point number of the line segment.
n Endpoint Northing: This is the endpoint northing coordinate.
n Endpoint Easting: This is the endpoint easting coordinate.
n Length: This is the length of the line segment.
n Station to: This is the ending station number of the line segment.

3 The bearing of a line can be changed if the Non-tangential to Previous

Element option is checked. By default, any line that follows a curve
element is defaulted to be tangential to it (the check box is turned off);
otherwise, the checkbox is on.
4 Under Bearing Quadrant, select one of the four standard quadrants.
5 The Bearing of the segment is entered in as DD.MMSS.

Input-Edit Centerline File

419
 The following is the Curve Element dialog box.

The dialog box for a Curve allows you to define the curve primarily by
its radius and delta angle. The other parameters of the curve that you
can edit are the arc length and the bearing of tangent-out. You can also
specify the curve by entering the coordinates or point numbers of its
end point (PT) and the radius point. Another way to specify the curve is
to enter the chord length or PT point station and chord bearing.
If the central PI point and a point on the forward tangent are known,
you can define the curve by entering both of these points and at least
one other property of the curve (such as radius, arc length, delta angle).
The point on the forward tangent can be any point that defines the
tangent-out direction, including the next PI point. If only the central PI
point is known, then the tangent-out can be entered by bearing instead
of by forward tangent point. Central PI and forward tangent points are
not read from the .CL file. You must enter them, and they are valid only
for the current edit session. They are not remembered the next time the
file is loaded.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

420
1 The PC, point of curvature, point number, station, northing and
easting are displayed at the top of the dialog box.
2 Under the Curve Edit Mode option, you define how the curve is
accepted in the centerline.
n Hold PC Point: If this is checked on, the radius is taken as fixed
and the delta angle of the curve is calculated based on additional
parameters listed below. Hence, the extent of the curve is unlimited.
n Hold PI Points: If this option is checked on, the bearing of
tangent-out of the curve is taken as fixed, and the radius is
calculated based on other parameters listed below. In this case, the
curve is completely restricted within the central PI point and the
bearing of tangent out. Hence, when the Hold PI Points option is
checked on, the additional parameters must also be defined (as
described below) so calculations can be carried out.

3 Additional curve elements must be defined.

n Radius: This is the radius of the curve.
n Station To: This is the ending station along the centerline.
n Delta Ang. (DD.MMSS): This is the decimal delta angle.
n Arc Length: This is the length along the arc of the centerline.
n Chord Length: This is the length of the incoming segment.

4 Under Chord Bearing Quadrant, you select the standard quadrant for
the chord.
5 The Curve Direction is either Left or Right.
6 Under PT Point, the location of the point of tangent is defined.
n Point#: This is the point number of the PT.
n Northing: This is the northing of the PT.
n Easting: This is the easting of the PT.

7 Under Radius Point, the location of the point is defined.

n Point#: This is the point number of the radius point.
n Northing: This is the northing of the radius point.
n Easting: This is the easting of the radius point.

8 Under Central PI Point, the location of the point of intersection is

defined.
n Point#: This is the point number of the PI point.
n Northing: This is the northing of the PI point.

Input-Edit Centerline File

421
 n Easting: This is the easting of the PI point.
n Length (Ts): This is length of the segment.

9 Under the Point on Forward Tangent option, the location of the point
is defined.
n Point#: This is the point number of the forward tangent point.
n Northing: This is the northing of the forward tangent point.
n Easting: This is the easting of the forward tangent point.
n Length: This is length of the segment.

10 The Bearing Quadrant of the Tangent Out option is at the bottom of

the dialog box. After you select the quadrant, enter in the bearing in
the format of DD.MMSS.

The following is the Spiral Element dialog box.

The dialog box for a Spiral allows you to define the spiral by entering
either the various parameters of the spiral (such as the angles and
lengths) or the coordinates or point numbers of its defining points:
the TS (Tangent-to-Spiral), SC (Spiral-to-Curve), Radius point, CS

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

422
 (Curve-to-Spiral), ST (Spiral-to-Tangent) and end point (optional).
While defining the spiral by its geometric properties, the command
will accept the data even if the information for the simple curve is
given with zero spiral lengths. However, the central PI point of the
spiral must be specified (that is, the command is always in Hold PI
Points mode). The tangent-out can be defined by entering a bearing or
by specifying a point on the forward tangent. The forward tangent
point can be the next PI coordinates. The direction of the spiral-in and
spiral-out elements is the same as the direction of the simple curve (left
or right).
The spiral can be defined by several different parameters, and the order
that you enter data into the spiral dialog box can be important. There
are two main sequences for entering data, depending on the spiral data
that you have. The first method is to enter the radius of the simple
curve, the spiral in and out lengths, the tangent bearing out, and the PI
station. The second method is to make a Line segment coming up to
the TS (tangent to spiral) point. This Line segment should be added
before creating the Spiral element. Then, with the Spiral In point set to
the TS point, enter the radius of the simple curve, the spiral in and out
lengths, the curve direction (left or right), and the arc length of the
simple curve. The rest of the spiral points will be calculated.

1 In the Spiral Element dialog box, the Spiral In Point information is

displayed at the top.
2 Under the Data for Simple Curve option, the parameters for the curve
are defined.
n Radius: This is the radius of the simple curve.
n Arc Length: This is the length along the curve.
n Curve Direction: This is the direction of the curve, either Left or
Right.
n Delta Angle: This is the angle defined as DD.MMSS.

3 Under the Central PI Point, the point location of the intersection is

entered.
n Point#: This is the point number of the PI.
n Northing: This is the northing of the PI.
n Easting: This is the easting of the PI.
n Station: This is the station along the centerline for the PI.
n Length: This is the length of the centerline between points.

4 The Length of the Spiral-In portion of the centerline is entered.

Input-Edit Centerline File

423
 5 The Length of the Spiral-Out portion of the centerline is entered.
6 Under the Point on Forward Tangent option, the location of the point
is defined.
n Point#: This is the point number of the Point on Forward Tangent.
n Northing: This is the northing of the Point on Forward Tangent.
n Easting: This is the easting of the Point on Forward Tangent.
n Length: This is the station along the centerline for the Point on
Forward Tangent.

7 Under the Tangent-Out option, the bearing and quadrant are defined.
n Bearing Quadrant: This is standard quadrant for the bearing.
n Bearing: This is the bearing of the Tangent-out in DD.MMSS
format.

8 Under the Tangent-to-Spiral Pt option, the point is identified.

n Point#: This is the point number of the point.
n Northing: This is the northing of the point.
n Easting: This is the easting of the point.

9 Under the Spiral-to-Curve Pt option, the point is identified.

n Point#: This is the point number of the point.
n Northing: This is the northing of the point.
n Easting: This is the easting of the point.

10 Under the Curve-to-Spiral Pt option, the point is identified.

n Point#: This is the point number of the point.
n Northing: This is the northing of the point.
n Easting: This is the easting of the point.

11 Under the Spiral-to-Tangent Pt option, the point is identified.

n Point#: This is the point number of the point.
n Northing: This is the northing of the point.
n Easting: This is the easting of the point.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

424
12 Under the Simple Curve Radius Pt, the point is identified.
n Point#: This is the point number of the point.
n Northing: This is the northing of the point.
n Easting: This is the easting of the point.

13 Under the End Point option, the point is identified.

n Point#: This is the point number of the point.

n Northing: This is the northing of the point.
n Easting: This is the easting of the point.

Once all the elements of the centerline are defined, the file can be
saved and then plotted using the "Centerline File to Polyline"
command.

Prompts
Here is an example of a highway interchange ramp that involves a
starting tangent and a spiral curve that goes abruptly into a simple
curve followed by a final tangent.

1 In the Centerline File dialog box, enter a starting Northing and Easting
and starting Station.
The Start Point# is optional.

Input-Edit Centerline File

425
 2 Click Add to add a line segment.

3 You want to enter the tangent segment length up to the TS (tangent to

spiral). Enter the length (200.0), bearing (88.0732), and then the
bearing quadrant (NW). Since the next spiral element has a PI station,
it is not necessary for this line segment to go up to the TS point. The
purpose of this line segment is to establish the tangent-in direction.
When you click OK, the command will add the Line element as the
first in the list of complete centerline elements.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

426
4 Next, to add a spiral segment, click Add.

5 Though the dialog box is complex (for total flexibility), enter the four
items shown, which can be done in the clockwise order shown. On a
typical spiral curve, enter four things: (1) the radius of the simple
curve, (2) the spiral in and out lengths, (3) the tangent bearing and (4)
the PI station. Everything else will be calculated when you press ENTER
for the PI station. Click OK to add the spiral element.
6 Next, click Add to add a curve segment.

Input-Edit Centerline File

427
 7 Select curve. The Curve dialog box appears.

8 Enter the Radius Length (255), the Arc Length (150) and the Curve
Direction. Everything else will be calculated. Click OK to add the curve
element.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

428
9 Click Add to add the final line segment.

All you need to enter in the final dialog box for the line (tangent)
segment is its length. All other items will be calculated when you press
ENTER.

The completed centerline will appear as shown in the dialog box, and
each element can be edited.

Input-Edit Centerline File

429
 10 Pick the Save button to store this centerline data to a .CL file.
A graphic representation of the centerline is shown below.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: A CRD file to put points into or take points from.
➤ Keyboard Command: CLEDIT

Polyline to Centerline File

Function
This command writes a centerline file from a polyline. The northing
and easting of each vertex of the polyline is written to the centerline
file, and each arc in the polyline becomes a circular curve.

Prompts
1 Centerline file to Write
Enter the .CL file name to create: enter file name
2 Beginning station <0+00>: Press ENTER to accept 0+00, or type in the
beginning station, then press ENTER
3 Select polyline or 3dpoly that represents centerline: pick the polyline
that represents your centerline

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

430
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools
➤ Prerequisite: a polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: CLPLINE

Centerline File to Polyline

Function
This command reads a .CL file and plots it as a 2D polyline in your
current drawing at the proper coordinates. You will be prompted at
the command line for the layer where you would like the polyline to
reside. The default layer name is CLINE. Once you press ENTER, you
will be prompted to enter the file name of the centerline in the
Centerline File to Plot dialog box.
If a spiral exists in the .CL file, the spiral will be represented by
polyline segments. The .CL file can be created with the Polyline to
Centerline File, Input-Edit Centerline or Design Centerline
commands. Drawing the centerline file is a way to check the .CL file
data graphically for correctness. Also several commands such as
Station Polyline/Centerline allow you to pick a polyline to define the
centerline instead of selecting a .CL file. The .CL file should be used
when using the commands in the Tool menu if a spiral exists in the
centerline file.

Prompts
1 Layer Name for Centerline <CLINE>: press ENTER or enter the layer
name to plot the polyline on
2 Centerline File to Plot file selection dialog: enter the .CL file name to
read

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: A centerline file
➤ Keyboard Command: CL2PLINE

Centerline File to Polyline

431
 Polyline Report

Function
This command generates a report of bearing-distance and curve data
for all the points along the selected polyline. The closure is reported
between the starting and ending points of the polyline. The polyline
area is also reported.

Prompts
1 Starting station <0.0>: Press ENTER
2 Decimal places <3>: 2
3 Select polyline to report: pick a polyline
4 Standard Report Viewer
Displays the report for the selected polyline.
5 Select polyline to report (Enter to End): Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: A polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: PLREPORT

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

432
 Station Polyline/Centerline

Function
This command stations a polyline or centerline file at a given interval
distance. The options for this command are set in the dialog box
shown below. After setting the options, click OK, and then pick the
polyline or select the centerline file.

1 In the Stationing Settings dialog box, you determine the stations and
intervals to label.
n Distance for Stations: This is the primary interval for stationing.
n Distance for Intermediate Stations: This is the intermediate
interval for stationing.
n Beginning Station: This is the beginning station of the centerline
for stationing.
n Locate Even Stations: T his labels the stations at the distance
interval (for example, 2+00, 3+00 ...).

Station Polyline/Centerline
433
 n Locate Odd Stations: This labels the non-interval stations at the
polyline/centerline end points and PC and PT points.
n Locate User-Entered: This prompts you for individual stations to
label.
n Increment Station Labels from Beginning Station: Without this
option, the program increments the station labels from zero. For
example, if the station interval is 100 and the polyline starting
station is 145, then the program will label 2+00, 3+00, etc. With this
option active, the station labels are incremented from the starting
station. In this example, the program would then label 2+45, 3+45,
and so on.
n Locate Centerline Points: When checked, the command will
locate points and store them in the current coordinate file.
n Locate Radius Points: When checked, the command will locate the
radius points of any arc segments.
n Label Station Text: When checked, this command places station
text along the polyline at the angle of the corresponding segment.
The text is plotted with the current style and on the current layer.
n Plot PC Lines: When checked, this option draws perpendicular
lines at the starting and ending (PC and PT) stations of an arc of the
polyline/centerline. The lines are drawn up to the radius point of
the arc or to the distance set in the Max Length field.
n Label Intermediate Stations: Intermediate distance is drawn the
same way as the station distance, with no intermediate station ticks
or labels. For example, with the above entries and 0+00 for the first
station, the stations will be labeled with descriptions as follows:
0+00 0+50 1+00 1+50, etc.
n Station + at Tick Mark: Labels the station text along the polyline
with the “ +” of the station text at the station's location on the
polyline.
n Starting Point Number: If you are placing the points in the
coordinate file, this is the first point number the command will use.
n Decimals: This is the number of decimals used in the stationing.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

434
2 Under Centerline By, the item to station is selected.
n Polyline: You pick a polyline in the drawing to station.
n CL File: You pick the centerline file to station.

3 Under Label Stations, you choose the alignment.

n Perpendicular: Stationing is drawn perpendicular to the centerline.
n Parallel: Stationing is drawn parallel to the centerline.

4 Under Position, you determine if the position of the label is above or

below the line.
5 Under Station Type, you choose the label option.
n 1+00: Stationing is drawn in the format 1+00.
n 1+000: Stationing is drawn in the format 1+000.
n NO. 0: Stationing is drawn in the format NO. 1, NO. 2, etc.

6 Under the Type of Curves option, you select the type of curve in the
centerline.
n Roadway: Stationing uses the actual arc length of the curve.
n Railroad: Stationing applies a slight adjustment to the arc length
based on 100 foot chord segments.

7 Under the Locate Offset Points option, you can select the option and
the command will locate points at the specified left and right offset
distances from the centerline.

Prompts
The Station Polyline dialog box is displayed.
The Polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing
stations.

1 Select polyline that represents centerline: select polyline

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: A polyline or CL file
➤ Keyboard Command: STAPL

Station Polyline/Centerline
435
 Label Station-Offset

Function
This command labels the station and offset of a point relative to a
centerline. A polyline that represents the centerline or a centerline file
(.cl) is required before running this command. The points to label can
either be picked on screen or specified by point number. As the
crosshairs are moved, the station and offset of the current position are
displayed in real time in the corner of the drawing window.

The options for this command are set in the dialog box shown.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

436
1 Under the Label Options, there are two options for labeling. In
addition to updating the point descriptions, these options control the
label format.
n Add to Existing Pnt Desc: If you have Autodesk Field Survey
points and want to add the station-offset to the point descriptions,
then use the Add to Existing Point Description option. The Point
Description option puts the station and offset on.
n Label Text Only: Labels the offsets on screen as text only. The
Label Text option draws a leader to the point with the station text
above the line and the offset below.

2 Under the Label Position, the location is set. The polyline should be
drawn in the order of increasing stations. If the polyline goes the
wrong way, use the Reverse Polyline command in the Polyline Utilities
in the Edit menu.
n Automatic: Labeling is automatic.
n Pick Location: You pick the location for each label.

3 Under the Type of Curve, you set the type of curve.

n Roadway: Stationing uses the actual arc length of the curve.
n Railroad: Stationing applies a slight adjustment to the arc length
based on 100 foot chord segments.

4 Other settings in the Label Station-Offset Settings dialog box are used
for precision and text additions.
n Layer Name: Enter in a layer name for the text. The Select button
brings up a list of layers to choose from.
n Beginning Station: Enter in the beginning station to start the
labeling for Automatic.
n Max Offset to Calc: Enter in the maximum offset distance to label.
Points with offsets greater than the Maximum Offset to Calc are not
labeled.
n Station Decimals: Determines the precision of the station for
labels.
n Offset Decimals: Determines the precision of the offset labels.
n Station Prefix: Assigns a prefix to station labels.
n Station Suffix: Assigns a suffix to station labels.
n Right Offset Prefix: Assigns a prefix to right offset labels.
n Right Offset Suffix: Assigns a suffix to right offset labels.

Label Station-Offset
437
 n Left Offset Prefix: Assigns a prefix to left offset labels.
n Left Offset Suffix: Assigns a suffix to left offset labels.

5 Under the Station Label, the label can be abbreviated.

n Full: Labels the full station.
n Partial: Labels a partial station, for example at station 5+89, the
label would be +89, the characters after the + sign.
n None: No station is labeled, only the offset.

6 Under the Offset Label, the label can be abbreviated.

n Full: Labels the full offset value.
n Partial: Labels a partial offset, for example at offset R 34.8, the label
is 34.8. The Offset Label Partial will drop the L for left or R for right
from the label.
n None: No offset is labeled, only the station.

7 Under the Station type, the label format is assigned.

n 1+00: Stationing is drawn in the format 1+00.
n 1+000: Stationing is drawn in the format 1+000.

8 Under the Centerline By, the entity is chosen. The centerline labeled is
either from a polyline or a centerline file.

Prompts

The Label Station-Offset dialog box is displayed.

The Polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing stations.

1 Select Polyline Centerline: pick the polyline centerline

2 Pick point or point number (Enter to End): pick a point
Station > 2+10.91 Offset> 57.36 Right
3 Select point number to add station description to: pick point number
This prompt will not appear if the L option, Label Text Only, was
selected.
4 Pick point or point number (Enter to End): Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: A polyline centerline
➤ Keyboard Command: offsta

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

438
 Offset Point Entry

Function
This command creates points along a centerline at specified stations
and left and right offsets. The centerline can be defined by a polyline, a
centerline file (.CL), or two points.

1 The Offset Point Settings dialog box has options for creating the
points.
n Store Points to *.CRD File: The offset points are added to the
current coordinate file.
n Locate Points on Centerline: Check this box if you would like to
locate points along the centerline, otherwise only the offset points
will be plotted.
n Label Stations & Offsets: Check this option to label the station-
offset as the point description attribute.
n Beginning Station: Enter in the beginning station number.

2 The Centerline from option defines the form of the centerline to use.
n Polyline: Select this option to pick a polyline in the drawing.
n Points: Select this option to use points representing the centerline.
n CL File: Select this option to use a centerline file.

Offset Point Entry

439
 3 Input Station-Offset from gives you the choice between different input
formats.
n Manual Entry: The Manual Entry option will prompt for the
station and offset distances.
n Read File: The Read File option will read the stations and offsets
from a text file. The text file format is comma delimited with point
number, station, offset, and elevation. The station should be just
the station number without the + (for example, 250 instead of
2+50). The elevation is optional. The Read File option is a quick way
to convert a station-offset data file into coordinates.

4 The Offset Prompt has two options for prompts.

n Both Left-Right: With Both Left-Right, the program will prompt
for left and right offsets. If, when prompted for a left or right offset
distance, you respond with a zero value, no point is located in that
direction.
n Polyline: The Single Offset option will prompt for one offset per
station. Enter a right offset as a positive value and a left offset as a
negative value.

5 Under the Station type, the label format is assigned.

n 1+00: Stationing is drawn in the format 1+00.
n 1+000: Stationing is drawn in the format 1+000.

6 Under the Type of Curve, you set the type of curve.

n Roadway: Stationing uses the actual arc length of the curve.
n Railroad: Stationing applies a slight adjustment to the arc length
based on 100 foot chord segments.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

440
 Prompts

The Offset Point Settings dialog box is displayed.

The polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing
stations.
Select the polyline near the endpoint that defines the first station.

1 Select Polyline to Station-Measure: select polyline

(5309.0 4845.0) Station: 0.00
(5526.0 4917.0) Station: 228.63
2 Input Station/<Distance along centerline ([Enter] to end): pick a point
Starting Segment Station: 0.0 Ending Segment Station: 228.633
Working Line segment...(5413.4 4879.64 0.0)
3 Offset distance (- for left) <10.0>: Press ENTER
4 Enter Point Elevation <396.25>: Press ENTER
5 Enter Point Description <>: ip
6 Input Station/<Distance along centerline ([Enter] to end): Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: If locating points off a polyline, the polyline must be
drawn prior to execution.
➤ Keyboard Command: OFFPTS

Offset Point Entry

441
 Calculate Offsets

Function
This command calculates the station and offsets of point coordinates
from a centerline. The points used to calculate the offsets can be stored
in a .CRD file or picked on the screen. When picking points, the
station and offset of the current position of the crosshairs is displayed
in the lower screen menu. The centerline can be defined by either a
polyline, by two point numbers, or by centerline file (.cl).

1 The options in the Calculate Offset Settings dialog box are as follows.
n Beginning Station defines the starting station of the centerline.
n Maximum Offset to Calc. gives the largest distance for offsets.
n The Store Station Text to CRD File option stores the station and
offset values in the point descriptions in a coordinate file.
n The Display Offsets Ahead/Behind Centerline option shows offsets
for points or picked points located before the beginning station and
after the ending station of the centerline.
n The Label Station and Offsets option draws station-offset labels.

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

442
 n The Sort Report by Stations option reports the station-offsets in
station order, no matter what order the points were calculated.
n The Report Point Coordinates option includes the point northing
and easting in the report.
n The Use Report Formatter option allows you to customize the layout
of the report fields and can be used to output the data to Microsoft
Excel or Access.
n The Report Grade Elevation From option will calculate an elevation
for each point from a 3D polyline, grid file (.grd), or triangulation
file (.flt). To use this option, the Report Formatter option must be
toggled on. The grade elevation is reported and compared with the
point elevation to report the cut/fill. For the 3D polyline option, the
grade elevation is calculated by finding the elevation at the point on
the 3D polyline that is the nearest perpendicular position from the
offset point. The 3D polyline that is used for elevations does not
need to be the same polyline that is used as the centerline for the
station-offset calculations.
2 Define Centerline by defines the form of the centerline to use.
n Polyline: Select this option to pick a polyline in the drawing.
n Points: Select this option to use points representing the centerline.
n CL File: Select this option to use a centerline file.

3 Under the Station type, the label format is assigned.

n 1+00: Stationing is drawn in the format 1+00.
n 1+000: Stationing is drawn in the format 1+000.

4 Decimals: This is the number of decimals used in the stationing and

labeling.
5 Under the Type of Curve, you set the type of curve.
n Roadway: Stationing uses the actual arc length of the curve.
n Railroad: Stationing applies a slight adjustment to the arc length
based on 100 foot chord segments.

Prompts

The Calculate Offset Settings dialog box is displayed.

The polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing stations.

1 Select the polyline near the endpoint that defines the first station.
2 Select Polyline Centerline: select polyline centerline

Calculate Offsets
443
 3 (5309.0 4845.0) Station: 0.00
4 (5526.0 4917.0) Station: 228.63

PtNo. North(y) East(x) Elev(z) Description

140 4889.13 5410.25 0.00 1+10.00L10.00

Station on Line> 1+10.00 Offset> 10.00 Left

PtNo. North(y) East(x) Elev(z) Description
141 4870.15 5416.55 0.00 1+10.00R10.00

Station on Line> 1+10.00 Offset> 10.00 Right

+ before station denotes point is ahead of line segment, - denotes
beyond.

5 Pick point or point numbers (Enter to End): 22– 28

Station Offset Description Elev Pt# North East

4+95.89 L 15.48 Catch Basin 0.00 22 4811.00 4454.00
5+78.43 L 58.18 Power Pole 0.00 23 4839.00 4548.00
6+77.26 L 57.28 Power Pole 0.00 24 4868.00 4656.00
9+01.55 R 16.81 Catch Basin 0.00 25 4745.00 4887.00
10+50.51 L 25.39 Traffic Sign 0.00 27 4872.00 5043.00
4+03.48 R 22.15 Light Pole 0.00 28 4657.00 4454.00

6 Pick point or point numbers (Enter to End): Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: A polyline that represents the centerline or a
centerline file (.cl).
➤ Keyboard Command: CALCOFF

Cut Sheet

Function
This command creates a report of the elevation difference between
points and a design elevation, which can be defined by a grid file,
triangulation file, 3D polyline, section file, note file, road template file,

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

444
 or design points. The station and offset of the points can also be
reported if a centerline is specified.

Prompts
1 The Grade Elevation From option has seven choices for the surface.
n 3D Polyline: When using a 3D polyline for the grade elevation, the
command calculates the elevation along the polyline at the position
perpendicular from the point.
n Grid File: For grid surface files, the design elevation is determined
by the surface file at the point.
n Triangulation File: For triangulation surface files, the design
elevation is determined by the surface file at the point.
n Section File: For section files, the grade elevation is interpolated
from the offset-elevation data in the section file based on the
station-offset of the point along the centerline.
n Note File (SurvStar/Tsunami): The Note File option reads the
grade elevation from the note file (.not) that is associated with the
current coordinate file. For example, if the current coordinate file is
job3.crd, then the note file name is job3.not.

Cut Sheet
445
 n Template Design: The Template Design option defines the grade
elevation using road design files. For each point, the program finds
the station-offset for the point along the centerline and then applies
the road design at that station to determine the grade elevation. The
required design files include a centerline (.cl), template (.tpl), and
profile (.pro).
n Points: The Points option reports the horizontal distance and
cut/fill between two points. The points to compare can be in the
same coordinate file, or separate files. For the same coordinate file
option, two ranges of point numbers are compared. For the
separate file option, the point numbers are used to match points
between the files.

2 The Use Report Formatter option can be used to customize the report
layout and to output the report data to Excel or Access. The Report
Formatter is explained in the List Points command in the Points menu.
3 The Decimals option controls the decimal precision used.
4 The Grade to Process option uses the top surface or various subgrades.
5 The Station-Offset Options contain the station settings.
n Define Centerline by: Define Centerline by defines the form of the
centerline to use.
n Polyline: Select this option to pick a polyline in the drawing.
n Points: Select this option to use points representing the centerline.
n CL File: Select this option to use a centerline file.
n None: No screen entity is used to define the centerline.
n Beginning Station: This is where you enter in the starting station
number.
n Sort Report by Stations: Sorts the report by station number.
n Under the Station type, the label format is assigned.
n 1+00: Stationing is drawn in the format 1+00.
n 1+000: Stationing is drawn in the format 1+000.
n Type of Curve: Under the Type of Curve, you set the type of curve.
n Roadway: Stationing uses the actual arc length of the curve.
n Railroad: Stationing applies a slight adjustment to the arc length
based on 100 foot chord segments.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Tools

➤ Prerequisite: A coordinate file (.CRD file) with points.
➤ Keyboard Command: CUTRPRT

Chapter 10 Tools Commands

446
11-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 4:21 PM

COGO Commands
11
This chapter provides information on using the In this chapter
commands from the COGO menu to perform ■ Using coordinate geometry
operations
coordinate geometry operations in your drawing.

447
 Draw-Locate Points

Function
See the Draw-Locate Points command in Chapter 9, “Points
Commands.”

Inverse

Function
This command reports the bearing/azimuth and horizontal distance
between two points. When the command prompts for a series of
points, use the appropriate object snap mode to select the points from
the screen or enter the point numbers to reference coordinates stored
in the current coordinate file. The results are then displayed.

Prompts
1 Calculate Bearing & Distance from starting point?
Traverse/Sideshot/Options/Arc/Point number or pick point: 2072
Use point number 2072, as an example.
PointNo. Northing(y) Easting(x) Elev (z) Description
2072 4028.83 8229.35 394.49 B

2 Traverse/Sideshot/Options/Arc/Point number or pick point: 2070

Use point number 2070.
PointNo. Northing(y) Easting(x) Elev (z) Description
2070 4037.31 8253.02 394.61 B
Bearing: N 70d17'36" E Horizontal Distance: 25.1385978

n Traverse and Sideshot: The Inverse command can be used in

conjunction with the Traverse and Sideshot commands. The last
two points you specify become the Backsight and the Occupied
point for the Traverse and Sideshot commands.

Chapter 11 COGO Commands

448
 You can go directly from the Inverse command to the Traverse and
Side shots command. Enter T to go directly to the Traverse
command. Enter SS or S to go directly to the Side shots command.
Hotkeys are not case sensitive. See the Traverse and Sideshot
commands descriptions in this chapter.
n Options: Several input options for Inverse are set by entering O for
Options.
Sideshot inverse/Pairs/Auto increment
[Sideshot/Pairs/Auto/<None>]?
Sideshot inverse holds the current occupied point and calculates the
bearing/distance to each entered point. When the Pairs option is set,
Inverse reports the bearing/distance between pairs of points instead
of every entered point. For example, if points 1,2,11,12 were
entered, the bearing/distance would be reported for 1,2 and 11,12
but not 2,11. The Auto Increment option uses the next point
number when you press ENTER. To exit the command with Auto
Increment active, enter End.
Several angle output options are set at the second prompt in
Options.
Angle to report [Azimuth/<Bearing>/Gon/Right]?
The angle can be reported as either Bearing, Azimuth, Gons, or
Angle Right. You can also set an option to report with decimal
seconds at the next prompt.
Report angle decimal seconds [Yes/<No>]?
n Arc: You can inverse around an arc by inversing to the PC, and
then entering A, for the Arc option. The command will ask for the
radius point, the curve direction left or right, and the PT point. The
curve data is then reported. There is an unequal PC-Radius and PT-
Radius distance check. The tolerance for this check is set in the Area
Label Defaults command under the Area menu.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: I

Inverse
449
 Occupy Point

Function
This command sets the occupied point and backsight angle for COGO
commands such as Traverse.

Prompts
1 Set Occupied Point
Pick point or point number: pick a point
When setting the occupied point, you can pick a point on the screen,
enter coordinates at the command line, or type in a point number that
will be read from the current coordinate file.
2 Set backsight method [Azimuth/Bearing/None/<Point>]?
Four options are available for determining the backsight direction:
Azimuth, Bearing, None, and Point.
n Azimuth and Bearing: With this option, you enter the backsight
angle in the selected format.
n None: This option sets the backsight to an azimuth of 0 (north).
n Point: With this option, you may pick a point on the screen, input
coordinates, or type a point number that will be read from the
current coordinate file.

You can also set the occupied point by using the Inverse command. If
you inverse from point 3 to point 1, you set point 1 as the occupied
point and point 3 as the backsight. For more information, see the
Inverse command described earlier in this chapter.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: OP

Chapter 11 COGO Commands

450
Traverse

Function
This command allows you to enter any combination of turned angles,
azimuths, or bearings to define a traverse or figure.
The command prompts for an Angle-Bearing Code that defines the
angle or bearing type. Codes 1 through 4 define the bearing quadrants:
1 being North-East, 2 South-East, 3 South-West, and 4 North-West.
Code 5 is a north based azimuth, 6 is an angle turned to the left, 7 is
an angle turned to the right, 8 is a deflection angle left, and 9 is a
deflection angle right. This command always occupies the last point it
calculated and backsights the point before that.

For both the Angle-Bearing Code and the Distance prompt, you can
enter point-defined responses, for example two points separated by
an asterisk, as in 2*3 for the bearing (or distance) defined by 2 to 3.
You can also add math expressions. For angles, 2*3+90 would deflect
90 degrees right from 2 to 3. For distance, 2*3/2 would mean half the
distance of 2 to 3. You do not need to enter N before entering a
number-defined distance.
The command draws lines between located points (if the Line On/Off
option in the COGO menu is set to on) and plots the points calculated
and stores them in the current coordinate file if point numbering is on.
The point settings are defined in the Point Defaults command under
the Points menu. If Point Protect is turned on, the Traverse command
checks whether the point numbers are already stored in the file. Point
Protect is set in the Coordinate File Utilities command under the
Points menu.

Traverse
451
 Some Angle-Bearing code input options for the Traverse command are
set by entering O for Options. The Angle Right option prompts for the
angle right and skips the angle-bearing code prompt. The Azimuth
option prompts for the azimuth and skips the angle-bearing code
prompt.

Prompts
1 Occupied Point ?
Pick point or point number: pick point
You will be prompted for the occupied point only the first time you
use the command. You can use the Inverse or Occupy Point commands
to set the occupied and backsight points.
2 Exit/Options/Line/Side Shot/Inverse/<Angle-Bearing Code <7>: Press
ENTER
Pressing ENTER uses the default angle right code.
3 Backsight Point ?
Pick point or point number: pick point
4 Enter Angle (dd.mmss) <90.0000>: 88.1324
You can also enter L or R to define an angle 90 degrees Left or Right.
5 Number inverse/<Distance>: 100
6 Vertical Angle Type (0-3) <2>: Press ENTER
You see this prompt only if Vertical Angle Prompt in Point Defaults is
set to None.
7 Enter Zenith Angle (dd.mmss) <90.0000>: Press ENTER
Hz Distance > 100.00
8 Enter Point Description <>: ip
9 If prompted, select Existing or New coordinate file where points are
stored.
10 Exit/Options/Line/Side Shot/Inverse/<Angle-Bearing Code <7>>: 14*9-
45.2045
Uses the bearing defined by point numbers 14 & 9 and subtracts the
angle 45 degrees, 20 minutes, and 45 seconds. You can use a + or - in
this type of entry.
11 Number inverse/<Distance>: N
You can enter 14*9/2 here, as well

Chapter 11 COGO Commands

452
12 Point number inverse (i.e. 10*20): 14*9/2
Causes the command to recall the distance from point number 14 to 9
and divide it by 2.
13 Enter Zenith Angle (dd.mmss) <90.0000>: Press ENTER
14 Enter Point Descriptions <ip>: Press ENTER
15 Exit/Options/Line/Side Shot/Inverse/<Angle-Bearing Code <7>>: L
Select Line or Polyline that defines Bearing: select line that defines
bearing
16 Number inverse/<Distance>: 100
17 Enter Zenith Angle (dd.mmss) <90.00>: Press ENTER
Hz Distance >100.00
18 Enter Point Description <ip>: Press ENTER
19 Exit/Options/Line/Side Shot/Inverse/<Angle-Bearing Code <7>>: E
Input to end the command. Enter S or SS to execute the Side Shots
command or I to execute the Inverse command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: T

Side Shots

Function
This command allows you to input any combination of turned angles,
azimuths, or bearings while remaining on an occupied point. A point is
"occupied" by inversing to it, traversing to it, or by using the
commands Occupy Point, Draw-Locate Point, or Enter-Assign Point
described in this chapter. The command prompts for an Angle-Bearing
Code that defines the angle or bearing type. Codes 1 through 4 define
the bearing quadrants: 1 being North-East, 2 South-East, 3 South-West,
and 4 North-West. Code 5 is a north based azimuth, 6 is an angle
turned to the left, 7 is an angled turned to the right, 8 is a deflection
angle left, and 9 is a deflection angle right.
The command plots the points calculated and stores them in the
current coordinate file if point numbering is on. If Point Protect is
turned on, Side Shots checks if the point numbers are already stored in
the file. All points calculated radiate from the occupied point. Use the

Side Shots
453
 Traverse, Inverse, or Occupied Point commands to define the occupied
and backsight points.

Prompts
1 Exit/Options/Line/Traverse/Inverse/<Angle-Bearing Code <7>: 6
Code 6 for angle turned to left.
2 Enter Angle (dd.mmss) <45.5413>: 22.3524
Angle of 22 degrees, 35 minutes, 24 seconds.
3 Number inverse/<Distance>: 120.91
4 Enter Vertical Angle (dd.mmss) <90.0000>: 88.2548
This prompt comes up only if you have Vertical angle prompting set to
1 or 2.
5 Instrument Height <5.0>: 5.12
6 Rod-Target Height <5.0>: 5.12
These prompts come up only if you have Instrument and Rod height
prompting turned on in Point Defaults.
7 Enter Point Elevation <1033.31>: Press ENTER
You can accept the elevation calculated by this command.
8 Enter point description: Topo Shot
9 Exit/Options/Line/Traverse/Inverse/<Angle-Bearing Code <6>>: E

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SS

Enter-Assign Point

Function
This command creates a point at the coordinates you specify. The point
is both stored in the current coordinate file and drawn on the screen.
The command prompts for northing and easting. Whether the program
prompts for point number, elevation, and description depends on the
settings in the Point Defaults command on the Points menu. The point
symbol and layer are also set in the Point Defaults command.

Chapter 11 COGO Commands

454
 Prompts
1 Enter North(y): 5000
2 Enter East(x): 5000
3 Enter Point Elevation <>: 100
4 Enter Point Description <>: START
(5000.0 5000.0 100.00)
5 Enter North(y): Press ENTER to end

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: EA

Raw File On/Off

Function
This command toggles raw file creation. When this option is active,
commands such as Traverse create entries in the current raw file
(.RW5). If Raw File is turned on, the Raw File On/Off menu option
will have a check mark character next to it.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO

➤ Prerequisite: *.RW5 file
➤ Keyboard Command: OPENRAW

Line On/Off

Function
This command toggles line plotting on and off for the: Traverse,
Locate by Line Bearing (LB), Locate by Turned Angle (TA), Locate by
Azimuth (AZ), and by Bearing (LG) commands. If line drawing is
turned on, the Line On/Off menu option will have a check mark
character next to it.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LINEONOFF

Raw File On/Off

455
 Locate by Line Bearing

Function
This command calculates and plots a line (if Line On/Off is set to on)
and point from an occupied point. You can define a bearing by picking
two points, selecting a line, entering two point numbers, or typing in a
bearing or azimuth. The command always occupies the last point
calculated.

Prompts
1 Press [Enter] to use preview point/or select occupied point.
Point number or pick point: 14
PtNo. North(y) East(x) Elev(z) Description
14 4869.06 4390.31 0.00
2 Pick points that define bearing.
Define Bearing by, Line/Bearing/Numbers/<pick 1st point>: B
The default is to pick the first point that defines the bearing. If you
pick a point, you are then prompted for a second point. You can enter
B to type in a bearing or azimuth, L to select a line or polyline that
defines the bearing, or N to input two point numbers that define the
bearing.
3 [A]zimuth/<Bearing (Qdd.mmss)>: A
4 Azimuth (ddd.mmss): 45.2349
5 Number inverse/<Distance>: 188.27
6 Enter Zenith Angle (dd.mmss) <90.0000>: 88.4515
7 Enter Point Description <>: ip

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO, Locate by Bearing Ang >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LB

Chapter 11 COGO Commands

456
 Locate by Turned Angle

Function
This command creates a point using turned angle and distance and
plots a line if Line On/Off is set to on.

Prompts
1 Define occupied & backsight points by [L]ine or [P]oints <P>: L
2 Select Line or Polyline near end point that defines occupied point:
select line
Occupied point: (4078.44 4610.89 0.0)
Backsight point: (4390.31 4869.06 0.0)
3 Enter Angle (ddd.mmss) <45.2349>: 22.5632
4 Pick or Type Distance <188.27>: 40.32
5 Enter Zenith Angle (dd.mmss) <90.0000>: 88.4515
6 Enter Point Description <>: ip

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO, Locate by Bearing Ang >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: TA

Locate by Azimuth

Function
This command creates points using azimuth and distance.

Prompts
1 [Enter] to use preview point/ or Select occupied point ?
Pick point or point number>: 14
2 Enter Azimuth (ddd.mmss) <22.5632>: 277.1259
3 Enter or Pick Distance <40.32>: 104.39
4 Enter Zenith Angle (dd.mmss) <90.0000>: 88.4515
5 Enter Point Description <>: ip

Locate by Turned Angle

457
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO, Locate by Bearing Ang >
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: AZ

Locate by Bearing

Function
This command creates points using bearing and distance.

Prompts
1 [Enter] to use preview point/ or Select occupied point ?
Pick point or point number>: 24
2 Enter Bearing (Qdd.mmss) <277.1259>: 435.2317
3 Enter or Pick Distance <104.39>: 200
4 Enter Zenith Angle (dd.mmss) <90.0000>: 88.4515
5 Enter Point Description <>: ip

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO, Locate by Bearing Ang >

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LG

Pick Intersection Points

Function
This command creates points at line or polyline intersections. The
object snap (OSNAP) mode is set to intersection. This command is
similar to the Draw-Locate Points command with an additional check
to see if an intersection exists at the picked point. If there is not an
intersection or interior polyline vertex at the point, no point is created.

Chapter 11 COGO Commands

458
 Prompts
1 In the Pick Intersections dialog box, you must set parameters for the
point.
■ Symbol Name: This field displays the symbol name.
■ Select Symbol: This allows you to select a new symbol type. The
symbol is displayed to the right.

2 Under Point Prompt Settings, you determine the point attributes and
elevation.
■ Prompt for Descriptions: You are prompted for point description.
■ Prompt for Elevations: You are prompted for elevation.
■ Locate on Real Z Axis: The point uses the elevation of the
intersected lines.

3 Under Point Number Settings, you determine how the intersect points
are numbered.
■ Point Numbers: This option assigns point numbers to the
created points.
■ Automatic Point Numbering: This option numbers the new points
automatically. You will be prompted for point numbers if the
option is not checked.

Pick Intersection Points

459
 ■ Starting Point Number: This option sets the starting point number
for automatic point numbering.
■ Layer Name for Points: This option allows you to assign a layer for
the points.

4 APParent intersection on <Yes>/No: Press ENTER

5 [app on] Pick Intersection Point: pick an intersection

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO, Locate at Intersect >

➤ Prerequisite: Execute Drawing Setup to set defaults.
➤ Keyboard Command: PICKINT

Bearing-Bearing Intersect

Function
This command creates a point at the intersection of two lines. You can
define a line by picking two points, selecting a line, or typing in a
bearing. After the lines are defined, a point symbol is located at the
point of intersection.

Prompts
1 [Enter] to use preview point/or select 1st Base point ?
Pick point or point number: 14
2 Define 1st angle by (Line/Points?Right/Azimuth/Bearing) <Bearing>: L
3 Select Line or Polyline that Defines 1st Bearing: select line
4 2nd Base point ?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
5 Define 2nd bearing by (Line/Points/Right/Azimuth/Bearing) <Line>:
Press ENTER
6 Select Line or Polyline that Defines 2nd Bearing: select line

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO, Locate at Intersect >

➤ Prerequisite: Execute Drawing Setup to set Defaults.
➤ Keyboard Command: BB

Chapter 11 COGO Commands

460
 Bearing-Distance Intersect

Function
This command creates a point using a bearing and a distance.

Prompts
1 [Enter] to use preview point or select known Bearing base point ?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
The command prompts you for a base point from which the known
bearing intersects.
2 Define bearing by (Line/Points/Bearing <Line>: Press ENTER
You then define the bearing by one of three methods: picking two
points, selecting a line with the same bearing, or typing in the bearing
in the form of Qdd.mmss (similar to the Locate by Bearing command).
3 Select Line or Polyline that defines Bearing: select line
4 Known distance base point.
Pick point or point number: pick a point
Next you are prompted for a base point from which the known
distance radiates.
5 Pick or Type Distance: 40.41
A circle is drawn radiating from the selected base point, and a line
defined by the bearing is extended to intersect the circle.
6 [int on] Pick Intersection point ([Enter] to cancel): pick point
You then pick the correct point for the solution desired and a point
symbol is located at the selected intersection. The command then
erases the temporary circle and line. Except where noted, most
commands leave the selection of the appropriate osnap mode up to
you. If a command turns on an osnap, the prompt line of a command
notates the osnap by enclosing it in brackets. For example, if the
MIDpoint Osnap is on, [mid on] appears in the point prompt line.
Each predefined point symbol has a point entity at the center of the
symbol, therefore you should use the NODE ObjectSNAP mode to snap
lines or other drawing entities to point symbols.
7 Enter Point Number <55>: Press ENTER
This prompt appears only if Automatic Point Numbering is toggled off
in the Point Defaults command on the Points menu.
8 Enter Point Symbol Number <4>: Press ENTER

Bearing-Distance Intersect
461
 Symbol number four is located at the computed coordinate and
labeled point number 55. This prompt appears only if Prompt for
Symbol Numbers is toggled ON in the Point Defaults command on
the Points menu.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO, Locate at Intersect >

➤ Prerequisite: Run Drawing Setup to set defaults.
➤ Keyboard Command: BD

Distance-Distance Intersect

Function
This command creates a point at the distance-distance intersection
from two base points. The command prompts for two distances and
two base points. The two possible intersections, labeled A and B, are
shown on the screen. You can either pick near the desired intersection
or type in the letter A or B. The A intersection is the first possible
intersection, clockwise from the first point.

Prompts
1 Select 1st base point
Pick point or point number: 2050
2 Points/<1st distance>: 46.72
3 Select 2nd base point
Pick point or point number: 2094
4 Points/<2nd distance>: 38.96
5 Pick near solution or Enter [A] or [B]: pick a point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO, Locate at Intersect>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: DD

Chapter 11 COGO Commands

462
 Resection

Function
This command calculates point coordinates given the angle and
distance from two or three reference points. The Z coordinate can be
calculated in addition to the X and Y. The command calculates the
coordinate by averaging the distance-distance and angle-angle
solutions. Since there is redundant data, the final calculated coordinate
differs slightly from the individual measurements. For example, in a 3-
point resection, there are two different distance-distance solutions, one
between the first-second point and one between the second-third
points. The command reports the difference between the final
coordinate and the individual solutions as the residuals, which indicate
whether the data is good. High residuals suggest a problem with the
input data.

Prompts
1 In the first Resection dialog box, you can choose to use two or three
reference points.

2 In the second Resection dialog box, you assign the reference point.

n Point: You must enter the point number of your reference point.
These reference points need to be stored in the current coordinate
file before you run this command.
n Inst. Height: You must enter the instrument height.

Resection
463
 n Target Height: You must enter the target height.
If you need only the 2D solution, then enter the instrument and
target heights as 0.0.
3 In the Manual Read dialog box you must specify parameters for the
calculation.

n Horizontal Angle: You must enter a horizontal angle from the

resection to the reference points. The horizontal angle is the
horizontal azimuth, or angle right, from the unknown point to the
reference point.
n Zenith Angle: You must enter a zenith angle. For a 2D solution, set
the zenith angle to 90 degrees.
n Slope Distance: You must enter a slope distance from the reference
points to the resection.

4 You are prompted for additional reference points and parameters.

5 In the results dialog box that displays the final coordinates and
residuals, you can select the option to store the coordinates in the
current coordinate file with a specified point number.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO, Locate at Intersect >

➤ Prerequisite: 2 or 3 reference points
➤ Keyboard Command: CRESECTION

Point on Arc

Function
This command creates a Point on an Arc.

Chapter 11 COGO Commands

464
 Prompts
1 Define arc by, Points/<select arc or polyline>: pick arc or polyline arc
segment
Pick a point on the arc somewhere near its midpoint. The preview
arrow points to the 1st endpoint, the occupied point.
2 Precede distance with minus sign if distance from 2nd endpoint.
Distance along arc from 1st point: 100
You must enter a distance. If the distance is from the 1st endpoint (PC,
the one highlighted by the screen preview arrow) use a positive value.
If the distance is from the 2nd endpoint (PT), use a negative value.

3 The command then plots a point at the computed distance.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO, Interpolate Points >

➤ Prerequisite: Execute Drawing Setup command to set defaults.
➤ Keyboard Command: PTARC

Divide Between Points

Function
This command divides the distance between two points and inserts a
point symbol at the specified distance. It can also interpolate elevation.
To interpolate the elevations, the points picked must be at their real Z
axis elevation.

Prompts
1 Interpolate elevations <N>: Press ENTER
If you want to have the elevations calculated at the points, then
respond with Y for yes.
2 Point to divide-interpolate from?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
PtNo. North(y) East(x) Elev(z) Description
1 4252.76 4158.32 0.00

3 Point to divide-interpolate to ?
Pick point or point number: pick a point

Divide Between Points

465
 4 Number of Segments-Divisions: 3
The command then locates 2 points.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO, Interpolate Points>

➤ Prerequisite: Locate two points to divide between and if you want
to interpolate elevation they should have a real Z axis elevation.
➤ Keyboard Command: DIVLIN

Divide Along Entity

Function
This command divides an entity such as a line, polyline, or arc. You
select the entity and specify the desired number of segments. The
command then locates the computed points along that entity.

Prompts
1 Interpolate Elevations <N>: Press ENTER
If you want to have the elevations calculated at the points, then
respond with Y for yes.
2 Select Entity to Divide: pick an entity
3 Number of Segments/Divisions: 5
The command then locates 4 points.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO, Interpolate Points>

➤ Prerequisite: If you want to interpolate elevations, you must locate
two points that have real Z axis elevations.
➤ Keyboard Command: DIVENT

Interval Along Entity

Function
This command creates points at a specified distance along a line, arc,
or polyline. The points are both stored in the current coordinate file
and drawn on the screen. For example, use this command to locate lot

Chapter 11 COGO Commands

466
 corner points along a frontage line. The point symbol, point layer, and
point prompting options are set in the dialog box.

Prompts

1 In the Interval Along Entity dialog box, you must set parameters for
the point.
■ Symbol Name: This field displays the symbol name.
■ Select Symbol: This allows you to select a new symbol type. The
symbol is displayed to the right.

2 Under Point Prompt Settings, you determine the point attributes and
elevation.
■ Prompt for Descriptions: You are prompted for point description.
■ Prompt for Elevations: You are prompted for elevation.
■ Locate on Real Z Axis: The point uses the elevation of the selected
entity.

3 Under Point Number Settings you determine how the created points
are numbered.
■ Point Numbers: This option assigns point numbers to the
created points.
■ Automatic Point Numbering: This option numbers the new points
automatically. You will be prompted for point numbers if the
option is not checked.

Interval Along Entity

467
 ■ Starting Point Number: This option sets the starting point number
for automatic point numbering.
■ Layer Name for Points: This allows you to assign a layer for
the points.

4 Break Entity [Yes/<No>]? Press ENTER.

If you want to have the entity broken or segmented at the calculated
points then respond with Y for yes.
5 Create point at start [Yes/<No>]? Y
This option will create a point at the start of the entity. Otherwise, the
first created point will be at the specified distance from the start.
6 Enter Horizontal Distance for Points <50.0>: 100
Enter the distance at which to locate points.
7 [nea on] Select Entity to Station/measure: select entity
The command then locates points along the selected entity.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO, Interpolate Points>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PTINT

Create Points from Entities

Function
This command creates Autodesk Field Survey points at the endpoints
of selected entities. For arcs and polylines with arc segments, points are
created at the radius points of the arcs. The points are both stored in
the current coordinate file and drawn on the screen.

Chapter 11 COGO Commands

468
 Prompts

1 In the Entities to Points dialog box, you must set parameters for the
points created.
■ Symbol Name: This field displays the symbol name.
■ Select Symbol: This allows you to select a new symbol type. The
symbol is displayed to the right.

2 Under Point Prompt Settings, you determine the point attributes and
elevation.
■ Prompt for Descriptions: You are prompted for point description.
■ Prompt for Elevations: You are prompted for elevation.
■ Locate on Real Z Axis: The point acquires the elevation of the
selected entities.

3 Under Point Number Settings, you determine how the intersect points
are numbered.
■ Point Numbers: This option assigns point numbers to the created
points.
■ Automatic Point Numbering: This option numbers the new points
automatically. You will be prompted for point numbers if the
option is not checked.
■ Starting Point Number: This option sets the starting point number
for automatic point numbering.

Create Points from Entities

469
 ■ Layer Name for Points: This allows you to assign a layer for the
points.

4 In the Create Points from Entities dialog box, you must determine the
types of entities to process for points.

■ Entities to Process: Select the types of entities you wish to process.

n Entity Layer for Description: This option allows you to use the
layer name of the entity as the description for the created point.
n Avoid Duplicates with Existing Points: This option allows you to
prevent creation of a point if a point with the same coordinates
already exists in the current coordinate file.

5 Select arcs, faces, points, text, lines and polylines.

Select objects: select entities
You must select the entities to process. Selected entities can include
polylines, lines, arcs, points, faces, inserts, and text.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO

➤ Prerequisite: Entities (Points, lines, polylines, etc.) on which to
locate points.
➤ Keyboard Command: AUTOPNTS

Chapter 11 COGO Commands

470
 Radial Stakeout

Function
This command creates a radial stakeout report, which can be sent to a
file or printer. Relative to an occupied point and a backsight point, the
command calculates the azimuth, angle right, horizontal distance,
and/or slope distance for a range of points. The point data is read from
the current coordinate file.

1 In the Radial Stakeout Program dialog box, you determine occupied

and backsight points, as well as parameters for the generated report.
n Occupied Point Number: You must enter your occupied point.
n Backsight Point Number: You must enter your backsight point
number.
n Maximum Hz Distance: You can set the maximum horizontal
distance to be included in the report.
n Select Points from Screen: This option allows you to select from
the screen the points to be included in the stakeout report.
n Range of points to Compute: Enter the range of points to be
included in the stakeout report.

2 Under Number of Decimal Places for, you can determine precision of

the points in the report.
3 Under Report Options, you can determine how the calculated stakeout
data is reported.

Radial Stakeout
471
 4 In the Radial Stakeout dialog box, you must determine if slope distance
is included in the report. You must also determine if the results are
reported in cut sheet format. The Cut Sheet Format option adds
columns to the report for Description, Hub Elev, and Elevation.
5 A Radial Stakeout report is generated.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: COGO

➤ Prerequisite: A coordinate file (.CRD file) with points
➤ Keyboard Command: RS

Chapter 11 COGO Commands

472
12-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 4:22 PM

Design Commands
12
This chapter provides information on using the In this chapter
commands from the Design menu to create and ■ Designing lot layouts
■ Offsets and intersections
organize lots, develop street intersections, and design
■ Cul-de-sacs
various land features in your drawing.
■ Parking spaces
■ Using best-fitting operations

473
 Lot Layout

Function
This command draws lots based on a front and back polyline. Starting
from the front polyline, the command calculates two lot side lines
perpendicular from the front polyline that intersect the back polyline
and create the specified lot size. Lots are created along the front
polyline in the order that the front polyline is drawn. (If the direction
of the front polyline is wrong, use the Reverse Polyline command
under Polyline Utilities on the Edit menu to change it. The direction of
the back polyline does not matter.)

1 In the Lot Layout dialog box, you must first designate a Target Lot Area.
2 Under Area Units you must choose square feet or acres.
3 In the Lot Layout dialog box, you must determine frontage parameters
and how you will be prompted.
■ Minimum Frontage: You can specify the minimum frontage for
each lot.
■ Minimum Backlot: You can specify the minimum length of
the backlot.
■ Use Frontage Setback Polyline: This option allows you to specify
another polyline to use as the minimum frontage indicator. The
Frontage Setback polyline typically would be offset a set amount
from the actual frontage polyline.

Chapter 12 Design Commands

474
 ■ Apply Remainder Equally to All Lots: In automatic mode, the
Target Lot Area is set at the top of the dialog box, and you can
choose the option to Apply Remainder Equally to All Lots. For
example, if the total area was 4.4 acres and the target lot area was
1.0 acre, then the remaining 0.4 acres would be spread equally
between the lots, resulting in 4 lots of 1.1 acres. If the Apply
Remainder Equally to All Lots option is not checked, the command
would make 4 lots of 1.0 acres and one 0.4 acre lot.
■ Prompt For Each Lot Area: With this option on, the command
reports the remaining area between the front and back polylines
and then asks for the lot size. You can specify lot size either by area
or frontage along the front polyline.

4 You must determine if the lots are to be closed polylines or drawn with
side boundary lines only.
5 You are prompted to pick the front and back polylines.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: A frontage polyline and a backlot polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: LOTLAY

Set Lot File

Function
This command sets the lot file name that other lot commands will
automatically reference. The lot file has a .lot extension. The lot file
stores a list of lots, with each lot being a list of point numbers that
reference coordinates stored in a coordinate file (.crd file).

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SETLOT

Set Lot File

475
 Design Lot

Function
This command creates lot definitions that are stored in a lot file. You
define a lot by entering a sequence of point numbers that reference
coordinates from the current coordinate file. Each lot has a lot name
and a block name. A lot doesn’t have to be a closed perimeter, and it
can also be used to represent other linework such as a centerline. You
enter a curve to define a lot by first specifying the PC point number,
then typing R for radius and entering the radius point number,
followed by the PT point number.

Prompts
1 Lot Name <1>: 105
2 Block Name <1>: Press ENTER
3 Lot Starting Station <0.0>: Press ENTER
If the figure that you are entering is a centerline, then you could use
this as the starting station of the centerline.
4 Starting point number: 17
5 Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): 18

Chapter 12 Design Commands

476
6 Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): 19
7 Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): R
8 Radius point number: 20
9 Use large included angle for curve (Yes/<No>)? Press ENTER
10 Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): 21
11 Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): 22
12 Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): 17
13 Point number (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): Press ENTER
14 Enter another lot (<Yes>/No)? N

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: Points in a coordinate file.
➤ Keyboard Command: MKLOT

Polyline to Lot File

Function
This command creates lot files from selected polylines by creating a
series of point numbers in the current coordinate file, one point
number for each point in the polylines. Before creating a point
number, the command checks to see if the point coordinates are
already in the coordinate file and uses the existing point number if a
match is found. Each lot has a lot name and block name. The lots don’t
have to be closed perimeters and can also be used to represent other
linework such as centerlines.

Prompts
1 Starting point number <8>: Press ENTER
Points will be automatically numbered starting from this value.
2 Select lot polyline: pick a polyline
3 Lot Name <106>: Press ENTER
4 Block Name <1>: Press ENTER
5 Lot Starting Station <0.0>: Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: a polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: PL2LOT

Polyline to Lot File

477
 Lot File by Interior Text

Function
This command creates lot definitions from the selected polylines and
text. For each text entity, the command finds the bounding polyline
around the text, and the text is used as the lot name. The selected
polylines do not need to be closed themselves but as a group they
should define closed areas. Multiple lots can be created at once with
this command. All the lots will have the same block name, which you
enter, and all lots will be assigned a starting station of 0.0.
The lots are defined by the series of point numbers. This command will
create point numbers in the current coordinate file for each point in
the bounding polylines. Before creating a point number, the command
checks to see if the point coordinates are already in the coordinate file
and uses the existing point number if a match is found.
This command works well with the Draw Lot File command described
later in this chapter. Once a lot file (containing 1 or more lots) is
created, all lots can be redrawn automatically, with annotation, using
the Draw Lot File command. Since the lots are drawn from point
numbers, if you move the point numbers for the lot corners, the lots
can be redrawn to the new point positions using the Draw Lot File
command. If a point number is located at the corner of 4 lots,
moving that point number will cause the Draw Lot File command to
redraw all 4 lots.

Prompts
1 Starting point number <8>: Press ENTER
Points will be automatically numbered starting from this value.
2 Block Name <1>: Press ENTER
3 Select lot lines, polylines and text.
Select objects: select the polylines and text

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: polylines and text
➤ Keyboard Command: TXT2LOT

Chapter 12 Design Commands

478
Input-Edit Lot File

Function
This command allows you to edit the lot definitions in a lot file.

The Input-Edit Lots dialog box shows a list of the lot names. To edit a
lot, highlight the lot name and click the Edit button. To create a new
lot, click the Add button.

Input-Edit Lot File

479
 1 The Lot Definition dialog box allows you to edit the lot name, block
name, coordinate file, starting station, ending station, and the point
numbers that define the lot.
n Change CRD File: This options allows you to switch to a different
coordinate file. This option is especially useful if the coordinate file
has moved since the lot was defined.
n Lot Name: You can change the Lot Name in this field.
n Block Name: You can change the Block Name in this field.
n Starting Station: You can change the Starting Station in this field.
When the starting or ending station is changed, the program
recalculates the stations at all other points.
n Ending Station: You can change the Ending Station in this field.

2 A listing of the points numbers defining the lot can be modified.

■ Point Number: This references the point number in the coordinate
file.
■ Radius Pt: This options indicates the point number is a radius
point of a curve. A curve is specified by the PC, radius point, and PT
point numbers.
■ Large Arc: This option indicates a curve with an included angle
greater than 180 degrees.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: EDITLOT

Chapter 12 Design Commands

480
 Lot File Report

Function
This command generates a report for the selected lots that includes the
point number, coordinates, station, bearing, and distance for every
point in the lots. Curve data is also reported. At the end of the lot, the
closure is reported. The area for each lot is reported as well as the total
area for all the lots.

1 You must select which lots to report, or click Select All.

2 In the Select Lots dialog box, you must choose how the report
is formatted.
n Report Areas Only: Shows only areas of lots.
■ Use Report Formatter: This option allows you to control the
fields to be reported and the layout of this report. This option
produces output that can be read by Excel and Access.
■ Add Page Break Between Lots: This option reports one lot per page.
■ Report Precision: You can set the precision for the results of the
report.
■ Unequal Radius Tolerance: This option sets the maximum
tolerance or difference between unequal radiuses in curves.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: A lot file
➤ Keyboard Command: LOTREPORT

Lot File Report

481
 Draw Lot File

Function
This command draws and labels lots stored in a lot file. The lots can be
drawn as polylines.

1 You must select which lots to draw, or click Select All.

2 In the Select Lots dialog box, you must choose how the lots are drawn.
n Draw Lot Polylines: This option draws polylines as lot boundaries.
If the lots are already drawn, then turn the Draw Lot Polylines
option off.
■ Polyline Layer: This option sets the layer name for the polylines
drawn from the file.
■ Label Lines & Arcs: This option automatically labels lines and arcs
drawn from the file.
■ Label Areas: This option automatically labels the area of the lot.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: A lot file
➤ Keyboard Command: DRAWLOT

Chapter 12 Design Commands

482
Offsets & Intersections

Function
This command takes a set of centerline polylines and calculates a series
of offset polylines using offset and fillet radius values that you define.
The command recognizes primary and secondary roadways, and allows
for different offsets and fillet radiuses to be specified for each. Up to
7 sets of offsets and radiuses can be defined for features such as edge of
pavement, right-of-way, and sidewalk. Multiple centerline polylines
can be processed together, which allows for the creation of an entire
set of roadway offset polylines in one step. Intersections are calculated
based on the selected centerlines, and the fillet radiuses are applied at
the intersections.
If you prefer to handle intersections manually, you may wish to select
non-intersecting centerlines and run the command few times. You can
also handle intersections manually using the Offset command and the
Fillet command, both on the Edit menu.

Offsets & Intersections

483
 1 You are prompted for both Primary and Secondary road polylines. You
must select the appropriate lines.
2 The Smooth Interior and Exterior Corners options will fillet bends
in the offset polylines. If these options are not used, turns without
an arc in the original centerline will become straight corners in the
offset polylines.
3 Each set of offset and fillet radiuses has a layer name and description.
The Pick button lets you set the layer name by picking an entity with
that layer in the drawing. You can also enter a description, which is for
your own information and is not used by the program.
4 The results of the calculations for the given parameters may be
previewed in the dialog box. You can zoom and pan by clicking and
dragging the mouse on the preview image after selecting zoom or pan
mode using the toggle.
5 Once you are satisfied with the calculated offsets, insert them into the
drawing by clicking on Finish button.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: Centerline polylines
➤ Keyboard Command: WAYINT

Cul-de-Sacs

Function
This command uses a polyline centerline and the offset polylines to
create a cul-de-sac. The offset polylines can be generated by the Offsets
& Intersections command or the standard Offset command. The layer
names of the offset polylines must match the layer names set in the
dialog box.

Chapter 12 Design Commands

484
1 You are prompted to select all offset polylines endpoints forming the
Cul-de-Sac and the projected centerline of the Cul-de-Sac. You must
select the appropriate lines.
2 Pick a set of polylines and a point on the roadway centerline at the cul-
de-sac center. For cul-de-sacs with an offset center, pick a projection of
that center onto the centerline and specify an offset distance (a
positive value is offset to the right, negative is offset to the left). You
can create bend cul-de-sacs by selecting offset entities on one side of
the centerline.
3 Enter values for Offset, Center Radius, and Set Back.
The Tear Drop Mode is the option to draw the tear-drop-shaped
Cul--de-Sac.
4 Each set of outside and fillet radiuses has a layer name. The Pick
button lets you set the layer name by picking an entity with that
layer in the drawing.
5 Like the Offsets & Intersections command, this command shows a
preview of the cul-de-sac being designed. You can modify the cul-de-sac
parameters and review the results before you apply the cul-de-sac to the
drawing using the Finish button.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: A set of offset polylines and roadway centerlines.
➤ Keyboard Command: STDCUL

Cul-de-Sacs
485
 Parking

Function
This command draws a series of parking stalls or equilateral lot lines.
The command prompts for stall width, stall parking angle, side lines
for stalls, and stall depth. You can locate the number of stalls using a
direction and between two points, or using a polyline.

1 In the Parking Settings dialog box, you must enter dimensions for the
parking stalls.
■ Stall Width: This field allows you to enter a value for stall width.
■ Stall Length: This field allows you to enter a value for stall length.
■ Angle of Parking (dd.mmss): This field allows you to enter a value
for the angle of the stalls.

2 Under Side for Stalls you must specify on which side of the polyline to
draw parking stalls, left, right, or both.
3 Under Stall Location Method you must determine how to define the
number of stalls along the polyline.
■ Number of Stalls: This option allows you to specify the number of
stalls to be drawn.
■ Between Points: This option allows you to determine the number
of stall to be drawn by defining a distance. The number of stalls is
determined by the stall width and the distance you provide.
■ Along Polyline: This option allows you to draw parking stalls on a
selected polyline.

Chapter 12 Design Commands

486
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design
➤ Prerequisite: Locate a starting point and an ending or direction
point.
➤ Keyboard Command: PARKING

4 Sided Building

Function
This command completes a building by drawing the two missing sides.
The 4 Sided Building command creates a parallelogram after you select
two connecting lines or a polyline with two segments. With the two
lines option, you can choose to make the parallelogram as a polyline or
as 4 lines.

Prompts
1 Pick a 2-sided building: pick a line
2 Pick another side: pick an adjoining line
3 Convert the lines into a polyline (<Y>/N)? Press ENTER
4 Enter a width for the polyline <1.00>: Press ENTER
5 Pick a 2-sided building: pick a polyline
6 Enter a width for the polyline <0.00>: Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: A polyline with two segments or two adjoining lines.
➤ Keyboard Command: 4SIDED

Best-Fit Circle

Function
This command draws a least-squares, best-fit circle based on points
on the perimeter. The command handles four or more perimeter
points. A design point for the circle center can optionally be
specified. The command also generates a report that shows the
residuals for each point, the residuals’ standard deviation, the
difference between the design point and the circle center, and the

4 Sided Building
487
 circle parameters. The residuals are calculated as the perpendicular
distance from the point to the circle.

Prompts
1 Select points from screen or by point number [<Screen>/Number]? N
If you select the Screen option, you pick points from the screen.
2 Point numbers: 2-6
3 Point numbers (Enter to continue): Press ENTER
4 Enter design center point# (Enter for None): 1
The Best Fit Circle report is generated.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: Four or more points
➤ Keyboard Command: BFITCIR

Best Fit Line by Average

Function
This command fits a line from a starting point by sampling a group of
points. The command averages the coordinates of the sampling
group, then draws the best-fit line. The command also generates a
report of the residuals, standard deviation, line bearing, and line
distance. The perpendicular distance from each point to the line is
reported as the residual.

Prompts
1 Starting point ?
Pick point or point number: pick starting point or enter point number
2 Select points from screen or by point number (Screen/<Number>):
Press ENTER
3 Point numbers: enter point number
4 Point numbers (Enter to continue): enter point number

Chapter 12 Design Commands

488
5 Point numbers (Enter to continue): enter point number
6 Point numbers (Enter to continue): Press ENTER
The Best Fit Line by Average report is generated.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: Points on screen
➤ Keyboard Command: BFITLINE

Best Fit Line Linear Reg

Function
This command samples a group of points and computes the best fitting
line by linear regression. It is similar to the Best Fit Line by Average
command but it doesn’t hold a starting point.

Prompts
1 Select points from screen or by point number [<Screen>/Number]: N
2 Point numbers: enter point number
3 Point numbers (Enter to continue): enter point number
4 Point numbers (Enter to continue): enter point number
5 Point numbers (Enter to continue): Press ENTER
The Best Fit Line by Linear Regression report is generated.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: Points on screen
➤ Keyboard Command: BFITLR

Best Fit Line Linear Reg

489
 Tangent Line from Circles

Function
This command draws a line that is tangent to two circles. You define
the circles by picking the radius point and entering the radius. You also
choose whether the tangent line is drawn to the left or right side. The
line and the circles are drawn in the current layer.

Prompts
1 Pick center point of first circle: pick a point
2 Pick first radius: enter value or pick point
3 Pick center point of second circle: pick a point
4 Pick second radius: enter value or pick point
5 Left or Right tangent [<Left>/Right]? R

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Design

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LINECIRCLE

Chapter 12 Design Commands

490
13-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 4:22 PM

Area Commands
13
This chapter provides information on using the com- In this chapter
mands from the Area menu to calculate and label areas ■ Labeling areas
■ Calculating areas
in your drawing.

491
 Area Label Defaults

Function
The Area Defaults dialog box allows you to set the way areas will
be labeled.

1 You must assign a sequence number to each type of label to control

the order in which the labels are drawn. If a sequence number is left
blank, then the corresponding area label value is not used. For each
value, you can set the label suffix name.
2 You can also specify the precision of the labels.
3 You must determine label style and layer.
■ Label Both Feet & Meters for Inverse with Area: When this
option is turned ON, both feet and meters will be shown in the
Inverse with Area report.
■ Label Area with +/-: This allows you to display + or – in the
area labels.

Chapter 13 Area Commands

492
■ Use Commas in Labels: This allows you to use commas in the
area labels.
■ Layer for area text: This allows you to assign a layer for the
area text.
■ Style for area text: This allows you to set a text style.
■ Area text size scaler: This allows you to set the text size to
appropriate scale.
■ Max gap to join (Area by Lines and Arcs): You use this option
during Area by Lines & Arcs command. When connecting lines
and arcs that define the perimeter, the program will join
endpoints if the distance between the two points is less than the
specified gap. Otherwise the program will report an error and will
not report an area.
■ Different Radius Tolerance: You use this option to check the
difference between the PC-Radius and PT-Radius on curves. If the
difference between these distances is greater than this tolerance,
an accurate area calculation cannot occur and the command
displays a warning.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Area

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: DEFAREA

Inverse with Area

Function
This command generates a report of the bearing and horizontal
distance between a series of points. The report also includes the
northing, easting, and station of each point and calculates the area of
the closed figure defined by the points. Curve data can also be entered
and reported. The command creates a polyline of the figure which can
be erased or kept in the drawing.
The points can be either picked on the screen or entered by point
number. You can also enter a range of point numbers (for example, 1-
9). The closure precision is calculated by dividing the total distance
inversed by the closure error. The distance between the starting and
ending points is the closure error. To report the distances in both feet
and meters, select the Label Both Feet & Meters for Inverse with Area
option in the Area Label Defaults dialog box. The area can be labeled in
the drawing using the settings from the Area Label Defaults command.

Inverse with Area

493
 Prompts
1 Station/<Pick starting point or number>: pick a point
2 Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): pick
a point
3 Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): R
(for radius)
4 Radius point number or pick point: pick a point
5 Curve direction (Left/<Right>)? Press ENTER
6 Pick End of Arc or point number (U-Undo,Enter to end): pick a point
7 Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): pick
a point
8 Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): pick
a point
9 Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): pick
a point
10 Pick point or point numbers (R-RadiusPt,U-Undo,Enter to end): Press
ENTER
A complete report is generated.
11 Pick area label centering point: pick a point
12 Erase Polyline Yes/No <Yes>: Press ENTER
This option allows you to keep the polyline you have created on
the screen.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Area

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: IA

Map Check by Pnt #s

Function
This command allows you to check the closure of a figure and produce
a line-curve table that describes the figure. The points used for the map
check must already be stored in a coordinate file that is created by
commands such as Traverse, Locate by Bearing, or perhaps by an
electronic data collector.

Chapter 13 Area Commands

494
 Prompts
1 CooRDinate File to Process: EXAMPLE.CRD
This prompt only appears if a coordinate file has not been set prior to
command execution.
2 Table Description: PARCEL 1285
This text will appear as the first line of the table if you chose to output
to the printer device or a file.
3 Beginning Point Number: 9
Enter the starting point number of the figure.
4 Exit/Curve/<point number>: 10
Continue to enter point numbers that define the lines of the figure.
In this example, point number 10 is the end of a line and the PC of
a curve.
5 Exit/Curve/<point number>: C
Enter C to define a curve and you will be prompted for the radius
point number.
6 Second point# on arc/<radius point number>: 11
7 End Point Number of Arc: 12
The arc is then plotted. Review the arc on the graphics screen to see if
it was drawn in the proper direction.
8 Curve direction (Left/<Right>)? Press ENTER
9 Exit/Curve/<point number>: C
In this example, point number 12 is the PT of the previous arc and the
PC of the arc we define next.
10 Second point# on arc/<radius point number>: S
Here the second point between the PC and PT is known, so enter S.
The command then prompts for the second point on the arc.
11 Second point# on arc: 13
12 End Point Number of Arc: 14
13 Exit/Curve/<point number>: 18
Point number 18 defines the last point of the figure. Point number 18
should match point number 9, the starting point of the check,
assuming a perfect closure.
14 Exit/Curve/<point number>: E
Enter E to terminate point number entry. The command then displays
the area of the figure and the closure information.

Map Check by Pnt#s

495
 15 Enter/Pick area label center point: pick point
Pick a point where you want the area text located. If you do not want
any text, press ENTER. The area is plotted as specified in the Area Label
Defaults command.
16 Erase Polyline Yes/No <Yes>: Press ENTER
The command plots a polyline that represents the figure you defined.
If you want to keep the polyline, respond with No.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Area

➤ Prerequisite: Store the coordinate points in a .CRD file that you
want to use for the map check.
➤ Keyboard Command: MC

Area by Lines & Arcs

Function
This command allows you to calculate the area of a perimeter or lot
defined by lines, arcs, or polylines. The default settings for joining the
perimeter and labeling the area are defined in Area Defaults. One of
the settings is the maximum gap size to join. If a gap is greater than
this gap tolerance, the area is not reported and the program displays a
temporary X symbol at the gap.

Prompts
1 Select lines & arcs or polylines of perimeter for area calculation.
Select Objects: select lines and arcs or polylines
The lines and arcs are then joined together and the area is calculated.
2 Enter/pick Label center point: pick point
The area is then plotted at the point selected.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Area

➤ Prerequisite: Lines, arcs, or polylines on screen.
➤ Keyboard Command: JOINAREA

Chapter 13 Area Commands

496
 Label Last Area

Function
This command will label the last area calculated with one of the
Area commands in the manner defined by the Area Label Defaults
command. The command prompts for a point where the label will
be centered.

Prompts
1 Pick area label centering point: pick a point
➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Area
➤ Prerequisite: Use one of the AREA commands to calculate an area.
➤ Keyboard Command: LASTAREA

Hinged Area

Function
This command allows you to determine the dimensions of a figure when
the area is fixed and three or more sides are known. You define the figure
by selecting a closed polyline or by picking the known points and curves.
The command then prompts you for the area to be solved for (in square
units or acres).

Label Last Area

497
 Prompts
1 Define area by points or closed polyline (Points/<Linework>)? Press
ENTER

2 Select polyline segment to adjust: pick the segment

3 Select hinge point[endp]: pick the hinge point
4 Keep existing polyline (Yes/<No>)? Press ENTER
5 Acres/Enter target area (s.f.): A
6 Enter target area (acres): 14

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Area

➤ Prerequisite: A closed perimeter polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: HAREA

Sliding Side Area

Function
This command adjusts one side of a polyline to meet a specified area.
The existing area can be defined by a closed polyline or by picking
each point in the perimeter. The desired area can be entered in either
square feet or acres. The area to adjust must be represented by a closed
polyline. The program moves the selected segment of the polyline in
or out. The original direction of the segment is maintained.

Chapter 13 Area Commands

498
 Prompts
1 Define area by points or closed polyline (Points/<Linework>)? Press
ENTER

2 Select polyline segment to adjust: pick a line segment of polyline

3 Keep existing polyline (Yes/<No>)? Press ENTER
4 Acres/Enter target area (s.f.): A
5 Enter target area (acres): 0.45

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Area

➤ Prerequisite: A closed perimeter polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: SSAREA

Area Radial from Curve

Function
This command allows you to draw lines radial from a curve to reach a
predetermined area.

Prompts
1 Define area by points or closed polyline [Points/<Linework>]? Press
ENTER
You define the existing area by selecting polylines or by picking each
point in the perimeter. For the point method, the curve to radiate from
should be the last entity you select when defining the figure. For the
polyline method, you select front and back polylines.
2 In the Area Radial from Curve dialog box, you must set parameters for
the area calculation.

Area Radial from Curve

499
 ■ You must assign a target area for the calculation.
■ Under Area Units, you must choose between square feet or acres.
■ Under Draw Area As, you must choose whether the resulting areas
will be displayed as closed polylines or as areas with only side lines
drawn.

3 Select curve to radiate from: pick the curve

4 Select back polyline: pick the polyline
The computed lines are drawn perpendicular from the front polyline
and intersect the back polyline. This computed line is moved to find
the target area. Both ends of the front and back polylines are
connected to close the area.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Area

➤ Prerequisite: An existing area defined by points or polylines.
➤ Keyboard Command: AREARC

Chapter 13 Area Commands

500
14-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 4:23 PM

Annotate Commands
14
This chapter provides information on using the com- In this chapter
mands from the Annotate menu to annotate and label ■ Using annotation
■ Labeling drawings
entities in your drawing.
■ Using text and leaders

501
 Annotate Defaults

Function
This command sets the defaults for the annotation commands and
controls the way various annotation commands work. Some of these
defaults can be changed globally by running the Configure command
in the Settings menu, which changes the file COGO.INI so that every
time you start Autodesk Field Survey the new defaults are set.
When you select Annotate Defaults under the Annotate menu, the
following dialog box appears.

1 Under the Saved Settings option, the settings of the dialog box are
saved. To load a group of settings, pick the name from the style list.
n Save current style: Current settings in the dialog box are saved
to the style name shown in the drop-down box to the left of
this button.
n Save As: Current settings in the dialog box are saved to the new
group specified.
n Delete: Deletes the current group from the list.

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

502
2 Determine scaling options for the annotation.
n Horizontal Scale: This is the horizontal scale for the current
drawing. This value can also be set by using the Drawing Setup
command on the Settings menu.
n Text Size Scaler: This value is multiplied by the horizontal scale
value to set the text size units.
n Annotation Layer: This specifies the layer to be used for the
bearing and distance text.
n Text Style: This specifies the text style to be used for the bearing
and distance text.
n Distance Label Suffix: This specifies the suffix that is appended to
distance Annotations.
n Text Offset Scaler: This value multiplied by the horizontal scale
defines the distance that an annotation label is placed from its
defining line.
n Line Type Spacing: Specifies the distance between the symbols on
special line types.
n Line Type Text Scaler: Specifies the size of the symbols of special
line types.
n Arc Length Label: Specifies the prefix label for arc length labels.
n Arc Text Spacing Factor: This variable controls how close letters
will be spaced when labeling arcs. The lower the number, the closer
the spacing. The higher, the farther apart. (The suggested range
between 0.8 and 1.5)
n Azimuth Label: Specifies the prefix text for azimuth labels.

3 Under the Bearing Annotation Precision option, there are settings for
the precision of bearing and azimuth labels.
n Deg, Min, Sec: This labels the degrees, minutes, and seconds.
n Deg, Min: This labels the degrees and minutes with the specified
decimals.
n Deg: This labels the degrees with the specified decimals.
n Other: This option activates the Seconds option so you can select a
precision from 0.01 seconds to 30 seconds.

Annotate Defaults
503
 4 Under the Bearing Direction Method, you choose the orientation of
the bearing. This controls how lines selected for bearing or azimuth
annotations will be referenced.
n Toward Picked End: If this option is chosen, the line will be
labeled in the direction of the endpoint that is closest to the point
where you selected the line.
n Away from Picked End: This labels the line in the direction away
from the closest endpoint.
n North Only: This option controls whether bearing annotations will
always be labeled in the north quadrants (NE or NW) and never in
the south quadrants.
n By Linework: This option labels the line in the direction that the
line was drawn.

5 Determine format options for leaders and labels.

n Strip Spaces in Bearing Labels: This option causes the spaces in
bearing labels to be removed.
n Add Spaces in Bearing Labels: This option puts spaces between
the degree, minutes, and seconds numbers.
n Label Both Feet and Meters: This option causes the program to
label distances in both feet and meters.
n 2nd Dist Decimals: This option applies to the second distance
label. The number of decimal places for the first distance label is set
by the Units Control command in the Settings menu. For example,
distances in feet could have 2 decimals and distances in meters
could have 3 decimals.
n 2nd Dist Label: This option applies to the second distance label.
This variable will be assigned as a suffix to the label.

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

504
n Use 2nd Dist Brackets: This option applies to the second distance
label. If turned on, the second distance labels will be enclosed in
brackets, for example [34.5m].
n Draw Bearing Leaders: This option creates a direction arrow with
the bearing annotation as shown below.

n Draw Leaders to Endpoints: This option creates leader lines

(Crow’s Feet) between the distance annotation and the line segment
endpoints as shown below. These leaders are used to help identify
the endpoints that were used to create the distance label.

n Leader Size Scaler: This option determines the maximum length

for leaders. The size in drawing units will be the Leader Size Scaler
multiplied by the Horizontal Scale (for example, 0.5x50=25). If the
line segment is too short, the leader is shortened to fit.
n Offset Scaler: This option controls the distance between the line
endpoints and the leader endpoints.
n Style: This option determines which of the four styles of endpoint
leaders to use. The four styles are: Arc with arrow, Arc only, Dash-
dot-dash, and Dashed.
n Leader Layer: This option determines the layer for drawing
the leader.

Annotate Defaults
505
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LDEF

Auto Annotate

Function
This command allows you to select a group of lines, arcs, and/or
polylines to be labeled. It displays a dialog box of options that allows
you to choose how to label the lines and arcs.

1 The Type of Line Label section defines the orientation of the line labels.
n 0 No Line Label: Does not label the line.
n 1 Bearing_Distance: Labels the bearing on top of the line and the
distance below the line.
n 2 Distance_Bearing: Labels the distance on top of the line and the
bearing below the line.
n 3 Bearing Distance_: Labels both the bearing and distance stacked
above the line

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

506
 n 4 _Bearing Distance: Labels both the bearing and distance stacked
below the line.
n 5 Distance_: Labels only the distance above the line.
n 6 _Distance: Labels only the distance below the line.
n 7 Azimuth_Distance: Labels the azimuth above the line and the
distance below the line.
n 8 Azimuth Distance_: Labels both the azimuth and distance
stacked above the line.
n 9 Line Table: Labels the line segments with L# and puts L#,
bearing, distance in a line table. Line table entries are numbered
sequentially beginning at the line Starting Table Number.
The location for the line table can be picked if there is no current
table. Otherwise Auto Annotate will add to the end of the current
line table. To set the location for the current line table, run the
Table Header command in the Annotate menu.

2 The Type of Arc Label section defines the orientation of the arc labels.
n 0 No Arc Label: Does not label the arc.
n 1 Arc Length_Radius: Labels the arc length on top of the arc and
the radius below the arc.
n 2 Radius_Arc Length: Labels the radius on top of the arc and the
arc length below the arc.
n 3 Radius Arc Length_: Labels both the radius and arc length
stacked above the arc.
n 4 _Radius Arc Length: Labels both the radius and arc length
stacked below the arc.
n 5 Arc Length_: Labels only the arc length above the arc.
n 6 _Arc Length: Labels only the arc length below the arc.
n 7 Rad, Delta Angle_Arc: Labels the radians and delta angle above
the arc and the arc length below the arc.
n 8 Arc, Delta Angle_Rad_: Labels both the arc length and delta
angle above the arc, and the radians below the arc.
n 9 Curve Table: Labels the arcs with C# and puts C# and the
curve data in a curve table. Curve table entries are numbered
sequentially from the curve Starting Table Number.
The location for curve tables can be picked if there is no current
table. Otherwise Auto Annotate will add to the end of the current
curve table. To set the location for the current curve table, run the
Table Header command in the Annotate menu.

Auto Annotate
507
 3 The To Line Table Scaler applies when the Type of Line Label option is
not set to Line Table. If the length of the line is less than this
minimum, the line is labeled as a line table entry. The To Line Table
Scaler is relative to the current horizontal scale and represents the
length of the line in plotted inches.
4 The To Curve Table Scaler applies when the Type of Arc label options is
not set to Curve Table. If the length of the arc is less than this
minimum, the arc is labeled as a curve table entry. The To Curve Table
Scaler is relative to the current horizontal scale and represents the
length of the arc in plotted inches.
5 The Starting Table Number (under line) is the starting number for the
first line entered in the line table.
6 The Starting Table Number (under arc) is the starting number for the
first arc in the curve table.
7 The Position Method determines the meaning of the “ _” in the Type of
Label list.
n Above_Below: The label before the “ _” will be drawn above the
line and the label after the “ _” will be drawn below. For example,
one option is Bearing_Distance. When the Above_Below is set, this
will label the bearing above the line and the distance below the line.
n Left_Right: The Left_Right option positions the labels relative to
the direction the line or polyline is drawn. For example, if a polyline
is drawn in a clockwise direction, then using Left_Right with
Bearing_Distance will create bearing labels on the outside of the
polyline and distance labels on the inside.
n Right_Left: The Right_Left option positions the labels relative
to the direction the line or polyline is drawn. For example, if a
polyline is drawn in a clockwise direction, then using Right_Left
with Bearing_Distance will create distance labels on the outside
of the polyline and bearing labels on the inside.

Prompts
1 On the Auto Annotate Dialog Box, choose settings and click OK.
2 Select Lines, Arcs, and/or Polylines to Annotate.
Select Objects: pick entities
Select the group of lines, arcs and/or polylines you want to annotate.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: Lines, arcs or polylines to annotate.
➤ Keyboard Command: AUTOLAB

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

508
Angle/Distance

Function
The Angle/Distance commands contain several options for labeling the
angle and/or distance of line segments. The line segments can be
defined by picking a line, picking a polyline segment, entering two
point numbers, or picking two points. The angles can be labeled in
bearing, azimuth, or gons format. In the command names, the "_"
indicates which side of the line the label will appear. For example,
"Bearing_" will label the bearing above the line and "_Bearing" will
label the bearing below the line.

Angle/Distance
509
 Prompts
1 Define bearing by, Points/type in Bearing/<select line or polyline>: P
2 1st Point ?
Pick point or point number: 11
PtNo. North(y) East(x) Elev(z) Description
11 4869.06 4390.31 0.00

3 2nd Point ?
Pick point or point number: 2
PtNo. North(y) East(x) Elev(z) Description
2 4610.89 4078.44 0.00

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Angle/Distance>

➤ Prerequisite: Object to label
➤ Keyboard Command: BRG_, BBRG, BRG_DIS, DIS_BRG, BRGDIS_,
DIS_, BDIS, STACKBD, STACKBD2, STACKBD3, STACKBD4, AZI_,
BAZI, AZI2_, AZI3_, GONLAB, GONLAB2, GONLAB3, GONLAB4

Draw End Point Leaders

Function
This command draws a pair of leaders at the ends of a line segment.
You can select the line segment by picking from a line, polyline, or a
pair of points. The leaders are drawn above or below the line
depending on which Endpoint Leader options you choose. Controls to
customize the look of the endpoint leaders are accessed through the
Annotate Defaults command in the Annotate menu.
Endpoint leaders can be drawn together with bearing/distance
annotation by turning on the Draw Leaders to Endpoints option under
Annotate Defaults. The Draw End Point Leaders command allows you
to add the leaders as another step after initially labeling lines or
polylines without them.

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

510
 Prompts
1 Define bearing by, Points/<select line or polyline>: select line
or polyline
If you wish to define the line using points, enter P at this prompt and
pick points on the screen or type in point numbers. If a coordinate file
has not been previously loaded, a dialog box will open to allow you to
select a coordinate file to process. While using the Point selection
method, the last point picked in the selection is stored in default
brackets. If you are working around a boundary, press ENTER to accept
the defaults for the first point and move ahead to the next point.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: CROWFT

Switch Bearing Quadrant

Function
This command changes bearing text to read as if the bearing were in
the opposite direction. A line labeled NE becomes SW.

Prompts
1 Pick Bearing Text: pick text

Switch Bearing Quadrant

511
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: BRGQUAD

Mirror Selected Labels

Function
This command rotates text 180 degrees and maintains the same text
position. Use this command to rotate any type of text. The command
ignores all entities in the selection set except text.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: Text to rotate
➤ Keyboard Command: FLIPSET

Flip Last Label

Function
This command flips the last text drawn 180 degrees. Use this command
to rotate your last annotation.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: FLIP

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

512
Flip Selected Labels

Function
This command rotates text 180 degrees. Use this command to rotate
any type of text. The command ignores all entities in the selection set
except text.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: Text to rotate
➤ Keyboard Command: FLIP_LABELS

Flip ON/OFF

Function
When activated, the bearing and distance text will be rotated
180 degrees.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Bearing/Distance>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: FLP

Flip Selected Labels

513
 Bearing with Leader

Function
This command places the bearing of a line or polyline segment at a
point, then plots a leader line pointing to the line. The appearance of
the leader line is controlled in the Annotate Defaults command in the
Annotation menu. Inadvertently.

Prompts
1 Define bearing by, Points/<select line or polyline>: select line
2 Pick point to start leader: pick point near the line
3 Label Position: (pick point) select point to place the label
4 Define bearing by, Points/<select line or polyline>: Press ENTER
Pressing ENTER ends the command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Annotate w/ Leader>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: BRGLEAD

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

514
 Distance with Leader

Function
This command labels the length of a line or polyline segment at a
point, then draws a leader line pointing to the line.

Prompts
1 Define distance by, Points/<select line or polyline>: select line
2 Pick point to start leader: pick point near the line
3 Label Position: pick point
4 Define distance by, Points/<select line or polyline>: Press ENTER
Pressing ENTER ends the command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Annotate w/ Leader>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: DISTLEAD

Distance with Leader

515
 Bearing-Distance with Leader

Function
This command places the bearing and distance of a line at a point and
then plots a leader line pointing to the line.

Prompts
1 Define bearing by, Points/<select line or polyline>: select line
2 Pick point to start leader: pick point near the line
3 Label Position: pick point
4 Define bearing by, Points/<select line or polyline>: Press ENTER
Pressing ENTER ends the command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Annotate w/ Leader>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: BDLEAD

Azimuth-Distance with Leader

Function
This command places the azimuth and distance of a line at a point and
then plots a user specified leader line which points to the defining line.

Prompts
1 Define azimuth by, Points/<select line or polyline>: select line
2 Pick point to start leader: pick point near the line
3 Label Position: pick point
4 Define azimuth by, Points/<select line or polyline>: Press ENTER
Pressing ENTER ends the command.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Annotate w/ Leader>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: AZILEAD

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

516
 Global Reannotate

Function
This command updates bearing and/or azimuth labels. You would use
this command when the lines and polylines associated with the labels
have been rotated after the bearings and/or azimuths were labeled.

Prompts
1 Select one bearing/azimuth text before rotation: pick a bearing or
azimuth label
2 Pick line associated with old bearing/azimuth: pick the line or
polyline for the selected label
3 Select All or specific objects to reannotate (<All>/Objects)? Press ENTER
to update all text or O to select objects to update

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: Bearing or azimuth labels and lines or polylines.
➤ Keyboard Command: GLOBALRE

Global Reannotate
517
 Survey Text Defaults

Function
This command sets the defaults for the Offset Dimensions, Building
Dimensions, and Adjoiner Text commands.

1 Under Building Dimensions, you set text specifications for building

dimensions.
n Layer: This option allows you to set the layer for the building text.
n Text Style: This option allows you to set the text style for the
building text.
n Text Size Scaler: This option allows you to set the text scaler to
determine text size.
n Decimal Places: This option allows you to set the precision for the
building dimensions.
n Drop Trailing Zeroes: This option allows you to truncate trailing
zeroes from dimensions.

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

518
 n Characters To Append: This options allows you to set characters to
add to reported dimensions.
n Offset From Line: This option allows you to set the offset distance
from the line to the dimension text.
n Auto Label Closed Pline: This option labels a closed polyline on
the interior or exterior.

2 Under Offset Dimension Text, you can set text specifications for offset
dimensions.
n Layer: This option allows you to set the layer for the offset text.
n Text Style: This option allows you to set the text style for the
offset text.
n Text Size Scaler: This option allows you to set the text scaler to
determine text size.
n Arrow Size Scaler: This option allows you to set the arrow scaler to
determine arrowhead size.
n Decimal Places: This option allows you to set the precision for the
offset dimensions.
n Drop Trailing Zeroes: This option allows you to truncate trailing
zeroes from dimensions.
n Characters To Append: This options allows you to set characters to
add to reported dimensions.
n Offset From Line: This option allows you to set the offset distance
from the line to the dimension text.
n Text Alignment: This options allows you to align text either
parallel to the line or horizontally in the drawing.
n Position: This option allows you to determine if you are to pick
the location of the text, or if the text is automatically positioned in
the drawing.

3 Under Adjoiner Text, you can set text specifications for adjoiner text.
n Layer: This option allows you to set the layer for the adjoiner text.
n Text Style: This option allows you to set the text style for the
adjoiner text.
n Text Size Scaler: This option allows you to set the text scaler to
determine text size.
n Justification: This option allows you to set the text justification.

4 Under Dimension Line Type, you can determine the line style to use
for dimensions.

Survey Text Defaults

519
 n Arrow Line: This option draws a line with an arrowhead from the
dimension text to the figure.
n Standard Line: This option draws a line with no arrowhead from
the dimension text to the figure.
n Curved Leaders: This option draws a curved line with an
arrowhead from the dimension text to the figure.
n Dimension Only: This option draws the dimension text with no
line.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Survey Text>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SVTEXTDF

Offset Dimensions

Function
This command labels the perpendicular distance between a point and a
line or polyline. The point can be a building corner or other object.
The line or polyline can represent the property line. The text layer,
size, and style and the dimensioning method is set in the Survey Text
Defaults command. The endpoint snap is turned on by default when
you pick the point.

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

520
 Prompts
1 [end on] Pick Bldg/Object Corner: pick a point
2 [perp] Pick Line To Offset From: pick a line or polyline

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Survey Text>

➤ Prerequisite: Line or polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: DIMENTXT

Building Dimensions

Function
This command labels the length of line and polyline segments. The
label is located in the middle of the line or polyline segment. The
options for Building Dimensions are set in the Survey Text Defaults
command. If the Auto Label Closed Pline option in the Survey Text
Defaults command is turned on, this command labels all the segments
of a closed polyline with one pick of the polyline. Otherwise, you pick
a line or polyline segment and then choose an alignment.

Building Dimensions
521
 Depending where you pick the alignment point, the label is drawn
either perpendicular or parallel, above or below the line, as shown in
the figure below.

Prompts
1 Pick Line or Polyline: pick line or polyline segment to label
2 Pick alignment: pick point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Survey Text>

➤ Prerequisite: Line or polyline.
➤ Keyboard Command: BLDGTEXT

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

522
 Adjoiner Text

Function
This command draws text that is aligned with the selected line or
polyline segment. The layer, style, size, and justification for the text is
set in the Survey Text Defaults command. To align text that is already
drawn, use the Rotate Text command under Modify.

Prompts
1 Pick Line or Polyline: pick a line or polyline for alignment
2 Starting point: pick a point to start the text
3 Text: MAIN STREET

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Survey Text>

➤ Prerequisite: Line or polyline.
➤ Keyboard Command: ADJNTEXT

Adjoiner Text
523
 Draw Grid

Function
This command plots a grid at a specified distance and optionally labels
the northing and easting coordinates of the grid. This command takes
in to consideration the current screen twist angle, and prompts for
three corner points.

The Draw Plan View Grid dialog box contains the options for drawing
the grid lines.

1 The Grid Interval is the distance between each grid line.

2 The Horizontal Scale reports the scale of the current drawing. This can
also be set using the Drawing Setup command in the Settings menu.
3 The Ticks Only option will draw tick marks instead of grid lines.
4 Selecting the Ticks Only option activates the Tick Size option for sizing
the tick marks.
5 The Layout of Ticks option places the ticks throughout the interior of
the grid work or just on the perimeter of the grid boundary.

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

524
6 The Use ’-‘ for Negative Coordinates option labels the negative grid
coordinates with a ‘-‘.
7 Under the Grid Text Settings, the text options are set.
n Label Grid: Selecting this option labels the grid coordinates.
n Text Size Scaler: This scaler, multiplied by the Horizontal Scale,
determines text size.
n Text Offset Scaler: This scaler, multiplied by the Horizontal Scale,
determines the offset for text.

8 Under Title Block Exclusion, you can set options so that the grid will
not overwrite the title block.
n Avoid Title Block Area: This option will not draw grid lines or tick
marks in the title block area.
n X Dimension (Scaled): This is the horizontal dimension of the title
block. This option is automatically filled in when the Pick Title
Block Corner option is selected.
n Y Dimension (Scaled): This is the vertical dimension of the title
block. This option is automatically filled in when the Pick Title
Block Corner option is selected.
n Pick Title Block Corner: This option prompts you to pick the
corner of the title block to determine where the grid lines and ticks
will be omitted.

9 The North Label Prefix option is for assigning a prefix to the northing
grid line and tick mark coordinates.
10 The East Label Prefix option is for assigning a prefix to the easting grid
line and tick mark coordinates

Prompts
1 Enter/Pick Lower Left Corner Point: endp of (pick point)
2 Enter/Pick Upper Right Corner Point: endp of (pick point)
3 Select the corners of the border in which you want the grid plotted.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: DGRID

Draw Grid
525
 Draw Legend

Function
This command draws a legend based on a legend definition file. After
you choose the legend definition file to use, a dialog box displays the
current definitions. A definition consists of a description assigned to a
symbol, linetype, or hatch pattern. If Include is set to Yes, this symbol
will be included in the legend when it is plotted on the screen.

n Edit: This options edits a definition, select it and then click on the
Edit button. This brings up the Symbol Definition dialog box
described below.
n Add: This option inserts a new definition to the definitions. To
insert a new definition, pick an existing definition and click on the
Add button. The new definition is added immediately following the
existing definition.
n Add from Drawing: This option adds entries to the legend table for
each different symbol that is selected from the drawing.
n Remove: This option removes the selected definition.
n On: This option switches the Include field in the selected definition
to Yes.
n Off: This option switches the Include field in the selected definition
to No.
n Sort: This option sorts the definitions alphabetically and numerically.
n Draw: This option draws the included definitions as a legend.
n Move Up: This option moves the selected definition up one row.
Legend entries are drawn in the order that they are defined.
n Move Down: This option moves the selected definition down one
row. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order
that the symbols will be drawn.

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

526
n Save: This option saves the legend file as its original file name. The
definitions are stored in a file with the .LGD extension in the data
directory. The default legend that comes with Autodesk Field Survey
is called legend.lgd. You can have multiple legend definitions by
creating multiple definition files.
n Save As: This option saves the legend file to a new file name.
n Quit: This option exits the command back to the drawing window.

Selecting the Edit option or the Add option brings up the Symbol
Definition dialog box.

n Symbol Name: This designates the symbol to draw in the legend.

You can either type in the symbol name or choose it from a slide
library by picking the appropriate Select button.
n Description: This is the name of the symbol.
n Hatch Scale and Color: These options are used if the symbol uses a
hatch pattern.
n Include in Legend: This option corresponds to the Include column
on the Legend Definitions dialog box. Not all the defined entries need
to be drawn. An entry will be drawn (shown as Yes) if the Include in
Legend box in the Symbol Definition dialog box is checked.
n Select Point Symbol: This option displays a slide library of point
symbols to choose from.
n Select Linetype: This option displays a slide library of linetypes to
choose from.
n Select Hatch Pattern: This option displays a slide library of hatch
patterns to choose from.

Draw Legend
527
 When you select the Draw button in the Legend Definitions dialog
box, the following dialog box appears for setting the legend size.

n Text Size sizes the text in the legend. The text size defaults to the
value from Drawing Setup in the Setting menu.
n Symbol Size defaults to the value from Drawing Setup in the
Settings menu.
n Hatch Size sizes the hatch pattern scaler.
n Line Size sizes the lines in the legend.
n Layer Name defines the layer for the legend.
n Draw Legend Title option draws the following text "Legend: These
standard symbols will be found in the drawing."

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

528
 Prompts
1 Specify the Legend Definition File, choose the .LGD file to process.
2 On the Draw Legend Dialog box, enter the sizes.
3 Enter or pick upper left point for legend: pick a point

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LEGEND

Draw North Arrow

Function
This command draws a north arrow symbol. You choose one of the
twenty four arrow styles.

Draw North Arrow

529
 Prompts
1 On the North Arrow Dialog box, choose a north arrow.
2 Specify insertion point or
[Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate/Pscale/PX/PY/PZ/PRotate: pick a point
You can choose to specify the scale and rotation angle prior to
insertion by selecting one of the listed options. You may also preview
your scale or rotation by choosing a P option.
3 Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
Press ENTER
4 Enter Y scale factor <use X scale factor>: Press ENTER
5 Specify rotation angle <E>: Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: NARROW

Draw Barscale

Function
This command draws a barscale. You will be prompted for the
horizontal scale. The default value is set in the Drawing Setup
command in the Settings menu.

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

530
 Prompts
1 Insertion Point: pick a point
2 Horizontal scale <50.0>: Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: BARSCALE

Create Point Table

Function
This command draws a table containing the coordinate data of the
points in a coordinate file. The current coordinate file (.crd) is used.
The command displays the following dialog box for setting the point
table options.

1 The Point Range is to enter the range of point numbers included in

the table.

Create Point Table

531
 2 Under Field Control, you specify the order and format of the table
columns containing Point Number, Northing, Easting, Elevation,
and Description.
n Seq#: Place a number 1 to 5 in the order you want the data type to
appear. To exclude a data type, set the Sequence number to blank.
n Heading: This is the actual text to appear in the column heading.
n Width: This is column width in characters.
n Align: This is the alignment of the column. It can be set to right,
left, or center.
n Prec: This is the decimal precision to be shown in the table.

3 Under the General Specs, the size of the table is defined.

n Plot Column Names: This option places the column headers in
the table.
n Plot Grid Lines: This option places the grid lines in the table.
n Text Height: This is height of the text in the table.
n Space Between Columns: This option places space between
the columns.
n Interline Scale: This option spaces the row height.
n Column Scale Factor: This scales the columns by this factor.

The following is a table created by the Create Point Table command.

Prompts
1 Point Table Dialog
Building Data List ... Done.
2 Table Upper Left Corner: pick a point
Generating Table... Done.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Point Table>

➤ Prerequisite: A coordinate file (.CRD)
➤ Keyboard Command: POINTTBL

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

532
 Update Point Table

Function
This command prompts you to select an existing point table. The
program then reads the settings from the table and displays these
settings in the same dialog box used in Create Point Table. You can
change any of the table format options. The program also updates
coordinates that changed in the coordinate file after the point table
was created.

Prompts
1 Select Existing Point Table: pick anywhere on the point table
2 Point Table dialog box is displayed.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Point Table>

➤ Prerequisite: A point table
➤ Keyboard Command: POINTTBLUPD

Table Defaults

Function
This command sets the format for line and curve tables.

Update Point Table

533
 1 Under the Annotation Table Defaults, you specify label and table
attributes.
n Label Text Layer: This field determines the layer of the
line/curve text.
n Label Text Style: This field determines the style of the
line/curve text.
n Label Text Size: This field determines the size of the line/curve
text.
n Line Label Prefix: This field determines the prefix for each line.
n Table Text Layer: This field determines the layer of the line/curve
table text.
n Table Text Style: This field determines the style of the line/curve
table text.
n Table Text Size: This field determines the size of the line/curve
table text.
n Curve Label Prefix: This field determines the prefix for each curve.
n Prompt for Label Location: This option prompts you to pick the
location to label each line or curve. If this is not selected, the
location is chosen automatically.

2 Under Line Table Distance, the method for measuring distance is

specified.
n Horizontal: The distance measured is only horizontal, even if the
line is a 3D polyline.
n Slope: The distance measured is the slope distance, used mostly for
3D polylines to get their true length.

3 Under Label Angles in, the type of angle is selected.

n Azimuth: The angles are reported as azimuth.
n Bearings: The angles are reported as bearings.
n Gons: The angles are reported as gons.

4 Under Automatic Table Update, the option automatically inserts the

entry into the line or curve table. The auto update renumbers the other
table entries and the associated labels in the drawing. For example, if a
line table contained lines #1– 5 and a line #4 was added, then the new
line #4 would be inserted into the table, and the previous lines #4 and
#5 would be updated to #5 and #6. The L4 and L5 labels on the lines
would also be updated to L5 and L6. If you set the Automatic Table
Update to Off, you must manually pick the entry location and update

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

534
 the labels. If Automatic Table Update is set to on, the table is updated
automatically whenever the line is modified.
5 Label Alignment determines the orientation of the L# or C# that is
labeled on the line or curve. Horizontal will make the label horizontal
to the current screen alignment, Parallel will draw the label parallel to
the line or curve chord.
6 Under Curve Options, you specify which curve data to include in the
table and the order.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Line/Curve Table>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: TDEF

Table Header

Function
This command draws the column header labels for the Curve Table
and Line Table commands. When you are prompted for the starting
point, you can enter a coordinate or pick a point on the screen. The
starting point location is one row below the start of the header labels.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Line/Curve Table>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: TABHEAD

Set Table Position

Function
This command sets the position for adding a line table. The rows of the
next line table you add will start from the specified point. To add to an
existing table, pick a point at the lower left of the existing table.
➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Line/Curve Table>
➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SET_TBL

Table Header
535
 Curve Table

Function
This command computes curve data and draws it in tabular form. The
program computes the curve data from an arc entity, an arc segment of
a polyline, or from specified points on an arc. The curve data includes
radius, length of curve, chord length, chord bearing, tangent and delta,
or included angle. You are prompted for curve number (default is
sequential, starting with 1) and the starting point of the table. The
curve is labeled with a C#, where # is the sequential curve number.
After you pick the starting point of the table, the placement point for
the remaining table entries will default to the next position, and you
can just press ENTER to accept the position unless you want to relocate
the table.
You can also use the Auto Annotate command to create curve tables.
Use the Table Header command to draw the column header containing
the curve data names.

Prompts
1 Define arc by, Points/<Select arc or polyline>: pick an arc
2 Enter curve number <1>: Press ENTER
3 Starting point of curve table text <(5000,5000)>: pick a point in a
clear area of the drawing
4 Define arc by, Points/<Select arc or polyline>: pick another arc
5 Enter curve number <2>: Press ENTER

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

536
6 Starting point of curve table text <(4030,4490)>: Press ENTER to use
next position
7 Define arc by, Points/<Select arc or polyline>: Press ENTER to end

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Line/Curve Table>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: CURVETBL

Line Table

Function
This command will compute line data and draw it in tabular form. The
program computes the bearing and distance from a line, polyline
segment, or between points. The line is labeled with a L#, where # is
the sequential number of the line picked. The bearing and distance is
then drawn in tabular form similar to the Curve Table command.
You can also use the Auto Annotate command to create line tables. Use
the Table Header command to draw the column header containing the
line data names.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Line/Curve Table>

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LINETABL

Line Table
537
 Delete Table Elements

Function
This command erases rows from line or curve tables. The table entries
following the removed rows are automatically repositioned and
renumbered. The line or curve labels on the linework in the drawing
are also updated.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Line/Curve Table>

➤ Prerequisite: Line or curve tables
➤ Keyboard Command: DEL_TBL

Label Arc

Function
This command labels the arc data along the arc and between the
endpoints of the arc. The curve information is also displayed. The format
for the label is set in the following dialog box.

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

538
1 Under Location, the placement of the text is determined.
n Inside of Arc: The arc is labeled on the inside.
n Outside of Arc: The arc is labeled on the outside.

2 Under Label Options, the text and row locations are set. If a row
number is left blank, then that value is not labeled.
n Arc Length: Select a label prefix and a row number.
n Radius: Select a label prefix and a row number.
n Delta Angle: Select a label prefix and a row number.
n Chord Angle: Select a label prefix and a row number.
n Chord Length: Select a label prefix and a row number.
n Tangent: Select a label prefix and a row number.
n Other Text: Enter any other item you want labeled.

3 The Flip Text on Arcs that Open to the North determines whether to
flip the text on arcs that open to the top of the drawing. An example
is seen below.

4 The Use symbol for Delta Angle option uses a delta triangle symbol for
the prefix.
5 Label Chord Angles In allows you to set how the angle is labeled.
n Azimuth: The angles are reported as azimuths.
n Bearings: The angles are reported as bearings.
n Gons: The angles are reported as gons.

6 The Type of Curve option determines the type of curve.

n Roadway: The length is determined as the true length of the curve.
n Railroad: The length is adjusted based on 100-foot chord segments.

Label Arc
539
 Prompts
1 Define arc by, Points/<select arc or polyline>: select arc
After you select the arc or polyline arc segment, the command displays
the dialog box. Select the OK button and the arc is labeled with the
current settings of the dialog box.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Annotate Arc>

➤ Prerequisite: An arc or polyline should be drawn before execution.
➤ Keyboard Command: LABARC

Stack Label Arc

Function
This command draws a small table of curve data. Unlike the Label Arc
command, which fits the text on the arc, this command lines the
data up in rows. After you select the command, the following dialog
box appears.

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

540
1 Under Label Options, the text and sequence is set. If a row number is
left blank, then that value is not labeled.
n Arc Length: Select a label prefix and a sequence number.
n Radius: Select a label prefix and a sequence number.
n Delta Angle: Select a label prefix and a sequence number.
n Chord Angle: Select a label prefix and a sequence number.
n Chord Length: Select a label prefix and a sequence number.
n Tangent: Select a label prefix and a sequence number.
n Degree of Curve: Select a label prefix and a sequence number.
n External: Select a label prefix and a sequence number.

2 The Use symbol for Delta Angle option uses a delta triangle symbol for
the prefix.
3 Label Chord Angles in allows you to set how the angle is labeled.
n Azimuth: The angles are reported as azimuths.
n Bearings: The angles are reported as bearings.
n Gons: The angles are reported as gons.

4 The Type of Curve option determines the type of curve.

n Roadway: The length is determined as the true length of the curve.
n Railroad: The length is adjusted based on 100-foot chord segments.

Stack Label Arc

541
 Prompts
1 Define arc by, Points/<select arc or polyline>: P
The command prompts you for arc endpoints and radius points. This
can be useful for labeling sub-arcs such as lot corners of a cul-de-sac.
2 Pick Endpoint of arc.
Pick point or point number: 1
3 Pick Radius point.
Pick point or point number: pick a point
4 Pick Other Endpoint.
Pick point or point number: 2
5 Direction of curve [Left/<Right>]? Press ENTER
6 Pick point for labels: pick point
The labels are then drawn left justified from the point picked.
7 Pick point to start leader at ([Enter] for none): pick a point near
the arc
8 To point: pick a point near the label
9 Define arc by, Points/<select arc or polyline>: Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Annotate Arc>

➤ Prerequisite: An arc entity or arc points.
➤ Keyboard Command: SLABARC

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

542
 Draw Text On Arc

Function
This command draws text that aligns with an arc, beginning at a
picked point. Each letter of the text is drawn as a separate text entity
that is rotated to align with the arc. These text letters are automatically
grouped together as a block.
The text string, text height, and text style are set in the Create Text on
Arc dialog box.

1 Text String is the text to label on the arc.

2 Text Height determines the text height.
3 Text Style determines the text style.
4 Select text offset on screen prompts you for offset. You can set the
text offset from the arc by graphically picking the offset point on the
screen If this option is not selected, the Text Offset is specified.
Placing a minus sign “ -” , in front of the text offset in the dialog box
places the text above the arc. A positive text offset places the text
below the arc.
5 The Is base of text towards radius point? option orients the text to the
curve. Examples of different settings follow.

Draw Text On Arc

543
 Prompts

Example 1: Offset distance picked on screen with base of text towards

radius point.

1 Select Arc or Polyline segment: pick Arc or Polyline segment to place

text on
2 Select Text Offset: pick the desired offset distance from arc

NOTE The ghosted text is located along the mid point of the arc. If no
offset distance is specified or picked from the screen, the text will be
placed at this point. An offset of zero puts the text directly on the arc.

3 Select Text Placement: pick a point, select the desired position to

draw the text
Note that the text remains visible on the screen and attached to the
“rubber banding cursor” so that various positions can be inspected
before specifying the placement point.
The graphic below shows this aspect of the command.

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

544
 Example 2: Offset distance specified on dialog box with the Is base of
text towards radius point? option set to No.

1 Select Arc or Polyline Arc Segment: pick Arc

2 Select Text Placement: pick point
Note that the prompt for offset distance was skipped because the offset
distance was input on the dialog box. Simply select the text placement
point resulting in the graphic below.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Annotate Arc>

➤ Prerequisite: An arc entity.
➤ Keyboard Command: TEXTARC

Draw Text On Arc

545
 Edit Text on Arc

Function
This command edits text created by the Draw Text on Arc command.
You can change the text string, text height, and text style. The
command prompts you to select a text entity and then displays the
dialog box shown.

Prompts
1 Text String is the text to label on the arc.
2 Text Height determines the text height.
3 Text Style determines the text style.
4 Select text offset on screen prompts you for offset. You can set the
text offset from the arc by graphically picking the offset point on the
screen If this option is not selected, the Text Offset is specified.
Placing a minus sign “ -” , in front of the text offset in the dialog box
places the text above the arc. A positive text offset places the text
below the arc.
5 The Is base of text towards radius point? option orients the text to
the curve.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Annotate Arc>

➤ Prerequisite: An text block on an arc
➤ Keyboard Command: EDITARCTXT

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

546
 Fit Text Inside Arc

Function
This command fits text between two points picked along an arc. It will
optionally display information about the selected arc. If you choose to
display the curve data, you will be prompted to pick the endpoints of
the arc in a clockwise manner. When prompted, enter the text you
want drawn inside the arc.

Prompts
1 Pick points in a clockwise direction.
[nea on] Start Point on arc for text: pick starting point on arc
2 [nea on] End Point on arc for text: pick ending point on arc
3 Enter text for inside of arc: enter text to label

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Annotate Arc>

➤ Prerequisite: An arc entity
➤ Keyboard Command: INARC

Fit Text Inside Arc

547
 Fit Text Outside Arc

Function
This command fits text between two points picked along an arc. It
will optionally display information about the selected arc. If you
choose to display the curve data, you will be prompted to pick the
endpoints of the arc in a clockwise manner. When prompted, enter
the text you want drawn outside the arc.

Prompts
1 Pick points in a clockwise direction.
[nea on] Start Point on arc for text: pick starting point on arc
2 [nea on] End Point on arc for text: pick ending point on arc
3 Enter text for outside of arc: enter text to label

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Annotate Arc>

➤ Prerequisite: An arc entity
➤ Keyboard Command: OUTARC

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

548
 Change Polyline Linetype

Function
This command changes the linetype of polylines to the specified
linetype. The polyline remains all one entity, which is the advantage of
this command over the other linetype commands, such as Polyline to
Special Line, which break the polyline between the linetype symbols.
The spacing between linetype symbols and the symbol size is
controlled by the Line Type Spacing and Line Type Text Scaler settings
in the Annotate Defaults command.

To select a linetype from the dialog box, pick on the linetype image.
Use the Next button to display more linetypes.

Prompts
1 On the elect Field Survey Linetype dialog box, select a linetype.
2 Select items to change.
Select objects: pick the polyline(s)

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Line Types >

➤ Prerequisite: Polylines
➤ Keyboard Command: PLTYPE2

Change Polyline Linetype

549
 Polyline to Special Line

Function
This command converts polylines into special lines by adding the
appropriate symbol to the polyline, such as railroad, hedge, stonewall,
or telephone lines. Autodesk Field Survey has several predefined line
types shown below.

You can create your own custom linetype by selecting the icon of the
linetype containing the question mark or by selecting “other” from the
list on the left. This command will then prompt you for a text string to
use. The size and spacing are set by the Annotate Defaults command.
An example of a user-defined linetype is shown below.

Most of these line types break the polyline in order to fit in the
symbol. Broken polylines cannot be used by the Area command and
are harder to edit, so you may want to delay using this command until
your drawing is complete.

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

550
 Prompts
1 Select Field Survey Linetype dialog.
2 Select the polyline(s) to convert.
Select objects: pick the polylines

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Line Types >

➤ Prerequisite: Polylines
➤ Keyboard Command: PLTYPE

Polyline to Tree Line

Function
This command changes a polyline into a series of semicircles for
representing a tree line.

Prompts
1 Side for bubbles on polyline direction? (<Left>/Right): Press ENTER
2 Enter the segment distance <10.0>: Press ENTER
3 Select the polylines to convert.
Select objects: pick one or more polylines

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate, Line Types >

➤ Prerequisite: Polyline
➤ Keyboard Command: MAKETREE

Polyline to Tree Line

551
 Label Coordinates

Function
This command labels the northing and easting of a selected point. You
can pick the point on the screen or specify a point number from the
current coordinate file.

1 In the Symbol option, select the type of symbol to use.

2 Under the Options, select the items to display.
n Layer Name: This specifies the layer to draw the label in.
n Draw with Leader: This option adds a leader to the label.
n Label Elevation: This labels the elevation at the coordinate.
n Box Coordinate Labels: This option draws a box around the
coordinate.
n Label Both Feet and Meters: This labels both feet and meters at the
coordinate.

3 The North Label Prefix and Suffix are specified.

4 The East Label Prefix and Suffix are specified.
5 The Elev Label Prefix and Suffix are specified.

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

552
6 Under the Number of Decimal Places option, the precision for the
North/East and Elevation are set for the number of decimal places. If
the Label Both Feet and Meters option is selected, the 2nd North/East
and 2nd Elevation can have different decimal precision.

Prompts
1 On the Label Coordinate Dialog box, choose settings.
2 Point to Label ?
Pick point or point number: pick a point
3 Point to Label (ENTER to End)?
Pick point or point number: Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LABCOOR

Label Coordinates
553
 Label Angles

Function
This command labels and reports the interior and exterior angles
between two directions. The angles can be defined by three points, or
by two line or polyline segments that have a common endpoint.

Prompts
1 Define angle by, Points/<select line or polyline>: pick a polyline
segment
2 Select adjoining line or polyline: pick another polyline segment
Interior: 72d39’46" Exterior: 287d20’14"
3 Angle to label (<Interior>/Exterior/None)? Press ENTER
4 Define angle by, Points/<select line or polyline>: Press ENTER to end

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LABANG

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

554
 Leader With Text

Function
This command draws a straight leader between two points with an
arrow at one end and optional text at the other. The arrow size is
determined by the Symbol Size setting in the Drawing Setup
command.

Prompts
1 Arrow location: pick a point
2 Text location: pick a point
3 Text: CENTERLINE
4 Text: Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: LDR

Special Leader

Function
This command draws a curved leader line like the one shown. You can
draw multiple lines of text.

Leader With Text

555
 Prompts
1 Arrow location: select point
Select point where leader arrow will start.
2 Text location: select point
3 Text: CENTERLINE
4 Text: ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SLEADER

Label Offset Distances

Function
This command labels the distances between a point and one or two
lines. The first distance is between the point and an east-west line. This
distance is labeled either north or south of the line. The second
distance is between the point and a north-south line. This distance is
labeled either east or west of the line. The distances are labeled with a
leader and a description of the point.

Chapter 14 Annotate Commands

556
 Prompts
1 Pick ’E-W’, Left to Right Property Line (if any)
Pick Line or Polyline (Enter for None): pick the polyline
2 Pick ’N-S’, Top to Bottom Property Line (if any)
Pick Line or Polyline (Enter for None): pick the polyline
3 Pick Offset Point, (N) for Number, <E> to Exit: pick a point
4 Pick point to start leader at: pick a point at or near the offset point
5 To point: pick an alignment point for the label
6 To point: Press ENTER
7 Pick Offset Point, (N) for Number, <E> to Exit: Press ENTER to end

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Annotate

➤ Prerequisite: Polyline or line
➤ Keyboard Command: OFFLAB

Label Offset Distances

557
Chapter 14 Annotate Commands
558
15-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 4:24 PM

Surface Commands
15
This chapter provides information on using the com- In this chapter
mands from the Surface menu to produce contours, pro- ■ Drawing contours
■ Working with grids
files, and earthwork volumes.
■ Calculating volumes
■ Drawing profiles

559
 Triangulate & Contour
Function
The Triangulate & Contour dialog box provides all the functionality
related to contouring. Given data points that represent the surface, this
command creates a final contour map with labeled, smoothed, and
highlighted contours. The data points can be points, inserts, lines,
polylines, and points from ASCII or .CRD files. To force Triangulate &
Contour to interpolate elevations between two points that define a straight
line in the surface, such as points on a ridge, wall, or road, you must place
a breakline between the points. A breakline can be specified as a 3D
polyline or line. In fact, all lines and polylines are treated as breaklines.
If Triangulate & Contour reports zero points found and fails to do
anything when you’re using Autodesk Field Survey points, then those
points are probably located at zero elevation. To fix this problem, you
can either choose the Specify Selection Options option and then select
Autodesk Field Survey point inserts, which will read the elevation from
the elevation attribute of the point. Or, you can select the Drawing
Setup command from the Settings menu and select Locate on
Real Z Axis, and then use the Draw-Locate Points command on the
Cogo menu to replot the points.

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

560
 The Triangulate & Contour command has many options. Using this
dialog box, you can select any combination of drawing the triangulation
network lines, drawing the contours, drawing triangulation network 3D
Faces, and writing a triangulation file. The triangulation options are in
the top section of the dialog box. The contouring options are at the
bottom. All the Triangulate & Contour options can be set as defaults in
the Configure command under the Settings menu.

1 In the Triangulate & Contour dialog box, you can specify the type of
output.
■ Draw Contours: When this box is marked, the command draws
contour lines after triangulating. Otherwise, only the triangulation
is performed.
■ Contour Layer: This specifies the name of the layer in which the
contour polylines are drawn.
■ Draw Triangulation Lines: When this box is marked, the
command draws the triangulation as 3D lines.
■ Triangulation Lines Layer: This specifies the name of the layer in
which the triangulation network lines are drawn.
■ Draw Triangulation Faces: When this box is marked, the program
draws each triangle in the triangulation network as a 3D Face.
■ Triangulation Faces Layer: This specifies the name of the layer in
which the triangulation network faces are drawn.
■ Write Triangulation File: This option stores the triangulation
surface model as a .flt file, which is a text file of the edges in the
triangulation network. The .flt file uses the Autodesk fault file format.
■ Highlight Breaklines: This option highlights breaklines in the
triangulation network by drawing the triangulation lines along
breaklines in yellow.

2 Under Maximum Tmesh line length, you specify parameters for

triangulation lines.
■ The maximum Tmesh line length values limit the lengths of the
triangulation network lines. Any triangulation line that exceeds
these limits is not drawn or included in contouring. This allows you
to avoid abnormally long triangulation lines either where you have
relatively too few data points or on the outskirts of your data points.
The Exterior value applies to triangulation lines around the
perimeter of the triangulation area, and the Interior value applies to
all the other triangulation lines. You generally set the exterior value
smaller than the interior.

Triangulate & Contour

561
 P= få=íÜÉ=qêá~åÖìä~íÉ=C=`çåíçìê=Çá~äçÖ=ÄçñI=óçì=Å~å=ëÉí=~ÇÇáíáçå~ä=
é~ê~ãÉíÉêëK=
å= fÖåçêÉ=wÉêç=bäÉî~íáçåëW==tÜÉå=~Åíáî~íÉÇI=íÜáë=ëÉííáåÖ=ÑáäíÉêë=~ää=Ç~í~=
éçáåíë=ïáíÜ=òÉêç=ÉäÉî~íáçåë=Ñêçã=íÜÉ=Ç~í~=ëÉíK=
å= máÅâ=oÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=mä~åÉW==qÜÉ=íêá~åÖìä~íáçå=åÉíïçêâ=áë=Ä~ëÉÇ=çå=íÜÉ=
éçëáíáçå=çÑ=íÜÉ=éçáåíëK=qÜáë=çéíáçå=~ääçïë=óçì=íç=Åçåíçìê=~å=
çîÉêÜ~åÖ=çê=ÅäáÑÑ=Äó=ÅÜ~åÖáåÖ=íÜÉ=êÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=éä~åÉ=íç=~=ëáÇÉ=îáÉïK=
vçì=Å~å=ëéÉÅáÑó=íÜÉ=êÉÑÉêÉåÅÉ=éä~åÉ=Äó=Ñáêëí=ìëáåÖ=íÜÉ=sáÉïéçáåí=Pa=
Åçãã~åÇ=~åÇ=íÜÉå=ìëáåÖ=íÜÉ=sáÉï=çéíáçåI=çê=óçì=Å~å=ëéÉÅáÑó=íÜêÉÉ=
Ç~í~=éçáåíë=çå=íÜÉ=ÅäáÑÑ=Eíïç=~äçåÖ=íÜÉ=Äçííçã=~åÇ=çåÉ=~í=íÜÉ=íçéFK=
å= péÉÅáÑó=pÉäÉÅíáçå=léíáçåëW==qÜáë=íçÖÖäÉ=~ääçïë=óçì=íç=Åçåíêçä=ïÜ~í=
íóéÉ=çÑ=ÉåíáíáÉë=qêá~åÖìä~íÉ=C=`çåíçìê=ìëÉë=Ñçê=áíë=Ç~í~=ëÉíK=^ÑíÉê=óçì=
ÅäáÅâ=lh=çå=íÜÉ=qêá~åÖìä~íÉ=C=`çåíçìê=Çá~äçÖ=ÄçñI=íÜÉ=`ÜççëÉ=
qóéÉë=íç=qêá~åÖìä~íÉ=Çá~äçÖ=Äçñ=~ééÉ~êëK=qÜáë=~ääçïë=óçì=íç=ëÉí=íÜÉ=
íóéÉë=çÑ=ÉåíáíáÉë=íç=ÄÉ=áåÅäìÇÉÇ=áå=íêá~åÖìä~íáçåK=

Q= få=íÜÉ=`ÜççëÉ=qóéÉë=íç=qêá~åÖìä~íÉ=Çá~äçÖ=ÄçñI=óçì=Å~å=ëÉäÉÅí=ÉåíáíáÉë=
íç=ÄÉ=áåÅäìÇÉÇ=áå=íêá~åÖìä~íáçåK=
å= mçáåíëI=Pa=mçäóäáåÉëI=Oa=mçäóäáåÉëI=iáåÉëI=Pa=c~ÅÉëI=fåëÉêíëW==
qÜÉëÉ=~êÉ=ëí~åÇ~êÇ=ÉåíáíáÉë=íÜ~í=Åçåí~áå=ÉäÉî~íáçåëK=

`Ü~éíÉê=NR==pìêÑ~ÅÉ=`çãã~åÇë=
RSO=
 å= cáÉäÇ=pìêîÉó=mçáåí=fåëÉêíëW==qÜáë=çéíáçå=ïáää=áåÅäìÇÉ=^ìíçÇÉëâ=cáÉäÇ=
pìêîÉó=éçáåí=áåëÉêíë=ëìÅÜ=~ë=íÜÉ=áåëÉêí=posmklN=ïáíÜ=íÜÉ=éçáåí=
åìãÄÉêI=ÉäÉî~íáçåI=~åÇ=ÇÉëÅêáéíáçå=~ííêáÄìíÉëK=
å= péçíL_çííçã=bäÉî~íáçå=fåëÉêíëW==qÜáë=çéíáçå=êÉ~Çë=íÜÉ=ÉäÉî~íáçå=áå=
íÉñí=ÉåíáíáÉë=íÜ~í=ëí~êí=ïáíÜ=DuDK==
å= bäÉî~íáçå=qÉñíW==qÜáë=çéíáçå=~ääçïë=óçì=íç=áåÅäìÇÉ=íÉñí=ÉäÉî~íáçå=
î~äìÉë=áå=íÜÉ=íêá~åÖìä~íáçåK=
å= cêçã=cáäÉW==qÜáë=çéíáçå=~ääçïë=óçì=íç=íêá~åÖìä~íÉ=Ñêçã=íÜÉ=éçáåíë=áå=
~=ÅççêÇáå~íÉ=çê=^p`ff=ÑáäÉK=
å= s~äìÉ=íç=mêçÅÉëëW==qÜáë=~ääçïë=óçì=íç=ÅÜççëÉ=ïÜ~í=î~äìÉ=íç=
Åçåíçìê=Ñêçã=íÜÉ=ÅççêÇáå~íÉ=ÑáäÉK=qÜÉ=~î~áä~ÄäÉ=âÉóïçêÇë=~êÉ=w=Ñçê=
íÜÉ=ÅççêÇáå~íÉ=ÉäÉî~íáçåI=abp`=Ñçê=íÜÉ=éçáåí=ÇÉëÅêáéíáçåI=~åÇ=
klqb=Ñçê=íÜÉ=éçáåí=åçíÉ=ÑáÉäÇëK=qÜÉ=klqb=âÉóïçêÇ=Å~å=ÄÉ=
ÑçääçïÉÇ=Äó=~=åçíÉ=äáåÉ=åìãÄÉêK=cçê=Éñ~ãéäÉI=íç=Åçåíçìê=íÜÉ=íÜáêÇ=
äáåÉ=Ñêçã=íÜÉ=åçíÉ=ÑáÉäÇI=ìëÉ=klqbPK=bèì~íáçåë=Å~å=~äëç=ÄÉ=ÉåíÉêÉÇ=
áå=íÜáë=ÑáÉäÇI=Ñçê=Éñ~ãéäÉI=EwHabp`FLOKMK=

R= råÇÉê=cáäÉ=cçêã~íI=óçì=ëéÉÅáÑó=íÜÉ=çêÇÉê=çÑ=íÜÉ=Ç~í~=áå=íÜÉ=ÑáäÉ=íç=ÄÉ=
ìëÉÇ=Ñçê=íêá~åÖìä~íáçåK=
å= cáåÇ=mçáåíë=çå=_êÉ~âäáåÉëW==qÜáë=çéíáçå=~ííÉãéíë=íç=äçÅ~íÉ=
áåíÉêëÉÅíáçå=éçáåíë=çå=äçåÖ=ÄêÉ~âäáåÉëI=ëìÅÜ=~ë=íÜÉ=éçáåíë=ïÜÉêÉ=ëáÇÉ=
ëäçéÉë=áåíÉêëÉÅí=ïáíÜ=~=íçé=çÑ=Ä~åâ=ÄêÉ~âäáåÉK=
å= péÉÅáÑó=bäÉî~íáçå=o~åÖÉW==qÜÉ=Åçãã~åÇ=~ìíçã~íáÅ~ääó=Åçåíçìêë=
Ñêçã=íÜÉ=äçïÉëí=ÉäÉî~íáçå=áå=íÜÉ=Ç~í~=ëÉí=íç=íÜÉ=ÜáÖÜÉëíI=ìëáåÖ=íÜÉ=
áåÅêÉãÉåí=ëéÉÅáÑáÉÇ=áå=íÜÉ=`çåíçìê=fåíÉêî~äK=fÑ=óçì=ïçìäÇ=äáâÉ=íç=
ã~åì~ääó=ëÉí=íÜÉ=ê~åÖÉ=çîÉê=ïÜáÅÜ=íç=ÅçåíçìêI=ëÉäÉÅí=íÜáë=çéíáçåK=
å= rëÉ=fåÅäìëáçåLbñÅäìëáçå=^êÉ~ëW==tÜÉå=íÜáë=Äçñ=áë=ëÉäÉÅíÉÇI=íÜÉ=
Åçãã~åÇ=éêçãéíë=óçì=Ñçê=áåÅäìëáçå=~åÇ=ÉñÅäìëáçå=éçäóäáåÉë=íÜ~í=
~êÉ=ìëÉÇ=íç=íêáã=íÜÉ=ÅçåíçìêëK=qÜÉ=áåÅäìëáçå=~åÇ=ÉñÅäìëáçå=éçäóäáåÉë=
ãìëí=ÄÉ=ÅäçëÉÇ=éçäóäáåÉë=~åÇ=óçì=ãìëí=Çê~ï=íÜÉã=ÄÉÑçêÉ=óçì=ëí~êí=
qêá~åÖìä~íÉ=C=`çåíçìêK=låäó=íÜÉ=é~êíë=çÑ=íÜÉ=Åçåíçìê=äáåÉë=íÜ~í=~êÉ=
ïáíÜáå=íÜÉ=áåÅäìëáçå=éçäóäáåÉë=ïáää=ÄÉ=Çê~ïåK=cçê=Éñ~ãéäÉI=~å=
áåÅäìëáçå=ÅçìäÇ=ÄÉ=íÜÉ=éÉêáãÉíÉê=çÑ=íÜÉ=ëáíÉK=qÜÉ=é~êíë=çÑ=Åçåíçìê=
äáåÉë=íÜ~í=~êÉ=áåëáÇÉ=íÜÉ=ÉñÅäìëáçå=éçäóäáåÉë=~êÉ=åçí=Çê~ïåK=
bñÅäìëáçå=éçäóäáåÉë=Å~å=ÄÉ=ìëÉÇ=Ñçê=~êÉ~ë=ïÜÉêÉ=óçì=ÇçåDí=ï~åí=
ÅçåíçìêëI=ëìÅÜ=~ë=ïáíÜáå=ÄìáäÇáåÖëK==

qêá~åÖìä~íÉ=C=`çåíçìê=
RSP=
 pÉÉ=íÜÉ=Éñ~ãéäÉ=ÄÉäçïW=

=
=
S= råÇÉê=`çåíçìê=léíáçåëI=ëÉäÉÅí=çéíáçåë=Ñçê=Åçåíçìê=~ééÉ~ê~åÅÉ=~åÇ=
ä~ÄÉäáåÖK=
å= `çåíçìê=Äó=fåíÉêî~äW==qÜáë=çéíáçå=ëïáíÅÜÉë=ÄÉíïÉÉå=ÅçåíçìêáåÖ=Äó=
áåíÉêî~ä=EÑçê=Éñ~ãéäÉI=ÉîÉêó=NM=ÑÉÉíF=çê=Äó=î~äìÉK=qÜÉ=Äó=î~äìÉ=
çéíáçå=~ääçïë=óçì=íç=Åçåíçìê=ëéÉÅáÑáÅ=î~äìÉëK=cçê=Éñ~ãéäÉI=áÑ=óçì=
ï~åí=~=NMMÑí=ÅçåíçìêI=ìëÉ=Åçåíçìê=Äó=î~äìÉ=~åÇ=ÉåíÉê=NMM=~ë=íÜÉ=
Åçåíçìê=áåíÉêî~äK=qÜÉ=ÇÉÑ~ìäí=ãçÇÉ=áë=Äó=áåíÉêî~äK=
å= `çåíçìê=fåíÉêî~äW==qÜáë=î~äìÉ=ÇÉíÉêãáåÉë=íÜÉ=áåÅêÉãÉåí=ÄÉíïÉÉå=
Åçåíçìê=äáåÉëK=fÑ=`çåíçìê=Äó=fåíÉêî~ä=áë=íìêåÉÇ=çÑÑI=íÜáë=î~äìÉ=áë=ìëÉÇ=
~ë=íÜÉ=Åçåíçìê=î~äìÉ=~ë=ÇÉëÅêáÄÉÇ=~ÄçîÉK=
å= oÉÇìÅÉ=sÉêíáÅÉëW==qÜáë=çéíáçå=~ííÉãéíë=íç=êÉãçîÉ=Éñíê~=îÉêíáÅÉë=
Ñêçã=íÜÉ=Åçåíçìê=éçäóäáåÉëI=ïÜáÅÜ=Ü~ë=íÜÉ=~Çî~åí~ÖÉë=çÑ=Ñ~ëíÉê=
Çê~ïáåÖ=~åÇ=ëã~ääÉê=Çê~ïáåÖ=ëáòÉK=aÉÑ~ìäí=áë=låK=
å= jáå=`çåíçìê=iÉåÖíÜW==`çåíçìê=äáåÉë=ïÜçëÉ=íçí~ä=äÉåÖíÜ=áë=äÉëë=íÜ~å=
íÜáë=î~äìÉ=~êÉ=åçí=Çê~ïåK=

`Ü~éíÉê=NR==pìêÑ~ÅÉ=`çãã~åÇë=
RSQ=
å= pãççíÜ=`çåíçìêëW==qÜáë=çéíáçå=~Åíáî~íÉë=ëãççíÜáåÖ=çå=íÜÉ=
Åçåíçìê=äáåÉëK=_ÉòáÉê=ëãççíÜáåÖ=ÜçäÇë=~ää=íÜÉ=Åçåíçìê=éçáåíë=
Å~äÅìä~íÉÇ=Ñêçã=íÜÉ=íêá~åÖìä~íáçå=~åÇ=çåäó=ëãççíÜë=ÄÉíïÉÉå=íÜÉ=
Å~äÅìä~íÉÇ=éçáåíëK=qÜÉ=_ÉòáÉê=pãççíÜáåÖ=c~Åíçê=ÇÉëÅêáÄÉÇ=ÄÉäçï=
~ÑÑÉÅíë=íÜÉ=ëãççíÜáåÖ=ÄìäÖÉK=
å= lÑÑëÉí=aáëí~åÅÉW==qÜáë=î~äìÉ=áë=íÜÉ=ã~ñáãìã=íçäÉê~åÅÉ=Ñçê=ëÜáÑíáåÖ=
íÜÉ=çêáÖáå~ä=Åçåíçìê=äáåÉ=áå=çêÇÉê=íç=êÉÇìÅÉ=îÉêíáÅÉëK=qÜÉ=êÉÇìÅÉÇ=
Åçåíçìê=éçäóäáåÉ=ëÜáÑíë=åç=ãçêÉ=íÜ~å=íÜáë=î~äìÉI=~í=~åó=éçáåíI=~ï~ó=
Ñêçã=íÜÉ=çêáÖáå~ä=Åçåíçìê=äáåÉK=^=äçïÉê=î~äìÉ=ÇÉÅêÉ~ëÉë=íÜÉ=åìãÄÉê=
çÑ=îÉêíáÅÉë=êÉãçîÉÇ=~åÇ=âÉÉéë=íÜÉ=Åçåíçìê=äáåÉ=ÅäçëÉê=íç=íÜÉ=
çêáÖáå~äK=^=ÜáÖÜÉê=î~äìÉ=êÉãçîÉë=ãçêÉ=îÉêíáÅÉë=~åÇ=~ääçïë=íÜÉ=
Åçåíçìê=äáåÉ=íç=ëÜáÑí=ãçêÉ=Ñêçã=íÜÉ=çêáÖáå~äK=
å= rëÉ=mçäóåçãá~ä=pãççíÜáåÖW==mçäóåçãá~ä=ëãççíÜáåÖ=~ééäáÉë=~=
ÑáÑíÜ=ÇÉÖêÉÉ=éçäóåçãá~ä=Ñçê=ëãççíÜ=íê~åëáíáçå=ÄÉíïÉÉå=íÜÉ=
íêá~åÖìä~íáçå=Ñ~ÅÉëK=
å= i~ÄÉä=`çåíçìêëW==qÜáë=ëÉäÉÅíáçå=çéÉåë=íÜÉ=`çåíçìê=i~ÄÉä=léíáçåë=
Çá~äçÖ=Äçñ=ëÜçïå=ÜÉêÉ=~ÑíÉê=lh=áë=ëÉäÉÅíÉÇ=çå=íÜÉ=qêá~åÖìä~íÉ=~åÇ=
`çåíçìê=Çá~äçÖ=ÄçñK=

qêá~åÖìä~íÉ=C=`çåíçìê=
RSR=
 T= få=íÜÉ=`çåíçìê=i~ÄÉä=léíáçåë=Çá~äçÖ=ÄçñI=óçì=Å~å=ëéÉÅáÑó=Üçï=
Åçåíçìêë=~êÉ=íç=ÄÉ=ä~ÄÉäÉÇK=
å= i~ÄÉä=i~óÉêW==dáîÉ=~=ä~óÉê=å~ãÉ=Ñçê=íÜÉ=Åçåíçìê=ä~ÄÉä=íÉñí=
~åÇ=ÉåíáíáÉëK=
å= qÉñí=páòÉW==péÉÅáÑó=~=íÉñí=ëáòÉ=Ñçê=íÜÉ=ä~ÄÉäëK=
å= jáå=iÉåÖíÜ=íç=i~ÄÉäW==péÉÅáÑó=~=ãáåáãìã=Åçåíçìê=äáåÉ=äÉåÖíÜ=íç=
ä~ÄÉäK=qÜáë=ïáää=éêÉîÉåí=îÉêó=ëã~ää=äáåÉ=ëÉÖãÉåíë=Ñêçã=ÄÉáåÖ=ä~ÄÉäÉÇK==
å= i~ÄÉä=fåÇÉñ=`çåíçìêë=låäóW==låäó=íÜÉ=ëéÉÅáÑáÉÇ=áåÇÉñ=Åçåíçìêë=
~êÉ=ä~ÄÉäÉÇK=
å= _êÉ~â=`çåíçìê=iáåÉ=~í=i~ÄÉäW==qÜÉ=Åçåíçìê=áë=ÄêçâÉå=~í=íÜÉ=ä~ÄÉäK=
qÜÉ=Åçåíçìê=äáåÉ=áë=åç=äçåÖÉê=ÅçåíáåìçìëK=
å= aê~ï=_êçâÉå=pÉÖãÉåíëW==qÜáë=çéíáçå=Çê~ïë=íÜÉ=äáåÉ=ëÉÖãÉåíë=
íÜêçìÖÜ=íÜÉ=ä~ÄÉä=~ë=áÑ=íÜÉ=Åçåíçìê=äáåÉ=áë=ÅçåíáåìçìëK=
å= i~ÄÉä=`çåíçìê=båÇëW==qÜáë=çéíáçå=ä~ÄÉäë=íÜÉ=ÉåÇë=çÑ=íÜÉ=
Åçåíçìê=äáåÉëK=
å= aê~ï=_çñ=^êçìåÇ=qÉñíW==qÜáë=çéíáçå=Çê~ïë=~=Äçñ=~êçìåÇ=íÜÉ=
ä~ÄÉä=íÉñíK=
å= ^äáÖå=qÉñí=táíÜ=`çåíçìêW==qÜÉ=ä~ÄÉä=íÉñí=ïáää=Ñçääçï=íÜÉ=~äáÖåãÉåí=
çÑ=íÜÉ=Åçåíçìê=äáåÉK=

U= råÇÉê=fåíÉêå~ä=i~ÄÉä=fåíÉêî~äë=óçì=ÇÉíÉêãáåÉ=íÜÉ=ÑêÉèìÉåÅó=çÑ=ä~ÄÉäë=
çå=~=ÅçåíçìêK=
å= aê~ï=fåÇÉñ=`çåíçìêëW==qÜáë=çéíáçå=~ääçïë=óçì=íç=ÜáÖÜäáÖÜí=
Åçåíçìêë=~í=~=ëéÉÅáÑáÉÇ=áåíÉêî~äK=qÜÉ=Çá~äçÖ=Äçñ=ëÜçïå=ÜÉêÉ=áë=
Çáëéä~óÉÇ=~ÑíÉê=lh=áë=ëÉäÉÅíÉÇ=çå=íÜÉ=ÅìêêÉåí=Çá~äçÖ=ÄçñK=^ëëáÖå=~=
Åçåíçìê=ÉäÉî~íáçå=áåíÉêî~äI=äáåÉ=ïáÇíÜI=~åÇ=ä~óÉê=å~ãÉK=

=
å= e~íÅÜ=wçåÉëW==qÜáë=çéíáçå=Ü~íÅÜÉë=íÜÉ=~êÉ~=ÄÉíïÉÉå=íÜÉ=Åçåíçìêë=
ëÉèìÉåíá~ääóK=
å= _ÉòáÉê=pãççíÜáåÖ=c~ÅíçêW==qÜÉ=Åçåíçìê=éêÉîáÉï=ïáåÇçï=ëÜçïë=óçì=
~å=Éñ~ãéäÉ=çÑ=Üçï=ãìÅÜ=ëãççíÜáåÖ=óçì=Å~å=ÉñéÉÅí=~í=É~ÅÜ=ëÉííáåÖK=
päáÇáåÖ=íÜÉ=Ä~ê=íç=íÜÉ=äÉÑí=êÉëìäíë=áå=~=äçïÉê=ëÉííáåÖI=ïÜáÅÜ=Ü~ë=äÉëë=
äççéáåÖ=çê=äÉëë=ÑêÉÉÇçã=íç=ÅìêîÉ=ÄÉíïÉÉå=Åçåíçìê=äáåÉ=éçáåíëK=
jçîáåÖ=íÜÉ=ëäáÇÉê=íç=íÜÉ=êáÖÜí=êÉëìäíë=áå=~=ëÉííáåÖ=íÜ~í=áåÅêÉ~ëÉë=íÜÉ=
äççéáåÖ=ÉÑÑÉÅíK==

`Ü~éíÉê=NR==pìêÑ~ÅÉ=`çãã~åÇë=
RSS=
 ➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface
➤ Prerequisite: Data points of the surface
➤ Keyboard Command: TRI

Contour Elevation Label

Function
The Contour Elevation Label dialog box allows you to label a group of
contour lines with their elevation. To place the labels, pick two points
across the contour polylines. The command finds all the contour
polylines that intersect the line defined by the two picked points, and
draws the labels to the intersection points.

1 In the Contour Label Options dialog box you must determine text
attributes.
■ Label Layer Name: This option allows you to assign a layer name
for the labels.
■ Horizontal Scale: This option allows you to adjust the horizontal
scale for the text size.
■ Text Size Scaler: This option allows you assign a text size to
proper scale.
■ Decimals: This option allows you to display up to six decimal
places of precision in the elevation label.

Contour Elevation Label

567
 2 Under Label Position, you can determine where the label is situated in
relation to the contour line.
■ On Contour: Label will appear on the contour line.
■ Above Contour: Label will “ float” above the contour line.

3 In the Contour Label Options dialog box, you assign additional

options for placing the contour labels. These are explained in detail
under Triangulation & Contour, Label Contour option.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface

➤ Prerequisite: Polylines with elevation (contour polylines)
➤ Keyboard Command: GCLABEL

Make 3D Grid File

Function
The Make 3D Grid File dialog box allow you to create a .GRD file that
serves as a surface model and is a prerequisite to many of the Surface
commands. The command makes a triangular network of the data
points and then interpolates the elevation values of a rectangular grid
at the specified grid resolution. Data points can be either points,
inserts, lines, or polylines. Lines and polylines are treated as
breaklines in the triangulation.

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

568
 You specify the grid location by first picking a lower left corner and
then an upper right corner. The screen cannot be twisted during this
process because grids always run north-south and east-west.

1 Use the Make Grid File dialog box to set the range of elevations to
process, modeling method, and grid resolution. Entities with elevations
outside the range to process are ignored.
2 Under Modeling Method, choose the method of calculating the
surface.
■ You should almost always set the modeling method to triangulation.
■ Polynomial, inverse distance, kriging, and linear least squares
options apply to random data points for surfaces such as
underground features.

3 Under Triangulation Mode choose one of the four modes:

AutoDetect, Triangulation Only, Intersection with Triangulation, and
Intersection Only.
■ Auto Detect: This option automatically chooses between the
Triangulation Only and Intersection with Triangulation methods. If
the selected surface entities are primarily made of polylines, then
the Intersection with Triangulation method is used. Otherwise the
Triangulation Only method is used.
■ Triangulation Only: This option allows you to build a
triangulation surface out of all the selected points, lines, and

Make 3D Grid File

569
 polylines. All lines and polylines are treated as breaklines. Grid node
elevations are calculated based on the triangulation.
■ Intersection with Triangulation: This option allows you to
triangulate all the selected points and only the end points of the
lines and polylines. Then a Steepest Intersection method is used to
assign the grid node elevations from the linework of the
triangulation lines and the selected lines and polylines.
■ Intersection Only: This option uses the Steepest Intersection
method using the selected lines and polylines. The triangulation step
is skipped and any selected point data is not used. This method can
be used for making grids out of polylines, such as a contour map, as
long as the surface is defined only by contour polylines without spot
elevation points. Skipping the triangulation step makes this method
faster than the other methods, especially for large files.

4 Under Grid Resolution you must specify how the grid size will
be determined.
■ Specify the grid resolution either by the number of grid cells or by
the size for each grid cell. While the program can handle huge grids,
a general rule of thumb is to keep the total number of grid cells
under 250,000 (500 by 500). The grid location and resolution can
also be specified using the settings from an existing grid file. In this
case, the location and resolution of the new grid will match those of
the selected grid file, which is useful for commands such as Two
Surface Volumes that require two grid files with identical locations
and resolutions.
■ No elevations are calculated on grid cells that extend beyond the
extent of the data.

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

570
 The following figure shows an example of how the grid is calculated
to the limits of the data points.

■ Extrapolation can be used to calculate elevations for the grid cells

that are beyond the data limits. When there are grid cells with no
elevation in a .grd file, the command prompts “ Extrapolate grid to
full grid size?” If you respond yes, extrapolation fills in all the grid
cells. The extrapolation method uses a safe calculation that tends to
average out or level the extrapolated values, which means that
extrapolated grid areas are not as accurate as grid areas within the
limits of the data. Use the Plot 3D Grid command to draw the grid
file so that you can see the extrapolation.

The .GRD file has the following format:

■ Line 1 is the lower left Y coordinate

■ Line 2 is the lower left X coordinate
■ Line 3 is the upper right Y coordinate
■ Line 4 is the upper right X coordinate
■ Line 5 is the X direction grid resolution
■ Line 6 is the Y direction grid resolution

Make 3D Grid File

571
 The rest of the lines are the Z values of the grid intersects, starting from
the lower left, moving in the left to right direction, and ending at the
upper right. If the intersect has no value, the letter ’N’ is saved instead
of the Z value.

Grids from Contour Maps

A grid file can be created from contours represented as polylines with
elevation. The command calculates the elevation of each grid corner
by looking for contour intersections in eight directions (N, S, E, W,
NE, SE, SW, NW) and then interpolating the elevation between the
two steepest intersections.
To accurately model the surface, you might need to add entities in
addition to the contour polylines. You should add spot elevation
points for the high and low points. Otherwise, the grid model will
plateau at the last contour. You should also add 3D polylines to act as
breaklines on long narrow ridge and valley contours. In these areas, the
command will find the same contour when it looks for intersections in
the eight directions, and when all eight intersections are the same
contour, the interpolated grid elevation equals the contour elevation
instead of rising up the ridge or dipping in the valley. Adding the 3D
breakline polylines forces interpolation along the ridge or valley.
To draw these polylines, set the OSNAP to Nearest and run the 3D
Polyline command under the Draw menu. Then draw the polyline by
picking the contour polylines where the breakline polyline crosses them.

Prompts
1 Grid File to Create File Selection dialog box is displayed. Enter a name
for the grid file. The default directory is the data directory.
2 Use position from another file or pick grid position (File/<Pick>)?
Press ENTER
Using the position from another file will apply the lower left and upper
right corners and the grid resolution of the another grid file to the
current one.
3 Pick the Lower Left grid corner: pick a point
4 Pick the Upper Right grid corner: pick a point
The Make Grid File dialog box is displayed.
In this dialog box, you specify the grid resolution and whether or
not to include data points with zero elevations. You can specify the
resolution by entering the number of grid cells in the X and Y

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

572
 directions. Use the Dimensions option to set the X and Y size for
each grid cell.
5 Select the points, lines, and polylines to grid from.
Select objects: pick the objects that will define the surface model

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface

➤ Prerequisite: Entities that define the surface.
➤ Keyboard Command: MKGRID

Plot 3D Grid File

Function
The Plot 3D Grid File dialog box allows you to draw the 3D grid mesh
of the chosen. GRD file. Each grid cell can be drawn as a 3D Face
entity, Polymesh, Text, or temporary lines.

Plot 3D Grid File

573
 1 In the Plot Grid Options dialog box, you have the option of using
Vertical Exaggeration to display the grid. You can also choose the
vertical exaggeration method.
■ Use Vertical Exaggeration: This option multiplies the grid
elevations by the Vertical Exaggeration value.
■ Absolute: This option allows you to multiply the grid by a vertical
exaggeration.
■ Relative to Base: This option allows you to multiply the grid using
a vertical exaggeration with a set base elevation.

2 Under Draw Method, you determine how the grid is displayed.

■ 3D Faces: This option allows you to draw the grid as individual 3D
faces with elevations at each corner.
■ Preview Only: This option allows you to draw the grid as
temporary "ghost" lines. The advantage to this method is that it is a
much faster way to view the grid. However, if you use the Zoom,
Redraw, Regen, or Pan commands, the grid will disappear.
■ Polyface Mesh: This option allows you draw the grid as a single 3D
mesh entity.
■ Text: This option allows you to label the grid elevation at the each
grid corner. The text is center justified over the grid corner.

3 You must assign a layer name for the displayed grid.

4 Under View you can choose a viewing orientation. This option
changes your 3D viewing angle orientation to NE, SE, SW, or NW.
5 In the Plot Grid Options dialog box, you have additional options for
displaying the grid.
■ Color by Elevation: This option allows you to color the grid based
on a table of user-defined elevation ranges and the assigned colors.
■ Specify Elevation Zones: This option allows you to define the
elevation ranges with colors.
■ Draw Side Faces: This is an option to draw vertical faces around
the perimeter of the grid. The side faces are drawn vertically from
the grid perimeter to the Sides Base Elevation.
■ Reverse Face Order: The Reverse Face Order option changes the
direction of the points for a grid cell from clockwise to
counterclockwise. The order applies to shading the grid cell in 3D
render viewers such as the 3D Viewer Window command. The grid
cell will only appear shaded when viewing the grid cell from the
clockwise side. Viewing from the other side will show a wire frame.
The default is to show the shaded side from the top-down view.

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

574
 This option allows you to draw the grid so that the underside of
the grid is shaded.
■ Draw Corners Only: This option draws the side lines only at the
grid corners. Otherwise side lines are drawn down each perimeter
grid cell.
■ Sides Base Elevation: This option allows you to provide an
elevation from which to draw the sides.
■ Extrapolate Grid to Full Size: This option allows you to plot the
grid to the full rectangular area.
■ Use Inclusion/Exclusion Perimeters: This option prompts you to
select closed polylines for inclusion and exclusion areas. Only grid cells
inside the inclusion polylines are drawn. Grid cells inside the exclusion
polylines will not be drawn.
■ Subdivide Grid Around Inclusion Perimeter: This option
subdivides grid cells that are partially inside and outside the
perimeter into smaller resolution grid cells.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface

➤ Prerequisite: A .GRD File
➤ Keyboard Command: PLOTGRID

Two Surface Volumes

Function
This command calculates the cut and fill volumes between two
surfaces modeled by grid files. These two grid files must have the same
location and resolution.
Calculating a volume using the Two Surface Volumes command
requires three steps:

1 Create the first grid file with the Make 3D Grid File command.
2 Create the second grid file with the Make 3D Grid File command.
3 Run the Two Surface Volumes command.
For steps 1 and 2, see the Make 3D Grid File command above. For step
3, follow the prompts below.

Two Surface Volumes

575
 Prompts
1 Select the Inclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none:
Select Objects: Press ENTER or pick polyline(s)
When inclusion areas are specified, only the volume within the
inclusion area is calculated. Whenever possible, you should use a
polyline that represents the limits of the disturbed area as the inclusion
perimeter. Inclusion areas are represented by closed polylines and must
be drawn prior to running this command.
2 Select the Exclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none:
Select Objects: Press ENTER or pick polyline(s)
Volumes within an exclusion area are not included in the calculations.
Exclusion areas are represented by closed polylines and must be drawn
prior to running this command.
3 The Select Base Grid File dialog box is displayed
Choose the grid file to be used as the base surface.
4 Extrapolate grid to full grid size [Yes/<No>]? N
If the grid contains grid cells that have no elevations, you can choose
to extrapolate elevations from the grid cells with elevations. When
you choose not to extrapolate, no volume is calculated for the grid
cells left without elevations. In general, extrapolation is not accurate
and should be avoided whenever possible.
5 The Select Final Grid File dialog box is displayed.
Choose the grid file to be used as the final surface.
6 Extrapolate grid to full grid size [Yes/<No>]? N

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

576
7 The Volume Report Options dialog box appears, allowing you to select
options for reporting results.

The following options are available for the reporting volume results:

■ Write Depth/Difference Grid File: This option creates a grid file of

the elevation difference of the two grid files.
■ Draw Depth/Difference Contours: This option creates a contour
map of the difference or depth between the two grid files.
■ Draw Depth/Difference in Each Cell: This option plots the
elevation difference at the grid corners.
■ Draw Volume in Each Cell: This option plots the calculated
volume for each grid cell and is an excellent way to verify the
volume calculation. If a cell contains both cut and fill, both values
are plotted.
■ Draw Cut/Fill Color Map: This option creates a solid fill color for
each grid cell with different shades based on the average cut or fill
in the cell. Red shades are used for cut and blue for fill. You can
choose to draw a color legend.
■ Calculate Elevation Zone Volumes: This option calculates the cut
and fill between different elevation ranges.
■ Use Report Formatter: This option allows you to customize the report
by choosing the fields to report and their order. The report formatter
can also be used to output the report data to Excel or Access.
■ Process Another Area With Current Grids: This option runs Two
Surface Volumes again using the same grid files but different
inclusion/exclusion polylines. This option saves you the step of
reloading the grid files to calculate volumes from the same grids for
multiple areas.

Two Surface Volumes

577
 ■ Cut Swell Factor: The Cut Swell Factor value is multiplied by the
cut volume in the report to generate a more accurate cut value.
■ Fill Shrink Factor: The Fill Shrink Factor value is multiplied by the
fill volume in the report to generate a more accurate fill value.
■ Report Tons: This option allows you to enter the material
Density and the program will report the cut and fill tons in
addition to volume.

8 The results of the calculation are reported and displayed.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface

➤ Prerequisite: Two grid files
➤ Keyboard Command: VOLCALC2

Volumes By Layer

Function
This command is an easy, yet accurate way to calculate volumes. For
this command, volumes are calculated in one step using a window of
the area and selected items.
You specify the layer names of the entities for the base and final
surfaces.. Inclusion and exclusion perimeters may optionally be
specified to limit the volume calculation area on the grid. An inclusion
perimeter should be used if there is a closed polyline for the limit of
the disturbed area. The command generates grids of the two surfaces
using the entities on the corresponding layers and calculates and
reports the volume. The main disadvantage of this command is that it
doesn’t have the special output options of the Two Surface Volumes
command such as the Depth Contours option.

Prompts
1 Pick Lower Left limit of surface area: pick a point
2 Pick Upper Right limit of surface area: pick a point

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

578
3 In the Make Grid File dialog box, choose a grid resolution.

n The grid parameters are reported at the top of the Make Grid File
dialog box. Either the cell size of the number of cells is reported
here depending on how you specify the grid resolution
n Ignore Zero Elevations: When this option is turned on, entities at
elevation zero will be ignored while calculating the grid files.
n Specify Grid Resolution As: You must choose whether to define
the grid files by specifying the number of cells or by specifying the
dimensions of each cell. While the program can handle huge grids,
a general rule of thumb is to keep the total number of grid cells
under 250,000 (500 by 500).

4 In the Volumes by Layer dialog box, specify layer names of existing

and final surfaces.

Click Select Layers to choose the layers of the surface entities on

screen. Select surface entities on corresponding layers. These entities,
which are used for modeling the surfaces, can be points, lines (such as
triangulation lines), 2D polylines (such as contours), and 3D polylines
(such as breaklines).
Select Objects: select screen entities in corresponding layers

Volumes By Layer
579
 5 Select the Inclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none:
Select objects: Press ENTER or pick polyline
6 Select the Exclusion perimeter polylines or ENTER for none:
Select objects: Press ENTER or pick polyline
7 Extrapolate grid to full grid size [Yes/<No>]? Press ENTER
8 The Volume Report Options dialog box appears to show options for
reporting results. See the Two Surface Volumes command above for
details.
9 The results of the calculation are reported and displayed.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface

➤ Prerequisite: Entities that define both the base and final surfaces.
➤ Keyboard Command: LAYERVOL

Design Pad Template

Function
This command creates design slopes from a perimeter polyline at
specified cut/fill slopes to reach existing ground. This command can be
used to design building pads, pits, roads, ditches, stockpiles, etc. The
design is drawn as 3D polylines for the cut/fill slopes and for the
daylight perimeter where the design meets existing ground. Before
beginning this command, you must draw the polyline perimeter. The
polyline perimeter can be either 2D or 3D, closed or open, for a
2D polyline, you are prompted for an elevation for the pad perimeter.
For a 3D polyline, the pad perimeter is set to the elevations of the
3D polyline. For an open polyline, you are prompted for the side for
the design. For a closed polyline, the command designs the slopes
either outward or inward depending on the setting you choose.

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

580
1 Under Source of Surface Model, you must select a surface type.
■ Grid File: This option specifies that a grid file created with the
Make Grid File command will be used for the existing surface.
■ Screen Entities: This option models the existing surface “ on-the-fly”
using a window you specify by requesting a window for the screen
selection of entities. This is the default option. This option prompts
you to select the “ pad disturbed area” on the screen by selecting from
lower left to upper right. This does an automatic “ crossing” selection.
If the “ pad” to be selected is a 3D polyline or 2D polyline at a non-
zero elevation, that pad will not be included in the surface model.
Thus the pad itself will not in any way distort the modeling of the
existing surface, but will only be used to carve in the final surface.
This option creates a grid file of the modeled surface.

2 Under Design Slope Format, you must specify the slope conditions to
tie into the existing ground.
■ Ratio: Ratios are entered as 2 for 2:1, 0.5 for 0.5:1, etc. This
method, which is the most commonly used, prompts you for both
the fill and cut outslope ratios, the elevation of the pad, and the
elevation range of the surface.
■ Percent: Very gradual slopes are often entered as percents. A 10%
slope would correspond to a 10:1 ratio slope. A 5% slope (more
gradual) would correspond to a 20:1 ratio slope. The danger of using

Design Pad Template

581
 percent slope is that a low percent slope, representing a gradual tie-
in slope, might be less than the actual slope of the surrounding
terrain, and a catch may not be found.

3 Under Slope Direction for Closed Plines, the specified slope seeks the
existing ground by extending outward (Outside) or inward (Inside).
4 In the Pad Template Parameters dialog box, you must specify how the
pad is displayed.
■ Use Another Grid for Pad Interior: This option allows you to
define the interior of the pad with a separate grid file. This is
important because the interior could be an undulating surface
which affects the slope tie-in and the volumes.
■ Draw Slope Direction Arrows: This option allows you to include
slope arrows pointing in the direction of the slope. You are
prompted for arrow size.
■ Solid Cut Arrows: If the Draw Slope Direction Arrows option is
clicked on, then this option is active. This option makes all slope
direction arrows appear with solid fill.
■ Round Exterior Corners: With this option, corners are rounded
and correspond more closely to how they would naturally be built
in the field. If the original pad itself is not sharp-edged, but is
instead rounded, then the Round Exterior Corners option is not as
critical for appearance. Round Exterior Corners does impact volume
calculations.
■ Draw Side Slope Polylines: This option draws polylines along
the slope.
■ Side Polyline Spacing: This option sets the spacing between the
ortho lines drawn from the pad to the perimeter. A typical spacing
is 25 units. Too close a spacing may make the slope direction arrows
less attractive. Too broad a spacing may reduce the accuracy of the
volume calculations and the precision of the perimeter intersection
(daylight) polyline.
■ Cut Swell Factor: This option allows you to enter a value for the
swell factor of the cut. For purposes of volumes, if the cut that is
removed “ swells” (rock, for example, will typically swell to larger
volumes after cut), then a swell factor for the cut can be applied to
the volumes. A factor of 1.2 would swell the cut, and a factor of 0.8
would shrink the cut.
■ Fill Shrink Factor: This option allows you to enter a value for the
shrink factor of the fill. For purposes of volumes, fill that is
compacted will sometimes shrink from the volumes of the source
material. A fill shrink factor of 0.8 would “ compact” the source fill

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

582
 by 0.8. If a cut swell factor of 1.2 were entered and a fill shrink
factor of 1.0 (no change) were entered, then a job that had a smaller
cut than fill might be closer to balancing, because the cut material is
swelled to produce more fill material.
■ Pad Layer Name: This option allows you to specify a layer name
for the pad. “ Pad” is the default layer name, and its color is set as
green. This is the layer for the computed final design.

5 After specifying options in the Pad Template Parameters dialog box,

you are prompted to specify pad perimeter, outslope ratios, and the
appearance of the contours.

Prompts
1 Pick Lower Left limit of pad disturbed area: pick lower left
2 Pick Upper Right limit of pad disturbed area: pick upper right
Be sure to pick these limits well beyond the area of the top of the pad
polyline in order to make room for the outslopes.
3 After you select the limits of the disturbed area, the command
generates a 3D grid that represents the surface. Specify the grid
resolution desired and select OK.
4 Pick the pad polyline: select perimeter polyline
5 Enter the fill outslope ratio <2.0>: 2.5
6 Enter the cut outslope ratio <2.0>: 2.5
After you enter outslope ratios, a range of elevations along the pad top
is noted.
7 Enter the pad elevation <29.54>: 39
8 Calculate earthwork volumes (<Yes>/No)? Press ENTER
9 Write final surface to grid file (Yes/<No>)? Press ENTER
The Report Viewer reports cut/fill volume.
If <Yes> is selected, this option outputs a grid file using the elevations
of the pad within the disturbed area polyline and using the original
ground surface everywhere else.
10 Adjust parameters and redesign pad (Yes/<No>)? Press ENTER
11 Trim existing contours inside pad perimeter (Yes/<No>)? Y
12 Retain trimmed contours (Yes/<No>)? N

Design Pad Template

583
 13 Contour the pad (<Yes>/No)? Press ENTER
You are prompted for options for the contours.
14 Join final contours with existing [<Yes>/No] Press ENTER

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface

➤ Prerequisite: A pad perimeter polyline and surface entities or .grd
file.
➤ Keyboard Command: PAD

Tag Hard Breaklines

Function
This command tags polylines with a description so that the Triangulate
& Contour command can identify these polylines as hard breaklines.
The tag is invisible and doesn’t change the polyline. Triangulate &
Contour will not smooth contours as they cross these hard breaklines.
For example, you can tag 3D polylines that represent a wall so that
contours go straight across the wall without smoothing curves.

Prompts
1 Select hard breaklines.
Select objects: pick a polyline

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface

➤ Prerequisite: Polylines
➤ Keyboard Command: HARDBRK

Untag Hard Breaklines

Function
This command removes description tags from polylines. These tags are
used by the Triangulate & Contour command to identify polylines as
hard breaklines. Contours are not smoothed as they cross hard
breaklines. This command untags polylines so that contours are
smoothed across them.

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

584
 Prompts
1 Select polylines to remove hard breakline tag from.
Select objects: pick a polyline

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface

➤ Prerequisite: Polylines with hard breakline tag
➤ Keyboard Command: SOFTBRK

Convert LDD-AEC Contours

Function
This command converts contours produced in Land Development
Desktop that are AEC objects into 2D polylines usable by Autodesk
Field Survey. You must have the LDD Object Enabler installed on your
computer.

Prompts
1 Select AEC Contours to convert.
Select objects: pick contours

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface

➤ Prerequisite: AEC contours
➤ Keyboard Command: AEC_CNTR

Convert LDD-AEC Contours

585
 Profile Defaults

Function
The Profile Defaults dialog box allows you to set default parameters
such as horizontal and vertical scales, text size, type of profile, and
layer names of profiles.

1 In the Profile Defaults dialog box, you must set the appropriate scale
for profiles and associated text.
■ Horizontal Scale: This option allows you to set the horizontal
scale.
■ Vertical Scale: This option allows you to set the vertical scale.
■ Text Size Scaler: This option allows you to set the size of text for
profile annotation relative to the horizontal scale.
■ Symbol Size Scaler: This option allows you to set the size of
dimension leader arrows relative to the horizontal scale.
■ Profile Annotation Layer: This option allow you to set the layer
on which the profile text is plotted.

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

586
2 Under Road Type Settings, you determine default for road profiles.
■ Object Height for Sight Distance Calcs: This option allows you to
set the value used when a sight distance is calculated.
■ Eye Height for Sight Distance Calcs: This option allows you to set
the value used when a sight distance is calculated. The sight
distance defaults are set to the ASHTO standards, but can be
changed as conditions dictate such as for an accident study or for
metric values.
■ Vertical Curve Drawing Resolution: This option allows you to
determine the length of line segments that are plotted to represent a
vertical curve.
■ Vertical Curve PC & PT Points Layer: This option allows you to
set the layer that the endpoint nodes of the vertical curve will be
plotted on.

3 Under Station Type, you determine how stations will the labeled. Station
Type sets the format for the station labels: 1+00 is the default, 1+000 is
for metric, NO. 0 is the Korean format.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PRD

Profile Defaults
587
 Profile from Surface Entities

Function
Profile from Surface Entities creates a profile from contours, triangular
mesh, and other 3D drawing entities. The method is to draw a polyline
as the profile centerline. Then the profile is derived from the
intersections of the polyline with 3D entities.

1 You must first name the .pro file in which the profile is stored.
2 In the Profile from Surface Model dialog box, you must set parameters
for creating the profile.
■ Beginning Station: You must assign the starting station for the
profile centerline.
■ Interpolate Endpoint Elevations from Beyond Profile Extents:
This option searches past the ends of the centerline for additional
intersections with 3D entities. These additional intersections are
then used to interpolate the elevation at the starting and ending
station of the centerline.
■ Extrapolate Endpoint Elevations to Extents of Profile: This
option uses the slope of the last two elevation points of the profile
and calculates the elevation of the endpoint from this slope.
■ Station by Another Reference Centerline: This option prompts
you to pick another centerline polyline. The intersection points
along the first centerline are projected onto the second centerline.

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

588
 The profile then stores the elevation of the intersection with the
station along the second centerline.
■ Breakpoint Descriptions from Layers: This option reports the
layer name of the surface entities used to generate the profile.
■ Ignore Zero Elevation Lines in Surface Model: With this option,
all surface entities with a zero elevation are not included in the
profile calculation.

3 In the Profile from Surface Model dialog box, you can create offset
profiles from the centerline used for the primary profile.
■ Profile Offsets: Enter the offset distance in Profile Offsets field.
■ Separate .PRO Files: Each offset profile created will have a unique
.PRO file.
■ All in One .PRO File: All offset profiles will be in the .PRO file of
the centerline profile.

Prompts
1 The file selection dialog box, PROfile File to Write is displayed.
Specify a profile file name.
2 The Profile from Surface Model dialog box is displayed.
3 Polyline should be drawn in direction of increasing stations.
CL File/<select polyline which represents the profile centerline>: pick
the centerline
4 Select Lines, PLines, and/or 3DFaces that define the surface
for profiling.
Select objects: select the entities

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface

➤ Prerequisite: A polyline centerline and surface lines and polylines.
➤ Keyboard Command: PROSM

Profile from Surface Entities

589
 Profile from Pts on Centerline

Function
This command creates a .PRO file from Autodesk Field Survey points
and a centerline that is represented by a polyline. The elevations of the
profile are derived from the elevation of the points, and the stationing
for these profile points is calculated from the distance along the
centerline. The points must be within the offset distance from the
polyline to be included in the profile. The polyline should be drawn in
the direction of increasing stations.

Prompts
1 The file selection dialog box, PROfile File to Write is displayed
Specify a profile file name.
2 Select centerline polyline: pick a polyline
3 Enter the centerline’s starting station <0.0>: Press ENTER or enter
starting station
4 Enter the maximum offset tolerance <1.0>: Press ENTER or enter
tolerance
5 Ignore zero elevations (<Yes>/No)? Press ENTER
The points should be located on the real Z axis. Choose No to include
points with zero elevations.
6 Select the Field Survey points along the centerline.
Select objects: select the point entities

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface

➤ Prerequisite: A polyline centerline and Autodesk Field Survey point
inserts
➤ Keyboard Command: PROFPTS

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

590
 Input-Edit Profile

Function
This command is a spreadsheet editor for profile files (.PRO files in the
data directory). This command can also be used to just the contents of
a profile. You can create a new profile by editing an empty or
nonexistent file.
The dialog box below shows the layout of the editor.

1 In the upper left corner is the Top Row number, which is the number
of the row at the top of the display. Next to Top Row is Current Row,
which is the number of the row that is currently being edited. To set
the current row, locate the cursor in one of the edit boxes in the row
and press ENTER.
2 There are six columns that can be used for fields in a profile. Which
columns are active depends on the type of profile. Six rows are visible
at a time. To view different rows, use the scroll bar on the right.
3 The Check Stations column on the right reports the elevation at the
specified stations. The Check Stations are not stored in the profile, but
you can view the elevations at certain stations while you adjust the
profile data.
4 The Profile Name is an optional identification name used by multiple
profiles in the Draw Profile command.
5 Under Type of Profile, choose from Generic, Road, Sewer, Pipe, or
Crossing. The profile type you choose will determine which columns
are active in the editor.

Input-Edit Profile
591
 6 In the profile editor, you can choose options for slopes and K-Values.
■ Hold Next Slope: This option allows you to modify the elevation
or slope of a station without subsequently modifying the slope of
the next station.
■ Use K-Value: This option switches the fifth column to K-value.

7 The bottom of the Profile Edit dialog box has seven action buttons.
■ Insert: This option adds a new row to the profile after the current
row.
■ Delete: This option removes the current row.
■ Next: Used for multiple profiles only. Next goes to the next profile
in the profile file.
■ Previous: Used for multiple profiles only. Previous moves to the
previous profile file.
■ Translate: This option adds or subtracts to stations or elevations.

■ Range of Stations: This field displays the range of stations to

modify.
■ Change Station: You can modify the stations of the range.
■ Change Elevation: You can modify the elevation of the range.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: PROFEDIT

Draw Profile

Function
This command draws a profile anywhere on the drawing. The Draw
Profile command uses profile information that is stored in .PRO files.
Profiles can be plotted by themselves or in conjunction with a plan
view to create a "plan and profile." This can be done by drawing the

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

592
 profile in model space underneath the plan view or by drawing the
profile on sheets, with the selected centerline captured in paper space
in the plan view portion. The sheet-based plan and profile procedure
creates multiple plan and profile sheets all at once. Labeling and
vertical curve calculations for sight distance respond to settings within
Profile Defaults.

Prompts
1 The file selection dialog box, Profile to Draw, is displayed.
Specify a profile file name.
2 The Draw Profile dialog box appears next. The title bar of the dialog
box reads Draw Generic Profile or Draw Road Profile, depending on
whether a generic profile (grades only, no vertical curves) or a road
profile (vertical curve lengths are included) is detected. The Profile
from Surface Entities and Profile from Points on Centerline commands
create only "generic" profiles. The Input-Edit Profile command can be
used to create both generic and road profiles.

Draw Profile
593
 n Draw Grid: This option will draw a grid and axis elevations for the
profile, as shown below.

If a grid already exists, and you want to superimpose additional

profiles on the same drawing, then turn off Draw Grid.
n Grid Direction: Profiles can be drawn Left to Right (the default) or
Right to Left. Although most profiles are drawn left to right, if you
have a road that runs east to west and you wish to draw the profile
stationing beneath the actual road stationing, then choosing a Right
to Left profile may be appropriate, as shown below.

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

594
3 If Draw Sheet is clicked on, numerous options become available, as
follows:
n Block Name: This is the drawing name for the plan and profile
sheet to be inserted. Autodesk Field Survey provides a standard plan
and profile drawing in the form of Profile.dwg located in the
Support subdirectory. You may wish to revise Profile.dwg, add your
company logo, and re-save it as Profile1.dwg. Or you could add your
own complete version of a Plan and Profile sheet. If you choose the
latter, you should examine the scale, dimensions and the lower left
corner of Profile.dwg, and try to duplicate those dimensions and
corner coordinates in your own drawing. It is also important to
store all your standard profile sheets in the Support subdirectory.
You cannot draw Right to Left in Sheet mode. Note that the Sheet
mode will re-orient the centerline left to right, which causes text
(such as the stationing) to plot upside down, until you use the Flip
Text command under the Edit menu, Text command to flip the text
right side up.
n Layout Name: This is the name given to the paper space view,
which allows you to toggle from Model Space to the actual Layout
Name (which puts you in Paper Space). If more than one sheet is

Draw Profile
595
 generated by the Draw Profile command (for example, a long
centerline is selected), then if the first Paper Space sheet is Layout1,
then the second sheet will automatically become Layout2, the third
Layout3, etc.

n Sheet Width: This is the profile width, in inches, on the sheet.

Even though the sheet is a fixed size, you can limit the length of the
plot to 32 inches or less with this entry. If we used an entry of 16 for
the example profile above, two plan and profile sheets would be
created, because the first sheet would go from station 10+00 to
13+20 (16 inches at a 20 scale) and the second sheet would finish
from 13+20 to 15+00. In English units, a typical entry here would be
30 for 30 inches.
n Draw Plan: With this clicked on, you are asked to select the
polyline that represents the centerline, and the program best fits the
centerline in the plan view portion of the plan and profile sheet,
then captures all of the associated drawing that will fit in that paper
space window. If the length of the polyline divided by the scale
exceeds the Sheet Width entry (for example, 5000 feet of road
divided by 50 Horiz. Scale is 100, which exceeds the sheet width),
then multiple plan and profile sheets will be automatically created.
A 5000 foot road at 50 scale with a 30-inch sheet width, would lead

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

596
 to 3 full sheets of 1500 feet each and a "leftover" fourth sheet
showing the last 500 feet.
n View Lower Y: This sets the lower position of the paper space
window for the plan view. With Lower Y set to 9 (inches above the
base of the sheet) and Top Y set to 21, there is a 12-inch vertical
window, running the full Sheet Width (typically 30 to 32). This
window for the plan view can be expanded or reduced with these
settings
n Top Y: This sets the top vertical limit for the plan view window,
measured in inches from the bottom of the plan and profile sheet.
n Fit Each Vertical: With this option turned on, the command will
recognize the lower and upper vertical elevations of the profile and
set the vertical axis elevation range to enclose the actual elevation
limits of the profile. With this option turned off, you can enter the
lower vertical elevation range, dropping it down further to increase
the lower margin. Whether or not the Fit Each Vertical option is
turned on or off, you are always prompted for the top elevation
range.
n Scale 1:1: With this clicked off (the default), the profile will draw in
scaled units (eg. 1"=50’), with a 1500-foot profile measuring 1500
feet. With this clicked on, the units will be 1:1. A 30-inch profile
sheet will measure 30 units, even though the centerline and profile
may be 1500 feet in length. If the Scale 1:1 option is turned on,
then you cannot check the distances of features using commands
such as Bearing and Distance on the Inquiry menu, because the
distances will be scaled down by a factor equal to the drawing scale
(for example, at 1"=50’, the reduction in scale factor is 1/50 or 0.02).
n Overlap Station: In multiple plan and profile sheet plotting, after
the first sheet, all subsequent sheets will have the first 2 stations in
common with the last 2 stations on the previous sheet, if the
Overlap Station option is turned on. For example, if the last 2
stations are 14+50 and 15+00 on sheet 1, then sheet 2 will start with
14+50, then 15+00, with this option turned on. With this option
turned off, if the first sheet ends with 15+00, then the second sheet
would begin with 15+00.

Draw Profile
597
 4 You must choose which annotation features to use. These apply to
both standard model space plotting and to plan and profile sheet
plotting in paper space.

n Label Scale: Click on this option and you obtain a scale drawn at the
lower left corner of the profile, as shown below.

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

598
n Draw Horz Label Box: This option draws a boxed area underneath
the profile. It is best used in standard Draw Grid mode, with Draw
Sheets clicked off. An example of the resulting plot is shown below.

n Decimals: The default is 3 decimal places, typical of metric

accuracy (1 mm). This is applied to the stations, partial distances,
and elevations of the break points on the profile. This decimal
setting is in association with the Horizontal Label Box option.
n Vertical Lines: This option enables or disables the drawing of the
vertical lines that appear in the graphic above, also in association
with the Horizontal Label Box option.

Draw Profile
599
 n PVI ’V’: This option plots a special "V" look above all vertical curve
PVIs (points of vertical intersection), as shown below.

n Draw Break Pt Elev: This option draws elevations vertically above

all break points on a profile. It is typically applied to generic ground
profiles and not to road profiles. See the example below.

n Decimals (for Break Points): Typically a setting of 1 or 2 decimals

is applied to break points for existing ground.
n Text Scaler (for Break Points): This text scaler is multiplied by the
Drawing Scale set in the Drawing Setup command under the
Settings menu, to determine the actual text height. For example, if
the horizontal scale is set to 50, a text scaler setting of 0.1 will
produce a text height of 5.

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

600
n Ticks Only: If this option is selected, full grid lines are not drawn.
Instead, a fringe of ticks are drawn along the two vertical axes and
the horizontal axis, as seen below:

n Match Line Elevations: For high relief profiles that might

otherwise extend up and into the plan view portion of the drawing,
the Match Line Elevations option can be used to break the profile
and redraw the remaining portion with its own vertical scale, as
seen above.
n Elevation Range: This is the range of elevations that is used in
conjunction with the Match Line Elevation option. If the range is
exceeded (that is, if the range above is 20), the program will break
the profile and draw the remainder with a separate vertical axis
range.
n Draw Break Pt Desc: Similar to the Draw Break Pt Elev option, this
option draws vertically, at each break point, the description
associated with the profile points. If a profile is made by the Profile
from Surface Entities command, there is an option to store the layer
of any polyline used for interpolation in the description for the
profile break point. In addition, within the Input-Edit Profile
command, you can enter a description. The descriptions are plotted
with this option turned on.
n Design Box: This is very similar to the Draw Horizontal Label Box
option discussed above. This draws three rows of information
beneath the profile, with text plotted vertically. The first row shows
the elevation of each vertex or break point in the profile. The
second row shows the "partial" or incremental distance between
break points, and the third row shows the station of each break

Draw Profile
601
 point. This command does not draw any line work associated with
these rows of text.
n Offset Station Text: When clicked on, this option offsets the
horizontal axis text by an amount equal to about 6 standard text
characters, allowing the insertion of elevation or other information
above the stationing.
n Offset Elev Text: This option offsets the left-side vertical axis text a
distance equal to the horizontal scale.
n Station Text Orientation: This option allows you to specify the
orientation of the station text shown along the bottom of the profile.
The example below shows both options.

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

602
5 Scale Entries in the Draw Profile dialog box are described below. These
distinct scale, grid, and text settings permit metric profile plots.
n Horizontal Scale: This scale applies primarily to text size. If the
text scaler is 0.1 and the horizontal scale is 50, then text size will be
0.1 * 50 = 5.
n Horizontal Grid Interval: This sets the spacing of the grids that
run vertically from the horizontal scale.
n Horizontal Text Interval: This sets the spacing of the stationing
text that appears along the horizontal axis.
n Vertical Scale: This scale sets the vertical exaggeration of the
profile. If the horizontal scale and vertical scale are the same, then
the vertical is not exaggerated. Profiles are often plotted with a 5 or
10 vertical exaggeration. For example, the horizontal scale may be
50, but the vertical scale may be 5.
n Vertical Grid Interval: This sets the spacing of the grids that run
horizontally between the vertical axes on the left and right side of
the profile.
n Vertical Text Interval: This sets the spacing of the elevation text
that appears along the vertical axes.
n Axis Text Scaler: This sets the size of the horizontal and vertical
axis text to the horizontal scale times the scaler, when you are
working in English units. In metric units, the text height would be
0.01*horizontal scale*scaler.
n Label Text Scaler: This sets the size of text used for vertical curve
annotation to the horizontal scale times the scaler, when you are
working in English units. In metric units the text height would be
0.01*horizontal scale*scaler.
Here is an example of metric entries that plot effectively, based on a
metric working scale of 1:500:

6 Starting Station and Ending Station are also controlled in the dialog
box.
n Starting Station: This field defaults to the starting station in the
selected profile(s). If changed, the starting station can move
forward, clipping out the first part of the profile. When you are not

Draw Profile
603
 plotting sheets, you must set the starting station to the end of the
previous sheet’s ending station to force a multiple sheet layout.
n Ending Station: This field defaults to the ending station in the
selected profile(s). A profile that is 3000 feet in length could be
plotted in 2 parts, first station 0 to 1500, then station 1500 to 3000,
using the Starting Station and Ending Station options.

7 The Profiles to Draw portion of the Draw Profile dialog box allows up
to 3 profiles to be selected and plotted simultaneously. These profiles
can be distinctly layered using the Layers button at the base of the
dialog box. If the goal is to plot more than 4 profiles on the same
drawing, run the Draw Profile command a second time, and specify up
to 3 more profiles, choosing the same scaling and lower left corner for
placement. Be sure to turn off Draw Grid when placing additional
profiles on a pre-drawn profile. Otherwise the grid and axis text may be
drawn more than once.
When OK is clicked at the base of the dialog box, the prompting at the
command line continues. In this example, assume that a road profile
has been selected, since more prompts will occur with road profiles than
with generic profiles.
8 Erase existing profile [<Yes>/No]? N
This prompt appears only if you have previously drawn the profile.
9 Bottom Elevation of Profile Grid <540.0>: Press ENTER
10 Top Elevation of Profile Grid <550.0>: Press ENTER
11 Pick Starting Point for Grid <8779.55 , 5716.36>: Pick a point for the
lower left corner of the grid
12 Assuming a road profile has been selected, the following dialog box
appears:

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

604
n K-value: This option is a function of the change in slopes on either
side of the point of vertical intersection.
n Sight Distance: This option is computed by the delta slope and is a
function of whether the vertical curve is a sag or a crest.
n Include Grades: This option draws slopes along the tangent
portion of the vertical curves, with slope direction arrows.
n Draw Vertical PVC and PVT Lines: This option draws vertical
lines emanating from the PVC and PVT of all vertical curves.
n Position Text Below Line: This option draws the PVC, PVI, and
PVT information under the picked location for the vertical curve
labeling, as shown below.

n Pick Each Label Position: If there were more than one vertical
curve in the profile, this option allows you to pick a vertical
position for each of the vertical curve’s annotation.
n Number of Decimal Places: The number entered here controls the
decimal places in the elevation and stationing annotation for
vertical curves.

Draw Profile
605
 13 Pick Vertical Position for VC Text: Pick a point
Select a point vertically that corresponds to the position of the left-
right lines under which is written percent grade and above which is
written the vertical curve length, sight distance, and K-factor, if
requested. The PVC, PVI, and PVT stations and elevations are written
above or below this picked point depending on dialog box settings.

Additional Prompting for Multiple Profiles:

1 Detected multiple profiles within c:\Program Files\Autodesk Field
Survey\data\example.pro.

NOTE The Profile from Surface Entities command can store additional
profiles into the same profile file.

Draw profiles on same or different grids (Same/<Different>)? Press

ENTER
This determines whether the multiple profiles will be drawn together
on the same grid or drawn on separate grids.
2 Uniform or variable grid size (Uniform/<Variable>)? Press ENTER
This selects between one-size-fits all grids or individually sized grids for
each profile.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface

➤ Prerequisite: A .PRO file and a centerline polyline.
➤ Keyboard Command: DRAWPROF

Profile To Points

Function
This command creates points along a profile. The points are stored in
the current coordinate file and can be drawn on the screen. A polyline
in plan view that represents the centerline is used to determine the X,Y
positions of the points. The point elevations are derived from the
profile. The station is stored in the point description.

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

606
 Prompts
1 The Profile to Points Settings dialog box allows you to set parameters
for the command.
■ Create points at each profile station-elevation: This option
allows you to create points at each PVI station in the profile.
■ Create points at station intervals: This option allows you to create
points at set station intervals.
■ Station Interval: This field allows you to set the station interval for
generating points.
■ Station to Begin Intervals: The field allows you to set the starting
station for generating points.
■ Create Points on Centerline: This option allows you to create
points directly on the profile centerline.
■ Create Left Offset Points: This option allows you to create points
on a left offset from the centerline.
■ Create Right Offset Points: This option allows you to create points
on a right offset from the centerline.
■ Vertical Offset of Profile: This field allows you to set the vertical
offset.
■ Plot Points: This option allows you to plot to the screen any points
generated by the Profile to Points command.
■ Layer: This field allows you to set the layer for the points
generated.

Profile To Points
607
 ■ Include profile name in point descriptions: This option allows
you to append the name of the .pro file to each point description.
■ Decimal Places: This allows you to set the precision for both the
elevation and the station for the points generated.

2 Select profile centerline polyline: pick a polyline

3 Starting station of centerline <0.0>: enter starting station
4 Choose Profile to Process.
Select .pro file from list.
5 Starting point number <100>: enter an unused point number
6 Station for additional point (ENTER to end): enter a station number
or press ENTER to end the command
➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Surface
➤ Prerequisite: A .PRO file and a centerline polyline.
➤ Keyboard Command: PRO2PTS

Chapter 15 Surface Commands

608
16-TITLE.fm Page 1 Monday, February 5, 2001 10:35 AM

Window Commands
16
This chapter provides information on using the In this chapter
commands from the Window menu to control the ■ Managing display windows

appearance and orientation of multiple drawings in

windows on your screen.

609
 Cascade

Function
This command overlaps windows, leaving title bars visible.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Window

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: None

Tile Horizontally

Function
This command arranges windows in horizontal, nonoverlapping tiles.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Window

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: None

Tile Vertically

Function
This command arranges windows in vertical, nonoverlapping tiles.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Window

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: None

Arrange Icons

Function
This command arranges the window icons.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Window

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: None

Chapter 16 Window Commands

610
17-TITLE.fm Page 1 Thursday, February 1, 2001 4:25 PM

Help Commands
17
This chapter provides information on using the In this chapter
commands from the Help menu to assist you in using ■ Accessing help

Autodesk Field Survey.

611
 Autodesk Point A
This command will open your default system Internet browser and
display the Autodesk Point A Web site.

Autodesk Point A™ i s an industry-focused portal that saves you time

locating design resources and helps you stay connected with your
professional colleagues. Point A is your starting point on the
Internet for:

■ Industry news, links, and resources.

■ Searchable databases of parts, materials, and symbols.
■ Project-hosting services that help design teams to collaborate
more efficiently.

Chapter 17 Help Commands

612
■ Hosted software applications.
■ Support documents, product tips, discussion groups, online
training, books, and other resources to help you get the most out of
your Autodesk software.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Help

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: None

Support Assistance
Support Assistance is designed to make your search for technical
support information as quick and easy as possible. You can search by
keyword or by category.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Help

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: SUPPORTA

Field Survey Manual

Function
This command opens the Autodesk Field Survey on-line Help File.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Help

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: HELP

Support Assistance
613
 About Field Survey

Function
About Field Survey displays the Autodesk Field Survey version number,
serial number, license information, and copyright information.

➤ Pull-Down Menu Location: Help

➤ Prerequisite: None
➤ Keyboard Command: ABOUT_SCAD

Chapter 17 Help Commands

614
AppA-TITLE.fm Page 1 Monday, February 5, 2001 10:38 AM

System Variables
A
Autodesk Field Survey stores the values for its operating In this appendix
environment and some of its commands in system ■ System variable definitions

variables. Each system variable has an associated type:

integer, real, point, switch, or text string. You can

examine any system variable and change any writable

system variable directly on the command line by using

the SETVAR command. Many system variables are also

accessible through dialog box options.

615
 APERTURE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 10

Sets the display size for the aperture, in pixels. The aperture is the
selection tool used in drawing commands.

ATTDIA
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 0

Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box for attribute
value entry.
0 Issues prompts on the command line
1 Uses a dialog box

ATTMODE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 1

Controls display of attributes.

0 Off: Makes all attributes invisible
1 Normal: Retains current visibility of each attribute: visible
attributes are displayed; invisible attributes are not
2 On: Makes all attributes visible

Appendix A System Variables

616
ATTREQ
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 1

Determines whether the INSERT command uses default attribute

settings during insertion of blocks.
0 Assumes the defaults for the values of all attributes
1 Turns on prompts or dialog box for attribute values, as specified
by ATTDIA

AUTOSNAP
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 63

Controls AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. Also turns on polar

and object snap tracking, and controls the display of polar and object
snap tracking tooltips. The system variable value is the sum of the
following bit values:
0 Turns off the AutoSnap marker, tooltips, and magnet. Also turns off
polar tracking, object snap tracking, and tooltips for polar and object
snap tracking
1 Turns on the AutoSnap marker
2 Turns on the AutoSnap tooltips
4 Turns on the AutoSnap magnet
8 Turns on polar tracking
16 Turns on object snap tracking
32 Turns on tooltips for polar tracking and object snap tracking

ATTREQ
617
 BLIPMODE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 0

Controls whether marker blips are visible. If you type blipmode at the
command line, you will be prompted for a setting of on or off rather
than 0 or 1.
0 or Off Turns off marker blips
1 or On Turns on marker blips

CECOLOR
n Type: String
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: "BYLAYER"

Sets the color of new objects.

CMDECHO
n Type: Integer
n (Not saved)
n Initial value: 1

Controls whether Autodesk Field Survey echoes prompts and input.

0 Turns off echoing
1 Turns on echoing

Appendix A System Variables

618
COORDS
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 1

Controls when coordinates are updated on the status line.

0 Coordinate display is updated as you specify points with the
pointing device
1 Display of absolute coordinates is updated continuously
2 Display of absolute coordinates is updated continuously, and
distance and angle from last point are displayed when a distance or
angle is requested

CURSORSIZE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 5

Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size.

Valid settings range from 1 to 100 percent. When set to 100, the
crosshairs are full-screen and the ends of the crosshairs are never
visible. When less than 100, the ends of the crosshairs may be visible
when the cursor is moved to one edge of the screen.

DIMSTYLE
n (Read-only)
n Type: String
n Saved in: Drawing

DIMSTYLE is both a command and a system variable. The DIMSTYLE

system variable shows the current dimension style. To display the
DIMSTYLE system variable, use the SETVAR command. The DIMSTYLE
system variable is read-only; you cannot change its value on the
command line. To change the current dimension style, use the
DIMSTYLE command.

COORDS
619
 DIMZIN
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0

Controls the suppression of zeros in the primary unit value. DIMZIN

stores this value when you enter it on the command line or set it under
Primary Units in the Annotation dialog box. DIMZIN values 0–3 affect
feet-and-inch dimensions only.
0 Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero inches
1 Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches
2 Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches
3 Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet
4 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000
becomes .5000)
8 Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example,
12.5000 becomes 12.5)
12 Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for example, 0.5000
becomes .5)

DRAGMODE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 2

Controls the display of objects being dragged. If you type dragmode at

the command line, you will be prompted for off, on, or auto rather
than 0, 1, or 2.
0 or Off Does not display an outline of the object as you drag it.
1 or On Displays the outline of the object as you drag it only if you
enter drag on the command line after selecting the object to drag
2 or Auto Always displays an outline of the object as you drag it

Appendix A System Variables

620
ELEVATION
n Type: Real
n Saved in: Drawing (viewport specific)
n Initial value: 0.0000

Stores the current elevation relative to the current user coordinate

system (UCS) for the current viewport in the current space.

FILEDIA
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 1

Suppresses display of the file dialog boxes.

0 Does not display dialog boxes. You can still request a file dialog box
to appear by entering a tilde (~) in response to the command’s prompt.
1 Displays file dialog boxes.

GRIDMODE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0

Specifies whether the grid is turned on or off.

0 Turns the grid off
1 Turns the grid on

ELEVATION
621
 GRIDUNIT
n Type: 2D point
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0.5000,0.5000

Specifies the grid spacing (X and Y) for the current viewport.

GRIPBLOCK
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 0

Controls the assignment of grips in blocks.

0 Assigns a grip only to the insertion point of the block
1 Assigns grips to objects within the block

GRIPCOLOR
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 5

Controls the color of unselected grips (drawn as box outlines). The

valid range is 1 to 255.

GRIPHOT
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 1

Controls the color of selected grips (drawn as filled boxes). The valid
range is 1 to 255.

Appendix A System Variables

622
GRIPS
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 1

Controls the use of selection set grips for the Stretch, Move, Rotate,
Scale, and Mirror Grip modes.
0 Turns off grips
1 Turns on grips
To adjust the size of the grips and the effective selection area used by
the cursor when you snap to a grip, use GRIPSIZE.

GRIPSIZE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial Value: 3

Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. The valid range is 1 to 255.

HIGHLIGHT
n Type: Integer
n (Not saved)
n Initial value: 1

Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with

grips.
0 Turns off object selection highlighting
1 Turns on object selection highlighting

GRIPS
623
 LAYOUTREGENCTL
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 0

Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab and layout
tabs. For each tab, the display list is updated either by regenerating the
drawing when you switch to that tab or by saving the display list to
memory and regenerating only the modified objects when you switch
to that tab. Changing the LAYOUTREGENCTL setting can improve
performance.
0 The drawing is regenerated each time you switch tabs.
1 For the Model tab and the last layout made current, the display list
is saved to memory and regenerations are suppressed when you switch
between the two tabs. For all other layouts, regenerations still occur
when you switch to those tabs.
2 The drawing is regenerated the first time you switch to each tab.
For the remainder of the drawing session, the display list is saved
to memory and regenerations are suppressed when you switch to
those tabs.
The performance gain achieved by changing the LAYOUTREGENCTL
setting is dependent on several factors, including the drawing size and
type, the objects contained in the drawing, the amount of available
memory, and the effect of other open drawings or applications. When
LAYOUTREGENCTL is set to 1 or 2, the amount of additional memory
used is the size of the Model tab’s display list multiplied by the number
of viewports in each layout for which the display list is saved.
If LAYOUTREGENCTL is set to 1 or 2 and performance seems slow in
general or when you switch between tabs for which the display list is
saved, consider changing to a setting of 0 or 1 to find the optimal
balance for your work environment.

NOTE Regardless of the LAYOUTREGENCTL setting, if you redefine a

block or undo a tab switch, the drawing is regenerated the first time you
switch to any tab that contains saved viewports.

Appendix A System Variables

624
LIMCHECK
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0

Controls the creation of objects outside the drawing limits.

0 Objects can be created outside the limits
1 Objects cannot be created outside the limits

LISPINIT
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 1

When single-document interface is enabled, specifies whether

AutoLISP-defined functions and variables are preserved when you open
a new drawing or whether they are valid in the current drawing session
only.
0 AutoLISP functions and variables are preserved from drawing
to drawing
1 AutoLISP functions and variables are valid in the current
drawing only

LTSCALE
n Type: Real
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 1.0000

Sets the global linetype scale factor. The linetype scale factor cannot
equal zero.

LIMCHECK
625
 MAXSORT
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 200

Sets the maximum number of symbol names or block names sorted by

listing commands. If the total number of items exceeds this value, no
items are sorted.

MBUTTONPAN
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 1

Controls the behavior of the third button or wheel on the pointing

device.
0 Supports the action defined in the Autodesk Field Survey menu file.
1 Supports panning by holding and dragging the button or wheel.

ORTHOMODE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0

Constrains cursor movement to the perpendicular. When

ORTHOMODE is turned on, the cursor can move only horizontally or
vertically relative to the UCS and the current grid rotation angle.
0 Turns off Ortho mode
1 Turns on Ortho mode

Appendix A System Variables

626
OSMODE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 4133

Sets running Object Snap modes using the following bitcodes.

0 NONe
1 ENDpoint
2 MIDpoint
4 CENter
8 NODe
16 QUAdrant
32 INTersection
64 INSertion
128 PERpendicular
256 TANgent
512 NEArest
1024 QUIck
2048 APParent Intersection
4096 EXTension
8192 PARallel
To specify more than one object snap, enter the sum of their
values. For example, entering 3 specifies the Endpoint (bitcode 1)
and Midpoint (bitcode 2) object snaps. Entering 16383 specifies all
object snaps.
When object snaps are switched off using the Osnap button on the
status bar, a bitcode of 16384 (0x4000) is returned, in addition to the
normal value of OSMODE. With this additional value, you can
distinguish this mode from Object Snap modes that have been turned
off from within the Drafting Settings dialog box. Setting this bit toggles
running object snaps off. Setting OSMODE to a value with this bit off
toggles running object snaps on.

OSMODE
627
 PDMODE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0

Controls how point objects are displayed. Autodesk Field Survey uses a
setting of 0 (zero).

PDSIZE
n Type: Real
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0.0000

Sets the display size for point objects. This variable has no effect when
PDMODE is set to the Autodesk Field Survey default of 0 (zero).
0 Creates a point at 5 percent of the drawing area height
>0 Specifies an absolute size
<0 Specifies a percentage of the viewport size

PICKADD
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 1

Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection

set or add to it.
0 Turns off PICKADD. The objects most recently selected become the
selection set. Previously selected objects are removed from the
selection set. Add more objects to the selection set by pressing SHIFT
while selecting.
1 Turns on PICKADD. Each object selected, either individually or by
windowing, is added to the current selection set. To remove objects
from the set, press SHIFT while selecting.

Appendix A System Variables

628
PICKAUTO
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 1

Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects prompt.

0 Turns off PICKAUTO
1 Draws a selection window (for either a window or a crossing
selection) automatically at the Select Objects prompt

PICKBOX
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 3

Sets the object selection target height, in pixels.

PICKDRAG
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 0

Controls the method of drawing a selection window.

0 Draws the selection window using two points. Click the pointing
device at one corner then click to select another corner.
1 Draws the selection window using dragging. Click one corner and
drag the pointing device; release the button at the other corner.

PICKAUTO
629
 PICKFIRST
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 1

Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or

after you issue a command.
0 Turns off PICKFIRST; you select objects after you issue a command
1 Turns on PICKFIRST; you select objects before you issue a command

PICKSTYLE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 1

Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection.

0 No group selection or associative hatch selection
1 Group selection
2 Associative hatch selection
3 Group selection and associative hatch selection

PLINEGEN
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0

Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a

2D polyline. Does not apply to polylines with tapered segments.
0 Generates polylines to start and end with a dash at each vertex
1 Generates the linetype in a continuous pattern around the vertices
of the polyline

Appendix A System Variables

630
PLINETYPE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 2

Specifies whether Autodesk Field Survey uses optimized 2D polylines.

PLINETYPE controls both the creation of new polylines with the PLINE
command and the conversion of existing polylines in drawings from
previous releases.
0 Polylines in older drawings are not converted when opened; PLINE
creates old-format polylines
1 Polylines in older drawings are not converted when opened; PLINE
creates optimized polylines
2 Polylines in older drawings are converted when opened; PLINE
creates optimized polylines

PLOTROTMODE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 2

Controls the orientation of plots.

0 Rotates the effective plotting area so the corner with the Rotation
icon aligns with the paper at the lower left for 0, top left for 90, top
right for 180, and lower right for 270.
X and Y origin offsets are calculated relative to the lower-left corner.
1 Aligns the lower-left corner of the effective plotting area with the
lower-left corner of the paper.
2 Works the same as 0 value except that the X and Y origin offsets are
calculated relative to the rotated origin position.

PLINETYPE
631
 PLQUIET
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 0

Controls the display of optional dialog boxes and nonfatal errors for
batch plotting and scripts.
0 Displays plot dialog boxes and nonfatal errors
1 Logs nonfatal errors and doesn’t display plot-related dialog boxes

PSLTSCALE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 1

Controls paper space linetype scaling.

0 No special linetype scaling. Linetype dash lengths are based on the
drawing units of the space (model or paper) in which the objects were
created. Scaled by the global LTSCALE factor.
1 Viewport scaling governs linetype scaling. If TILEMODE is set to 0,
dash lengths are based on paper space drawing units, even for objects
in model space. In this mode, viewports can have varying
magnifications, yet display linetypes identically. For a specific linetype,
the dash lengths of a line in a viewport are the same as the dash
lengths of a line in paper space. You can still control the dash lengths
with LTSCALE.
When you change PSLTSCALE or use a command such as ZOOM with
PSLTSCALE set to 1, objects in viewports are not automatically
regenerated with the new linetype scale. Use the REGEN command to
update the linetype scales in each viewport.

Appendix A System Variables

632
PSTYLEMODE
n (Read Only)
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 1

Indicates whether the current drawing is in a Color-Dependent or

Named Plot Style mode.
0 Uses named plot style tables in the current drawing
1 Uses color-dependent plot style tables in the current drawing

PSTYLEPOLICY
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 1

Controls whether an object’s color property is associated with its plot

style. The new value you assign affects only newly created drawings.
0 No association is made between color and plot style. The plot style
for new objects is set to the default defined in DEFPLSTYLE. The plot
style for new layers is set to the default defined in DEFLPLSTYLE.
1 An object’s plot style is associated with its color.

PSVPSCALE
n Type: Real
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0

Sets the view scale factor for all newly created viewports. The view scale
factor is defined by comparing the ratio of units in paper space to the
units in newly created model space viewports. The view scale factor
you set is used with the VPORTS command. A value of 0 means the
scale factor is Scaled to Fit. A scale must be a positive real value.

PSTYLEMODE
633
 RASTERPREVIEW
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 1

Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing.
0 No preview image is created
1 Preview image created

REGENMODE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 1

Controls automatic regeneration of the drawing.

0 Turns off the REGENAUTO command
1 Turns on the REGENAUTO command

SAVETIME
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 120

Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes.

0 Turns off automatic saving
>0 Saves the drawing at intervals specified by the nonzero
integer automatically.
The SAVETIME timer starts as soon as you make a change to a drawing.
It is reset and restarted by a manual QSAVE, SAVE, or SAVEAS. The
current drawing is saved to the path specified in the Options Dialog by
the SAVEFILEPATH system variable.

Appendix A System Variables

634
SNAPANG
n Type: Real
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0

Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current viewport. The
angle you specify is relative to the UCS.
Changes to this variable are not reflected in the grid until the display is
refreshed. Autodesk Field Survey does not redraw automatically when
system variable settings are changed.

SNAPBASE
n Type: 2D point
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0.0000,0.0000

Sets the snap and grid origin point for the current viewport relative to
the current UCS.
Changes to this variable are not reflected in the grid until the display is
refreshed. Autodesk Field Survey does not redraw automatically when
system variable settings are changed.

SNAPISOPAIR
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0

Controls the isometric plane for the current viewport.

0 Left
1 Top
2 Right

SNAPANG
635
 SNAPMODE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0

Turns the Snap mode on and off.

0 Snap off
1 Snap on for the current viewport

SNAPSTYL
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0

Sets the snap style for the current viewport.

0 Standard (rectangular snap)
1 Isometric snap

SNAPTYPE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Registry
n Initial value: 0

Sets the snap style for the current viewport.

0 Grid, or standard snap.
1 Polar snap. Snaps along polar angle increments. Use polar snap with
polar and object snap tracking.

Appendix A System Variables

636
SNAPUNIT
n Type: 2D point
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0.5000,0.5000

Sets the snap spacing for the current viewport. If SNAPSTYL is set to 1,
Autodesk Field Survey adjusts the X value of SNAPUNIT automatically
to accommodate the isometric snap.
Changes to this system variable are not reflected in the grid until the
display is refreshed. Autodesk Field Survey does not redraw
automatically when system variable settings are changed.

TABMODE
n Type: Integer
n (Not saved)
n Initial value: 0

Controls the use of the tablet. For more information on using and
configuring a tablet, see Chapter 8, “Settings.”
0 Turns off Tablet mode
1 Turns on Tablet mode

THICKNESS
n Type: Real
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 0.0000

Sets the current 3D solid thickness

SNAPUNIT
637
 TILEMODE
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 1

Makes the Model tab or the last layout tab current.

0 Makes the last active layout tab (paper space) active
1 Makes the Model tab active

UCSICON
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing (viewport specific)
n Initial value: 3

Displays the UCS icon for the current viewport using bitcode.
UCSICON is both a command and a system variable. It is the sum of
the following:
0 No icon displayed
1 On; icon is displayed
2 Origin; if icon is displayed, the icon floats to the UCS
origin, if possible
3 On and displayed at origin

WORLDVIEW
n Type: Integer
n Saved in: Drawing
n Initial value: 1

Determines whether input to the Viewpoint 3D command is relative to

the WCS (default) or the current UCS.
0 UCS remains unchanged
1 UCS changes to the WCS for the duration of the
Viewpoint 3D command.

Appendix A System Variables

638
AppB-TITLE.fm Page 1 Monday, February 5, 2001 10:46 AM

Standard Libraries
B
This chapter contains illustrations of the contents of In this appendix
Autodesk Field Survey provides standard library files for ■ Standard linetypes
■ Standard hatch patterns
you to use to define linetypes, hatch patterns, and text
■ Standard text and symbol fonts
fonts. This appendix provides illustrations of the
■ TrueType™ fonts
contents of these files.

639
 Standard Linetypes
Autodesk Field Survey provides a library of standard linetypes in the
surv.lin file.

Appendix B Standard Libraries

640
Standard Hatch Patterns
Autodesk Field Survey provides a library of standard hatch patterns in
the surv.pat file.

Standard Hatch Patterns

641
Appendix B Standard Libraries
642
Standard Hatch Patterns
643
Appendix B Standard Libraries
644
Standard Hatch Patterns
645
Appendix B Standard Libraries
646
Standard Text and Symbol Fonts
Autodesk Field Survey provides a library of standard fonts listed in the
table below.

Standard Text and Symbol Fonts

Font Description

txt The standard Autodesk Field Survey text font. This simple font is
described by a minimum of vectors so it can be drawn very quickly.

monotxt Monospaced txt font. The characters in this font are the same as
those in the txt font, except that the space allotted to each
character is the same (monospaced). Thus, this font is preferable
for construction of lists or tables where the items must line up
vertically.

romans A simplex (single stroke, sans serif) roman font drawn by means of
many short line segments. This font produces smoother-looking
characters than those of the txt font.

romand Similar to the romans font, but defined using double strokes. This
font produces thicker, darker characters and is highly
recommended for plotting on high-resolution printers such as laser
printers.

romanc A complex (double stroke, with serifs) roman font.

romant A triplex (triple stroke, with serifs) roman font similar to romanc.

italicc A complex italic font (double stroke, with serifs).

italict A triplex italic font (triple stroke, with serifs).

scripts A simplex script font (single stroke).

scriptc A complex script font (double stroke).

greeks A simplex Greek font (single stroke, sans serif).

greekc A complex Greek font (double stroke, with serifs).

Standard Text and Symbol Fonts

647
 Standard Text and Symbol Fonts (continued)

Font Description

gothice Gothic English.

gothicg Gothic German.

gothici Gothic Italian.

syastro Astronomical symbols.

symap Mapping symbols.

symath Mathematical symbols.

symeteo Meteorological symbols.

symusic Musical symbols.

Examples of Standard Text and Symbol

Fonts

Appendix B Standard Libraries

648
Examples of Standard Text and Symbol Fonts
649
 TrueType Fonts

Autodesk Field Survey provides the following TrueType® fonts.

6ZLVV5HJXODU
6ZLVV&RQGHQVHG
6ZLVV([SDQGHG
6ZLVV2XWOLQH
0RQRVSDFH
'XWFK5HJXODU
'XWFK([SDQGHG
%DQN*RWKLF
&RPPHUFLDO6FULSW
9LQHWD
&RPPHUFLDO3L Commercial Pi
Universal Math 1 Universal Math 1

Appendix B Standard Libraries

650
Index

B
.CRD file ................................................ 309
Backsight................................................ 448
. FLT file................................................. 561
Bearing & Distance ................................ 231
.GIS File ................................................. 297
Best Fit Line ........................................... 488
.GRD file ................................................ 568
Best Fit Line Linear Regression .............. 489
.GRD file format .................................... 571
Best-Fit Circle......................................... 487
.PRO file................................................. 591
Bezier smoothing ................................... 565
.RW5 file ................................................ 455
Boundary Polyline ................................. 214
3D Entity to 2D Entity ...................... 162
Break 3D Polyline .................................. 161
3D Face .................................................. 561
Break at 2nd Point ................................... 135
3D Grid File ........................................... 568
Break at Intersection.............................. 134
3D Viewing
Break by Closed Polyline ....................... 133
3D Viewer Window........................... 172
Break, At Selected Point ......................... 136
Viewpoint 3D .................................... 174
Break, Select Object, Two Points ........... 135
4 Sided Building .................................... 487
Breaklines............................... 189, 560, 572
Buffer Offset........................................... 221
A Building Set Back ........................... 487, 490
Access Requirements ................................. 7
Add Intersection Points......................... 155 C
Add Polyline Vertex............................... 155
Calculate Area................................ 497, 498
Align ...................................................... 148
Change Attribute Style .......................... 137
Align by Two Pairs of Points ................. 313
Change Block/Inserts............................. 139
Align Points ........................................... 327
Change Elevation .................................. 138
Alphanumeric........................................ 275
Change Layer ......................................... 183
Alphanumeric point numbers............... 310
Change Point Layer/Color..................... 336
Angle Right............................................ 451
Change Polyline Elevation .................... 153
Angle-Bearing Code............................... 451
Change Polyline Width ......................... 154
Area by Lines & Arcs.............................. 496
Change Properties.................................. 136
Area Label Defaults................................ 492
Change Style .......................................... 137
Area Radial from Curve ......................... 499
Change Text Oblique Angle .................. 145
Arrowhead ............................................. 212
Change Text Size ................................... 144
Attribute Layout Number .............. 277, 295
Change Text Style.................................. 143
Authorizing Field Survey ......................... 14
Change Text Width ............................... 144
Autodesk Point A................................... 612
Circle...................................................... 191
Automatic Point Numbering......... 278, 295
Close ...................................................... 108
Automatic Save File Location ................ 253
Closure................................................... 493
Automatic Zoom Center........................ 297

Index
651
Closure Error ......................................... 494 D
Compare Points ..................................... 319
Deflection angle..................................... 451
Complex Linetypes................................ 640
Delete Layer ........................................... 125
Compound Curve.................................. 205
Delete Points from File .......................... 317
Compress CRD File................................ 312
Description for Points............................ 318
Configure Field Survey .......................... 272
Design Lot.............................................. 476
Contouring ............................................ 560
Design Pad Template ............................. 580
Convert LDD-AEC Contours ................. 585
Different Radius Tolerance .................... 493
CooRDinate File ............................ 451, 453
Digitizer ................................................. 263
CooRDinate File Utilities....................... 309
Display Order
Coordinate Transformation .................. 312
Bring to Front .................................... 179
Copy ...................................................... 126
Send to Back ...................................... 179
Copy (clipboard) ................................... 129
Display settings...................................... 254
Copy CRD File ....................................... 311
Display-Edit File..................................... 118
Copyright Information ......................... 614
Distance-Distance Intersection.............. 462
CRD File Format .................................... 275
Disturbed area................................ 576, 581
Create Drawing...................................... 218
Divide Along Entity ............................... 466
Create Points from Entities ................... 468
Divide Between Points........................... 465
Create Profile from
Draw By Example................................... 210
Surface Entities ................................ 588
Draw Entities by Point Number............. 309
Crosshairs .............................................. 244
Draw Lot File ......................................... 482
Cul-De-Sac Design ................................. 484
Draw Nodes Only .................................. 299
Curve
Draw Profile ........................................... 592
2 Tangents, Arc Length ..................... 198
Drawing Block ....................................... 216
2 Tangents, Chord Length ................ 199
Drawing Explorer................................... 101
2 Tangents, Degree of Curve............. 200
Drawing Inspector ................................. 229
2 Tangents, External ......................... 200
Drawing Setup ....................................... 236
2 Tangents, Mid-Ordinate................. 199
Drawing Units........................................ 236
2 Tangents, Radius ............................ 198
Draw-Locate Points................................ 298
3 Point............................................... 203
Duplicate Points .................................... 318
Best Fit............................................... 206
DXF File
Compound or Reverse....................... 205
Field Survey Points in........................ 338
Information....................................... 232
PC, PT, Radius Point ......................... 204
Spiral ................................................. 208 E
Tangent, PC, Radius, Eagle Point Points .................................. 341
Arc Length .................................... 201 Earthwork .............................................. 580
Tangent, PC, Radius, Edit File .................................................. 118
Chord Length ............................... 202 Edit Multiple Pt Attributes..................... 331
Tangent, PC, Radius, Edit Point Attributes .............................. 329
Delta Angle ................................... 203 Edit Points.............................................. 322
Tangent, PC, Radius, Edit Polyline Vertex ............................... 156
Tang Length.................................. 201 Edit Text................................................. 141
Curve Table ........................................... 494 Elevation Text Only............................... 299
Curved Leader ....................................... 213 Enter-Assign Point ................................. 454
Cut (clipboard) ...................................... 128 Entering Northing and
Cut sheet ............................................... 280 Easting Coordinates ......................... 301
Cut Sheet Format................................... 472 Entities to Polylines ............................... 151

Index
652
Erase....................................................... 124 Image (continued)
Erase Point Attributes ............................ 334 Attaching a Raster Image................... 222
Erase Points ........................................... 323 Clip .................................................... 163
Excel Export........................................... 103 Frame................................................. 163
Exclusion Area ....................................... 563 Import Text/ASCII File........................... 305
Exit ........................................................ 121 Importing ASCII text files...................... 147
Explode.................................................. 126 Inclusion Area........................................ 563
Explode Points....................................... 338 Index Contours...................................... 566
Extend 3D Polyline................................ 160 Input-Edit Lot File ................................. 479
Extend by Distance................................ 131 Input-Edit Point..................................... 321
Extend To Edge...................................... 130 Input-Edit Profile ................................... 591
Extend to Intersection........................... 131 Insert
Extrapolate grid ..................................... 571 Block .................................................. 220
Drawing ............................................. 220
F Installation................................................. 7
Instrument & Rod Height.............. 277, 295
Feet & Meters......................................... 493 Internet .................................................. 612
Field to Finish........................................ 297 Interpolate Points .................................. 465
Fillet....................................................... 150 Intersect
Fillet 3D Polyline ................................... 159 Bearing-Bearing ................................. 460
Find Point.............................................. 231 Bearing-Distance ............................... 461
Flip Text................................................. 146 Distance-Distance.............................. 462
Fonts Interval Along Entity ............................. 466
Big Font ............................................. 243 Inverse ................................................... 448
Shape................................................. 242 Inverse with Area ................................... 493
TrueType ........................................... 242 Isolate Layer........................................... 185
Freeze Layer ........................................... 184

J
G
Join 3D Polyline..................................... 160
GIS Point Prompting ............................. 297 Joining Lines and Polylines ................... 161
Gon........................................................ 449
Grid From Contours .............................. 572
Grid Resolution ..................................... 570 L
Grips ...................................................... 271 Label Contours ...................................... 567
Label Last Area ....................................... 497
H LandXML Files ....................................... 117
Latitude/Longitude ................................ 312
Hardware Requirements ............................ 6 Layer by Decription ............................... 298
Hatch ..................................................... 192 Layer Control......................................... 180
Hatch Patterns ....................................... 641 Layer ID ................................................. 228
Hinged Area........................................... 497 Layer Report........................................... 229
Horizontal scale............................. 237, 276 LDD Contours........................................ 585
License Information .............................. 614
I Line ........................................................ 188
ID Layer ................................................. 228 Line On/Off ................................... 451, 455
ID Point ................................................. 228 Line Table .............................................. 494
Image LISCAD .................................................. 340
Adjust ................................................ 165 List ......................................................... 228

Index
653
List Points .............................................. 303 P
Locate
Page Setup.............................................. 111
By Azimuth ....................................... 457
Pan ......................................................... 171
By Bearing ......................................... 458
Parking Design....................................... 486
Locate by Line Bearing .......................... 456
Paste (clipboard) .................................... 129
Locate on Real Z Axis .................... 277, 294
Paste to Original Coordinates................ 130
Locate within
Permissions ................................................ 7
Coordinate Range ............................. 299
Pick Intersection Points ......................... 458
Distance............................................. 299
Plot......................................................... 111
Polyline ............................................. 299
Plot 3D Grid File .................................... 573
Lot File by Interior Text ........................ 478
Plot Entities by Point Numbers ............. 314
Lot File Report ....................................... 481
Plot Preview ........................................... 111
Lot frontage ........................................... 474
Plot Stamp ............................................. 113
Lot Layout ............................................. 474
Plotting Options .................................... 259
Plotting Scale ................................. 236, 276
M Point Conversion............................. 338–42
Map Check ............................................ 494 Point Defaults ........................................ 294
Map Points from 2nd File...................... 311 Point ID ................................................. 228
Maximum Grid Size....................... 570, 579 Point Number Report ............................ 318
Metric-English conversion ............ 317, 328 Point Number Settings................... 278, 295
Microsoft Access Export ........................ 103 Point on Arc........................................... 464
Mirror .................................................... 149 Point Protect Toggle .............................. 322
Mortgage Block...................................... 240 Point Symbol Size .......................... 236, 276
Move...................................................... 126 POINTS.MDB ......................................... 339
Move Point Number/Elev/Desc ............. 332 Polyline
Move Points........................................... 329 2D ...................................................... 188
3D ...................................................... 189
Information ....................................... 233
N Polyline by Nearest Found..................... 215
Nadcon .................................................. 312 Polyline to Lot File................................. 477
New........................................................ 106 Polynomial smoothing .......................... 565
New Last Point Number ........................ 314 Preferences ............................................. 250
Note file ................................................. 297 Profile Defaults ...................................... 586
Profile from Centerline.......................... 590
O Profile To Points .................................... 606
Project Explorer ..................................... 105
Object Linking....................................... 274
Purge ...................................................... 119
Object Snap ........................................... 288
Occupy Point......................................... 450
Offset ..................................................... 151 R
Offset 3D Polyline ................................. 158 Radial Stakeout ...................................... 471
Offset Distance ...................................... 565 RAM and Hard Disk
Offset Measurement ...................... 487, 490 Space Requirements ............................. 6
Offsets & Intersections .......................... 483 Raw File On/Off ..................................... 455
Open...................................................... 108 Recent File List....................................... 258
Options.................................................. 250 Recover .................................................. 118
Over Determination by Rectangular Grid.................................... 568
Plane Similarity................................ 313 Redo ....................................................... 124
Redraw ................................................... 168

Index
654
Reduce Polyline Vertices ....................... 152 Slope Ratio ............................................. 231
Regen ..................................................... 168 Smooth Polyline .................................... 153
Remove Polyline Arcs ............................ 156 Smoothing, Contours ............................ 565
Remove Polyline Segment ..................... 157 Softdesk Point Blocks............................. 340
Remove Polyline Vertex ........................ 157 Solid Fill. See Hatch
Rendering .............................................. 172 Solving Curves ....................................... 206
Renumber Points ........................... 320, 337 South Azimuth....................................... 274
Replace Text .......................................... 146 Spiral Curve ........................................... 208
Resection ............................................... 463 SRVPNO ................................................. 295
Reset Crosshairs..................................... 244 Srvpno.dwg ............................................ 277
Resize Point Attributes .......................... 335 Standard Linetypes ................................ 640
Restore Due North................................. 179 State Plane Coordinates......................... 312
Restore Layer ......................................... 185 Support Assistance ................................. 613
Reverse Curve ........................................ 205 Surface Model ........................................ 568
Reverse Polyline..................................... 152 Swell Factor............................................ 578
Right-Click Customization.................... 265 Symbol Size............................ 237, 276, 277
Rigid Body Transformation ................... 313 Symbols.................................................. 612
Rotate by Bearing .................................. 139 System Requirements................................. 6
Rotate by Pick ........................................ 140 System Variables .................................... 616
Rotate Points ......................................... 325
Rotate Text ............................................ 142
T
Running Object Snaps........................... 288
Tablet
Calibrate ............................................ 245
S Configure........................................... 248
Save........................................................ 109 Status ................................................. 245
Save As................................................... 109 Tag Hard Breaklines ............................... 584
Scale....................................................... 141 Tangent Line from Circles ..................... 490
Scale Point Attributes ............................ 333 Text ........................................................ 191
Scale Points............................................ 328 Enlarge/Reduce .................................. 142
Search for a Point .................................. 231 Export ................................................ 147
Sequential Numbers .............................. 210 Import ............................................... 147
Serial Number........................................ 614 Style ................................................... 241
Set Coordinate File ................................ 309 Text and Symbol Fonts .......................... 647
Set Crosshairs ........................................ 244 Thaw Layer ............................................ 184
Set Data Directory ................................. 100 Title Block .............................................. 239
Set Layer ................................................ 183 Toolbars ................................................. 250
Set Lot File ............................................. 475 Translate Points ..................................... 324
Set Polyline Origin ................................ 154 Traverse.................................................. 451
Set UCS to World................................... 244 Triangulate & Contour .......................... 560
Setting Enviroment Variables................ 292 Triangulation File .................................. 561
Shrink Factor ......................................... 578 Trim ....................................................... 128
Shrink-Wrap Entities ............................. 214 Trim 3D Polyline ................................... 159
Side Shots .............................................. 453 Trim by Point Symbol............................ 335
Sight Distance........................................ 587 TrueType Fonts ...................................... 650
Site Design ............................................. 580 Turned Angle ......................................... 457
Sliding Side Area.................................... 498 Twist Point Attributes............................ 334
Slope distance........................................ 231

Index
655
Twist Screen Viewports............................................... 176
Line ................................................... 178 Volume Calculation............................... 575
Standard ............................................ 177 Volumes By Layer .................................. 578
Surveyor ............................................ 178
Two Surface Volumes ............................ 575
W
Wildcard match of point description .... 301
U Window
Undo...................................................... 124 Cascade.............................................. 610
Units Control ........................................ 285 Tile..................................................... 610
Universal Transverse Mercator .............. 312 Wintab Compatible Digitizer ................ 263
Untag Hard Breaklines........................... 584 Write Block ............................................ 218
Update CRD File from Drawing ............ 316
Update Drawing from CRD File ............ 315
Z
Update from Drawing ........................... 309
Use Report Formatter ............................ 304 Zoom
Using a Template................................... 107 Center................................................ 169
Dynamic ............................................ 169
Extents............................................... 170
V In ...................................................... 170
Version Information.............................. 614 Out .................................................... 170
Vertical Angle ........................................ 231 Previous ............................................. 169
Vertical Angle Prompt ................... 278, 296 To a Point .......................................... 171
Window............................................. 168

Index
656